US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention /
Barbados Ministry of Health
Barbados National Reference
Laboratories
Project Specifications, Volume I
Construction Documents, December 27, 2013
Rev. November 5, 2014
Client
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Architect
Swanke Hayden Connell Architects
3007 Tilden Street NW, Suite 2L-100
Washington, DC 20008
Planning
SST Planners
1501 Wilson Boulevard, Suite 902
Arlington, VA, 22209
Civil and Geotechnical Engineering
Langan Engineering and Environmental Services
2300 Clarendon Boulevard, Courthouse Plaza II, Suite 711
Arlington, VA 22201
Structural Engineering
Weidlinger Associates
1825 K Street NW, Suite 350
Washington, DC 20006
Mechanical/ Electrical/ Plumbing and Fire Protection Engineering
WSP Flack + Kurtz
512 Seventh Avenue
New York, NY 10018
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013 rev. November 5, 2014
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
Table of Contents Generated by Masterworks: 2/24/2014
Division
Section Title
PROCUREMENT AND CONTRACTING DOCUMENTS GROUP
DIVISION 00 - PROCUREMENT AND CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS
00 0101
Project Title Page
00 0115
List Of Drawing Sheets
00 3119
Existing Condition Information
00 3126
Existing Hazardous Material Information
00 3132
Geotechnical Data
00 4322
Unit Prices Form
00 4323
Alternates Form REVISED November 5, 2014
00 4373
Proposed Schedule of Values Form
SPECIFICATIONS GROUP
General Requirements Subgroup
DIVISION 01 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
01 1000
Summary REVISED November 5, 2014
01 2300
Alternates
01 2500
Substitution Procedures
01 2600
Contract Modification Procedures
01 3100
Project Management And Coordination
01 3200
Construction Progress Documentation
01 3300
Submittal Procedures
01 4000
Quality Requirements
01 4200
References
01 5000
Temporary Facilities And Controls
01 5639
Temporary Tree And Plant Protection
01 6000
Product Requirements
01 7300
Execution
01 7419
Construction Waste Management And Disposal
01 7700
Closeout Procedures
01 7823
Operation And Maintenance Data
01 7839
Project Record Documents
01 7900
Demonstration And Training
TABLE OF CONTENTS – VOLUME I
1
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013 rev. November 5, 2014
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
Facility Construction Subgroup
DIVISION 02 - EXISTING CONDITIONS
02 4110
Site Demolition
02 4116
Structure Demolition
02 4119
Selective Demolition
DIVISION 03 - CONCRETE
03 3000
Cast-in-Place Concrete
DIVISION 04 - MASONRY
04 2200
Concrete Unit Masonry
DIVISION 05 - METALS
05 1200
Structural Steel Framing
05 3100
Steel Decking
05 4000
Cold-Formed Metal Framing
05 5000
Metal Fabrications
05 5213
Pipe And Tube Railings
05 7300
Decorative Metal Railings
DIVISION 06 - WOOD, PLASTICS, AND COMPOSITES
06 1053
Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry
06 2023
Interior Finish Carpentry
06 4116
Plastic-Laminate-Faced Architectural Cabinets
DIVISION 07 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION
07 2100
Thermal Insulation
07 2419
Water-drainage Exterior Insulation And Finish System (EIFS)
07 4213
Metal Wall Panels
07 5419
Polyvinyl-chloride (PVC) Roofing
07 7100
Roof Specialties
07 7200
Roof Accessories
07 8413
Penetration Firestopping
07 9200
Joint Sealants
DIVISION 08 - OPENINGS
08 1113
Hollow Metal Doors And Frames
08 1416
Flush Wood Doors
08 1423
Clad Wood Doors
08 3113
Access Doors And Frames
08 4213
Aluminum-framed Entrances
TABLE OF CONTENTS – VOLUME I
2
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013 rev. November 5, 2014
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
08 4413
08 5113
08 7100
08 8000
08 9516
Glazed Aluminum Curtain Walls
Aluminum Windows
Door Hardware
Glazing
Wall Vents
DIVISION 09 - FINISHES
09 2216
Non-Structural Metal Framing
09 2613
Gypsum Veneer Plastering
09 2900
Gypsum Board
09 6513
Resilient Base And Accessories
09 6516
Resilient Sheet Flooring
09 6519
Resilient Tile Flooring
DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES
10 1100
Visual Display Units
10 1426
Post And Panel / Pylon Signage
10 2113
Toilet Compartments
10 2800
Toilet, Bath And Laundry Accessories
10 4413
Fire Extinguishers, Cabinets, And Accessories
10 5613
Metal Storage Shelving
105623
Storage Shelving
DIVISION 11 - EQUIPMENT
115300
Laboratory Equipment ‐ General Requirements
115313
Fume Hoods
115314
Biosafety Cabinets
115319
Sterilizing and Washing Equipment
115343
Laboratory Service Fixtures
115360
Miscellaneous Laboratory Equipment
DIVISION 12 - FURNISHINGS
12 2116
Vertical Louver Blinds
12 2413
Roller Window Shades
123553
Laboratory Casework ‐ General Requirements
123555
Wood Laboratory Casework
12 3623.13 Plastic-Laminate-Clad Countertops
12 4816
Entrance Floor Grilles
DIVISION 13 - SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION
13 3419
Metal Building Systems
TABLE OF CONTENTS – VOLUME I
3
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013 rev. November 5, 2014
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
DIVISION 14 - CONVEYING EQUIPMENT
14 2100
Electric Traction Elevators
DIVISION 28 - ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY
28 1300
Access Control
DIVISION 31 - EARTHWORK
31 1000
Site Preparation
31 2000
Earth Moving
31 3116
Termite Control
31 3223
Proof Drilling and Grouting
31 5000
Temporary Excavation Support and Protection
DIVISION 32 - EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS
32 1216
Asphalt Paving
32 1313
Concrete Paving
32 1373
Concrete Paving Joint Sealants
32 9305
Planting
DIVISION 33 - UTILITIES
33 0505
Common Work Results for Piped Utilities
33 1116
Site Water Distribution Piping
33 1616
Underground Water Storage Tanks
33 3150
Site Sanitary Sewerage Piping Structures
33 4100
Site Storm Utility Drainage Piping
33 5113
Natural Gas Piping
33 7119
Underground Ducts and Raceways
END OF TABLE OF CONTENTS
TABLE OF CONTENTS – VOLUME I
4
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
DOCUMENT 000101 - PROJECT TITLE PAGE
1.1
PROJECT MANUAL
A.
Barbados National Reference Laboratories.
B.
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention / Barbados Ministry of Health.
C.
Bridgetown, Barbados, W.I.
D.
Architect Project No. 7017.
E.
Swanke Hayden Connell Architects.
F.
3007 Tilden Street NW, Suite 2L-100.
G.
Washington, DC 20008.
H.
Web Site: www.shca.com.
I.
Issued: December 27, 2013.
J.
Copyright 2013 Swanke Hayden Connell Architects. All rights reserved.
END OF DOCUMENT 000101
PROJECT TITLE PAGE
000101 - 1
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
DOCUMENT 000115 - LIST OF DRAWING SHEETS
1.1
LIST OF DRAWINGS
A.
Drawings: Drawings consist of the Contract Drawings and other drawings listed on the Table of
Contents page of the separately bound drawing set titled Barbados National Reference
Laboratories / Construction Documents, dated 27 December 2013, as modified by subsequent
Addenda and Contract modifications.
B.
List of Drawings: Drawings consist of the following Contract Drawings and other drawings of
type indicated:
GENERAL
G-01
COVER SHEET
G-02
ABBREV. SYMBOLS & CODES
LS-1
LIFE SAFETY
CIVIL
C-01
C-02
C-03
C-04
C-05
C-06
C-07
C-08
C-09
C-10
C-11
C-12
L-01
L-02
EXISTING CONDITIONS PLAN
SITE DEMOLITION PLAN
SITE LAYOUT PLAN
SITE LAYOUT PLAN
SITE GRADING PLAN
SITE DRAINAGE PLAN
SITE UTILITY PLAN
STORM AND SANITARY PROFILES
WATER AND GAS PROFILES
SITE DETAILS
SITE DETAILS
CURB STAKEOUT PLAN
LANDSCAPE PLAN
LANDSCAPE NOTES & DETAILS
ARCHITECTURAL
A-1
FIRST FLOOR PLAN
A-2
SECOND FLOOR PLAN
A-3
1st FLR REFLECTED CEILING PLAN
A-4
2nd FLR REFLECTED CEILING PLAN
A-5
ROOF PLAN
A-6
BUILDING ELEVATIONS
A-6.1
BUILDING ELEVATIONS
A-7
ELEVATOR SECTIONS & DETAILS
A-8
BUILDING SECTIONS
A-9
WALL SECTIONS
A-10
WALL SECTIONS
A-11
WALL SECTIONS
A-11.1
WALL SECTIONS
A-12
PLAN DETAILS
LIST OF DRAWING SHEETS
000115 - 1
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
A-12.1
A-12.2
A-13
A-13.1
A-13.2
A-14
A-15
A-16
A-17
A-18
A-19
A-20
A-26
A-27
A-28
A-28.1
A-29
A-30
A-31
A-31.1
A-32
A-33
PLAN DETAILS
DRIVEWAY CANOPY SECTIONS & DETAILS
LOBBY PLAN ELEVATIONS & SECTIONS
LOBBY STAIR & DETAILS
EXIT STAIR & DETAILS
DETAILED TOILET PLANS & ELEVATIONS
WALL TYPES & SIGNAGE
DOOR TYPES & DETAILS
DOOR SCHEDULE
WINDOW SCHEDULE & DETAILS
ROOM FINISH SCHEDULE
NOT USED
FIRST FLOOR FURNITURE PLAN
SECOND FLOOR FURNITURE PLAN
FIRST FLOOR INTERIOR FINISH PLAN
SECOND FLOOR INTERIOR FINISH PLANS
CASEWORK & FURNITURE DETAILS
INTERIOR CORRIDOR ELEVATIONS
BARN BUILDING PLAN & SECTION
BARN BUILDING SECTIONS, ELEVATIONS & DETAILS
FIRST FLOOR ACCESS CONTROL PLAN
SECOND FLOOR ACCESS CONTROL PLAN
STRUCTURAL
S-01
GENERAL NOTES
S-11
FOUNDATION PLAN
S-12
SECOND FLOOR FRAMING PLAN
S-13
ROOF FRAMING PLAN
S-21
SHEAR WALL ELEVATIONS
S-31
COLUMN AND BEAM SCHEDULES
S-41
TYPICAL SLAB-ON-GRADE DETAILS
S-42
TYPICAL FOUNDATION DETAILS, SECTIONS & SCHEDULES
S-43
TYPICAL CONCRETE SLAB DETAILS
S-51
CONCRETE SECTIONS & DETAILS
S-52
CONCRETE SECTIONS & DETAILS
S-53
STAIR A SECTIONS & DETAILS
S-54
STAIR B SECTIONS & DETAILS
S-61
MISCELLANEOUS SECTIONS & DETAILS
MECHANICAL
M-001.00 MECH SCOPE OF WORK & SEQUENCE OF OPERATION
M-002.00 MECH. SYMB. ABBREV. AND GEN. NOTES
M-003.00 HVAC CALCULATIONS
M-301.00 MECH. FIRST FLOOR
M-301A.00 MECH. FIRST FLOOR EQUIPMENT DIMENSIONS
M-302.00 MECH. SECOND FLOOR
M-303.00 MECH. ROOF PLAN
M-321.00 MECH. FIRST FLOOR PRESSURIZATION
M-401.00 MECHANICAL SECTIONS
M-501.00 MECH. AIR RISER DIAGRAM
LIST OF DRAWING SHEETS
000115 - 2
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
M-502.00
M-601.00
M-602.00
M-701.00
M-702.00
M-801.00
MECH. REFRIGERANT RISER DIAGRAM
MECH. DETAIL SHEET #1
MECH. DETAIL SHEET #2
MECH. SCHEDULE SHEET #1
MECH. SCHEDULE SHEET #1 CONT.
MECH. CONTROLS DIAGRAM SHEET#1
FIRE PROTECTION
FP-001.00 FIRE PROTEC. DRAWING LIST, SYMB. AND ABBREV.
FP-301.00 FIRE PROTEC. FIRST FLOOR PLAN
FP-302.00 FIRE PROTEC. SECOND FLOOR PLAN
FP-600.00 FIRE PROTEC. DETAILS
ELECTRICAL
E-001.00 ELECT. DWG LIST AND SCOPE OF WORK
E-002.22 ELECT. LEGEND AND ABBREVIATIONS
E-100.00 ELECT. SITE PLAN
E-101.00 FIRE ALARM FIRST FLOOR PLAN
E-102.00 FIRE ALARM SECOND FLOOR PLAN
E-201.00 ELECT. FIRST FLOOR LIGHTING PLAN
E-202.00 ELECT. SECOND FLOOR LIGHTING PLAN
E-301.00 ELECT. FIRST FLOOR POWER PLAN
E-302.00 ELECT. SECOND FLOOR POWER PLAN
E-303.00 ELECT. ROOF POWER PLAN
E-400.00 ELECT. BARN LAB PART PLAN SHT #1
E-401.00 ELECT. FIRST FLOOR LAB PART PLAN SHT #1
E-402.00 ELECT. FIRST FLOOR LAB PART PLAN SHT #2
E-403.00 ELECT. CONDUIT ROUTING PLAN
E-500.00 ELECT. RISER DIAGRAM
E-501.00 FIRE ALARM RISER DIAGRAM
E-600.00 ELECT. DETAILS SHEET
E-700.00 ELECT. SCHEDULE SHT #1
E-701.00 ELECT. SCHEDULE SHT #2
E-702.00 ELECT. SCHEDULE SHT #3
E-703.00 ELECT. SCHEDULE SHT #4
PLUMBING
P-001.00 PLUMB. DRAWING LIST, SYMB., ABBREV. & GENERAL NOTES
P-100.00 PLUMB. SITE PLAN
P-300.00 PLUMB. UNDERSLAB FLOOR PLAN
P-301.00 PLUMB. FIRST FLOOR PLAN
P-301G.00 PLUMB. FIRST FLOOR PROCESS GAS PLAN
P-302.00 PLUMB. SECOND FLOOR PLAN
P-304.00 PLUMB. ROOF PLAN
P-500
PLUMBING WATER RISER DIAGRAMS
P-501.00 PLUMBING RO RISER DIAGRAMS
P-502.00 PLUMB. SANITARY & STORM RISER DIAGRAMS
P-503.00 PLUMB. PROCESS & NATURAL GAS RISER DIAGRAMS
P-601.00 PLUMB. DETAIL SHEET#1
P-602.00 PLUMB. DETAILS SHEET #2
LIST OF DRAWING SHEETS
000115 - 3
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
P-701.00
PLUMB. SCHEDULE
LABORATORY EQUIPMENT
Q-001
CASEWORK MENU
Q-002
LEGEND & ABBREVIATIONS
Q-101
LAB PLAN -1ST FLOOR
Q-201A
ENLARGED LAB PLAN
Q-201B
ENLARGED LAN PLAN
Q-201C
ENLARGED LAB PLAN-BARN
Q-301A
LAB ELEVATIONS
Q-301B
LAB ELEVATIONS
Q-301C
LAB ELEVATIONS
Q-301D
LAB ELEVATIONS
Q-301E
LAB ELEVATIONS/ BARN
Q-401
CASEWORK DETAILS
Q-402
CASEWORK DETAILS
Q-403
CASEWORK DETAILS
Q-404
CASEWORK DETAILS
Q-405
AUTOCLAVE & CANOPY DETAILS
Q-406
AUTOCLAVE & CANOPY DETAILS
Q-407
AUTOCLAVE & CANOPY DETAILS
Q-408
EMERGENCY SHOWER DETAILS
END OF DOCUMENT 000115
LIST OF DRAWING SHEETS
000115 - 4
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
DOCUMENT 003119 - EXISTING CONDITION INFORMATION
1.1
EXISTING CONDITION INFORMATION
A.
This Document with its referenced attachments is part of the Procurement and Contracting
Requirements for Project. They provide Owner's information for Bidders' convenience and are
intended to supplement rather than serve in lieu of the Bidders' own investigations. They are
made available for Bidders' convenience and information, but are not a warranty of existing
conditions. This Document and its attachments are not part of the Contract Documents.
B.
Existing drawings that include information on existing conditions including previous construction
at Project site are available for viewing on Project Web site.
C.
Survey information that includes information on existing conditions, prepared by Hart,
Hutchinson & Field, is available for viewing as part of Drawings.
D.
The site contains one building, the Lepto Spiro Laboratory, which shall be maintained in
operation until the contents and activities of this facility have been relocated and are fully
functional in the new Laboratory. At that time the Contractor shall coordinate its operations to
allow the Government of Barbados to demolish the above-ground portions of the building. The
Contractor shall then proceed to remove that building's foundations and complete all sitework
shown in the drawings.
E.
Related Requirements:
1.
2.
3.
Document 002113 "Instructions to Bidders" for the Bidder's responsibilities for
examination of Project site and existing conditions.
Document 003126 "Existing Hazardous Material Information" for hazardous materials
reports that are made available to bidders.
Document 003132 "Geotechnical Data" for reports and soil-boring data from geotechnical
investigations that are made available to bidders.
END OF DOCUMENT 003119
EXISTING CONDITION INFORMATION
003119 - 1
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
DOCUMENT 003126 - EXISTING HAZARDOUS MATERIAL INFORMATION
1.1
EXISTING HAZARDOUS MATERIAL INFORMATION
A.
The site has been cleared of all known hazardous materials by the Barbados Ministry of Health
with the exception of the Lepto Spiro Laboratory. This building will be remediated and
demolished by the Government as well. See Project Narrative for more information.
END OF DOCUMENT 003126
EXISTING HAZARDOUS MATERIAL INFORMATION
003126 - 1
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
DOCUMENT 003132 - GEOTECHNICAL DATA
1.1
GEOTECHNICAL DATA
A.
This Document with its referenced attachments is part of the Procurement and Contracting
Requirements for Project. They provide Owner's information for Bidders' convenience and are
intended to supplement rather than serve in lieu of Bidders' own investigations. They are made
available for Bidders' convenience and information, but are not a warranty of existing conditions.
This Document and its attachments are not part of the Contract Documents.
B.
Soil-boring data for Project and Geotechnical Report, obtained by Langan Engineering and
Environmental Services, dated March 6, 2013, is available for viewing on Project Web site as
appended to this Document.
C.
RelatedRequirements:
1.
2.
Document 002113 "Instructions to Bidders" for the Bidder's responsibilities for
examination of Project site and existing conditions.
Document 003119 "Existing Condition Information" for information about existing
conditions that is made available to bidders.
END OF DOCUMENT 003132
GEOTECHNICAL DATA
003132 - 1
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
DOCUMENT 004322 - UNIT PRICES FORM
1.1
BID INFORMATION
A.
Bidder: ____________________________________________________.
B.
Project Name: Barbados National Reference Laboratories.
C.
Project Location: Bridgetown, Barbados.
D.
Owner: US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention / Barbados Ministry of Health.
E.
Owner Project Number: SAQMMA-12-F-2295.
F.
Architect: Swanke Hayden Connell Architects.
G.
Architect Project Number: 7017.
1.2
BID FORM SUPPLEMENT
A.
This form is required to be attached to the Bid Form.
B.
The undersigned Bidder proposes the amounts below be added to or deducted from the
Contract Sum on performance and measurement of the individual items of Work.
1.3
UNIT PRICES
A.
Unit-Price No. 1: Removal of unsatisfactory soil and replacement with satisfactory soil material.
1.
1.4
Grout Piers Dollars ($_____________) per unit.
SUBMISSION OF BID SUPPLEMENT
A.
Respectfully submitted this ____ day of ____________, 2012.
B.
Submitted By:___________________________________(Insert name of bidding firm or
corporation).
C.
Authorized Signature:___________________________________(Handwritten signature).
D.
Signed By:______________________________________________(Type or print name).
E.
Title:___________________________________(Owner/Partner/President/Vice President).
UNIT PRICES FORM
004322 - 1
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
END OF DOCUMENT 004322
UNIT PRICES FORM
004322 - 2
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013 rev. November 5, 2014
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
DOCUMENT 004323 - ALTERNATES FORM
1.1
BID INFORMATION
A.
Bidder: ____________________________________________________.
B.
Prime Contract: _____________________________________________.
C.
Project Name: Barbados National Reference Laboratories.
D.
Project Location: Bridgetown, Barbados, W.I.
E.
Owner: US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention / Barbados Ministry of Health.
F.
Owner Project Number: SAQMMA-12-F-2295.
G.
Architect: Swanke Hayden Connell Architects.
H.
Architect Project Number: 7017.
1.2
BID FORM SUPPLEMENT
A.
1.3
This form is required to be attached to the Bid Form.
DESCRIPTION
A.
The undersigned Bidder proposes the amount below be added to or deducted from the Base
Bid if particular alternates are accepted by Owner. Amounts listed for each alternate include
costs of related coordination, modification, or adjustment.
1.
Cost-Plus-Fee Contract: Alternate price given below includes adjustment to Contractor's
Fee.
B.
The Bidder shall be responsible for determining from the Contract Documents the affects of
each alternate on the Contract Time and the Contract Sum.
C.
Owner reserves the right to accept or reject any alternate, in any order, and to award or amend
the Contract accordingly within 60 days of the Notice of Award unless otherwise indicated in the
Contract Documents.
D.
Acceptance or non-acceptance of any alternates by the Owner shall have no affect on the
Contract Time unless the "Schedule of Alternates" Article below provides a formatted space for
the adjustment of the Contract Time.
ALTERNATES FORM
004323 - 1
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013 rev. November 5, 2014
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
1.4
ALTERNATE BID ITEMS
Mark
1
TYPE
DEDUCT
Identification
REVISE: Change roof framing of prefabricated steel building
from single pitch ‘monoslope’ roof, to ‘gable’ roof with 4 in 12
pitch slope as delineated.
2
DEDUCT
REVISE: Change from’ PVC’ roofing material at Laboratory
Bldg.to ‘TPO’ roofing material. All other associated materials
and products remain the same, Modification identified in Specification.
3
DEDUCT
DELETE: Delete entire lower canopy that extends to rear
building entrance. Reduce length of upper canopy from 44’ to
24’.
4
DEDUCT
DELETE Aluminum sunscreens from the Laboratory and office
portions of the Building (Sunscreens at Lobby to remain)
5
DELETE
DELETE Roof mechanical equipment screen: See SHT A-5
for instruction
6
DEDUCT
REVISE: See HVAC Deductive alternate Note on SHT M004.00 for more instruction
7
DEDUCT
DELETE portion of Barn (1,957 SF),c between columns B-1,
B-5, B-E and B-G. End of the barn to be along column line BE between B-1 and B-5.
8
DEDUCT
DELETE 12 Moveable Tables: Four (4) tables type T05W in
room #6, Immunology/Flow Cytometry and eight (8) tables
type T03 (four in room #3 Water Quality Lab and four in room
#17 BSL2/Training Lab).
9
DEDUCT
DELETE four (4) movable casework type D16W, located under tables, in room #17 BSL2/Training Lab.
10
DEDUCT
DELETE eight (8) casework on wheels with epoxy tops, two
cabinets type B02W and two cabinets type B03W in Pre-PCR
room #8 and two cabinets type B02W and two cabinets type
B03W in Media Prep room #12.
11
DEDUCT
DELETE two (2) ice makers, one in Equipment Alcove,
room#07B and one in Refrig. Room #16A; one (1) undercounter refrigerator and one (1) under-counter freezer in the
Nested PCR, room #10.
12
DEDUCT
DELETE eight (8) full height shelving type F05, 4 ft. wide, in
rooms #20A and 20B (four in each room).
ALTERNATES FORM
004323 - 2
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013 rev. November 5, 2014
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
13
1.5
REVISION
DELETE- all references to site phasing requirements. A clear
site (including removal of the Leptospira Laboratory) will be
provided to the GC upon project commencement.
SUBMISSION OF BID SUPPLEMENT
A.
Respectfully submitted this ____ day of ____________, 2014.
B.
Submitted By:___________________________________(Insert name of bidding firm or
corporation).
C.
Authorized Signature:____________________________________(Handwritten signature).
D.
Signed By:______________________________________________(Type or print name).
E.
Title:___________________________________(Owner/Partner/President/Vice President).
END OF DOCUMENT 004323
ALTERNATES FORM
004323 - 3
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
DOCUMENT 004373 - PROPOSED SCHEDULE OF VALUES FORM
1.1
BID FORM SUPPLEMENT
A.
1.2
A completed Proposed Schedule of Values form is required to be attached to the Bid Form.
PROPOSED SCHEDULE OF VALUES FORM
A.
Proposed Schedule of Values Form: After initial selection, the Contractor shall provide a
detailed breakdown of the bid amount, including alternates, in enough detail to facilitate
continued evaluation of bid. Coordinate with the Project Manual table of contents. Provide
multiple line items for principal material and subcontract amounts in excess of five (5) percent of
the Contract Sum.
B.
Arrange schedule of values consistent with format of AIA Document G703.
C.
Level of Detail Expected: The following example shows the level of detail required in the
Schedule of Values.
END OF DOCUMENT 004373
PROPOSED SCHEDULE OF VALUES FORM
004373 - 1
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013 rev. November 5, 2014
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
SECTION 011000 - SUMMARY
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
B.
Related Requirements:
1.
C.
Project information.
Work covered by Contract Documents.
Phased construction.
Work by Owner.
Owner-furnished products.
Access to site.
Coordination with occupants.
Work restrictions.
Specification and drawing conventions.
Miscellaneous provisions.
Section 015000 "Temporary Facilities and Controls" for limitations and procedures
governing temporary use of Owner's facilities.
Project Description:
The Barbados National Reference Library consists of all labor and material necessary to
substantially complete a two story office and laboratory building, and an adjunct storage
facility, as follows:
Barn (S-1 Storage Occupancy) Type II-B Construction
Laboratory / Office Building (B-Business occupancy), two (2) stories
Type II-B Construction
~5,804 GSF
~13,279 GSF
The Barn is a one- (1) story, pre-engineered metal building that is fully sprinkled and partially tempered. This building is fully insulated and features metal siding and roofing. The
building’s interior has both concrete masonry and metal security cage wall types. The
building has minimal interior wall finishes, but it does have an epoxy sealed floor.
The Laboratory/Office is a two- (2) story concrete framed structure that is fully sprinkled
and tempered with stringent ventilation, temperature, and humidity control requirements.
SUMMARY
011000 - 1
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013 rev. November 5, 2014
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
The building has hurricane resistant glazing and curtain wall. Exterior wall finishes include both metal siding and EFIS (Exterior Insulation & Finish System) on concrete masonry backup. The roof has a concrete deck with rigid insulation and a white PVC membrane.
Interior wall finishes include painted gypsum veneer plaster over concrete block; painted
gypsum veneer plaster over gypsum wall board; exposed concrete (sealed); and it has
one decorative architectural feature wall. All interior partitions shall be minimum one (1)
hour rated. Ceiling finishes include standard suspended acoustical tile; scrubable, antimicrobial suspended acoustical tile; suspended wood architectural ceilings; and painted
and sealed concrete finished ceilings. Floor finishes will include VCT, sheet vinyl, sealed
concrete, and quarry tile.
Vertical circulation in the Laboratory / Office Building is accommodated via a monumental
interior stair, an exterior emergency egress stair and an electric passenger elevator.
Both buildings have been designed to meet LEED ‘Certified’ requirements, however formal certification is not required. The contract for construction includes a building security
system featuring electronic door access control, intrusion detection system with electronic
security camera controls. Emergency power is provided via a standby diesel powered
generator with separate distribution and automatic transfer switch, furnished and installed
by the Barbados Government under separate contract.
The building mechanical system consists of variable refrigerant flow cooling system using
roof mounted condensing units, cooling towers, and suspended, interior fan coil units. A
separate exhaust system serving the laboratory spaces will be provided. All HVAC
equipment will be monitored via a direct digital control Building Management System.
The base building also includes all laboratory furniture, casework, and equipment as
identified in the documents. A reception desk shall be provided as designed in the documents, however all other furniture items have been shown for coordination purposes only
and their procurement is not in contract.
1.3
PROJECT INFORMATION
A.
Project Identification: Barbados National Reference Laboratories.
1.
B.
Project Location: Collymore Rock Road, Bridgetown, Barbados.
Owner: US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention / Barbados Ministry of Health.
1.
Owner's Representative: Robert Lindquist, LindquistRA@state.gov.
C.
Architect: Swanke Hayden Connell Architects, 3007 Tilden Street NW, Suite 2L-100,
Washington, DC 20008, ATTN: Louis Krupnick, AIA, 202-244-2500, krupnick.l@shca.com.
D.
Architect's Consultants: The Architect has retained the following design professionals who have
prepared designated portions of the Contract Documents:
SUMMARY
011000 - 2
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013 rev. November 5, 2014
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
1.
2.
3.
4.
E.
Project Web Site: A project Web site administered by Architect will be used for purposes of
managing communication and documents during the construction stage.
1.
1.4
Planning: SST Planners; 1501 Wilson Boulevard, Suite 902, Arlington, VA, 22209; 703875-8787
Civil and Geotechnical Engineering: Langan Engineering and Environmental Services;
2300 Clarendon Boulevard, Courthouse Plaza II, Suite 711, Arlington, VA 22201; 571366-6800
Structural Engineering: Weidlinger Associates; 1825 K Street NW, Suite 350,
Washington, DC 20006 202-649-2500
Mechanical/ Electrical/ Plumbing and Fire Protection Engineering: WSP Flack + Kurtz;
512 Seventh Avenue, New York, NY 10018; 212-532-9600
See Section 013100 "Project Management and Coordination." for requirements for using
the Project Web site.
WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
A.
Work covered includes all labor and materials necessary to construct the project as delineated
on plans and in the specifications and listed below:
1.
Site Work:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
2.
Building Construction:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
SUMMARY
Site, utility anddemolition of existing foundations and underground structures
Trenching and backfilling for new utilities and foundations
Installation of new underground utilities for water supply, firefighting appurtenances
and devices, sanitary and storm drainage, underground power, natural gas.
Excavation and placement of new site features including roads, drives, curbs&
drainage structures
New fencing and gates, building signage
Tree protection, removal and replacement
Final grading and landscaping
Cast-in-place, reinforced, concrete building frame including foundations, floors and
roof slabs, concrete floor and deck topping to maintain elevations identified on
drawings.
Grout piers as required
Concrete masonry unit construction, reinforced
Metal stud partition and gypsum wall board construction
Fixed, hollow metal and wood doors in hollow metal frames
Hollow metal frame interior windows
Operable and non-operable exterior aluminum framed windows and curtain wall
with aluminum sunscreens (see bid alternates)
Aluminum entrances
Glazing, laminated exterior hurricane resistant at exterior, tempered at interior,
window film
011000 - 3
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013 rev. November 5, 2014
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
j.
k.
l.
m.
n.
o.
p.
q.
r.
s.
t.
Door hardware, door protection and access control devices
Wall and door louvers and vents
EFIS (insulated) exterior wall finish system
Metal siding and roofing
Rigid plastic and fiberglass batt insulation
Water Resistant Barrier, liquid applied
Interior and exterior building sealants, fire stopping and fire- rated assemblies
Single ply roofing membrane (see bid alternates)
Roofing appurtenances
Rainwater harvesting devices, gutters, and downspouts
Wall finishes including clear stains/sealers, ceramic and mosaic tile, paint including
latex and epoxy
u.
Floor finishes including clear stains/sealers, quarry tile, and grout
v.
Resilient flooring including VCT, sheet vinyl and rubber base
w.
Suspended acoustical ceiling tile, anti-microbial and regular
x.
Gypsum board ceiling framing systems
y.
Floor mats and grates, wall protection
z.
Marker boards and tack boards
aa. Interior roll up shades and blackout curtains
bb. Plastic laminate cabinets and countertops, custom casework
cc.
Toilet partitions and accessories
dd. Interior door signage
ee. Fire extinguishers and hose cabinets
ff.
Pre-engineered metal buildings
gg. Pre-engineered metal canopies
hh. Mechanical air conditioning systems and controls
ii.
Ductwork and insulation
jj.
Pre-packaged air-handling equipment
kk.
Piping and hanger systems
ll.
Electrical systems, wiring devices, over current protection, conduit
mm. Building power and emergency systems (emergency power generation under
separate contract)
nn. Building interior, exterior and emergency lighting systems
oo. Building energy management devices and controls
pp. Plumbing, domestic supply and sanitary system including devices, piping, fixtures
and equipment for air, water, vacuum, and gas systems
qq. Water coolers and filters, electric and gas fired water heating systems
rr.
Recirculating pumps
ss.
Fire protection including piped sprinkler systems, alarms controls, fire pumps and
alarm/ notification devices and systems
B.
Type of Contract:
1.
SUMMARY
Project will be constructed under a single prime contract.
011000 - 4
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013 rev. November 5, 2014
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
1.5
WORK BY OWNER
A.
General: Cooperate fully with Owner so work may be carried out smoothly, without interfering
with or delaying work under this Contract or work by Owner. Coordinate the Work of this
Contract with work performed by Owner.
1.
B.
Preceding Work: Owner will perform the following construction operations at Project site. Those
operations are scheduled to be substantially complete before work under this Contract begins.
1.
C.
The existing buildings identified on the site plans as to be demolished will be removed by
the Government. Foundations will remain for removal by the Owner.
Concurrent Work: Owner will perform the following construction operations at Project site.
Those operations will be conducted simultaneously with work under this Contract.
1.
1.6
Installation of Emergency Generator.
See Project Sequencing
ACCESS TO SITE
A.
General: Contractor shall have limited use of Project site for construction operations as
indicated on Drawings by the Contract limits and as indicated by requirements of this Section.
B.
Use of Site: Limit use of Project site to work in areas outside designated Project "Sequence
Line" indicated as required by Project Sequencing. Do not disturb portions of Project site
beyond areas in which the Work is indicated.
1.
2.
1.7
Driveways, Walkways and Entrances: Keep driveways and entrances serving premises
clear and available to Owner, Owner's employees, and emergency vehicles at all times.
Do not use these areas for parking or storage of materials.
Smoking will be prohibited on site.
COORDINATION WITH OCCUPANTS
A.
Full Owner Occupancy: Owner will occupy portions of the site and existing building during entire
construction period. Cooperate with Owner during construction operations to minimize conflicts
and facilitate Owner usage. Perform the Work so as not to interfere with Owner's day-to-day
operations. Maintain existing exits unless otherwise indicated.
1.
2.
B.
Maintain access to existing facilities. Do not close or obstruct facilities without written
permission from Owner and approval of authorities having jurisdiction.
Notify Owner not less than 72 hours in advance of activities that will affect Owner's
operations.
Owner Limited Occupancy of Completed Areas of Construction: Owner reserves the right to
occupy and to place and install equipment in completed portions of the Work, prior to
SUMMARY
011000 - 5
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013 rev. November 5, 2014
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
Substantial Completion of the Work, provided such occupancy does not interfere with
completion of the Work. Such placement of equipment and limited occupancy shall not
constitute acceptance of the total Work.
1.
2.
3.
4.
1.8
Architect will prepare a Certificate of Substantial Completion for each specific portion of
the Work to be occupied prior to Owner acceptance of the completed Work.
Obtain a Certificate of Occupancy from authorities having jurisdiction before limited
Owner occupancy.
Before limited Owner occupancy, mechanical and electrical systems shall be fully
operational, and required tests and inspections shall be successfully completed. On
occupancy, Owner will operate and maintain mechanical and electrical systems serving
occupied portions of Work.
On occupancy, Owner will assume responsibility for maintenance and custodial service
for occupied portions of Work.
WORK RESTRICTIONS
A.
Work Restrictions, General: Comply with restrictions on construction operations.
1.
B.
On-Site Work Hours: Limit work in the existing building to normal business working hours of
7:00 a.m. to 5:00 p.m., Monday through Friday, unless otherwise indicated.
1.
2.
C.
2.
Notify Architect and Owner not less than five (5) days in advance of proposed utility
interruptions.
Obtain Owner's written permission before proceeding with utility interruptions.
Noise, Vibration, and Odors: Coordinate operations that may result in high levels of noise and
vibration, odors, or other disruption to Owner occupancy with Owner.
1.
2.
E.
Weekend Hours: 7:00 a.m. to 5:00 p.m.
Hours for Utility Shutdowns: Coordinate with Owner.
Existing Utility Interruptions: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or
others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after providing temporary
utility services according to requirements indicated:
1.
D.
Comply with limitations on use of public streets and with other requirements of authorities
having jurisdiction.
Notify Architect and Owner not less than five (5) days in advance of proposed disruptive
operations.
Obtain Architect's and Owner's written permission before proceeding with disruptive
operations.
Nonsmoking Building: Smoking is not permitted within the building or within 25 feet (8 m) of
entrances, operable windows, or outdoor-air intakes.
SUMMARY
011000 - 6
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013 rev. November 5, 2014
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
F.
Controlled Substances: Use of tobacco products and other controlled substances within the
existing building is not permitted.
G.
Employee Identification: Provide identification tags for Contractor personnel working on Project
site. Require personnel to use identification tags at all times.
1.9
SPECIFICATION AND DRAWING CONVENTIONS
A.
Specification Content: The Specifications use certain conventions for the style of language and
the intended meaning of certain terms, words, and phrases when used in particular situations.
These conventions are as follows:
1.
2.
Imperative mood and streamlined language are generally used in the Specifications. The
words "shall," "shall be," or "shall comply with," depending on the context, are implied
where a colon (:) is used within a sentence or phrase.
Specification requirements are to be performed by Contractor unless specifically stated
otherwise.
B.
Division 01 General Requirements: Requirements of Sections in Division 01 apply to the Work
of all Sections in the Specifications.
C.
Drawing Coordination: Requirements for materials and products identified on Drawings are
described in detail in the Specifications. One or more of the following are used on Drawings to
identify materials and products:
1.
2.
3.
Terminology: Materials and products are identified by the typical generic terms used in
the individual Specifications Sections.
Abbreviations: Materials and products are identified by abbreviations as scheduled on
Drawings.
Keynoting: Materials and products are identified by reference keynotes referencing
Specification Section numbers found in this Project Manual.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)
END OF SECTION 011000
SUMMARY
011000 - 7
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
SECTION 012300 - ALTERNATES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
1.3
Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for alternates.
DEFINITIONS
A.
Alternate: An amount proposed by bidders and stated on the Bid Form for certain work defined
in the bidding requirements that may be added to or deducted from the base bid amount if
Owner decides to accept a corresponding change either in the amount of construction to be
completed or in the products, materials, equipment, systems, or installation methods described
in the Contract Documents.
1.
2.
3.
1.4
Alternates described in this Section are part of the Work only if enumerated in the
Agreement.
The cost or credit for each alternate is the net addition to or deduction from the Contract
Sum to incorporate alternate into the Work. No other adjustments are made to the
Contract Sum.
The Owner maintains the right to award based on their determination of which alternate
represents the best value to the Government.
PROCEDURES
A.
Coordination: Revise or adjust affected adjacent work as necessary to completely integrate
work of the alternate into Project.
1.
Include as part of each alternate, miscellaneous devices, accessory objects, and similar
items incidental to or required for a complete installation whether or not indicated as part
of alternate.
B.
Notification: Immediately following award of the Contract, notify each party involved, in writing,
of the status of each alternate. Indicate if alternates have been accepted, rejected, or deferred
for later consideration. Include a complete description of negotiated revisions to alternates.
C.
Execute accepted alternates under the same conditions as other work of the Contract.
ALTERNATES
012300 - 1
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
D.
Schedule: A schedule of alternates is included at the end of this Section. Specification Sections
referenced in schedule contain requirements for materials necessary to achieve the work
described under each alternate.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
SCHEDULE OF ALTERNATES
A.
See attached schedule.
END OF SECTION 012300
ALTERNATES
012300 - 2
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
SECTION 012500 - SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for substitutions.
B.
Related Requirements:
1.
2.
1.3
Section 012300 "Alternates" for products selected under an alternate.
Section 016000 "Product Requirements" for requirements for submitting comparable
product submittals for products by listed manufacturers.
DEFINITIONS
A.
Substitutions: Changes in products, materials, equipment, and methods of construction from
those required by the Contract Documents and proposed by Contractor.
1.
2.
1.4
Substitutions for Cause: Changes proposed by Contractor that are required due to
changed Project conditions, such as unavailability of product, regulatory changes, or
unavailability of required warranty terms.
Substitutions for Convenience: Changes proposed by Contractor or Owner that are not
required in order to meet other Project requirements but may offer advantage to
Contractor or Owner.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Substitution Requests: Submit three copies of each request for consideration. Identify product
or fabrication or installation method to be replaced. Include Specification Section number and
title and Drawing numbers and titles.
1.
Documentation: Show compliance with requirements for substitutions and the following,
as applicable:
a.
Statement indicating why specified product or fabrication or installation cannot be
provided, if applicable.
SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES
012500 - 1
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
k.
l.
2.
Architect's Action: If necessary, Architect will request additional information or
documentation for evaluation within 10 days of receipt of a request for substitution.
Architect will notify Contractor through Construction Manager of acceptance or rejection
of proposed substitution within 15 days of receipt of request, or seven (7) days of receipt
of additional information or documentation, whichever is later.
a.
b.
1.5
Coordination information, including a list of changes or revisions needed to other
parts of the Work and to construction performed by Owner and separate
contractors, that will be necessary to accommodate proposed substitution.
Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed substitution with those of
the Work specified. Include annotated copy of applicable Specification Section.
Significant qualities may include attributes such as performance, weight, size,
durability, visual effect, sustainable design characteristics, warranties, and specific
features and requirements indicated. Indicate deviations, if any, from the Work
specified.
Product Data, including drawings and descriptions of products and fabrication and
installation procedures.
Samples, where applicable or requested.
Certificates and qualification data, where applicable or requested.
Material test reports from a qualified testing agency indicating and interpreting test
results for compliance with requirements indicated.
Research reports evidencing compliance with building code in effect for Project,
from ICC.
Detailed comparison of Contractor's construction schedule using proposed
substitution with products specified for the Work, including effect on the overall
Contract Time. If specified product or method of construction cannot be provided
within the Contract Time, include letter from manufacturer, on manufacturer's
letterhead, stating date of receipt of purchase order, lack of availability, or delays in
delivery.
Cost information, including a proposal of change, if any, in the Contract Sum.
Contractor's certification that proposed substitution complies with requirements in
the Contract Documents except as indicated in substitution request, is compatible
with related materials, and is appropriate for applications indicated.
Contractor's waiver of rights to additional payment or time that may subsequently
become necessary because of failure of proposed substitution to produce
indicated results.
Forms of Acceptance: Change Order, Construction Change Directive, or
Architect's Supplemental Instructions for minor changes in the Work.
Use product specified if Architect does not issue a decision on use of a proposed
substitution within time allocated.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Compatibility of Substitutions: Investigate and document compatibility of proposed substitution
with related products and materials. Engage a qualified testing agency to perform compatibility
tests recommended by manufacturers.
SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES
012500 - 2
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
1.6
PROCEDURES
A.
Coordination: Revise or adjust affected work as necessary to integrate work of the approved
substitutions.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
SUBSTITUTIONS
A.
Substitutions for Cause: Submit requests for substitution immediately on discovery of need for
change, but not later than 15 days prior to bid.
1.
Conditions: Architect will consider Contractor's request for substitution when the following
conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not satisfied, Architect will return
requests without action, except to record noncompliance with these requirements:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
Requested substitution is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce
indicated results.
Substitution request is fully documented and properly submitted.
Requested substitution will not adversely affect Contractor's construction schedule.
Requested substitution has received necessary approvals of authorities having
jurisdiction.
Requested substitution is compatible with other portions of the Work.
Requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work.
Requested substitution provides specified warranty.
If requested substitution involves more than one contractor, requested substitution
has been coordinated with other portions of the Work, is uniform and consistent, is
compatible with other products, and is acceptable to all contractors involved.
B.
Substitutions for Convenience: Not allowed.
C.
Substitutions for Convenience: Architect will consider requests for substitution if received within
60 days after the Notice of Award. Requests received after that time may be considered or
rejected at discretion of Architect.
1.
Conditions: Architect will consider Contractor's request for substitution when the following
conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not satisfied, Architect will return
requests without action, except to record noncompliance with these requirements:
a.
b.
Requested substitution offers Owner a substantial advantage in cost, time, energy
conservation, or other considerations, after deducting additional responsibilities
Owner must assume. Owner's additional responsibilities may include
compensation to Architect for redesign and evaluation services, increased cost of
other construction by Owner, and similar considerations.
Requested substitution does not require extensive revisions to the Contract
Documents.
SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES
012500 - 3
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
k.
Requested substitution is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce
indicated results.
Requested substitution provides sustainable design characteristics that specified
product provided.
Substitution request is fully documented and properly submitted.
Requested substitution will not adversely affect Contractor's construction schedule.
Requested substitution has received necessary approvals of authorities having
jurisdiction.
Requested substitution is compatible with other portions of the Work.
Requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work.
Requested substitution provides specified warranty.
If requested substitution involves more than one contractor, requested substitution
has been coordinated with other portions of the Work, is uniform and consistent, is
compatible with other products, and is acceptable to all contractors involved.
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)
END OF SECTION 012500
SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES
012500 - 4
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
SECTION 012600 - CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for handling and processing
Contract modifications.
B.
Related Requirements:
1.
1.3
Section 012500 "Substitution Procedures" for administrative procedures for handling
requests for substitutions made after the Contract award.
MINOR CHANGES IN THE WORK
A.
1.4
Architect will issue supplemental instructions authorizing minor changes in the Work, not
involving adjustment to the Contract Sum or the Contract Time, on AIA Document G710,
"Architect's Supplemental Instructions."
PROPOSAL REQUESTS
A.
Owner-Initiated Proposal Requests: The Contracting Officer's Representative (COR) will issue a
detailed description of proposed changes in the Work that may require adjustment to the
Contract Sum or the Contract Time. If necessary, the description will include supplemental or
revised Drawings and Specifications.
1.
2.
Work Change Proposal Requests issued by COR are not instructions either to stop work
in progress or to execute the proposed change.
Within time specified in Proposal Request or 20 days, when not otherwise specified, after
receipt of Proposal Request, submit a quotation estimating cost adjustments to the
Contract Sum and the Contract Time necessary to execute the change.
a.
b.
c.
Include a list of quantities of products required or eliminated and unit costs, with
total amount of purchases and credits to be made. If requested, furnish survey
data to substantiate quantities.
Indicate applicable delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of trade
discounts.
Include costs of labor and supervision directly attributable to the change.
CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES
012600 - 1
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
d.
e.
B.
Contractor-Initiated Proposals: If latent or changed conditions require modifications to the
Contract, Contractor may initiate a claim by submitting a request for a change to Architect and
COR.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
1.5
Include an updated Contractor's construction schedule that indicates the effect of
the change, including, but not limited to, changes in activity duration, start and
finish times, and activity relationship. Use available total float before requesting an
extension of the Contract Time.
Quotation Form: Use forms acceptable to Architect.
Include a statement outlining reasons for the change and the effect of the change on the
Work. Provide a complete description of the proposed change. Indicate the effect of the
proposed change on the Contract Sum and the Contract Time.
Include a list of quantities of products required or eliminated and unit costs, with total
amount of purchases and credits to be made. If requested, furnish survey data to
substantiate quantities.
Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of trade
discounts.
Include costs of labor and supervision directly attributable to the change.
Include an updated Contractor's construction schedule that indicates the effect of the
change, including, but not limited to, changes in activity duration, start and finish times,
and activity relationship. Use available total float before requesting an extension of the
Contract Time.
Comply with requirements in Section 012500 "Substitution Procedures" if the proposed
change requires substitution of one product or system for product or system specified.
Proposal Request Form: Use form acceptable to Architect.
ADMINISTRATIVE CHANGE ORDERS
A.
Allowance Adjustment: See Section 012100 "Allowances" for administrative procedures for
preparation of Change Order Proposal for adjusting the Contract Sum to reflect actual costs of
allowances.
B.
Unit-Price Adjustment: See Section 012200 "Unit Prices" for administrative procedures for
preparation of Change Order Proposal for adjusting the Contract Sum to reflect measured
scope of unit-price work.
1.6
CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES
A.
On Owner's approval of a Work Changes Proposal Request, the COR will issue a Change
Order for signatures of Owner and Contractor on AIA Document G701.
CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES
012600 - 2
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
1.7
CONSTRUCTION CHANGE DIRECTIVE
A.
Construction Change Directive: COR may issue a Construction Change Directive on
AIA Document G714. Construction Change Directive instructs Contractor to proceed with a
change in the Work, for subsequent inclusion in a Change Order.
1.
B.
Construction Change Directive contains a complete description of change in the Work. It
also designates method to be followed to determine change in the Contract Sum or the
Contract Time.
Documentation: Maintain detailed records on a time and material basis of work required by the
Construction Change Directive.
1.
After completion of change, submit an itemized account and supporting data necessary
to substantiate cost and time adjustments to the Contract.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)
END OF SECTION 012600
CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES
012600 - 3
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
SECTION 013100 - PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
Section includes administrative provisions for coordinating construction operations on Project
including, but not limited to, the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
General coordination procedures.
Coordination drawings.
Requests for Information (RFIs).
Project Web site.
Project meetings.
B.
Each contractor shall participate in coordination requirements. Certain areas of responsibility
are assigned to a specific contractor.
C.
Related Requirements:
1.
2.
3.
4.
1.3
Section 013200 "Construction Progress Documentation" for preparing and submitting
Contractor's construction schedule.
Section 017300 "Execution" for procedures for coordinating general installation and fieldengineering services, including establishment of benchmarks and control points.
Section 017700 "Closeout Procedures" for coordinating closeout of the Contract.
Section 019113 "General Commissioning Requirements" for coordinating the Work with
Owner's Commissioning Authority.
DEFINITIONS
A.
1.4
RFI: Request from Owner, Contracting Officer's Representative, Construction
Manager, Architect, or Contractor seeking information required by or clarifications of the
Contract Documents.
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A.
Subcontract List: Prepare a written summary identifying individuals or firms proposed for each
portion of the Work, including those who are to furnish products or equipment fabricated to a
special design. Include the following information in tabular form:
PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION
013100 - 1
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
1.
2.
3.
B.
Key Personnel Names: Within 15 days of starting construction operations, submit a list of key
personnel assignments, including superintendent and other personnel in attendance at Project
site. Identify individuals and their duties and responsibilities; list addresses and telephone
numbers, including home, office, and cellular telephone numbers and e-mail addresses. Provide
names, addresses, and telephone numbers of individuals assigned as alternates in the absence
of individuals assigned to Project.
1.
1.5
Name, address, and telephone number of entity performing subcontract or supplying
products.
Number and title of related Specification Section(s) covered by subcontract.
Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate, covered by subcontract.
Post copies of list in project meeting room, in temporary field office, and by each
temporary telephone. Keep list current at all times.
GENERAL COORDINATION PROCEDURES
A.
Coordination: Coordinate construction operations included in different Sections of the
Specifications to ensure efficient and orderly installation of each part of the Work. Coordinate
construction operations, included in different Sections, that depend on each other for proper
installation, connection, and operation.
1.
2.
3.
B.
Prepare memoranda for distribution to each party involved, outlining special procedures
required for coordination. Include such items as required notices, reports, and list of attendees
at meetings.
1.
C.
Schedule construction operations in sequence required to obtain the best results where
installation of one part of the Work depends on installation of other components, before
or after its own installation.
Coordinate installation of different components to ensure maximum performance and
accessibility for required maintenance, service, and repair.
Make adequate provisions to accommodate items scheduled for later installation.
Prepare similar memoranda for Owner and separate contractors if coordination of their
Work is required.
Administrative Procedures: Coordinate scheduling and timing of required administrative
procedures with other construction activities and activities of other contractors to avoid conflicts
and to ensure orderly progress of the Work. Such administrative activities include, but are not
limited to, the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Preparation of Contractor's construction schedule.
Preparation of the schedule of values.
Installation and removal of temporary facilities and controls.
Delivery and processing of submittals.
Progress meetings.
Preinstallation conferences.
Project closeout activities.
PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION
013100 - 2
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
8.
D.
Conservation: Coordinate construction activities to ensure that operations are carried out with
consideration given to conservation of energy, water, and materials. Coordinate use of
temporary utilities to minimize waste.
1.
1.6
Startup and adjustment of systems.
Salvage materials and equipment involved in performance of, but not actually
incorporated into, the Work. See other Sections for disposition of salvaged materials that
are designated as Owner's property.
COORDINATION DRAWINGS
A.
Coordination Drawings, General: Prepare coordination drawings according to requirements in
individual Sections, and additionally where installation is not completely shown on Shop
Drawings, where limited space availability necessitates coordination, or if coordination is
required to facilitate integration of products and materials fabricated or installed by more than
one entity.
1.
Content: Project-specific information, drawn accurately to a scale large enough to
indicate and resolve conflicts. Do not base coordination drawings on standard printed
data. Include the following information, as applicable:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
B.
Use applicable Drawings as a basis for preparation of coordination drawings.
Prepare sections, elevations, and details as needed to describe relationship of
various systems and components.
Coordinate the addition of trade-specific information to the coordination drawings
by multiple contractors in a sequence that best provides for coordination of the
information and resolution of conflicts between installed components before
submitting for review.
Indicate functional and spatial relationships of components of architectural,
structural, civil, mechanical, and electrical systems.
Indicate space requirements for routine maintenance and for anticipated
replacement of components during the life of the installation.
Show location and size of access doors required for access to concealed dampers,
valves, and other controls.
Indicate required installation sequences.
Indicate dimensions shown on the Drawings. Specifically note dimensions that
appear to be in conflict with submitted equipment and minimum clearance
requirements. Provide alternate sketches to Architect indicating proposed
resolution of such conflicts. Minor dimension changes and difficult installations will
not be considered changes to the Contract.
Coordination Drawing Organization: Organize coordination drawings as follows:
1.
Floor Plans and Reflected Ceiling Plans: Show architectural and structural elements, and
mechanical, plumbing, fire-protection, fire-alarm, and electrical Work. Show locations of
visible ceiling-mounted devices relative to acoustical ceiling grid. Supplement plan
drawings with section drawings where required to adequately represent the Work.
PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION
013100 - 3
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Plenum Space: Indicate subframing for support of ceiling and wall systems, mechanical
and electrical equipment, and related Work. Locate components within ceiling plenum to
accommodate layout of light fixtures indicated on Drawings. Indicate areas of conflict
between light fixtures and other components.
Mechanical Rooms: Provide coordination drawings for mechanical rooms showing plans
and elevations of mechanical, plumbing, fire-protection, fire-alarm, and electrical
equipment.
Structural Penetrations: Indicate penetrations and openings required for all disciplines.
Slab Edge and Embedded Items: Indicate slab edge locations and sizes and locations of
embedded items for metal fabrications, sleeves, anchor bolts, bearing plates, angles,
door floor closers, slab depressions for floor finishes, curbs and housekeeping pads, and
similar items.
Mechanical and Plumbing Work: Show the following:
a.
b.
c.
7.
Electrical Work: Show the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
8.
10.
C.
Runs of vertical and horizontal conduit 1-1/4 inches (32 mm) in diameter and
larger.
Light fixture, exit light, emergency battery pack, smoke detector, and other firealarm locations.
Panel board, switch board, switchgear, transformer, busway, generator, and motor
control center locations.
Location of pull boxes and junction boxes, dimensioned from column center lines.
Fire-Protection System: Show the following:
a.
9.
Sizes and bottom elevations of ductwork, piping, and conduit runs, including
insulation, bracing, flanges, and support systems.
Dimensions of major components, such as dampers, valves, diffusers, access
doors, cleanouts and electrical distribution equipment.
Fire-rated enclosures around ductwork.
Locations of standpipes, mains piping, branch lines, pipe drops, and sprinkler
heads.
Review: Architect will review coordination drawings to confirm that the Work is being
coordinated, but not for the details of the coordination, which are Contractor's
responsibility. If Architect determines that coordination drawings are not being prepared
in sufficient scope or detail, or are otherwise deficient, Architect will so inform Contractor,
who shall make changes as directed and resubmit.
Coordination Drawing Prints: Prepare coordination drawing prints according to
requirements in Section 013300 "Submittal Procedures."
Coordination Digital Data Files: Prepare coordination digital data files according to the following
requirements:
1.
File Preparation Format: Same digital data software program, version, and operating
system as original Drawings.
PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION
013100 - 4
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
2.
3.
4.
File Preparation Format: DWG Version, operating in Microsoft Windows operating
system.
File Submittal Format: Submit or post coordination drawing files using Portable Data File
(PDF) format.
Architect will furnish Contractor one set of digital data files of Drawings for use in
preparing coordination digital data files.
a.
b.
1.7
Architect makes no representations as to the accuracy or completeness of digital
data files as they relate to Drawings.
Digital Data Software Program: Drawings are available in Revit 2013/ Autocad
2013.
REQUESTS FOR INFORMATION (RFIs)
A.
General: Immediately on discovery of the need for additional information or interpretation of the
Contract Documents, Contractor shall prepare and submit an RFI in the form specified.
1.
2.
B.
Architect will return RFIs submitted to Architect by other entities controlled by Contractor
with no response.
Coordinate and submit RFIs in a prompt manner so as to avoid delays in Contractor's
work or work of subcontractors.
Content of the RFI: Include a detailed, legible description of item needing information or
interpretation and the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
Project name.
Project number.
Date.
Name of Contractor.
Name of Architect.
RFI number, numbered sequentially.
RFI subject.
Specification Section number and title and related paragraphs, as appropriate.
Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate.
Field dimensions and conditions, as appropriate.
Contractor's suggested resolution. If Contractor's suggested resolution impacts the
Contract Time or the Contract Sum, Contractor shall state impact in the RFI.
Contractor's signature.
Attachments: Include sketches, descriptions, measurements, photos, Product Data, Shop
Drawings, coordination drawings, and other information necessary to fully describe items
needing interpretation.
a.
C.
Include dimensions, thicknesses, structural grid references, and details of affected
materials, assemblies, and attachments on attached sketches.
RFI Forms: AIA Document G716.
1.
Attachments shall be electronic files in Adobe Acrobat PDF format.
PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION
013100 - 5
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
D.
Architect's Action: Architect will review each RFI, determine action required, and respond. Allow
seven (7) working days for Architect's response for each RFI. RFIs received by Architect after
1:00 p.m. will be considered as received the following working day.
1.
The following Contractor-generated RFIs will be returned without action:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
2.
3.
Architect's action may include a request for additional information, in which case
Architect's time for response will date from time of receipt of additional information.
Architect's action on RFIs that may result in a change to the Contract Time or the
Contract Sum may be eligible for Contractor to submit Change Proposal according to
Section 012600 "Contract Modification Procedures."
a.
E.
If Contractor believes the RFI response warrants change in the Contract Time or
the Contract Sum, notify Architect and COR in writing within five (5) days of receipt
of the RFI response.
RFI Log: Prepare, maintain, and submit a tabular log of RFIs organized by the RFI number.
Submit log weekly. Include the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
F.
Requests for approval of submittals.
Requests for approval of substitutions.
Requests for approval of Contractor's means and methods.
Requests for coordination information already indicated in the Contract
Documents.
Requests for adjustments in the Contract Time or the Contract Sum.
Requests for interpretation of Architect's actions on submittals.
Incomplete RFIs or inaccurately prepared RFIs.
Project name.
Name and address of Contractor.
Name and address of Architect.
RFI number including RFIs that were returned without action or withdrawn.
RFI description.
Date the RFI was submitted.
Date Architect's response was received.
On receipt of Architect's action, update the RFI log and immediately distribute the RFI response
to affected parties. Review response and notify Architect within seven (7) days if Contractor
disagrees with response.
1.
2.
Identification of related Minor Change in the Work, Construction Change Directive, and
Proposal Request, as appropriate.
Identification of related Field Order, Work Change Directive, and Proposal Request, as
appropriate.
PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION
013100 - 6
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
1.8
PROJECT WEB SITE
A.
Use Architect's Project Web site for purposes of hosting and managing project communication
and documentation until Final Completion. Project Web site shall include the following functions:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
1.9
Project directory.
Project correspondence.
Meeting minutes.
Contract modifications forms and logs.
RFI forms and logs.
Task and issue management.
Photo documentation.
Schedule and calendar management.
Submittals forms and logs.
Payment application forms.
Drawing and specification document hosting, viewing, and updating.
Online document collaboration.
Reminder and tracking functions.
Archiving functions.
PROJECT MEETINGS
A.
General: Schedule and conduct meetings and conferences at Project site unless otherwise
indicated.
1.
2.
3.
B.
Attendees: Inform participants and others involved, and individuals whose presence is
required, of date and time of each meeting. Notify Owner and Architect of scheduled
meeting dates and times.
Agenda: Prepare the meeting agenda. Distribute the agenda to all invited attendees.
Minutes: Entity responsible for conducting meeting will record significant discussions and
agreements achieved. Distribute the meeting minutes to everyone concerned, including
Owner, COR, and Architect, within three (3) days of the meeting.
Preconstruction Conference: Architect will schedule and conduct a preconstruction conference
before starting construction, at a time convenient to Owner and Architect, but no later than 15
days after execution of the Agreement.
1.
2.
3.
Conduct the conference to review responsibilities and personnel assignments.
Attendees: Authorized representatives of Owner, Architect, and their consultants;
Contractor and its superintendent; major subcontractors; suppliers; and other concerned
parties shall attend the conference. Participants at the conference shall be familiar with
Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work.
Agenda: Discuss items of significance that could affect progress, including the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
Tentative construction schedule.
Phasing.
Critical work sequencing and long-lead items.
Designation of key personnel and their duties.
PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION
013100 - 7
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
k.
l.
m.
n.
o.
p.
q.
r.
s.
t.
u.
v.
w.
x.
y.
z.
4.
C.
Lines of communications.
Procedures for processing field decisions and Change Orders.
Procedures for RFIs.
Procedures for testing and inspecting.
Procedures for processing Applications for Payment.
Distribution of the Contract Documents.
Submittal procedures.
Preparation of record documents.
Use of the premises and existing building.
Work restrictions.
Working hours.
Owner's occupancy requirements.
Responsibility for temporary facilities and controls.
Procedures for moisture and mold control.
Procedures for disruptions and shutdowns.
Construction waste management and recycling.
Parking availability.
Office, work, and storage areas.
Equipment deliveries and priorities.
First aid.
Security.
Progress cleaning.
Minutes: Entity responsible for conducting meeting will record and distribute meeting
minutes.
Project Closeout Conference: Schedule and conduct a project closeout conference, at a time
convenient to Owner and Architect, but no later than 60 days prior to the scheduled date of
Substantial Completion.
1.
2.
3.
Conduct the conference to review requirements and responsibilities related to Project
closeout.
Attendees: Authorized representatives of Owner, Architect, and their consultants;
Contractor and its superintendent; major subcontractors; suppliers; and other concerned
parties shall attend the meeting. Participants at the meeting shall be familiar with Project
and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work.
Agenda: Discuss items of significance that could affect or delay Project closeout,
including the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
Preparation of record documents.
Procedures required prior to inspection for Substantial Completion and for final
inspection for acceptance.
Submittal of written warranties.
Requirements for preparing operations and maintenance data.
Requirements for delivery of material samples, attic stock, and spare parts.
Requirements for demonstration and training.
Preparation of Contractor's punch list.
Procedures for processing Applications for Payment at Substantial Completion and
for final payment.
PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION
013100 - 8
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
i.
j.
k.
l.
m.
4.
D.
Submittal procedures.
Coordination of separate contracts.
Owner's partial occupancy requirements.
Installation of Owner's furniture, fixtures, and equipment.
Responsibility for removing temporary facilities and controls.
Minutes: Entity conducting meeting will record and distribute meeting minutes.
Progress Meetings: Conduct progress meetings at biweekly intervals.
1.
2.
3.
Coordinate dates of meetings with preparation of payment requests.
Attendees: In addition to representatives of Owner and Architect, each contractor,
subcontractor, supplier, and other entity concerned with current progress or involved in
planning, coordination, or performance of future activities shall be represented at these
meetings. All participants at the meeting shall be familiar with Project and authorized to
conclude matters relating to the Work.
Agenda: Review and correct or approve minutes of previous progress meeting. Review
other items of significance that could affect progress. Include topics for discussion as
appropriate to status of Project.
a.
Contractor's Construction Schedule: Review progress since the last meeting.
Determine whether each activity is on time, ahead of schedule, or behind
schedule, in relation to Contractor's construction schedule. Determine how
construction behind schedule will be expedited; secure commitments from parties
involved to do so. Discuss whether schedule revisions are required to ensure that
current and subsequent activities will be completed within the Contract Time.
1)
b.
Review schedule for next period.
Review present and future needs of each entity present, including the following:
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
7)
8)
9)
10)
11)
12)
13)
14)
15)
16)
17)
18)
Interface requirements.
Sequence of operations.
Status of submittals.
Deliveries.
Off-site fabrication.
Access.
Site utilization.
Temporary facilities and controls.
Progress cleaning.
Quality and work standards.
Status of correction of deficient items.
Field observations.
Status of RFIs.
Status of proposal requests.
Pending changes.
Status of Change Orders.
Pending claims and disputes.
Documentation of information for payment requests.
PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION
013100 - 9
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
4.
Minutes: Entity responsible for conducting the meeting will record and distribute the
meeting minutes to each party present and to parties requiring information.
a.
E.
Schedule Updating: Revise Contractor's construction schedule after each progress
meeting where revisions to the schedule have been made or recognized. Issue
revised schedule concurrently with the report of each meeting.
Coordination Meetings: Conduct Project coordination meetings at biweekly intervals. Project
coordination meetings are in addition to specific meetings held for other purposes, such as
progress meetings and preinstallation conferences.
1.
2.
Attendees: In addition to representatives of Owner and Architect, each contractor,
subcontractor, supplier, and other entity concerned with current progress or involved in
planning, coordination, or performance of future activities shall be represented at these
meetings. All participants at the meetings shall be familiar with Project and authorized to
conclude matters relating to the Work.
Agenda: Review and correct or approve minutes of the previous coordination meeting.
Review other items of significance that could affect progress. Include topics for
discussion as appropriate to status of Project.
a.
b.
c.
Combined Contractor's Construction Schedule: Review progress since the last
coordination meeting. Determine whether each contract is on time, ahead of
schedule, or behind schedule, in relation to combined Contractor's construction
schedule. Determine how construction behind schedule will be expedited; secure
commitments from parties involved to do so. Discuss whether schedule revisions
are required to ensure that current and subsequent activities will be completed
within the Contract Time.
Schedule Updating: Revise combined Contractor's construction schedule after
each coordination meeting where revisions to the schedule have been made or
recognized. Issue revised schedule concurrently with report of each meeting.
Review present and future needs of each contractor present, including the
following:
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
7)
8)
9)
10)
11)
12)
13)
3.
Interface requirements.
Sequence of operations.
Status of submittals.
Deliveries.
Off-site fabrication.
Access.
Site utilization.
Temporary facilities and controls.
Work hours.
Hazards and risks.
Progress cleaning.
Quality and work standards.
Change Orders.
Reporting: Record meeting results and distribute copies to everyone in attendance and to
others affected by decisions or actions resulting from each meeting.
PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION
013100 - 10
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)
END OF SECTION 013100
PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION
013100 - 11
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
SECTION 013200 - CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for documenting the progress of
construction during performance of the Work, including the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
B.
Related Requirements:
1.
2.
1.3
Startup construction schedule.
Contractor's construction schedule.
Construction schedule updating reports.
Daily construction reports.
Material location reports.
Site condition reports.
Special reports.
Section 013300 "Submittal Procedures" for submitting schedules and reports.
Section 014000 "Quality Requirements" for submitting a schedule of tests and
inspections.
DEFINITIONS
A.
Activity: A discrete part of a project that can be identified for planning, scheduling, monitoring,
and controlling the construction project. Activities included in a construction schedule consume
time and resources.
1.
2.
3.
Critical Activity: An activity on the critical path that must start and finish on the planned
early start and finish times.
Predecessor Activity: An activity that precedes another activity in the network.
Successor Activity: An activity that follows another activity in the network.
B.
CPM: Critical path method, which is a method of planning and scheduling a construction project
where activities are arranged based on activity relationships. Network calculations determine
when activities can be performed and the critical path of Project.
C.
Critical Path: The longest connected chain of interdependent activities through the network
schedule that establishes the minimum overall Project duration and contains no float.
CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION
013200 - 1
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
D.
Event: The starting or ending point of an activity.
E.
Resource Loading: The allocation of manpower and equipment necessary for the completion of
an activity as scheduled.
1.4
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A.
Format for Submittals: Submit required submittals in the following format:
1.
2.
3.
B.
Working electronic copy of schedule file, where indicated.
PDF electronic file.
Five (5) paper copies.
Startup construction schedule.
1.
Approval of cost-loaded, startup construction schedule will not constitute approval of
schedule of values for cost-loaded activities.
C.
Startup Network Diagram: Of size required to display entire network for entire construction
period. Show logic ties for activities.
D.
Contractor's Construction Schedule: Initial schedule, of size required to display entire schedule
for entire construction period.
1.
E.
Submit a working electronic copy of schedule, using software indicated, and labeled to
comply with requirements for submittals. Include type of schedule (initial or updated) and
date on label.
CPM Reports: Concurrent with CPM schedule, submit each of the following reports. Format for
each activity in reports shall contain activity number, activity description, cost and resource
loading, original duration, remaining duration, early start date, early finish date, late start date,
late finish date, and total float in calendar days.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Activity Report: List of all activities sorted by activity number and then early start date, or
actual start date if known.
Logic Report: List of preceding and succeeding activities for all activities, sorted in
ascending order by activity number and then early start date, or actual start date if
known.
Total Float Report: List of all activities sorted in ascending order of total float.
Earnings Report: Compilation of Contractor's total earnings from the Notice to Proceed
until most recent Application for Payment.
F.
Construction Schedule Updating Reports: Submit with Applications for Payment.
G.
Material Location Reports: Submit at weekly intervals.
H.
Site Condition Reports: Submit at time of discovery of differing conditions.
CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION
013200 - 2
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
I.
Special Reports: Submit at time of unusual event.
J.
Qualification Data: For scheduling consultant.
1.5
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
1.6
Scheduling Consultant Qualifications: An experienced specialist in CPM scheduling and
reporting, with capability of producing CPM reports and diagrams within 24 hours of Architect's
request.
COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate Contractor's construction schedule with the schedule of values, submittal schedule,
progress reports, payment requests, and other required schedules and reports.
1.
2.
Secure time commitments for performing critical elements of the Work from entities
involved.
Coordinate each construction activity in the network with other activities and schedule
them in proper sequence.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE, GENERAL
A.
Time Frame: Extend schedule from date established for the Notice of Award to date of
Substantial Completion.
1.
B.
Contract completion date shall not be changed by submission of a schedule that shows
an early completion date, unless specifically authorized by Change Order.
Activities: Treat each story or separate area as a separate numbered activity for each main
element of the Work. Comply with the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Activity Duration: Define activities so no activity is longer than 20 days, unless specifically
allowed by Architect.
Procurement Activities: Include procurement process activities for the following long lead
items and major items, requiring a cycle of more than 60 days, as separate activities in
schedule. Procurement cycle activities include, but are not limited to, submittals,
approvals, purchasing, fabrication, and delivery.
Submittal Review Time: Include review and resubmittal times indicated in Section 013300
"Submittal Procedures" in schedule. Coordinate submittal review times in Contractor's
construction schedule with submittal schedule.
Startup and Testing Time: Include no fewer than 15 days for startup and testing.
CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION
013200 - 3
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
5.
6.
C.
Substantial Completion: Indicate completion in advance of date established for
Substantial Completion, and allow time for Architect's administrative procedures
necessary for certification of Substantial Completion.
Punch List and Final Completion: Include not more than 30 days for completion of punch
list items and final completion.
Constraints: Include constraints and work restrictions indicated in the Contract Documents and
as follows in schedule, and show how the sequence of the Work is affected.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Phasing: Arrange list of activities on schedule by phase.
Work by Owner: Include a separate activity for each portion of the Work performed by
Owner.
Products Ordered in Advance: Include a separate activity for each product. Include
delivery date indicated in Section 011000 "Summary." Delivery dates indicated stipulate
the earliest possible delivery date.
Owner-Furnished Products: Include a separate activity for each product. Include delivery
date indicated in Section 011000 "Summary." Delivery dates indicated stipulate the
earliest possible delivery date.
Work Restrictions: Show the effect of the following items on the schedule:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
6.
Work Stages: Indicate important stages of construction for each major portion of the
Work, including, but not limited to, the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
k.
l.
m.
7.
Coordination with existing construction.
Limitations of continued occupancies.
Uninterruptible services.
Partial occupancy before Substantial Completion.
Use of premises restrictions.
Provisions for future construction.
Seasonal variations.
Environmental control.
Subcontract awards.
Submittals.
Purchases.
Mockups.
Fabrication.
Sample testing.
Deliveries.
Installation.
Tests and inspections.
Adjusting.
Curing.
Building flush-out.
Startup and placement into final use and operation.
Construction Areas: Identify each major area of construction for each major portion of the
Work. Indicate where each construction activity within a major area must be sequenced
or integrated with other construction activities to provide for the following:
CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION
013200 - 4
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
a.
b.
c.
d.
Structural completion.
Completion of mechanical installation.
Completion of electrical installation.
Substantial Completion.
D.
Milestones: Include milestones indicated in the Contract Documents in schedule, including, but
not limited to, the Notice to Proceed, Substantial Completion, and final completion.
E.
Upcoming Work Summary: Prepare summary report indicating activities scheduled to occur or
commence prior to submittal of next schedule update. Summarize the following issues:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
F.
2.2
Unresolved issues.
Unanswered Requests for Information.
Rejected or unreturned submittals.
Notations on returned submittals.
Pending modifications affecting the Work and Contract Time.
Recovery Schedule: When periodic update indicates the Work is 14 or more calendar days
behind the current approved schedule, submit a separate recovery schedule indicating means
by which Contractor intends to regain compliance with the schedule. Indicate changes to
working hours, working days, crew sizes, and equipment required to achieve compliance, and
date by which recovery will be accomplished.
CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE (GANTT CHART)
A.
Gantt-Chart Schedule: Submit a comprehensive, fully developed, horizontal, Gantt-chart-type,
Contractor's construction schedule within 15 days of date established for the Notice of Award.
Base schedule on the startup construction schedule and additional information received since
the start of Project.
B.
Preparation: Indicate each significant construction activity separately. Identify first workday of
each week with a continuous vertical line.
1.
2.3
For construction activities that require three months or longer to complete, indicate an
estimated completion percentage in 10 percent increments within time bar.
REPORTS
A.
Daily Construction Reports: Prepare a daily construction report recording the following
information concerning events at Project site:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
List of subcontractors at Project site.
List of separate contractors at Project site.
Approximate count of personnel at Project site.
Equipment at Project site.
Material deliveries.
CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION
013200 - 5
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
B.
Material Location Reports: At bi-weekly intervals, prepare and submit a comprehensive list of
materials delivered to and stored at Project site. List shall be cumulative, showing materials
previously reported plus items recently delivered. Include with list a statement of progress on
and delivery dates for materials or items of equipment fabricated or stored away from Project
site. Indicate the following categories for stored materials:
1.
2.
3.
C.
High and low temperatures and general weather conditions, including presence of rain or
snow.
Accidents.
Meetings and significant decisions.
Unusual events (see special reports).
Stoppages, delays, shortages, and losses.
Meter readings and similar recordings.
Emergency procedures.
Orders and requests of authorities having jurisdiction.
Change Orders received and implemented.
Construction Change Directives received and implemented.
Services connected and disconnected.
Equipment or system tests and startups.
Partial completions and occupancies.
Substantial Completions authorized.
Material stored prior to previous report and remaining in storage.
Material stored prior to previous report and since removed from storage and installed.
Material stored following previous report and remaining in storage.
Site Condition Reports: Immediately on discovery of a difference between site conditions and
the Contract Documents, prepare and submit a detailed report. Submit with a Request for
Information. Include a detailed description of the differing conditions, together with
recommendations for changing the Contract Documents.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE
A.
Scheduling Consultant: Engage a consultant to provide planning, evaluation, and reporting
using CPM scheduling.
1.
2.
B.
In-House Option: Owner may waive the requirement to retain a consultant if Contractor
employs skilled personnel with experience in CPM scheduling and reporting techniques.
Submit qualifications.
Meetings: Scheduling consultant shall attend all meetings related to Project progress,
alleged delays, and time impact.
Contractor's Construction Schedule Updating: At bi-weekly intervals, update schedule to reflect
actual construction progress and activities. Issue schedule one (1) week before each regularly
scheduled progress meeting.
CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION
013200 - 6
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
1.
2.
3.
C.
Revise schedule immediately after each meeting or other activity where revisions have
been recognized or made. Issue updated schedule concurrently with the report of each
such meeting.
Include a report with updated schedule that indicates every change, including, but not
limited to, changes in logic, durations, actual starts and finishes, and activity durations.
As the Work progresses, indicate final completion percentage for each activity.
Distribution: Distribute copies of approved schedule to Architect, Owner, separate contractors,
testing and inspecting agencies, and other parties identified by Contractor with a need-to-know
schedule responsibility.
1.
2.
Post copies in Project meeting rooms and temporary field offices.
When revisions are made, distribute updated schedules to the same parties and post in
the same locations. Delete parties from distribution when they have completed their
assigned portion of the Work and are no longer involved in performance of construction
activities.
END OF SECTION 013200
CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION
013200 - 7
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
SECTION 013300 - SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
Section includes requirements for the submittal schedule and administrative and procedural
requirements for submitting Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples, and other submittals.
B.
Related Requirements:
1.
2.
3.
4.
1.3
Section 012900 "Payment Procedures" for submitting Applications for Payment and the
schedule of values.
Section 013200 "Construction Progress Documentation" for submitting schedules and
reports, including Contractor's construction schedule.
Section 017823 "Operation and Maintenance Data" for submitting operation and
maintenance manuals.
Section 017839 "Project Record Documents" for submitting record Drawings, record
Specifications, and record Product Data.
DEFINITIONS
A.
Action Submittals: Written and graphic information and physical samples that require Architect's
and COR's responsive action. Action submittals are those submittals indicated in individual
Specification Sections as "action submittals."
B.
Informational Submittals: Written and graphic information and physical samples that do not
require Architect's and COR's responsive action. Submittals may be rejected for not complying
with requirements. Informational submittals are those submittals indicated in individual
Specification Sections as "informational submittals."
C.
File Transfer Protocol (FTP): Communications protocol that enables transfer of files to and from
another computer over a network and that serves as the basis for standard Internet protocols.
An FTP site is a portion of a network located outside of network firewalls within which internal
and external users are able to access files.
D.
Portable Document Format (PDF): An open standard file format licensed by Adobe Systems
used for representing documents in a device-independent and display resolution-independent
fixed-layout document format.
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
013300 - 1
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
1.4
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Submittal Schedule: Submit a schedule of submittals, arranged in chronological order by dates
required by construction schedule. Include time required for review, ordering, manufacturing,
fabrication, and delivery when establishing dates. Include additional time required for making
corrections or revisions to submittals noted by Architect and COR and additional time for
handling and reviewing submittals required by those corrections.
1.
2.
3.
Coordinate submittal schedule with list of subcontracts, the schedule of values, and
Contractor's construction schedule.
Initial Submittal: Submit concurrently with startup construction schedule. Include
submittals required during the first 60 days of construction. List those submittals required
to maintain orderly progress of the Work and those required early because of long lead
time for manufacture or fabrication.
Final Submittal: Submit concurrently with the first complete submittal of Contractor's
construction schedule.
a.
4.
Format: Arrange the following information in a tabular format:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
1.5
Submit revised submittal schedule to reflect changes in current status and timing
for submittals.
Scheduled date for first submittal.
Specification Section number and title.
Submittal category: Action; informational.
Name of subcontractor.
Description of the Work covered.
Scheduled date for Architect's and COR's final release or approval.
Scheduled date of fabrication.
Scheduled dates for purchasing.
Scheduled dates for installation.
Activity or event number.
SUBMITTAL ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A.
Architect's Digital Data Files: Electronic digital data files of the Contract Drawings will be
provided by Architect for Contractor's use in preparing submittals.
1.
Architect will furnish Contractor one set of digital data drawing files of the Contract
Drawings for use in preparing Shop Drawings.
a.
b.
c.
Architect makes no representations as to the accuracy or completeness of digital
data drawing files as they relate to the Contract Drawings.
Digital Drawing Software Program: The Contract Drawings are available in Revit
2013/ Autocad 2013.
The following digital data files will by furnished for each appropriate discipline:
1)
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
Floor plans.
013300 - 2
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
2)
3)
B.
Coordination: Coordinate preparation and processing of submittals with performance of
construction activities.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Coordinate each submittal with fabrication, purchasing, testing, delivery, other submittals,
and related activities that require sequential activity.
Submit all submittal items required for each Specification Section concurrently unless
partial submittals for portions of the Work are indicated on approved submittal schedule.
Submit action submittals and informational submittals required by the same Specification
Section as separate packages under separate transmittals.
Coordinate transmittal of different types of submittals for related parts of the Work so
processing will not be delayed because of need to review submittals concurrently for
coordination.
a.
C.
Architect and COR reserve the right to withhold action on a submittal requiring
coordination with other submittals until related submittals are received.
Processing Time: Allow time for submittal review, including time for resubmittals, as follows.
Time for review shall commence on Architect's receipt of submittal. No extension of the
Contract Time will be authorized because of failure to transmit submittals enough in advance of
the Work to permit processing, including resubmittals.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
D.
Reflected ceiling plans.
Mechanical, Electrical, Plumbing, and Fire Protection plans.
Initial Review: Allow 10 days for initial review of each submittal. Allow additional time if
coordination with subsequent submittals is required. Architect will advise Contractor when
a submittal being processed must be delayed for coordination.
Intermediate Review: If intermediate submittal is necessary, process it in same manner
as initial submittal.
Resubmittal Review: Allow 15 days for review of each resubmittal.
Sequential Review: Where sequential review of submittals by Architect's consultants,
Owner, or other parties is indicated, allow 15 days for initial review of each submittal.
Concurrent Consultant Review: Where the Contract Documents indicate that submittals
may be transmitted simultaneously to Architect and to Architect's consultants, allow 10
days for review of each submittal. Submittal will be returned to Architect before being
returned to Contractor.
Paper Submittals: Place a permanent label or title block on each submittal item for identification.
1.
2.
3.
Indicate name of firm or entity that prepared each submittal on label or title block.
Provide a space approximately 6 by 8 inches (150 by 200 mm) on label or beside title
block to record Contractor's review and approval markings and action taken by Architect.
Include the following information for processing and recording action taken:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
Project name.
Date.
Name of Architect.
Name of Construction Manager.
Name of Contractor.
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
013300 - 3
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
f.
g.
h.
i.
Name of subcontractor.
Name of supplier.
Name of manufacturer.
Submittal number or other unique identifier, including revision identifier.
1)
j.
k.
l.
m.
4.
Number and title of appropriate Specification Section.
Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate.
Location(s) where product is to be installed, as appropriate.
Other necessary identification.
Additional Paper Copies: Unless additional copies are required for final submittal, and
unless Architect observes noncompliance with provisions in the Contract Documents,
initial submittal may serve as final submittal.
a.
5.
Submittal number shall use Specification Section number followed by a
decimal point and then a sequential number (e.g., 061000.01). Resubmittals
shall include an alphabetic suffix after another decimal point (e.g.,
061000.01.A).
Submit one copy of submittal to concurrent reviewer in addition to specified
number of copies to Architect.
Transmittal for Paper Submittals: Assemble each submittal individually and appropriately
for transmittal and handling. Transmit each submittal using a transmittal form.
Architect and COR will discard submittals received from sources other than Contractor.
a.
b.
Transmittal Form for Paper Submittals: Use AIA Document G810.
Transmittal Form for Paper Submittals: Provide locations on form for the following
information:
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
7)
8)
9)
10)
11)
12)
13)
14)
15)
16)
17)
18)
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
Project name.
Date.
Destination (To:).
Source (From:).
Name and address of Architect.
Name of Construction Manager.
Name of Contractor.
Name of firm or entity that prepared submittal.
Names of subcontractor, manufacturer, and supplier.
Category and type of submittal.
Submittal purpose and description.
Specification Section number and title.
Specification paragraph number or drawing designation and generic name
for each of multiple items.
Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate.
Indication of full or partial submittal.
Transmittal number.
Submittal and transmittal distribution record.
Remarks.
013300 - 4
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
19)
E.
Signature of transmitter.
Electronic Submittals: Identify and incorporate information in each electronic submittal file as
follows:
1.
2.
Assemble complete submittal package into a single indexed file incorporating submittal
requirements of a single Specification Section and transmittal form with links enabling
navigation to each item.
Name file with submittal number or other unique identifier, including revision identifier.
a.
3.
4.
File name shall use project identifier and Specification Section number followed by
a decimal point and then a sequential number (e.g., LNHS-061000.01).
Resubmittals shall include an alphabetic suffix after another decimal point (e.g.,
LNHS-061000.01.A).
Provide means for insertion to permanently record Contractor's review and approval
markings and action taken by Architect and COR.
Transmittal Form for Electronic Submittals: Use electronic form acceptable to Owner,
containing the following information:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
k.
l.
m.
n.
o.
p.
q.
r.
s.
Project name.
Date.
Name and address of Architect.
Name of Construction Manager.
Name of Contractor.
Name of firm or entity that prepared submittal.
Names of subcontractor, manufacturer, and supplier.
Category and type of submittal.
Submittal purpose and description.
Specification Section number and title.
Specification paragraph number or drawing designation and generic name for each
of multiple items.
Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate.
Location(s) where product is to be installed, as appropriate.
Related physical samples submitted directly.
Indication of full or partial submittal.
Transmittal number.
Submittal and transmittal distribution record.
Other necessary identification.
Remarks.
F.
Options: Identify options requiring selection by Architect.
G.
Deviations and Additional Information: On an attached separate sheet, prepared on Contractor's
letterhead, record relevant information, requests for data, revisions other than those requested
by Architect on previous submittals, and deviations from requirements in the Contract
Documents, including minor variations and limitations. Include same identification information as
related submittal.
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
013300 - 5
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
H.
Resubmittals: Make resubmittals in same form and number of copies as initial submittal.
1.
2.
3.
Note date and content of previous submittal.
Note date and content of revision in label or title block and clearly indicate extent of
revision.
Resubmit submittals until they are marked with approval notation from Architect's action
stamp.
I.
Distribution: Furnish copies of final submittals to manufacturers, subcontractors, suppliers,
fabricators, installers, authorities having jurisdiction, and others as necessary for performance of
construction activities. Show distribution on transmittal forms.
J.
Use for Construction: Retain complete copies of submittals on Project site. Use only final action
submittals that are marked with approval notation from Architect's action stamp.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
A.
General Submittal Procedure Requirements: Prepare and submit submittals required by
individual Specification Sections. Types of submittals are indicated in individual Specification
Sections.
1.
Post electronic submittals as PDF electronic files directly to Project Web site specifically
established for Project.
a.
2.
Submit electronic submittals via email as PDF electronic files.
a.
3.
4.
5.
Architect will return annotated file. Annotate and retain one copy of file as an
electronic Project record document file.
Architect will return annotated file. Annotate and retain one copy of file as an
electronic Project record document file.
Action Submittals: Submit five (5) paper copies of each submittal unless otherwise
indicated. Architect will return two copies.
Informational Submittals: Submit two (2) paper copies of each submittal unless otherwise
indicated. Architect will not return copies.
Certificates and Certifications Submittals: Provide a statement that includes signature of
entity responsible for preparing certification. Certificates and certifications shall be signed
by an officer or other individual authorized to sign documents on behalf of that entity.
a.
b.
Provide a digital signature with digital certificate on electronically submitted
certificates and certifications where indicated.
Provide a notarized statement on original paper copy certificates and certifications
where indicated.
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
013300 - 6
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
B.
Product Data: Collect information into a single submittal for each element of construction and
type of product or equipment.
1.
2.
3.
If information must be specially prepared for submittal because standard published data
are not suitable for use, submit as Shop Drawings, not as Product Data.
Mark each copy of each submittal to show which products and options are applicable.
Include the following information, as applicable:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
4.
For equipment, include the following in addition to the above, as applicable:
a.
b.
c.
d.
5.
6.
Wiring diagrams showing factory-installed wiring.
Printed performance curves.
Operational range diagrams.
Clearances required to other construction, if not indicated on accompanying Shop
Drawings.
Submit Product Data before or concurrent with Samples.
Submit Product Data in the following format:
a.
C.
Manufacturer's catalog cuts.
Manufacturer's product specifications.
Standard color charts.
Statement of compliance with specified referenced standards.
Testing by recognized testing agency.
Application of testing agency labels and seals.
Notation of coordination requirements.
Availability and delivery time information.
PDF electronic file.
Shop Drawings: Prepare Project-specific information, drawn accurately to scale. Do not base
Shop Drawings on reproductions of the Contract Documents or standard printed data, unless
submittal based on Architect's digital data drawing files is otherwise permitted.
1.
Preparation: Fully illustrate requirements in the Contract Documents. Include the
following information, as applicable:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
2.
3.
Identification of products.
Schedules.
Compliance with specified standards.
Notation of coordination requirements.
Notation of dimensions established by field measurement.
Relationship and attachment to adjoining construction clearly indicated.
Seal and signature of professional engineer if specified.
Sheet Size: Except for templates, patterns, and similar full-size drawings, submit Shop
Drawings on sheets at least 8-1/2 by 11 inches (215 by 280 mm), but no larger than 30
by 42 inches (750 by 1067 mm).
Submit Shop Drawings in the following format:
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
013300 - 7
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
a.
D.
PDF electronic file.
Samples: Submit Samples for review of kind, color, pattern, and texture for a check of these
characteristics with other elements and for a comparison of these characteristics between
submittal and actual component as delivered and installed.
1.
2.
Transmit Samples that contain multiple, related components such as accessories
together in one submittal package.
Identification: Attach label on unexposed side of Samples that includes the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
3.
4.
For projects where electronic submittals are required, provide corresponding electronic
submittal of Sample transmittal, digital image file illustrating Sample characteristics, and
identification information for record.
Disposition: Maintain sets of approved Samples at Project site, available for qualitycontrol comparisons throughout the course of construction activity. Sample sets may be
used to determine final acceptance of construction associated with each set.
a.
b.
5.
Samples that may be incorporated into the Work are indicated in individual
Specification Sections. Such Samples must be in an undamaged condition at time
of use.
Samples not incorporated into the Work, or otherwise designated as Owner's
property, are the property of Contractor.
Samples for Initial Selection: Submit manufacturer's color charts consisting of units or
sections of units showing the full range of colors, textures, and patterns available.
a.
6.
Generic description of Sample.
Product name and name of manufacturer.
Sample source.
Number and title of applicable Specification Section.
Specification paragraph number and generic name of each item.
Number of Samples: Submit one (1) full set(s) of available choices where color,
pattern, texture, or similar characteristics are required to be selected from
manufacturer's product line. Architect will return submittal with options selected.
Samples for Verification: Submit full-size units or Samples of size indicated, prepared
from same material to be used for the Work, cured and finished in manner specified, and
physically identical with material or product proposed for use, and that show full range of
color and texture variations expected. Samples include, but are not limited to, the
following: partial sections of manufactured or fabricated components; small cuts or
containers of materials; complete units of repetitively used materials; swatches showing
color, texture, and pattern; color range sets; and components used for independent
testing and inspection.
a.
Number of Samples: Submit three (3) sets of Samples. Architect will retain two (2)
Sample sets; remainder will be returned. Mark up and retain one returned Sample
set as a project record sample.
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
013300 - 8
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
1)
2)
E.
Submit a single Sample where assembly details, workmanship, fabrication
techniques, connections, operation, and other similar characteristics are to
be demonstrated.
If variation in color, pattern, texture, or other characteristic is inherent in
material or product represented by a Sample, submit at least three (3) sets
of paired units that show approximate limits of variations.
Product Schedule: As required in individual Specification Sections, prepare a written summary
indicating types of products required for the Work and their intended location. Include the
following information in tabular form:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Type of product. Include unique identifier for each product indicated in the Contract
Documents or assigned by Contractor if none is indicated.
Manufacturer and product name, and model number if applicable.
Number and name of room or space.
Location within room or space.
Submit product schedule in the following format:
a.
b.
PDF electronic file.
Three (3) paper copies of product schedule or list unless otherwise indicated.
Architect will return two (2) copies.
F.
Coordination Drawing Submittals: Comply with requirements specified in Section 013100
"Project Management and Coordination."
G.
Contractor's Construction Schedule: Comply with requirements specified in Section 013200
"Construction Progress Documentation."
H.
Application for Payment and Schedule of Values: Comply with requirements specified in
Section 012900 "Payment Procedures."
I.
Test and Inspection Reports and Schedule of Tests and Inspections Submittals: Comply with
requirements specified in Section 014000 "Quality Requirements."
J.
Closeout Submittals and Maintenance Material Submittals: Comply with requirements specified
in Section 017700 "Closeout Procedures."
K.
Maintenance Data: Comply with requirements specified in Section 017823 "Operation and
Maintenance Data."
L.
Qualification Data: Prepare written information that demonstrates capabilities and experience of
firm or person. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, contact
information of architects and owners, and other information specified.
M.
Welding Certificates: Prepare written certification that welding procedures and personnel
comply with requirements in the Contract Documents. Submit record of Welding Procedure
Specification and Procedure Qualification Record on AWS forms. Include names of firms and
personnel certified.
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
013300 - 9
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
N.
Installer Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that
Installer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents and, where required, is
authorized by manufacturer for this specific Project.
O.
Manufacturer Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that
manufacturer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. Include evidence of
manufacturing experience where required.
P.
Product Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that
product complies with requirements in the Contract Documents.
Q.
Material Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that
material complies with requirements in the Contract Documents.
R.
Material Test Reports: Submit reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's
standard form, indicating and interpreting test results of material for compliance with
requirements in the Contract Documents.
S.
Product Test Reports: Submit written reports indicating that current product produced by
manufacturer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. Base reports on
evaluation of tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency, or
on comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency.
T.
Research Reports: Submit written evidence, from a model code organization acceptable to
authorities having jurisdiction, that product complies with building code in effect for Project.
Include the following information:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Name of evaluation organization.
Date of evaluation.
Time period when report is in effect.
Product and manufacturers' names.
Description of product.
Test procedures and results.
Limitations of use.
U.
Preconstruction Test Reports: Submit reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing
agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of tests performed before installation
of product, for compliance with performance requirements in the Contract Documents.
V.
Compatibility Test Reports: Submit reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing
agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of compatibility tests performed
before installation of product. Include written recommendations for primers and substrate
preparation needed for adhesion.
W.
Field Test Reports: Submit written reports indicating and interpreting results of field tests
performed either during installation of product or after product is installed in its final location, for
compliance with requirements in the Contract Documents.
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
013300 - 10
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
X.
2.2
Design Data: Prepare and submit written and graphic information, including, but not limited to,
performance and design criteria, list of applicable codes and regulations, and calculations.
Include list of assumptions and other performance and design criteria and a summary of loads.
Include load diagrams if applicable. Provide name and version of software, if any, used for
calculations. Include page numbers.
DELEGATED-DESIGN SERVICES
A.
Performance and Design Criteria: Where professional design services or certifications by a
design professional are specifically required of Contractor by the Contract Documents, provide
products and systems complying with specific performance and design criteria indicated.
1.
B.
If criteria indicated are not sufficient to perform services or certification required, submit a
written request for additional information to Architect.
Delegated-Design Services Certification: In addition to Shop Drawings, Product Data, and other
required submittals, submit digitally signed PDF electronic file and three (3) paper copies of
certificate, signed and sealed by the responsible design professional, for each product and
system specifically assigned to Contractor to be designed or certified by a design professional.
1.
Indicate that products and systems comply with performance and design criteria in the
Contract Documents. Include list of codes, loads, and other factors used in performing
these services.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
CONTRACTOR'S REVIEW
A.
Action and Informational Submittals: Review each submittal and check for coordination with
other Work of the Contract and for compliance with the Contract Documents. Note corrections
and field dimensions. Mark with approval stamp before submitting to Architect.
B.
Project Closeout and Maintenance Material Submittals: See requirements in Section 017700
"Closeout Procedures."
C.
Approval Stamp: Stamp each submittal with a uniform, approval stamp. Include Project name
and location, submittal number, Specification Section title and number, name of reviewer, date
of Contractor's approval, and statement certifying that submittal has been reviewed, checked,
and approved for compliance with the Contract Documents.
3.2
ARCHITECT'S ACTION
A.
Action Submittals: Architect will review each submittal, make marks to indicate corrections or
revisions required, and return it. Architect will stamp each submittal with an action stamp and
will mark stamp appropriately to indicate action.
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
013300 - 11
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
B.
Informational Submittals: Architect will review each submittal and will not return it, or will return it
if it does not comply with requirements. Architect will forward each submittal to appropriate
party.
C.
Partial submittals prepared for a portion of the Work will be reviewed when use of partial
submittals has received prior approval from Architect.
D.
Incomplete submittals are unacceptable, will be considered nonresponsive, and will be returned
for resubmittal without review.
E.
Submittals not required by the Contract Documents may be returned by the Architect without
action.
END OF SECTION 013300
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
013300 - 12
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
SECTION 014000 - QUALITY REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for quality assurance and quality
control.
B.
Testing and inspecting services are required to verify compliance with requirements specified or
indicated. These services do not relieve Contractor of responsibility for compliance with the
Contract Document requirements.
1.
2.
3.
4.
1.3
Specific quality-assurance and -control requirements for individual construction activities
are specified in the Sections that specify those activities. Requirements in those Sections
may also cover production of standard products.
Specified tests, inspections, and related actions do not limit Contractor's other qualityassurance and -control procedures that facilitate compliance with the Contract Document
requirements.
Requirements for Contractor to provide quality-assurance and -control services required
by Architect, Owner, Commissioning Authority, or authorities having jurisdiction are not
limited by provisions of this Section.
Specific test and inspection requirements are not specified in this Section.
DEFINITIONS
A.
Quality-Assurance Services: Activities, actions, and procedures performed before and during
execution of the Work to guard against defects and deficiencies and substantiate that proposed
construction will comply with requirements.
B.
Quality-Control Services: Tests, inspections, procedures, and related actions during and after
execution of the Work to evaluate that actual products incorporated into the Work and
completed construction comply with requirements. Services do not include contract enforcement
activities performed by Architect.
C.
Mockups: Full-size physical assemblies that are constructed on-site. Mockups are constructed
to verify selections made under Sample submittals; to demonstrate aesthetic effects and, where
indicated, qualities of materials and execution; to review coordination, testing, or operation; to
show interface between dissimilar materials; and to demonstrate compliance with specified
QUALITY REQUIREMENTS
014000 - 1
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
installation tolerances. Mockups are not Samples. Unless otherwise indicated, approved
mockups establish the standard by which the Work will be judged.
1.
2.
3.
Laboratory Mockups: Full-size physical assemblies constructed at testing facility to verify
performance characteristics.
Integrated Exterior Mockups: Mockups of the exterior envelope erected separately from
the building but on Project site, consisting of multiple products, assemblies, and
subassemblies.
Room Mockups: Mockups of typical interior spaces complete with wall, floor, and ceiling
finishes, doors, windows, millwork, casework, specialties, furnishings and equipment, and
lighting.
D.
Preconstruction Testing: Tests and inspections performed specifically for Project before
products and materials are incorporated into the Work, to verify performance or compliance with
specified criteria.
E.
Product Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed by an NRTL, an NVLAP, or a testing
agency qualified to conduct product testing and acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, to
establish product performance and compliance with specified requirements.
F.
Source Quality-Control Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed at the source, e.g.,
plant, mill, factory, or shop.
G.
Field Quality-Control Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed on-site for installation of
the Work and for completed Work.
H.
Testing Agency: An entity engaged to perform specific tests, inspections, or both. Testing
laboratory shall mean the same as testing agency.
I.
Installer/Applicator/Erector: Contractor or another entity engaged by Contractor as an
employee, Subcontractor, or Sub-subcontractor, to perform a particular construction operation,
including installation, erection, application, and similar operations.
1.
J.
1.4
Use of trade-specific terminology in referring to a trade or entity does not require that
certain construction activities be performed by accredited or unionized individuals, or that
requirements specified apply exclusively to specific trade(s).
Experienced: When used with an entity or individual, "experienced" means having successfully
completed a minimum of five (5) previous projects similar in nature, size, and extent to this
Project; being familiar with special requirements indicated; and having complied with
requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
CONFLICTING REQUIREMENTS
A.
Referenced Standards: If compliance with two or more standards is specified and the standards
establish different or conflicting requirements for minimum quantities or quality levels, comply
with the most stringent requirement. Refer conflicting requirements that are different, but
apparently equal, to Architect for a decision before proceeding.
QUALITY REQUIREMENTS
014000 - 2
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
B.
1.5
Minimum Quantity or Quality Levels: The quantity or quality level shown or specified shall be the
minimum provided or performed. The actual installation may comply exactly with the minimum
quantity or quality specified, or it may exceed the minimum within reasonable limits. To comply
with these requirements, indicated numeric values are minimum or maximum, as appropriate,
for the context of requirements. Refer uncertainties to Architect for a decision before
proceeding.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Shop Drawings: For laboratory mockups, provide plans, sections, and elevations, indicating
materials and size of mockup construction.
1.
2.
1.6
Indicate manufacturer and model number of individual components.
Provide axonometric drawings for conditions difficult to illustrate in two dimensions.
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A.
Contractor's Quality-Control Plan: For quality-assurance and quality-control activities and
responsibilities.
B.
Qualification Data: For Contractor's quality-control personnel.
C.
Contractor's Statement of Responsibility: When required by authorities having jurisdiction,
submit copy of written statement of responsibility sent to authorities having jurisdiction before
starting work on the following systems:
1.
2.
Seismic-force-resisting system, designated seismic system, or component listed in the
designated seismic system quality-assurance plan prepared by Architect.
Main wind-force-resisting system or a wind-resisting component listed in the wind-forceresisting system quality-assurance plan prepared by Architect.
D.
Testing Agency Qualifications: For testing agencies specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to
demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include proof of qualifications in the form of a
recent report on the inspection of the testing agency by a recognized authority.
E.
Schedule of Tests and Inspections: Prepare in tabular form and include the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Specification Section number and title.
Entity responsible for performing tests and inspections.
Description of test and inspection.
Identification of applicable standards.
Identification of test and inspection methods.
Number of tests and inspections required.
Time schedule or time span for tests and inspections.
Requirements for obtaining samples.
Unique characteristics of each quality-control service.
QUALITY REQUIREMENTS
014000 - 3
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
1.7
CONTRACTOR'S QUALITY-CONTROL PLAN
A.
Quality-Control Plan, General: Submit quality-control plan within 10 days of Notice to Proceed,
and not less than five (5) days prior to preconstruction conference. Submit in format acceptable
to Architect. Identify personnel, procedures, controls, instructions, tests, records, and forms to
be used to carry out Contractor's quality-assurance and quality-control responsibilities.
Coordinate with Contractor's construction schedule.
B.
Quality-Control Personnel Qualifications: Engage qualified full-time personnel trained and
experienced in managing and executing quality-assurance and quality-control procedures
similar in nature and extent to those required for Project.
1.
Project quality-control manager may also serve as Project superintendent.
C.
Submittal Procedure: Describe procedures for ensuring compliance with requirements through
review and management of submittal process. Indicate qualifications of personnel responsible
for submittal review.
D.
Testing and Inspection: In quality-control plan, include a comprehensive schedule of Work
requiring testing or inspection, including the following:
1.
2.
Contractor-performed tests and inspections including subcontractor-performed tests and
inspections. Include required tests and inspections and Contractor-elected tests and
inspections.
Special inspections required by authorities having jurisdiction and indicated on the
"Statement of Special Inspections."
E.
Continuous Inspection of Workmanship: Describe process for continuous inspection during
construction to identify and correct deficiencies in workmanship in addition to testing and
inspection specified. Indicate types of corrective actions to be required to bring work into
compliance with standards of workmanship established by Contract requirements and approved
mockups.
F.
Monitoring and Documentation: Maintain testing and inspection reports including log of
approved and rejected results. Include work Architect has indicated as nonconforming or
defective. Indicate corrective actions taken to bring nonconforming work into compliance with
requirements. Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
1.8
REPORTS AND DOCUMENTS
A.
Test and Inspection Reports: Prepare and submit certified written reports specified in other
Sections. Include the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Date of issue.
Project title and number.
Name, address, and telephone number of testing agency.
Dates and locations of samples and tests or inspections.
Names of individuals making tests and inspections.
QUALITY REQUIREMENTS
014000 - 4
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
B.
Manufacturer's Technical Representative's Field Reports: Prepare written information
documenting manufacturer's technical representative's tests and inspections specified in other
Sections. Include the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
C.
2.
3.
4.
5.
1.9
Name, address, and telephone number of technical representative making report.
Statement on condition of substrates and their acceptability for installation of product.
Statement that products at Project site comply with requirements.
Summary of installation procedures being followed, whether they comply with
requirements and, if not, what corrective action was taken.
Results of operational and other tests and a statement of whether observed performance
complies with requirements.
Statement whether conditions, products, and installation will affect warranty.
Other required items indicated in individual Specification Sections.
Factory-Authorized Service Representative's Reports: Prepare written information documenting
manufacturer's factory-authorized service representative's tests and inspections specified in
other Sections. Include the following:
1.
D.
Description of the Work and test and inspection method.
Identification of product and Specification Section.
Complete test or inspection data.
Test and inspection results and an interpretation of test results.
Record of temperature and weather conditions at time of sample taking and testing and
inspecting.
Comments or professional opinion on whether tested or inspected Work complies with
the Contract Document requirements.
Name and signature of laboratory inspector.
Recommendations on retesting and reinspecting.
Name, address, and telephone number of factory-authorized service representative
making report.
Statement that equipment complies with requirements.
Results of operational and other tests and a statement of whether observed performance
complies with requirements.
Statement whether conditions, products, and installation will affect warranty.
Other required items indicated in individual Specification Sections.
Permits, Licenses, and Certificates: For Owner's records, submit copies of permits, licenses,
certifications, inspection reports, releases, jurisdictional settlements, notices, receipts for fee
payments, judgments, correspondence, records, and similar documents, established for
compliance with standards and regulations bearing on performance of the Work.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
General: Qualifications paragraphs in this article establish the minimum qualification levels
required; individual Specification Sections specify additional requirements.
QUALITY REQUIREMENTS
014000 - 5
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
B.
Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing products or systems similar to
those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well
as sufficient production capacity to produce required units.
C.
Fabricator Qualifications: A firm experienced in producing products similar to those indicated for
this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient
production capacity to produce required units.
D.
Installer Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in installing, erecting, or assembling
work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project, whose work has
resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance.
E.
Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally qualified to practice
in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing engineering services
of the kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as those performed for installations of
the system, assembly, or product that are similar in material, design, and extent to those
indicated for this Project.
F.
Specialists: Certain Specification Sections require that specific construction activities shall be
performed by entities who are recognized experts in those operations. Specialists shall satisfy
qualification requirements indicated and shall be engaged for the activities indicated.
1.
G.
Requirements of authorities having jurisdiction shall supersede requirements for
specialists.
Testing Agency Qualifications: An NRTL, an NVLAP, or an independent agency with the
experience and capability to conduct testing and inspecting indicated, as documented according
to ASTM E 329; and with additional qualifications specified in individual Sections; and, where
required by authorities having jurisdiction, that is acceptable to authorities.
1.
2.
NRTL: A nationally recognized testing laboratory according to 29 CFR 1910.7.
NVLAP: A testing agency accredited according to NIST's National Voluntary Laboratory
Accreditation Program.
H.
Manufacturer's Technical Representative Qualifications: An authorized representative of
manufacturer who is trained and approved by manufacturer to observe and inspect installation
of manufacturer's products that are similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for
this Project.
I.
Factory-Authorized Service Representative Qualifications: An authorized representative of
manufacturer who is trained and approved by manufacturer to inspect installation of
manufacturer's products that are similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for
this Project.
J.
Preconstruction Testing: Where testing agency is indicated to perform preconstruction testing
for compliance with specified requirements for performance and test methods, comply with the
following:
1.
Contractor responsibilities include the following:
QUALITY REQUIREMENTS
014000 - 6
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
2.
Provide test specimens representative of proposed products and construction.
Submit specimens in a timely manner with sufficient time for testing and analyzing
results to prevent delaying the Work.
Provide sizes and configurations of test assemblies, mockups, and laboratory
mockups to adequately demonstrate capability of products to comply with
performance requirements.
Build site-assembled test assemblies and mockups using installers who will
perform same tasks for Project.
Build laboratory mockups at testing facility using personnel, products, and methods
of construction indicated for the completed Work.
Testing Agency Responsibilities: Submit a certified written report of each test, inspection,
and similar quality-assurance service to Architect and Commissioning Authority, with
copy to Contractor. Interpret tests and inspections and state in each report whether
tested and inspected work complies with or deviates from the Contract Documents.
K.
Room Mockups: Construct room mockups incorporating required materials and assemblies,
finished according to requirements. Provide required lighting and additional lighting where
required to enable Architect to evaluate quality of the Work. Provide room mockups of the
following rooms:
L.
Laboratory Mockups: Comply with requirements of preconstruction testing and those specified
in individual Specification Sections.
1.10
A.
QUALITY CONTROL
Owner Responsibilities: Where quality-control services are indicated as Owner's responsibility,
Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform these services.
1.
2.
3.
B.
Owner will furnish Contractor with names, addresses, and telephone numbers of testing
agencies engaged and a description of types of testing and inspecting they are engaged
to perform.
Payment for these services will be made from testing and inspecting allowances, as
authorized by Change Orders.
Costs for retesting and reinspecting construction that replaces or is necessitated by work
that failed to comply with the Contract Documents will be charged to Contractor, and the
Contract Sum will be adjusted by Change Order.
Contractor Responsibilities: Tests and inspections not explicitly assigned to Owner are
Contractor's responsibility. Perform additional quality-control activities required to verify that the
Work complies with requirements, whether specified or not.
1.
2.
Unless otherwise indicated, provide quality-control services specified and those required
by authorities having jurisdiction. Perform quality-control services required of Contractor
by authorities having jurisdiction, whether specified or not.
Where services are indicated as Contractor's responsibility, engage a qualified testing
agency to perform these quality-control services.
QUALITY REQUIREMENTS
014000 - 7
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
a.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Contractor shall not employ same entity engaged by Owner, unless agreed to in
writing by Owner.
Notify testing agencies at least 24 hours in advance of time when Work that requires
testing or inspecting will be performed.
Where quality-control services are indicated as Contractor's responsibility, submit a
certified written report, in duplicate, of each quality-control service.
Testing and inspecting requested by Contractor and not required by the Contract
Documents are Contractor's responsibility.
Submit additional copies of each written report directly to authorities having jurisdiction,
when they so direct.
C.
Manufacturer's Field Services: Where indicated, engage a factory-authorized service
representative to inspect field-assembled components and equipment installation, including
service connections. Report results in writing as specified in Section 013300 "Submittal
Procedures."
D.
Manufacturer's Technical Services: Where indicated, engage a manufacturer's technical
representative to observe and inspect the Work. Manufacturer's technical representative's
services include participation in preinstallation conferences, examination of substrates and
conditions, verification of materials, observation of Installer activities, inspection of completed
portions of the Work, and submittal of written reports.
E.
Retesting/Reinspecting: Regardless of whether original tests or inspections were Contractor's
responsibility, provide quality-control services, including retesting and reinspecting, for
construction that replaced Work that failed to comply with the Contract Documents.
F.
Testing Agency Responsibilities: Cooperate with Architect, Commissioning Authority, and
Contractor in performance of duties. Provide qualified personnel to perform required tests and
inspections.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
G.
Notify Architect, Commissioning Authority, and Contractor promptly of irregularities or
deficiencies observed in the Work during performance of its services.
Determine the location from which test samples will be taken and in which in-situ tests
are conducted.
Conduct and interpret tests and inspections and state in each report whether tested and
inspected work complies with or deviates from requirements.
Submit a certified written report, in duplicate, of each test, inspection, and similar qualitycontrol service through Contractor.
Do not release, revoke, alter, or increase the Contract Document requirements or
approve or accept any portion of the Work.
Do not perform any duties of Contractor.
Associated Services: Cooperate with agencies performing required tests, inspections, and
similar quality-control services, and provide reasonable auxiliary services as requested. Notify
agency sufficiently in advance of operations to permit assignment of personnel. Provide the
following:
1.
Access to the Work.
QUALITY REQUIREMENTS
014000 - 8
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
H.
Coordination: Coordinate sequence of activities to accommodate required quality-assurance
and -control services with a minimum of delay and to avoid necessity of removing and replacing
construction to accommodate testing and inspecting.
1.
I.
A.
Schedule times for tests, inspections, obtaining samples, and similar activities.
Schedule of Tests and Inspections: Prepare a schedule of tests, inspections, and similar qualitycontrol services required by the Contract Documents as a component of Contractor's qualitycontrol plan. Coordinate and submit concurrently with Contractor's construction schedule.
Update as the Work progresses.
1.
1.11
Incidental labor and facilities necessary to facilitate tests and inspections.
Adequate quantities of representative samples of materials that require testing and
inspecting. Assist agency in obtaining samples.
Facilities for storage and field curing of test samples.
Delivery of samples to testing agencies.
Preliminary design mix proposed for use for material mixes that require control by testing
agency.
Security and protection for samples and for testing and inspecting equipment at Project
site.
Distribution: Distribute schedule to Owner, Architect, Commissioning Authority, testing
agencies, and each party involved in performance of portions of the Work where tests
and inspections are required.
SPECIAL TESTS AND INSPECTIONS
Special Tests and Inspections: Engage a qualified testing agency to conduct special tests and
inspections required by authorities having jurisdiction as the responsibility of Owner, and as
follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Verifying that manufacturer maintains detailed fabrication and quality-control procedures
and reviews the completeness and adequacy of those procedures to perform the Work.
Notifying Architect and Contractor promptly of irregularities and deficiencies observed in
the Work during performance of its services.
Submitting a certified written report of each test, inspection, and similar quality-control
service to Architect with copy to Contractor and to authorities having jurisdiction.
Submitting a final report of special tests and inspections at Substantial Completion, which
includes a list of unresolved deficiencies.
Interpreting tests and inspections and stating in each report whether tested and inspected
work complies with or deviates from the Contract Documents.
Retesting and reinspecting corrected work.
QUALITY REQUIREMENTS
014000 - 9
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
TEST AND INSPECTION LOG
A.
Test and Inspection Log: Prepare a record of tests and inspections. Include the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
3.2
Date test or inspection was conducted.
Description of the Work tested or inspected.
Date test or inspection results were transmitted to Architect.
Identification of testing agency or special inspector conducting test or inspection.
Maintain log at Project site. Post changes and revisions as they occur. Provide access to test
and inspection log for Architect's, Commissioning Authority's, reference during normal working
hours.
REPAIR AND PROTECTION
A.
General: On completion of testing, inspecting, sample taking, and similar services, repair
damaged construction and restore substrates and finishes.
1.
Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other
Specification Sections or matching existing substrates and finishes. Restore patched
areas and extend restoration into adjoining areas with durable seams that are as invisible
as possible. Comply with the Contract Document requirements for cutting and patching in
Section 017300 "Execution."
B.
Protect construction exposed by or for quality-control service activities.
C.
Repair and protection are Contractor's responsibility, regardless of the assignment of
responsibility for quality-control services.
END OF SECTION 014000
QUALITY REQUIREMENTS
014000 - 10
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
SECTION 014200 - REFERENCES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
DEFINITIONS
A.
General: Basic Contract definitions are included in the Conditions of the Contract.
B.
"Approved": When used to convey Architect's action on Contractor's submittals, applications,
and requests, "approved" is limited to Architect's duties and responsibilities as stated in the
Conditions of the Contract.
C.
"Directed": A command or instruction by Architect. Other terms including "requested,"
"authorized," "selected," "required," and "permitted" have the same meaning as "directed."
D.
"Indicated": Requirements expressed by graphic representations or in written form on Drawings,
in Specifications, and in other Contract Documents. Other terms including "shown," "noted,"
"scheduled," and "specified" have the same meaning as "indicated."
E.
"Regulations": Laws, ordinances, statutes, and lawful orders issued by authorities having
jurisdiction, and rules, conventions, and agreements within the construction industry that control
performance of the Work.
F.
"Furnish": Supply and deliver to Project site, ready for unloading, unpacking, assembly,
installation, and similar operations.
G.
"Install": Unload, temporarily store, unpack, assemble, erect, place, anchor, apply, work to
dimension, finish, cure, protect, clean, and similar operations at Project site.
H.
"Provide": Furnish and install, complete and ready for the intended use.
I.
"Project Site": Space available for performing construction activities. The extent of Project site is
shown on Drawings and may or may not be identical with the description of the land on which
Project is to be built.
1.3
INDUSTRY STANDARDS
A.
Applicability of Standards: Unless the Contract Documents include more stringent requirements,
applicable construction industry standards have the same force and effect as if bound or copied
REFERENCES
014200 - 1
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
directly into the Contract Documents to the extent referenced. Such standards are made a part
of the Contract Documents by reference.
B.
Publication Dates: Comply with standards in effect as of date of the Contract Documents unless
otherwise indicated.
C.
Copies of Standards: Each entity engaged in construction on Project should be familiar with
industry standards applicable to its construction activity. Copies of applicable standards are not
bound with the Contract Documents.
1.
1.4
Where copies of standards are needed to perform a required construction activity, obtain
copies directly from publication source.
ABBREVIATIONS AND ACRONYMS
A.
Industry Organizations: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other
Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities indicated in Gale's
"Encyclopedia of Associations: National Organizations of the U.S." or in Columbia Books'
"National Trade & Professional Associations of the United States."
B.
Industry Organizations: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other
Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list.
This information is subject to change and is believed to be accurate as of the date of the
Contract Documents.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
22.
REFERENCES
AABC - Associated Air Balance Council; www.aabc.com.
AAMA - American Architectural Manufacturers Association; www.aamanet.org.
AASHTO - American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials;
www.transportation.org.
ACI - American Concrete Institute; (Formerly: ACI International); www.concrete.org.
ACPA - American Concrete Pipe Association; www.concrete-pipe.org.
AEIC - Association of Edison Illuminating Companies, Inc. (The); www.aeic.org.
AGA - American Gas Association; www.aga.org.
AHAM - Association of Home Appliance Manufacturers; www.aham.org.
AHRI - Air-Conditioning, Heating, and Refrigeration Institute (The); www.ahrinet.org.
AI - Asphalt Institute; www.asphaltinstitute.org.
AIA - American Institute of Architects (The); www.aia.org.
AISC - American Institute of Steel Construction; www.aisc.org.
AISI - American Iron and Steel Institute; www.steel.org.
AMCA - Air Movement and Control Association International, Inc.; www.amca.org.
ANSI - American National Standards Institute; www.ansi.org.
AOSA - Association of Official Seed Analysts, Inc.; www.aosaseed.com.
APA - Architectural Precast Association; www.archprecast.org.
API - American Petroleum Institute; www.api.org.
ARI - Air-Conditioning & Refrigeration Institute; (See AHRI).
ARI - American Refrigeration Institute; (See AHRI).
ARMA - Asphalt Roofing Manufacturers Association; www.asphaltroofing.org.
ASCE - American Society of Civil Engineers; www.asce.org.
014200 - 2
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
23.
24.
25.
26.
27.
28.
29.
30.
31.
32.
33.
34.
35.
36.
37.
38.
39.
40.
41.
42.
43.
44.
45.
46.
47.
48.
49.
50.
51.
52.
53.
54.
55.
56.
57.
58.
59.
60.
61.
62.
63.
64.
65.
REFERENCES
ASCE/SEI - American Society of Civil Engineers/Structural Engineering Institute; (See
ASCE).
ASHRAE - American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers;
www.ashrae.org.
ASME - ASME International; (American Society of Mechanical Engineers);
www.asme.org.
ASSE - American Society of Safety Engineers (The); www.asse.org.
ASSE - American Society of Sanitary Engineering; www.asse-plumbing.org.
ASTM - ASTM International; (American Society for Testing and Materials International);
www.astm.org.
ATIS - Alliance for Telecommunications Industry Solutions; www.atis.org.
AWI - Architectural Woodwork Institute; www.awinet.org.
AWPA - American Wood Protection Association; (Formerly: American Wood-Preservers'
Association); www.awpa.com.
AWS - American Welding Society; www.aws.org.
AWWA - American Water Works Association; www.awwa.org.
BHMA - Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association; www.buildershardware.com.
BIA - Brick Industry Association (The); www.gobrick.com.
CDA - Copper Development Association; www.copper.org.
CEA - Consumer Electronics Association; www.ce.org.
CFFA - Chemical Fabrics & Film Association, Inc.; www.chemicalfabricsandfilm.com.
CFSEI - Cold-Formed Steel Engineers Institute; www.cfsei.org.
CGA - Compressed Gas Association; www.cganet.com.
CIMA - Cellulose Insulation Manufacturers Association; www.cellulose.org.
CISCA - Ceilings & Interior Systems Construction Association; www.cisca.org.
CISPI - Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute; www.cispi.org.
CLFMI - Chain Link Fence Manufacturers Institute; www.chainlinkinfo.org.
CRI - Carpet and Rug Institute (The); www.carpet-rug.org.
CRRC - Cool Roof Rating Council; www.coolroofs.org.
CRSI - Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute; www.crsi.org.
CSA - CSA International; (Formerly: IAS - International Approval Services); www.csainternational.org.
CSI - Construction Specifications Institute (The); www.csinet.org.
CTI - Cooling Technology Institute; (Formerly: Cooling Tower Institute); www.cti.org.
DASMA - Door and Access Systems Manufacturers Association; www.dasma.com.
DHI - Door and Hardware Institute; www.dhi.org.
ECA - Electronic Components Association; www.ec-central.org.
ECAMA - Electronic Components Assemblies & Materials Association; (See ECA).
EIA - Electronic Industries Alliance; (See TIA).
EIMA - EIFS Industry Members Association; www.eima.com.
EJMA - Expansion Joint Manufacturers Association, Inc.; www.ejma.org.
ESD - ESD Association; (Electrostatic Discharge Association); www.esda.org.
ESTA - Entertainment Services and Technology Association; (See PLASA).
EVO - Efficiency Valuation Organization; www.evo-world.org.
FM Approvals - FM Approvals LLC; www.fmglobal.com.
FM Global - FM Global; (Formerly: FMG - FM Global); www.fmglobal.com.
FRSA - Florida Roofing, Sheet Metal & Air Conditioning Contractors Association, Inc.;
www.floridaroof.com.
FSA - Fluid Sealing Association; www.fluidsealing.com.
FSC - Forest Stewardship Council U.S.; www.fscus.org.
014200 - 3
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
66.
67.
68.
69.
70.
71.
72.
73.
74.
75.
76.
77.
78.
79.
80.
81.
82.
83.
84.
85.
86.
87.
88.
89.
90.
91.
92.
93.
94.
95.
96.
97.
98.
99.
100.
101.
102.
103.
104.
105.
106.
107.
108.
109.
REFERENCES
GA - Gypsum Association; www.gypsum.org.
GANA - Glass Association of North America; www.glasswebsite.com.
GS - Green Seal; www.greenseal.org.
HI - Hydraulic Institute; www.pumps.org.
HI/GAMA - Hydronics Institute/Gas Appliance Manufacturers Association; (See AHRI).
HMMA - Hollow Metal Manufacturers Association; (See NAAMM).
HPVA - Hardwood Plywood & Veneer Association; www.hpva.org.
IAPSC - International Association of Professional Security Consultants; www.iapsc.org.
IAS - International Approval Services; (See CSA).
ICBO - International Conference of Building Officials; (See ICC).
ICC - International Code Council; www.iccsafe.org.
ICEA - Insulated Cable Engineers Association, Inc.; www.icea.net.
ICRI - International Concrete Repair Institute, Inc.; www.icri.org.
IEC - International Electrotechnical Commission; www.iec.ch.
IEEE - Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc. (The); www.ieee.org.
IES - Illuminating Engineering Society; (Formerly: Illuminating Engineering Society of
North America); www.ies.org.
IESNA - Illuminating Engineering Society of North America; (See IES).
IEST - Institute of Environmental Sciences and Technology; www.iest.org.
Intertek - Intertek Group; (Formerly: ETL SEMCO; Intertek Testing Service NA);
www.intertek.com.
ISA - International Society of Automation (The); (Formerly: Instrumentation, Systems, and
Automation Society); www.isa.org.
ISAS - Instrumentation, Systems, and Automation Society (The); (See ISA).
ISFA - International Surface Fabricators Association; (Formerly: International Solid
Surface Fabricators Association); www.isfanow.org.
ISO - International Organization for Standardization; www.iso.org.
ISSFA - International Solid Surface Fabricators Association; (See ISFA).
ITU - International Telecommunication Union; www.itu.int/home.
LMA - Laminating Materials Association; (See CPA).
LPI - Lightning Protection Institute; www.lightning.org.
MBMA - Metal Building Manufacturers Association; www.mbma.com.
MCA - Metal Construction Association; www.metalconstruction.org.
MFMA - Metal Framing Manufacturers Association, Inc.; www.metalframingmfg.org.
MHIA - Material Handling Industry of America; www.mhia.org.
MPI - Master Painters Institute; www.paintinfo.com.
MSS - Manufacturers Standardization Society of The Valve and Fittings Industry Inc.;
www.mss-hq.org.
NAAMM - National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers; www.naamm.org.
NACE - NACE International; (National Association of Corrosion Engineers International);
www.nace.org.
NADCA - National Air Duct Cleaners Association; www.nadca.com.
NAIMA - North American Insulation Manufacturers Association; www.naima.org.
NCMA - National Concrete Masonry Association; www.ncma.org.
NEBB - National Environmental Balancing Bureau; www.nebb.org.
NECA - National Electrical Contractors Association; www.necanet.org.
NEMA - National Electrical Manufacturers Association; www.nema.org.
NETA - InterNational Electrical Testing Association; www.netaworld.org.
NFPA - NFPA; (National Fire Protection Association); www.nfpa.org.
NFPA - NFPA International; (See NFPA).
014200 - 4
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
110.
111.
112.
113.
114.
115.
116.
117.
118.
119.
120.
121.
122.
123.
124.
125.
126.
127.
128.
129.
130.
131.
132.
133.
134.
135.
136.
137.
138.
139.
140.
141.
142.
143.
144.
145.
146.
147.
148.
149.
150.
151.
152.
REFERENCES
NFRC - National Fenestration Rating Council; www.nfrc.org.
NHLA - National Hardwood Lumber Association; www.nhla.com.
NLGA - National Lumber Grades Authority; www.nlga.org.
NOMMA - National Ornamental & Miscellaneous Metals Association; www.nomma.org.
NRCA - National Roofing Contractors Association; www.nrca.net.
NRMCA - National Ready Mixed Concrete Association; www.nrmca.org.
NSF - NSF International; (National Sanitation Foundation International); www.nsf.org.
NSPE - National Society of Professional Engineers; www.nspe.org.
NSSGA - National Stone, Sand & Gravel Association; www.nssga.org.
NTMA - National Terrazzo & Mosaic Association, Inc. (The); www.ntma.com.
PCI - Precast/Prestressed Concrete Institute; www.pci.org.
PDI - Plumbing & Drainage Institute; www.pdionline.org.
RCSC - Research Council on Structural Connections; www.boltcouncil.org.
RFCI - Resilient Floor Covering Institute; www.rfci.com.
SAE - SAE International; (Society of Automotive Engineers); www.sae.org.
SCTE - Society of Cable Telecommunications Engineers; www.scte.org.
SDI - Steel Door Institute; www.steeldoor.org.
SEFA - Scientific Equipment and Furniture Association; www.sefalabs.com.
SEI/ASCE - Structural Engineering Institute/American Society of Civil Engineers; (See
ASCE).
SIA - Security Industry Association; www.siaonline.org.
SMA - Screen Manufacturers Association; www.smainfo.org.
SMACNA - Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association;
www.smacna.org.
SPIB - Southern Pine Inspection Bureau; www.spib.org.
SPRI - Single Ply Roofing Industry; www.spri.org.
SRCC - Solar Rating and Certification Corporation; www.solar-rating.org.
SSINA - Specialty Steel Industry of North America; www.ssina.com.
SSPC - SSPC: The Society for Protective Coatings; www.sspc.org.
STI - Steel Tank Institute; www.steeltank.com.
SWPA - Submersible Wastewater Pump Association; www.swpa.org.
TCNA - Tile Council of North America, Inc.; (Formerly: Tile Council of America);
www.tileusa.com.
TEMA - Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Association, Inc.; www.tema.org.
TIA
Telecommunications
Industry
Association;
(Formerly:
TIA/EIA
Telecommunications
Industry
Association/Electronic
Industries
Alliance);
www.tiaonline.org.
TIA/EIA - Telecommunications Industry Association/Electronic Industries Alliance; (See
TIA).
TMS - The Masonry Society; www.masonrysociety.org.
UL - Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; www.ul.com.
UNI - Uni-Bell PVC Pipe Association; www.uni-bell.org.
USGBC - U.S. Green Building Council; www.usgbc.org.
WASTEC - Waste Equipment Technology Association; www.wastec.org.
WCLIB - West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau; www.wclib.org.
WCMA - Window Covering Manufacturers Association; www.wcmanet.org.
WDMA - Window & Door Manufacturers Association; www.wdma.com.
WMMPA - Wood Moulding & Millwork Producers Association; (See MMPA).
WPA - Western Wood Products Association; www.wwpa.org.
014200 - 5
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
C.
Code Agencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other
Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list.
This information is believed to be accurate as of the date of the Contract Documents.
1.
2.
3.
D.
Federal Government Agencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications
or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the
following list. Information is subject to change and is up-to-date as of the date of the Contract
Documents.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
E.
IAPMO - International Association of Plumbing and Mechanical Officials; www.iapmo.org.
ICC - International Code Council; www.iccsafe.org.
ICC-ES - ICC Evaluation Service, LLC; www.icc-es.org.
COE - Army Corps of Engineers; www.usace.army.mil.
CPSC - Consumer Product Safety Commission; www.cpsc.gov.
DOC - Department of Commerce; National Institute of Standards and Technology;
www.nist.gov.
DOD - Department of Defense; http://dodssp.daps.dla.mil.
DOE - Department of Energy; www.energy.gov.
EPA - Environmental Protection Agency; www.epa.gov.
FAA - Federal Aviation Administration; www.faa.gov.
FG - Federal Government Publications; www.gpo.gov.
GSA - General Services Administration; www.gsa.gov.
HUD - Department of Housing and Urban Development; www.hud.gov.
LBL - Lawrence Berkeley National Laboratory; Environmental Energy Technologies
Division; http://eetd.lbl.gov.
OSHA - Occupational Safety & Health Administration; www.osha.gov.
SD - Department of State; www.state.gov.
TRB - Transportation Research Board; National Cooperative Highway Research
Program; www.trb.org.
USDA - Department of Agriculture; Agriculture Research Service; U.S. Salinity
Laboratory; www.ars.usda.gov.
USDA - Department of Agriculture; Rural Utilities Service; www.usda.gov.
USDJ - Department of Justice; Office of Justice Programs; National Institute of Justice;
www.ojp.usdoj.gov.
USP - U.S. Pharmacopeia; www.usp.org.
USPS - United States Postal Service; www.usps.com.
Standards and Regulations: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or
other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the standards and
regulations in the following list. This information is subject to change and is believed to be
accurate as of the date of the Contract Documents.
1.
2.
3.
4.
REFERENCES
CFR - Code of Federal Regulations; Available from Government Printing Office;
www.gpo.gov/fdsys.
DOD - Department of Defense; Military Specifications and Standards; Available from
Department of Defense Single Stock Point; http://dodssp.daps.dla.mil.
DSCC - Defense Supply Center Columbus; (See FS).
FED-STD - Federal Standard; (See FS).
014200 - 6
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
5.
FS - Federal Specification; Available from Department of Defense Single Stock Point;
http://dodssp.daps.dla.mil.
a.
b.
c.
6.
7.
8.
F.
Available from Defense Standardization Program; www.dsp.dla.mil.
Available from General Services Administration; www.gsa.gov.
Available from National Institute of Building Sciences/Whole Building Design
Guide; www.wbdg.org/ccb.
MILSPEC - Military Specification and Standards; (See DOD).
USAB - United States Access Board; www.access-board.gov.
USATBCB - U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board; (See
USAB).
State Government Agencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or
other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following
list. This information is subject to change and is believed to be accurate as of the date of the
Contract Documents.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
CBHF - State of California; Department of Consumer Affairs; Bureau of Electronic
Appliance and Repair, Home Furnishings and Thermal Insulation; www.bearhfti.ca.gov.
CCR - California Code of Regulations; Office of Administrative Law; California Title 24
Energy Code; www.calregs.com.
CDHS - California Department of Health Services; (See CDPH).
CDPH - California Department of Public Health; Indoor Air Quality Program; www.caliaq.org.
CPUC - California Public Utilities Commission; www.cpuc.ca.gov.
SCAQMD - South Coast Air Quality Management District; www.aqmd.gov.
TFS - Texas Forest Service; Forest Resource Development and Sustainable Forestry;
http://txforestservice.tamu.edu.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)
END OF SECTION 014200
REFERENCES
014200 - 7
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
SECTION 015000 - TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
Section includes requirements for temporary utilities, support facilities, and security and
protection facilities.
B.
Related Requirements:
1.
2.
3.
1.3
Section 011000 "Summary" for work restrictions and limitations on utility interruptions.
Section 321216 "Asphalt Paving" for construction and maintenance of asphalt pavement
for temporary roads and paved areas.
Section 321313 "Concrete Paving" for construction and maintenance of cement concrete
pavement for temporary roads and paved areas.
USE CHARGES
A.
General: Installation and removal of and use charges for temporary facilities shall be included in
the Contract Sum unless otherwise indicated. Allow other entities to use temporary services and
facilities without cost, including, but not limited to, Owner's construction forces, Architect, testing
agencies, and authorities having jurisdiction.
B.
Sewer Service: Owner will pay sewer-service use charges for sewer usage by all entities for
construction operations.
C.
Water Service: Owner will pay water-service use charges for water used by all entities for
construction operations.
D.
Electric Power Service: Owner will pay electric-power-service use charges for electricity used
by all entities for construction operations.
E.
Water and Sewer Service from Existing System: Water from Owner's existing water system is
available for use without metering and without payment of use charges. Provide connections
and extensions of services as required for construction operations.
F.
Electric Power Service from Existing System: Electric power from Owner's existing system is
available for use without metering and without payment of use charges. Provide connections
and extensions of services as required for construction operations.
TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
015000 - 1
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
1.4
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A.
Site Plan: Show temporary facilities, utility hookups, staging areas, and parking areas for
construction personnel.
B.
Erosion- and Sedimentation-Control Plan: Show compliance with requirements of EPA
Construction General Permit or authorities having jurisdiction, whichever is more stringent.
C.
Fire-Safety Program: Show compliance with requirements of NFPA 241 and authorities having
jurisdiction. Indicate Contractor personnel responsible for management of fire-prevention
program.
D.
Moisture-Protection Plan: Describe procedures and controls for protecting materials and
construction from water absorption and damage.
1.
2.
3.
E.
Dust- and HVAC-Control Plan: Submit coordination drawing and narrative that indicates the
dust- and HVAC-control measures proposed for use, proposed locations, and proposed time
frame for their operation. Identify further options if proposed measures are later determined to
be inadequate. Include the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
1.5
Describe delivery, handling, and storage provisions for materials subject to water
absorption or water damage.
Indicate procedures for discarding water-damaged materials, protocols for mitigating
water intrusion into completed Work, and replacing water-damaged Work.
Indicate sequencing of work that requires water, such as plastering and terrazzo grinding,
and describe plans for dealing with water from these operations. Show procedures for
verifying that wet construction has dried sufficiently to permit installation of finish
materials.
Locations of dust-control partitions at each phase of work.
HVAC system isolation schematic drawing.
Location of proposed air-filtration system discharge.
Waste handling procedures.
Other dust-control measures.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Electric Service: Comply with NECA, NEMA, and UL standards and regulations for temporary
electric service. Install service to comply with NFPA 70.
B.
Tests and Inspections: Arrange for authorities having jurisdiction to test and inspect each
temporary utility before use. Obtain required certifications and permits.
1.6
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Temporary Use of Permanent Facilities: Engage Installer of each permanent service to assume
responsibility for operation, maintenance, and protection of each permanent service during its
TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
015000 - 2
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
use as a construction facility before Owner's acceptance, regardless of previously assigned
responsibilities.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
A.
Chain-Link Fencing: Minimum 2-inch (50-mm), 0.148-inch- (3.8-mm-) thick, galvanized-steel,
chain-link fabric fencing; minimum 6 feet (1.8 m) high with galvanized-steel pipe posts; minimum
2-3/8-inch- (60-mm-) OD line posts and 2-7/8-inch- (73-mm-) OD corner and pull posts, with 15/8-inch- (42-mm-) OD top rails, with galvanized barbed-wire top strand.
B.
Polyethylene Sheet: Reinforced, fire-resistive sheet, 10-mil (0.25-mm) minimum thickness, with
flame-spread rating of 15 or less per ASTM E 84 and passing NFPA 701 Test Method 2.
2.2
TEMPORARY FACILITIES
A.
Field Offices, General: Prefabricated or mobile units with serviceable finishes, temperature
controls, and foundations adequate for normal loading.
B.
Common-Use Field Office: Of sufficient size to accommodate needs of Owner, Architect, and
construction personnel office activities and to accommodate Project meetings specified in other
Division 01 Sections. Keep office clean and orderly. Furnish and equip offices as follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
C.
Storage and Fabrication Sheds: Provide sheds sized, furnished, and equipped to accommodate
materials and equipment for construction operations.
1.
2.3
Furniture required for Project-site documents including file cabinets, plan tables, plan
racks, and bookcases.
Conference room of sufficient size to accommodate meetings of 10 individuals. Provide
electrical power service and 120-V ac duplex receptacles, with no fewer than one
receptacle on each wall. Furnish room with conference table, chairs, and 4-foot- (1.2-m-)
square tack and marker boards.
Drinking water and private toilet.
Lighting fixtures capable of maintaining average illumination of 20 fc (215 lx) at desk
height.
Store combustible materials apart from building.
EQUIPMENT
A.
Fire Extinguishers: Portable, UL rated; with class and extinguishing agent as required by
locations and classes of fire exposures.
TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
015000 - 3
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
B.
HVAC Equipment: Unless Owner authorizes use of permanent HVAC system, provide vented,
self-contained, liquid-propane-gas or fuel-oil heaters with individual space thermostatic control.
1.
2.
C.
Use of gasoline-burning space heaters, open-flame heaters, or salamander-type heating
units is prohibited.
Heating Units: Listed and labeled for type of fuel being consumed, by a qualified testing
agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended location
and application.
Air-Filtration Units: Primary and secondary HEPA-filter-equipped portable units with four-stage
filtration. Provide single switch for emergency shutoff. Configure to run continuously.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A.
Locate facilities where they will serve Project adequately and result in minimum interference
with performance of the Work. Relocate and modify facilities as required by progress of the
Work.
B.
Provide each facility ready for use when needed to avoid delay. Do not remove until facilities
are no longer needed or are replaced by authorized use of completed permanent facilities.
3.2
TEMPORARY UTILITY INSTALLATION
A.
General: Connect to existing service.
1.
B.
Arrange with utility company, Owner, and existing users for time when service can be
interrupted, if necessary, to make connections for temporary services.
Sewers and Drainage: Provide temporary utilities to remove effluent lawfully.
1.
Connect temporary sewers to municipal system as directed by authorities having
jurisdiction.
C.
Water Service: Install water service and distribution piping in sizes and pressures adequate for
construction.
D.
Sanitary Facilities: Provide temporary toilets, wash facilities, and drinking water for use of
construction personnel. Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction for type,
number, location, operation, and maintenance of fixtures and facilities.
E.
Heating and Cooling: Provide temporary heating and cooling required by construction activities
for curing or drying of completed installations or for protecting installed construction from
adverse effects of low temperatures or high humidity. Select equipment that will not have a
harmful effect on completed installations or elements being installed.
TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
015000 - 4
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
F.
Isolation of Work Areas in Occupied Facilities: Prevent dust, fumes, and odors from entering
occupied areas.
1.
Prior to commencing work, isolate the HVAC system in area where work is to be
performed according to coordination drawings.
a.
b.
Disconnect supply and return ductwork in work area from HVAC systems servicing
occupied areas.
Maintain negative air pressure within work area using HEPA-equipped air-filtration
units, starting with commencement of temporary partition construction, and
continuing until removal of temporary partitions is complete.
G.
Ventilation and Humidity Control: Provide temporary ventilation required by construction
activities for curing or drying of completed installations or for protecting installed construction
from adverse effects of high humidity. Select equipment that will not have a harmful effect on
completed installations or elements being installed. Coordinate ventilation requirements to
produce ambient condition required and minimize energy consumption.
H.
Electric Power Service: Connect to Owner's existing electric power service for temporary power.
Maintain equipment in a condition acceptable to Owner.
I.
Electric Power Service: Provide electric power service and distribution system of sufficient size,
capacity, and power characteristics required for construction operations.
1.
2.
J.
Lighting: Provide temporary lighting with local switching that provides adequate illumination for
construction operations, observations, inspections, and traffic conditions.
1.
K.
Install electric power service as indicated.
Connect temporary service to Owner's existing power source, as directed by Owner.
Install and operate temporary lighting that fulfills security and protection requirements
without operating entire system.
Telephone Service: Provide temporary telephone service in common-use facilities for use by all
construction personnel. Install one telephone line(s) for each field office.
1.
At each telephone, post a list of important telephone numbers.
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
2.
Police and fire departments.
Ambulance service.
Contractor's home office.
Contractor's emergency after-hours telephone number.
Architect's office.
Engineers' offices.
Owner's office.
Principal subcontractors' field and home offices.
Provide superintendent with cellular telephone or portable two-way radio for use when
away from field office.
TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
015000 - 5
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
3.3
SUPPORT FACILITIES INSTALLATION
A.
General: Comply with the following:
1.
2.
B.
Temporary Roads and Paved Areas: Construct and maintain temporary roads and paved areas
adequate for construction operations. Locate temporary roads and paved areas within
construction limits indicated on Drawings.
1.
C.
Provide dust-control treatment that is nonpolluting and nontracking. Reapply treatment as
required to minimize dust.
Temporary Use of Permanent Roads and Paved Areas: Locate temporary roads and paved
areas in same location as permanent roads and paved areas. Construct and maintain
temporary roads and paved areas adequate for construction operations. Extend temporary
roads and paved areas, within construction limits indicated, as necessary for construction
operations.
1.
2.
3.
4.
D.
Provide construction for temporary offices, shops, and sheds located within construction
area or within 30 feet (9 m) of building lines that is noncombustible according to
ASTM E 136. Comply with NFPA 241.
Maintain support facilities until Architect schedules Substantial Completion inspection.
Remove before Substantial Completion. Personnel remaining after Substantial
Completion will be permitted to use permanent facilities, under conditions acceptable to
Owner.
Coordinate elevations of temporary roads and paved areas with permanent roads and
paved areas.
Prepare subgrade and install subbase and base for temporary roads and paved areas
according to Section 312000 "Earth Moving."
Recondition base after temporary use, including removing contaminated material,
regrading, proofrolling, compacting, and testing.
Delay installation of final course of permanent hot-mix asphalt pavement until
immediately before Substantial Completion. Repair hot-mix asphalt base-course
pavement before installation of final course according to Section 321216 "Asphalt
Paving."
Traffic Controls: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
1.
Maintain access for fire-fighting equipment and access to fire hydrants.
E.
Parking: Provide temporary parking areas for construction personnel.
F.
Dewatering Facilities and Drains: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
Maintain Project site, excavations, and construction free of water.
1.
2.
Dispose of rainwater in a lawful manner that will not result in flooding Project or adjoining
properties or endanger permanent Work or temporary facilities.
Remove snow and ice as required to minimize accumulations.
TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
015000 - 6
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
G.
Project Signs: Provide Project signs as indicated. Unauthorized signs are not permitted.
1.
2.
Identification Signs: Provide Project identification signs as indicated on Drawings.
Temporary Signs: Provide other signs as indicated and as required to inform public and
individuals seeking entrance to Project.
a.
3.
Provide temporary, directional signs for construction personnel and visitors.
Maintain and touchup signs so they are legible at all times.
H.
Waste Disposal Facilities: Comply with requirements specified in Section 017419 "Construction
Waste Management and Disposal."
I.
Lifts and Hoists: Provide facilities necessary for hoisting materials and personnel.
1.
Truck cranes and similar devices used for hoisting materials are considered "tools and
equipment" and not temporary facilities.
J.
Temporary Elevator Use: Use of elevators is not permitted.
K.
Temporary Use of Permanent Stairs: Use of new stairs for construction traffic will be permitted,
provided stairs are protected and finishes restored to new condition at time of Substantial
Completion. Provide temporary protection to prevent damage to surface color and condition.
3.4
SECURITY AND PROTECTION FACILITIES INSTALLATION
A.
Protection of Existing Facilities: Protect existing vegetation, equipment, structures, utilities, and
other improvements at Project site and on adjacent properties, except those indicated to be
removed or altered. Repair damage to existing facilities.
B.
Environmental Protection: Provide protection, operate temporary facilities, and conduct
construction as required to comply with environmental regulations and that minimize possible
air, waterway, and subsoil contamination or pollution or other undesirable effects.
1.
Comply with work restrictions specified in Section 011000 "Summary."
C.
Temporary Erosion and Sedimentation Control: Comply with requirements specified in
Section 311000 "Site Clearing."
D.
Temporary Erosion and Sedimentation Control: Provide measures to prevent soil erosion and
discharge of soil-bearing water runoff and airborne dust to undisturbed areas and to adjacent
properties and walkways, according to erosion- and sedimentation-control Drawings and
authorities having jurisdiction, whichever is more stringent.
1.
2.
Verify that flows of water redirected from construction areas or generated by construction
activity do not enter or cross tree- or plant- protection zones.
Inspect, repair, and maintain erosion- and sedimentation-control measures during
construction until permanent vegetation has been established.
TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
015000 - 7
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
3.
4.
Clean, repair, and restore adjoining properties and roads affected by erosion and
sedimentation from Project site during the course of Project.
Remove erosion and sedimentation controls and restore and stabilize areas disturbed
during removal.
E.
Stormwater Control: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. Provide
barriers in and around excavations and subgrade construction to prevent flooding by runoff of
stormwater from heavy rains.
F.
Tree and Plant Protection: Install temporary fencing located as indicated or outside the drip line
of trees to protect vegetation from damage from construction operations. Protect tree root
systems from damage, flooding, and erosion.
G.
Pest Control: Engage pest-control service to recommend practices to minimize attraction and
harboring of rodents, roaches, and other pests and to perform extermination and control
procedures at regular intervals so Project will be free of pests and their residues at Substantial
Completion. Perform control operations lawfully, using environmentally safe materials.
H.
Site Enclosure Fence: Prior to commencing earthwork, furnish and install site enclosure fence,
or modify existing fence, in a manner that will prevent people and animals from easily entering
site except by entrance gates.
1.
2.
Extent of Fence: As required to enclose entire Project site or portion determined
sufficient to accommodate construction operations.
Maintain security by limiting number of keys and restricting distribution to authorized
personnel.
I.
Barricades, Warning Signs, and Lights: Comply with requirements of authorities having
jurisdiction for erecting structurally adequate barricades, including warning signs and lighting.
J.
Temporary Enclosures: Provide temporary enclosures for protection of construction, in progress
and completed, from exposure, foul weather, other construction operations, and similar
activities. Provide temporary weathertight enclosure for building exterior.
1.
3.5
Where heating or cooling is needed and permanent enclosure is incomplete, insulate
temporary enclosures.
MOISTURE AND MOLD CONTROL
A.
Contractor's Moisture-Protection Plan: Avoid trapping water in finished work. Document visible
signs of mold that may appear during construction.
B.
Exposed Construction Phase: Before installation of weather barriers, when materials are subject
to wetting and exposure and to airborne mold spores, protect as follows:
1.
2.
3.
Protect porous materials from water damage.
Protect stored and installed material from flowing or standing water.
Keep porous and organic materials from coming into prolonged contact with concrete.
TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
015000 - 8
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
4.
5.
C.
Partially Enclosed Construction Phase: After installation of weather barriers but before full
enclosure and conditioning of building, when installed materials are still subject to infiltration of
moisture and ambient mold spores, protect as follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
D.
Remove standing water from decks.
Keep deck openings covered or dammed.
Do not load or install drywall or other porous materials or components, or items with high
organic content, into partially enclosed building.
Keep interior spaces reasonably clean and protected from water damage.
Periodically collect and remove waste containing cellulose or other organic matter.
Discard or replace water-damaged material.
Do not install material that is wet.
Discard, replace, or clean stored or installed material that begins to grow mold.
Perform work in a sequence that allows any wet materials adequate time to dry before
enclosing the material in drywall or other interior finishes.
Controlled Construction Phase of Construction: After completing and sealing of the building
enclosure but prior to the full operation of permanent HVAC systems, maintain as follows:
1.
2.
3.
Control moisture and humidity inside building by maintaining effective dry-in conditions.
Use permanent HVAC system to control humidity.
Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for temperature, relative humidity, and
exposure to water limits.
a.
3.6
Hygroscopic materials that may support mold growth, including wood and gypsumbased products, that become wet during the course of construction and remain wet
for 48 hours are considered defective.
OPERATION, TERMINATION, AND REMOVAL
A.
Supervision: Enforce strict discipline in use of temporary facilities. To minimize waste and
abuse, limit availability of temporary facilities to essential and intended uses.
B.
Maintenance: Maintain facilities in good operating condition until removal.
1.
Maintain operation of temporary enclosures, heating, cooling, humidity control,
ventilation, and similar facilities on a 24-hour basis where required to achieve indicated
results and to avoid possibility of damage.
C.
Operate Project-identification-sign lighting daily from dusk until 12:00 midnight.
D.
Temporary Facility Changeover: Do not change over from using temporary security and
protection facilities to permanent facilities until Substantial Completion.
E.
Termination and Removal: Remove each temporary facility when need for its service has
ended, when it has been replaced by authorized use of a permanent facility, or no later than
Substantial Completion. Complete or, if necessary, restore permanent construction that may
TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
015000 - 9
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
have been delayed because of interference with temporary facility. Repair damaged Work,
clean exposed surfaces, and replace construction that cannot be satisfactorily repaired.
1.
2.
3.
Materials and facilities that constitute temporary facilities are property of Contractor.
Owner reserves right to take possession of Project identification signs.
Remove temporary roads and paved areas not intended for or acceptable for integration
into permanent construction. Where area is intended for landscape development, remove
soil and aggregate fill that do not comply with requirements for fill or subsoil. Remove
materials contaminated with road oil, asphalt and other petrochemical compounds, and
other substances that might impair growth of plant materials or lawns. Repair or replace
street paving, curbs, and sidewalks at temporary entrances, as required by authorities
having jurisdiction.
At Substantial Completion, repair, renovate, and clean permanent facilities used during
construction period. Comply with final cleaning requirements specified in Section 017700
"Closeout Procedures."
END OF SECTION 015000
TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
015000 - 10
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
SECTION 015639 - TEMPORARY TREE AND PLANT PROTECTION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
Section includes general protection and pruning of existing trees and plants that are affected by
execution of the Work, whether temporary or permanent construction.
B.
Related Sections:
1.
2.
1.3
Section 015000 "Temporary Facilities and Controls" for temporary site fencing.
Section 311000 "Site Clearing" for removing existing trees and shrubs.
DEFINITIONS
A.
Caliper: Diameter of a trunk measured by a diameter tape at 6 inches above the ground for
trees up to, and including, 4-inch (100-mm) size; and 12 inches (300 mm) above the ground for
trees larger than 4-inch (100-mm) size.
B.
Plant-Protection Zone: Area surrounding individual trees, groups of trees, shrubs, or other
vegetation to be protected during construction, and indicated on Drawings.
C.
Tree-Protection Zone: Area surrounding individual trees or groups of trees to be protected
during construction, and indicated on Drawings.
D.
Vegetation: Trees, shrubs, groundcovers, grass, and other plants.
1.4
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B.
Tree Pruning Schedule: Written schedule detailing scope and extent of pruning of trees to
remain that interfere with or are affected by construction.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Species and size of tree.
Location on site plan. Include unique identifier for each.
Reason for pruning.
Description of pruning to be performed.
TEMPORARY TREE AND PLANT PROTECTION
015639 - 1
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
5.
1.5
Description of maintenance following pruning.
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A.
Qualification Data: For qualified arborist and tree service firm.
B.
Certification: From arborist, certifying that trees indicated to remain have been protected during
construction according to recognized standards and that trees were promptly and properly
treated and repaired when damaged.
C.
Maintenance Recommendations: From arborist, for care and protection of trees affected by
construction during and after completing the Work.
D.
Existing Conditions: Documentation of existing trees and plantings indicated to remain, which
establishes preconstruction conditions that might be misconstrued as damage caused by
construction activities.
1.
2.
1.6
Use sufficiently detailed photographs or videotape.
Include plans and notations to indicate specific wounds and damage conditions of each
tree or other plants designated to remain.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Arborist Qualifications: Licensed arborist in jurisdiction where Project is located.
B.
Tree Service Firm Qualifications: An experienced tree service firm that has successfully
completed temporary tree and plant protection work similar to that required for this Project and
that will assign an experienced, qualified arborist to Project site during execution of the Work.
C.
Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.
1.
Review methods and procedures related to temporary tree and plant protection including,
but not limited to, the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
1.7
Construction schedule. Verify availability of materials, personnel, and equipment
needed to make progress and avoid delays.
Enforcing requirements for protection zones.
Arborist's responsibilities.
Field quality control.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
The following practices are prohibited within protection zones:
1.
2.
Storage of construction materials, debris, or excavated material.
Parking vehicles or equipment.
TEMPORARY TREE AND PLANT PROTECTION
015639 - 2
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Foot traffic.
Erection of sheds or structures.
Impoundment of water.
Excavation or other digging unless otherwise indicated.
Attachment of signs to or wrapping materials around trees or plants unless otherwise
indicated.
B.
Do not direct vehicle or equipment exhaust toward protection zones.
C.
Prohibit heat sources, flames, ignition sources, and smoking within or near protection zones and
organic mulch.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
A.
Topsoil: Natural or cultivated top layer of the soil profile or manufactured topsoil; containing
organic matter and sand, silt, and clay particles; friable, pervious, and black or a darker shade
of brown, gray, or red than underlying subsoil; reasonably free of subsoil, clay lumps, gravel,
and other objects more than 1 inch (25 mm) in diameter; and free of weeds, roots, and toxic and
other nonsoil materials.
1.
B.
Organic Mulch: Free from deleterious materials and suitable as a top dressing for trees and
shrubs, consisting of one of the following:
1.
2.
3.
C.
Obtain topsoil only from well-drained sites where topsoil is 4 inches (100 mm) deep or
more; do not obtain from bogs or marshes.
Type: Shredded hardwood or Ground or shredded bark.
Size Range: 1 inch (25 mm) maximum, 1/2 inch (13 mm) minimum.
Color: Natural.
Protection-Zone Fencing: Fencing fixed in position and meeting one of the following
requirements.
1.
Chain-Link Protection-Zone Fencing: Galvanized-steel.
a.
2.
Height: 4 feet (1.2 m).
Plastic Protection-Zone Fencing: Plastic construction fencing constructed of high-density
extruded and stretched polyethylene fabric with 2-inch (50-mm) maximum opening in
pattern and weighing a minimum of 0.4 lb/ft. (0.6 kg/m); remaining flexible from minus 60
to plus 200 deg F (minus 16 to plus 93 deg C); inert to most chemicals and acids;
minimum tensile yield strength of 2000 psi (13.8 MPa) and ultimate tensile strength of
2680 psi (18.5 MPa); secured with plastic bands or galvanized-steel or stainless-steel
wire ties; and supported by tubular or T-shape galvanized-steel posts spaced not more
than 8 feet (2.4 m) apart.
TEMPORARY TREE AND PLANT PROTECTION
015639 - 3
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
a.
b.
Height: 4 feet (1.2 m).
Color: High-visibility orange, nonfading.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Erosion and Sedimentation Control: Examine the site to verify that temporary erosion- and
sedimentation-control measures are in place. Verify that flows of water redirected from
construction areas or generated by construction activity do not enter or cross protection zones.
B.
For the record, prepare written report, endorsed by arborist, listing conditions detrimental to tree
and plant protection.
3.2
PREPARATION
A.
Locate and clearly identify trees, shrubs, and other vegetation to remain. Flag each tree trunk at
54 inches (1372 mm) above the ground.
B.
Protect tree root systems from damage caused by runoff or spillage of noxious materials while
mixing, placing, or storing construction materials. Protect root systems from ponding, eroding, or
excessive wetting caused by dewatering operations.
C.
Tree-Protection Zones: Mulch areas inside tree-protection zones and other areas indicated.
1.
3.3
Apply 4-inch (100-mm) average thickness of organic mulch. Do not place mulch within 6
inches (150 mm) of tree trunks.
TREE- AND PLANT-PROTECTION ZONES
A.
Protection-Zone Fencing: Install protection-zone fencing along edges of protection zones before
materials or equipment are brought on the site and construction operations begin in a manner
that will prevent people from easily entering protected area except by entrance gates. Construct
fencing so as not to obstruct safe passage or visibility at vehicle intersections where fencing is
located adjacent to pedestrian walkways or in close proximity to street intersections, drives, or
other vehicular circulation.
1.
2.
B.
Chain-Link Fencing: Install to comply with ASTM F 567 and with manufacturer's written
instructions.
Posts: Set or drive posts into ground one-third the total height of the fence without
concrete footings. Where a post is located on existing paving or concrete to remain,
provide appropriate means of post support acceptable to Architect.
Maintain protection zones free of weeds and trash.
TEMPORARY TREE AND PLANT PROTECTION
015639 - 4
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
C.
Repair or replace trees, shrubs, and other vegetation indicated to remain or be relocated that
are damaged by construction operations, in a manner approved by Architect.
D.
Maintain protection-zone fencing and signage in good condition as acceptable to Architect and
remove when construction operations are complete and equipment has been removed from the
site.
1.
3.4
Do not remove protection-zone fencing, even temporarily, to allow deliveries or
equipment access through the protection zone.
EXCAVATION
A.
General: Excavate at edge of protection zones and for trenches indicated within protection
zones according to requirements in Section 312000 "Earth Moving."
B.
Trenching near Trees: Where utility trenches are required within protection zones, hand
excavate under or around tree roots or tunnel under the roots by drilling, auger boring, or pipe
jacking. Do not cut main lateral tree roots or taproots; cut only smaller roots that interfere with
installation of utilities. Cut roots as required for root pruning.
C.
Redirect roots in backfill areas where possible. If encountering large, main lateral roots, expose
roots beyond excavation limits as required to bend and redirect them without breaking. If
encountered immediately adjacent to location of new construction and redirection is not
practical, cut roots approximately 3 inches (75 mm) back from new construction and as required
for root pruning.
D.
Do not allow exposed roots to dry out before placing permanent backfill. Provide temporary
earth cover or pack with peat moss and wrap with burlap. Water and maintain in a moist
condition. Temporarily support and protect roots from damage until they are permanently
relocated and covered with soil.
3.5
CROWN PRUNING
A.
Prune branches that are affected by temporary and permanent construction. Prune branches as
follows:
1.
2.
Prune trees to remain to compensate for root loss caused by damaging or cutting root
system. Provide subsequent maintenance during Contract period as recommended by
arborist.
Pruning Standards: Prune trees according to ANSI A300 (Part 1) and the following:
a.
b.
3.
4.
Type of Pruning: Cleaning.
Specialty Pruning: Restoration.
Cut branches with sharp pruning instruments; do not break or chop.
Do not apply pruning paint to wounds.
TEMPORARY TREE AND PLANT PROTECTION
015639 - 5
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
B.
3.6
Chip removed branches and dispose of off-site.
REGRADING
A.
Lowering Grade: Where new finish grade is indicated below existing grade around trees, slope
grade beyond the protection zone. Maintain existing grades within the protection zone.
B.
Lowering Grade within Protection Zone: Where new finish grade is indicated below existing
grade around trees, slope grade away from trees as recommended by arborist unless otherwise
indicated.
1.
Root Pruning: Prune tree roots exposed by lowering the grade. Do not cut main lateral
roots or taproots; cut only smaller roots. Cut roots as required for root pruning.
C.
Raising Grade: Where new finish grade is indicated above existing grade around trees, slope
grade beyond the protection zone. Maintain existing grades within the protection zone.
D.
Minor Fill within Protection Zone: Where existing grade is 2 inches (50 mm) or less below
elevation of finish grade, fill with topsoil. Place topsoil in a single uncompacted layer and hand
grade to required finish elevations.
3.7
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
3.8
Inspections: Engage a qualified arborist to direct plant-protection measures in the vicinity of
trees, shrubs, and other vegetation indicated to remain and to prepare inspection reports.
REPAIR AND REPLACEMENT
A.
General: Repair or replace trees, shrubs, and other vegetation indicated to remain or be
relocated that are damaged by construction operations, in a manner approved by Architect.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
B.
Submit details of proposed root cutting and tree and shrub repairs.
Have arborist perform the root cutting, branch pruning, and damage repair of trees and
shrubs.
Treat damaged trunks, limbs, and roots according to arborist's written instructions.
Perform repairs within 24 hours.
Replace vegetation that cannot be repaired and restored to full-growth status, as
determined by Architect.
Trees: Remove and replace trees indicated to remain that are more than 25 percent dead or in
an unhealthy condition before the end of the corrections period or are damaged during
construction operations that Architect determines are incapable of restoring to normal growth
pattern.
1.
Provide two new tree(s) of 4-inch (100-mm) caliper size for each tree being replaced that
measures more than 6 inches (150 mm) in caliper size.
TEMPORARY TREE AND PLANT PROTECTION
015639 - 6
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
a.
2.
C.
3.9
Species: Species selected by Architect.
Plant and maintain new trees as specified in Section 329300 "Plants."
Soil Aeration: Where directed by Architect, aerate surface soil compacted during construction.
Aerate 10 feet (3 m) beyond drip line and no closer than 36 inches (900 mm) to tree trunk. Drill
2-inch- (50-mm-) diameter holes a minimum of 12 inches (300 mm) deep at 24 inches (600 mm)
o.c. Backfill holes with an equal mix of augered soil and sand.
DISPOSAL OF SURPLUS AND WASTE MATERIALS
A.
Disposal: Remove excess excavated material, displaced trees, trash and debris, and legally
dispose of them off Owner's property.
END OF SECTION 015639
TEMPORARY TREE AND PLANT PROTECTION
015639 - 7
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
SECTION 016000 - PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for selection of products for use in
Project; product delivery, storage, and handling; manufacturers' standard warranties on
products; special warranties; and comparable products.
B.
Related Requirements:
1.
2.
3.
1.3
Section 012300 "Alternates" for products selected under an alternate.
Section 012500 "Substitution Procedures" for requests for substitutions.
Section 014200 "References" for applicable industry standards for products specified.
DEFINITIONS
A.
Products: Items obtained for incorporating into the Work, whether purchased for Project or
taken from previously purchased stock. The term "product" includes the terms "material,"
"equipment," "system," and terms of similar intent.
1.
2.
B.
New Products: Items that have not previously been incorporated into another project or
facility. Products salvaged or recycled from other projects are not considered new
products.
Comparable Product: Product that is demonstrated and approved through submittal
process to have the indicated qualities related to type, function, dimension, in-service
performance, physical properties, appearance, and other characteristics that equal or
exceed those of specified product.
Basis-of-Design Product Specification: A specification in which a specific manufacturer's
product is named and accompanied by the words "basis-of-design product" (BOD), including
make or model number or other designation, to establish the significant qualities related to type,
function, dimension, in-service performance, physical properties, appearance, and other
characteristics for purposes of evaluating comparable products of additional manufacturers
named in the specification.
PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
016000 - 1
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
1.4
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Comparable Product Requests: Submit request for consideration of each comparable product.
Identify product or fabrication or installation method to be replaced. Include Specification
Section number and title and Drawing numbers and titles.
1.
2.
Include data to indicate compliance with the requirements specified in "Comparable
Products" Article.
Architect's Action: If necessary, Architect will request additional information or
documentation for evaluation within one week of receipt of a comparable product request.
Architect will notify Contractor of approval or rejection of proposed comparable product
request within 15 days of receipt of request, or seven (7) days of receipt of additional
information or documentation, whichever is later.
a.
b.
B.
1.5
Form of Approval: As specified in Section 013300 "Submittal Procedures."
Use product specified if Architect does not issue a decision on use of a
comparable product request within time allocated.
Basis-of-Design Product Specification Submittal: Comply with requirements in Section 013300
"Submittal Procedures." Show compliance with requirements.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Compatibility of Options: If Contractor is given option of selecting between two or more products
for use on Project, select product compatible with products previously selected, even if
previously selected products were also options.
1.
2.
1.6
Each contractor is responsible for providing products and construction methods
compatible with products and construction methods of other contractors.
If a dispute arises between contractors over concurrently selectable but incompatible
products, Architect will determine which products shall be used.
PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Deliver, store, and handle products using means and methods that will prevent damage,
deterioration, and loss, including theft and vandalism. Comply with manufacturer's written
instructions.
B.
Delivery and Handling:
1.
2.
Schedule delivery to minimize long-term storage at Project site and to prevent
overcrowding of construction spaces.
Coordinate delivery with installation time to ensure minimum holding time for items that
are flammable, hazardous, easily damaged, or sensitive to deterioration, theft, and other
losses.
PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
016000 - 2
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
3.
4.
C.
Storage:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
1.7
Deliver products to Project site in an undamaged condition in manufacturer's original
sealed container or other packaging system, complete with labels and instructions for
handling, storing, unpacking, protecting, and installing.
Inspect products on delivery to determine compliance with the Contract Documents and
to determine that products are undamaged and properly protected.
Store products to allow for inspection and measurement of quantity or counting of units.
Store materials in a manner that will not endanger Project structure.
Store products that are subject to damage by the elements, under cover in a weathertight
enclosure above ground, with ventilation adequate to prevent condensation.
Protect foam plastic from exposure to sunlight, except to extent necessary for period of
installation and concealment.
Comply with product manufacturer's written instructions for temperature, humidity,
ventilation, and weather-protection requirements for storage.
Protect stored products from damage and liquids from freezing.
Provide a secure location and enclosure at Project site for storage of materials and
equipment by Owner's construction forces. Coordinate location with Owner.
PRODUCT WARRANTIES
A.
Warranties specified in other Sections shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other
warranties required by the Contract Documents. Manufacturer's disclaimers and limitations on
product warranties do not relieve Contractor of obligations under requirements of the Contract
Documents.
1.
2.
B.
Special Warranties: Prepare a written document that contains appropriate terms and
identification, ready for execution.
1.
2.
3.
C.
Manufacturer's Warranty: Written warranty furnished by individual manufacturer for a
particular product and specifically endorsed by manufacturer to Owner.
Special Warranty: Written warranty required by the Contract Documents to provide
specific rights for Owner.
Manufacturer's Standard Form: Modified to include Project-specific information and
properly executed.
Specified Form: When specified forms are included with the Specifications, prepare a
written document using indicated form properly executed.
See other Sections for specific content requirements and particular requirements for
submitting special warranties.
Submittal Time: Comply with requirements in Section 017700 "Closeout Procedures."
PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
016000 - 3
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
PRODUCT SELECTION PROCEDURES
A.
General Product Requirements: Provide products that comply with the Contract Documents, are
undamaged and, unless otherwise indicated, are new at time of installation.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
B.
Product Selection Procedures:
1.
2.
3.
C.
Provide products complete with accessories, trim, finish, fasteners, and other items
needed for a complete installation and indicated use and effect.
Standard Products: If available, and unless custom products or nonstandard options are
specified, provide standard products of types that have been produced and used
successfully in similar situations on other projects.
Owner reserves the right to limit selection to products with warranties not in conflict with
requirements of the Contract Documents.
Where products are accompanied by the term "as selected," Architect will make
selection.
Descriptive, performance, and reference standard requirements in the Specifications
establish salient characteristics of products.
Or Equal: For products specified by name and accompanied by the term "or equal," or "or
approved equal," or "or approved," comply with requirements in "Comparable Products"
Article to obtain approval for use of an unnamed product.
Product: Where Specifications name a single manufacturer or Basis of Design and
product, provide the named product that complies with requirements. Comparable
products or substitutions for Contractor's convenience will not be considered.
Manufacturer/Source: Where Specifications name a single manufacturer or source,
provide a product by the named manufacturer or source that complies with requirements.
Comparable products or substitutions for Contractor's convenience will not be
considered.
Basis-of-Design Product: Where Specifications name a product, or refer to a product
indicated on Drawings, and include a list of manufacturers, provide the specified or
indicated product or a comparable product by one of the other named manufacturers.
Drawings and Specifications indicate sizes, profiles, dimensions, and other
characteristics that are based on the product named. Comply with requirements in
"Comparable Products" Article for consideration of an unnamed product by one of the
other named manufacturers.
Visual Matching Specification: Where Specifications require "match Architect's sample", provide
a product that complies with requirements and matches Architect's sample. Architect's decision
will be final on whether a proposed product matches.
1.
If no product available within specified category matches and complies with other
specified requirements, comply with requirements in Section 012500 "Substitution
Procedures" for proposal of product.
PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
016000 - 4
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
D.
2.2
Visual Selection Specification: Where Specifications include the phrase "as selected by
Architect from manufacturer's full range" or similar phrase, select a product that complies with
requirements. Architect will select color, gloss, pattern, density, or texture from manufacturer's
product line that includes both standard and premium items.
COMPARABLE PRODUCTS
A.
Conditions for Consideration: Architect will consider Contractor's request for comparable
product when the following conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not satisfied,
Architect may return requests without action, except to record noncompliance with these
requirements:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Evidence that the proposed product does not require revisions to the Contract
Documents, that it is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce the
indicated results, and that it is compatible with other portions of the Work.
Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed product with those named in the
Specifications. Significant qualities include attributes such as performance, weight, size,
durability, visual effect, and specific features and requirements indicated.
Evidence that proposed product provides specified warranty.
List of similar installations for completed projects with project names and addresses and
names and addresses of architects and owners, if requested.
Samples, if requested.
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)
END OF SECTION 016000
PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
016000 - 5
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
SECTION 017300 - EXECUTION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
Section includes general administrative and procedural requirements governing execution of the
Work including, but not limited to, the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
B.
Related Requirements:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
1.3
Construction layout.
Field engineering and surveying.
Installation of the Work.
Cutting and patching.
Coordination of Owner-installed products.
Progress cleaning.
Starting and adjusting.
Protection of installed construction.
Section 011000 "Summary" for limits on use of Project site.
Section 013300 "Submittal Procedures" for submitting surveys.
Section 017700 "Closeout Procedures" for submitting final property survey with Project
Record Documents, recording of Owner-accepted deviations from indicated lines and
levels, and final cleaning.
Section 024119 "Selective Demolition" for demolition and removal of selected portions of
the building.
Section 078413 "Penetration Firestopping" for patching penetrations in fire-rated
construction.
DEFINITIONS
A.
Cutting: Removal of in-place construction necessary to permit installation or performance of
other work.
B.
Patching: Fitting and repair work required to restore construction to original conditions after
installation of other work.
EXECUTION
017300 - 1
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
1.4
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A.
Qualification Data: For professional engineer.
B.
Certificates: Submit certificate signed by professional engineer certifying that location and
elevation of improvements comply with requirements.
C.
Cutting and Patching Plan: Submit plan describing procedures at least 10 days prior to the time
cutting and patching will be performed. Include the following information:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Extent: Describe reason for and extent of each occurrence of cutting and patching.
Changes to In-Place Construction: Describe anticipated results. Include changes to
structural elements and operating components as well as changes in building
appearance and other significant visual elements.
Products: List products to be used for patching and firms or entities that will perform
patching work.
Dates: Indicate when cutting and patching will be performed.
Utilities and Mechanical and Electrical Systems: List services and systems that cutting
and patching procedures will disturb or affect. List services and systems that will be
relocated and those that will be temporarily out of service. Indicate length of time
permanent services and systems will be disrupted.
a.
Include description of provisions for temporary services and systems during
interruption of permanent services and systems.
D.
Landfill Receipts: Submit copy of receipts issued by a landfill facility, licensed to accept
hazardous materials, for hazardous waste disposal.
E.
Certified Surveys: Submit two (2) copies signed by land surveyor.
1.5
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Land Surveyor Qualifications: A professional land surveyor who is legally qualified to practice in
jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing land-surveying
services of the kind indicated.
B.
Cutting and Patching: Comply with requirements for and limitations on cutting and patching of
construction elements.
1.
Structural Elements: When cutting and patching structural elements, notify Architect of
locations and details of cutting and await directions from Architect before proceeding.
Shore, brace, and support structural elements during cutting and patching. Do not cut
and patch structural elements in a manner that could change their load-carrying capacity
or increase deflection
2.
Operational Elements: Do not cut and patch operating elements and related components
in a manner that results in reducing their capacity to perform as intended or that results in
EXECUTION
017300 - 2
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
increased maintenance or decreased operational life or safety. Operational elements
include the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
k.
3.
Other Construction Elements: Do not cut and patch other construction elements or
components in a manner that could change their load-carrying capacity, that results in
reducing their capacity to perform as intended, or that results in increased maintenance
or decreased operational life or safety. Other construction elements include but are not
limited to the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
4.
C.
Primary operational systems and equipment.
Fire separation assemblies.
Air or smoke barriers.
Fire-suppression systems.
Mechanical systems piping and ducts.
Control systems.
Communication systems.
Fire-detection and -alarm systems.
Conveying systems.
Electrical wiring systems.
Operating systems of special construction.
Water, moisture, or vapor barriers.
Membranes and flashings.
Exterior curtain-wall construction.
Sprayed fire-resistive material.
Equipment supports.
Piping, ductwork, vessels, and equipment.
Noise- and vibration-control elements and systems.
Visual Elements: Do not cut and patch construction in a manner that results in visual
evidence of cutting and patching. Do not cut and patch exposed construction in a manner
that would, in Architect's opinion, reduce the building's aesthetic qualities. Remove and
replace construction that has been cut and patched in a visually unsatisfactory manner.
Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Obtain and maintain on-site manufacturer's written
recommendations and instructions for installation of products and equipment.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
A.
General: Comply with requirements specified in other Sections.
B.
In-Place Materials: Use materials for patching identical to in-place materials. For exposed
surfaces, use materials that visually match in-place adjacent surfaces to the fullest extent
possible.
EXECUTION
017300 - 3
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
1.
If identical materials are unavailable or cannot be used, use materials that, when
installed, will provide a match acceptable to Architect for the visual and functional
performance of in-place materials.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Existing Conditions: The existence and location of underground and other utilities and
construction indicated as existing are not guaranteed. Before beginning sitework, investigate
and verify the existence and location of underground utilities, and other construction affecting
the Work.
1.
2.
B.
Examination and Acceptance of Conditions: Before proceeding with each component of the
Work, examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer or Applicator present where
indicated, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions
affecting performance. Record observations.
1.
2.
3.
C.
3.2
Examine roughing-in for mechanical and electrical systems to verify actual locations of
connections before equipment and fixture installation.
Examine walls, floors, and roofs for suitable conditions where products and systems are
to be installed.
Verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility with existing
finishes or primers.
Written Report: Where a written report listing conditions detrimental to performance of the Work
is required by other Sections, include the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
D.
Before construction, verify the location and invert elevation at points of connection of
sanitary sewer, storm sewer, and water-service piping; underground electrical services,
and other utilities.
Furnish location data for work related to Project that must be performed by public utilities
serving Project site.
Description of the Work.
List of detrimental conditions, including substrates.
List of unacceptable installation tolerances.
Recommended corrections.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. Proceeding
with the Work indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions.
PREPARATION
A.
Existing Utility Information: Furnish information to local utility and COR that is necessary to
adjust, move, or relocate existing utility structures, utility poles, lines, services, or other utility
EXECUTION
017300 - 4
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
appurtenances located in or affected by construction. Coordinate with authorities having
jurisdiction.
B.
Field Measurements: Take field measurements as required to fit the Work properly. Recheck
measurements before installing each product. Where portions of the Work are indicated to fit to
other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before
fabrication. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the
Work.
C.
Space Requirements: Verify
diagrammatically on Drawings.
D.
Review of Contract Documents and Field Conditions: Immediately on discovery of the need for
clarification of the Contract Documents caused by differing field conditions outside the control of
Contractor, submit a request for information to Architect according to requirements in
Section 013100 "Project Management and Coordination."
3.3
space
requirements
and
dimensions
of
items
shown
CONSTRUCTION LAYOUT
A.
Verification: Before proceeding to lay out the Work, verify layout information shown on
Drawings, in relation to the property survey and existing benchmarks. If discrepancies are
discovered, notify Architect promptly.
B.
General: Engage a land surveyor to lay out the Work using accepted surveying practices.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Establish benchmarks and control points to set lines and levels at each story of
construction and elsewhere as needed to locate each element of Project.
Establish limits on use of Project site.
Establish dimensions within tolerances indicated. Do not scale Drawings to obtain
required dimensions.
Inform installers of lines and levels to which they must comply.
Check the location, level and plumb, of every major element as the Work progresses.
Notify Architect when deviations from required lines and levels exceed allowable
tolerances.
Close site surveys with an error of closure equal to or less than the standard established
by authorities having jurisdiction.
C.
Site Improvements: Locate and lay out site improvements, including pavements, grading, fill and
topsoil placement, utility slopes, and rim and invert elevations.
D.
Building Lines and Levels: Locate and lay out control lines and levels for structures, building
foundations, column grids, and floor levels, including those required for mechanical and
electrical work. Transfer survey markings and elevations for use with control lines and levels.
Level foundations and piers from two or more locations.
E.
Record Log: Maintain a log of layout control work. Record deviations from required lines and
levels. Include beginning and ending dates and times of surveys, weather conditions, name and
EXECUTION
017300 - 5
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
duty of each survey party member, and types of instruments and tapes used. Make the log
available for reference by Architect.
3.4
FIELD ENGINEERING
A.
Identification: Owner will identify existing benchmarks, control points, and property corners.
B.
Reference Points: Locate existing permanent benchmarks, control points, and similar reference
points before beginning the Work. Preserve and protect permanent benchmarks and control
points during construction operations.
1.
2.
C.
Benchmarks: Establish and maintain a minimum of two (2) permanent benchmarks on Project
site, referenced to data established by survey control points. Comply with authorities having
jurisdiction for type and size of benchmark.
1.
2.
3.
D.
3.5
Do not change or relocate existing benchmarks or control points without prior written
approval of Architect. Report lost or destroyed permanent benchmarks or control points
promptly. Report the need to relocate permanent benchmarks or control points to
Architect before proceeding.
Replace lost or destroyed permanent benchmarks and control points promptly. Base
replacements on the original survey control points.
Record benchmark locations, with horizontal and vertical data, on Project Record
Documents.
Where the actual location or elevation of layout points cannot be marked, provide
temporary reference points sufficient to locate the Work.
Remove temporary reference points when no longer needed. Restore marked
construction to its original condition.
Certified Survey: On completion of foundation walls, major site improvements, and other work
requiring field-engineering services, prepare a certified survey showing dimensions, locations,
angles, and elevations of construction and sitework.
INSTALLATION
A.
General: Locate the Work and components of the Work accurately, in correct alignment and
elevation, as indicated.
1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
Make vertical work plumb and make horizontal work level.
Where space is limited, install components to maximize space available for maintenance
and ease of removal for replacement.
Conceal pipes, ducts, and wiring in finished areas unless otherwise indicated.
Maintain minimum headroom clearance of 96 inches (2440 mm) in occupied spaces and
90 inches (2300 mm) in unoccupied spaces.
Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations for installing products in
applications indicated.
EXECUTION
017300 - 6
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
C.
Install products at the time and under conditions that will ensure the best possible results.
Maintain conditions required for product performance until Substantial Completion.
D.
Conduct construction operations so no part of the Work is subjected to damaging operations or
loading in excess of that expected during normal conditions of occupancy.
E.
Sequence the Work and allow adequate clearances to accommodate movement of construction
items on site and placement in permanent locations.
F.
Tools and Equipment: Do not use tools or equipment that produce harmful noise levels.
G.
Templates: Obtain and distribute to the parties involved templates for work specified to be
factory prepared and field installed. Check Shop Drawings of other work to confirm that
adequate provisions are made for locating and installing products to comply with indicated
requirements.
H.
Attachment: Provide blocking and attachment plates and anchors and fasteners of adequate
size and number to securely anchor each component in place, accurately located and aligned
with other portions of the Work. Where size and type of attachments are not indicated, verify
size and type required for load conditions.
1.
2.
3.
Mounting Heights: Where mounting heights are not indicated, mount components at
heights directed by Architect.
Allow for building movement, including thermal expansion and contraction.
Coordinate installation of anchorages. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions
for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with
integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to
Project site in time for installation.
I.
Joints: Make joints of uniform width. Where joint locations in exposed work are not indicated,
arrange joints for the best visual effect. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints.
J.
Hazardous Materials: Use products, cleaners, and installation materials that are not considered
hazardous.
3.6
CUTTING AND PATCHING
A.
Cutting and Patching, General: Employ skilled workers to perform cutting and patching. Proceed
with cutting and patching at the earliest feasible time, and complete without delay.
1.
B.
Cut in-place construction to provide for installation of other components or performance
of other construction, and subsequently patch as required to restore surfaces to their
original condition.
Existing Warranties: Remove, replace, patch, and repair materials and surfaces cut or damaged
during installation or cutting and patching operations, by methods and with materials so as not
to void existing warranties.
EXECUTION
017300 - 7
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
C.
Temporary Support: Provide temporary support of work to be cut.
D.
Protection: Protect in-place construction during cutting and patching to prevent damage.
Provide protection from adverse weather conditions for portions of Project that might be
exposed during cutting and patching operations.
E.
Cutting: Cut in-place construction by sawing, drilling, breaking, chipping, grinding, and similar
operations, including excavation, using methods least likely to damage elements retained or
adjoining construction. If possible, review proposed procedures with original Installer; comply
with original Installer's written recommendations.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
F.
In general, use hand or small power tools designed for sawing and grinding, not
hammering and chopping. Cut holes and slots neatly to minimum size required, and with
minimum disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings when not in use.
Finished Surfaces: Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces.
Concrete and Masonry: Cut using a cutting machine, such as an abrasive saw or a
diamond-core drill.
Excavating and Backfilling: Comply with requirements in applicable Sections where
required by cutting and patching operations.
Mechanical and Electrical Services: Cut off pipe or conduit in walls or partitions to be
removed. Cap, valve, or plug and seal remaining portion of pipe or conduit to prevent
entrance of moisture or other foreign matter after cutting.
Proceed with patching after construction operations requiring cutting are complete.
Patching: Patch construction by filling, repairing, refinishing, closing up, and similar operations
following performance of other work. Patch with durable seams that are as invisible as
practicable. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other
Sections, where applicable.
1.
2.
Inspection: Where feasible, test and inspect patched areas after completion to
demonstrate physical integrity of installation.
Exposed Finishes: Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and extend finish
restoration into retained adjoining construction in a manner that will minimize evidence of
patching and refinishing.
a.
b.
3.
Floors and Walls: Where walls or partitions that are removed extend one finished area
into another, patch and repair floor and wall surfaces in the new space. Provide an even
surface of uniform finish, color, texture, and appearance. Remove in-place floor and wall
coverings and replace with new materials, if necessary, to achieve uniform color and
appearance.
a.
EXECUTION
Clean piping, conduit, and similar features before applying paint or other finishing
materials.
Restore damaged pipe covering to its original condition.
Where patching occurs in a painted surface, prepare substrate and apply primer
and intermediate paint coats appropriate for substrate over the patch, and apply
final paint coat over entire unbroken surface containing the patch. Provide
additional coats until patch blends with adjacent surfaces.
017300 - 8
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
4.
5.
G.
3.7
Ceilings: Patch, repair, or rehang in-place ceilings as necessary to provide an even-plane
surface of uniform appearance.
Exterior Building Enclosure: Patch components in a manner that restores enclosure to a
weathertight condition and ensures thermal and moisture integrity of building enclosure.
Cleaning: Clean areas and spaces where cutting and patching are performed. Remove paint,
mortar, oils, putty, and similar materials from adjacent finished surfaces.
OWNER-INSTALLED PRODUCTS
A.
Site Access: Provide access to Project site for Owner's construction personnel.
B.
Coordination: Coordinate construction and operations of the Work with work performed by
Owner's construction personnel.
1.
2.
3.8
Construction Schedule: Inform Owner of Contractor's preferred construction schedule for
Owner's portion of the Work. Adjust construction schedule based on a mutually
agreeable timetable. Notify Owner if changes to schedule are required due to differences
in actual construction progress.
Preinstallation Conferences: Include Owner's construction personnel at preinstallation
conferences covering portions of the Work that are to receive Owner's work. Attend
preinstallation conferences conducted by Owner's construction personnel if portions of
the Work depend on Owner's construction.
PROGRESS CLEANING
A.
General: Clean Project site and work areas daily, including common areas. Enforce
requirements strictly. Dispose of materials lawfully.
1.
2.
3.
Comply with requirements in NFPA 241 for removal of combustible waste materials and
debris.
Do not hold waste materials more than seven days during normal weather or three days if
the temperature is expected to rise above 80 deg F (27 deg C).
Containerize hazardous and unsanitary waste materials separately from other waste.
Mark containers appropriately and dispose of legally, according to regulations.
a.
4.
Use containers intended for holding waste materials of type to be stored.
Coordinate progress cleaning for joint-use areas where Contractor and other contractors
are working concurrently.
B.
Site: Maintain Project site free of waste materials and debris.
C.
Work Areas: Clean areas where work is in progress to the level of cleanliness necessary for
proper execution of the Work.
1.
EXECUTION
Remove liquid spills promptly.
017300 - 9
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
2.
Where dust would impair proper execution of the Work, broom-clean or vacuum the
entire work area, as appropriate.
D.
Installed Work: Keep installed work clean. Clean installed surfaces according to written
instructions of manufacturer or fabricator of product installed, using only cleaning materials
specifically recommended. If specific cleaning materials are not recommended, use cleaning
materials that are not hazardous to health or property and that will not damage exposed
surfaces.
E.
Concealed Spaces: Remove debris from concealed spaces before enclosing the space.
F.
Exposed Surfaces in Finished Areas: Clean exposed surfaces and protect as necessary to
ensure freedom from damage and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.
G.
Waste Disposal: Do not bury or burn waste materials on-site. Do not wash waste materials
down sewers or into waterways. Comply with waste disposal requirements in Section 017419
"Construction Waste Management and Disposal."
H.
During handling and installation, clean and protect construction in progress and adjoining
materials already in place. Apply protective covering where required to ensure protection from
damage or deterioration at Substantial Completion.
I.
Clean and provide maintenance on completed construction as frequently as necessary through
the remainder of the construction period. Adjust and lubricate operable components to ensure
operability without damaging effects.
J.
Limiting Exposures: Supervise construction operations to assure that no part of the
construction, completed or in progress, is subject to harmful, dangerous, damaging, or
otherwise deleterious exposure during the construction period.
3.9
STARTING AND ADJUSTING
A.
Coordinate startup and adjusting of equipment and operating components with requirements in
Section 019113 "General Commissioning Requirements."
B.
Start equipment and operating components to confirm proper operation. Remove malfunctioning
units, replace with new units, and retest.
C.
Adjust equipment for proper operation. Adjust operating components for proper operation
without binding.
D.
Test each piece of equipment to verify proper operation. Test and adjust controls and safeties.
Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.
E.
Manufacturer's Field Service: Comply with qualification requirements in Section 014000 "Quality
Requirements."
EXECUTION
017300 - 10
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
3.10
PROTECTION OF INSTALLED CONSTRUCTION
A.
Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure installed Work is without damage or
deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.
B.
Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for temperature and relative humidity.
END OF SECTION 017300
EXECUTION
017300 - 11
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
SECTION 017419 - CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for the following:
1.
2.
3.
B.
Related Requirements:
1.
2.
3.
4.
1.3
Salvaging nonhazardous demolition and construction waste.
Recycling nonhazardous demolition and construction waste.
Disposing of nonhazardous demolition and construction waste.
Section 011200 "Multiple Contract Summary" for coordination of responsibilities for waste
management.
Section 024119 "Selective Demolition" for disposition of waste resulting from partial
demolition of buildings, structures, and site improvements, and for disposition of
hazardous waste.
Section 042000 "Unit Masonry" for disposal requirements for masonry waste.
Section 311000 "Site Clearing" for disposition of waste resulting from site clearing and
removal of above- and below-grade improvements.
DEFINITIONS
A.
Construction Waste: Building and site improvement materials and other solid waste resulting
from construction, remodeling, renovation, or repair operations. Construction waste includes
packaging.
B.
Demolition Waste: Building and site improvement materials resulting from demolition or
selective demolition operations.
C.
Disposal: Removal off-site of demolition and construction waste and subsequent sale, recycling,
reuse, or deposit in landfill or incinerator acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
D.
Recycle: Recovery of demolition or construction waste for subsequent processing in preparation
for reuse.
E.
Salvage: Recovery of demolition or construction waste and subsequent sale or reuse in another
facility.
CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL
017419 - 1
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
F.
1.4
Salvage and Reuse: Recovery of demolition or construction waste and subsequent
incorporation into the Work.
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
General: Achieve end-of-Project rates for salvage/recycling of 50 percent by weight of total nonhazardous solid waste generated by the Work. Practice efficient waste management in the use
of materials in the course of the Work. Use all reasonable means to divert construction and
demolition waste from landfills and incinerators. Facilitate recycling and salvage of
materials, including the following:
1.
Demolition Waste:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
k.
l.
m.
n.
o.
p.
q.
r.
s.
t.
u.
v.
w.
x.
y.
z.
aa.
bb.
cc.
dd.
ee.
ff.
gg.
2.
Asphalt paving.
Concrete.
Concrete reinforcing steel.
Concrete masonry units.
Wood trim.
Structural and miscellaneous steel.
Rough hardware.
Roofing.
Insulation.
Doors and frames.
Door hardware.
Windows.
Glazing.
Metal studs.
Gypsum board.
Acoustical tile and panels.
Equipment.
Cabinets.
Plumbing fixtures.
Piping.
Supports and hangers.
Valves.
Sprinklers.
Mechanical equipment.
Refrigerants.
Electrical conduit.
Copper wiring.
Lighting fixtures.
Lamps.
Ballasts.
Electrical devices.
Switchgear and panelboards.
Transformers.
Construction Waste:
CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL
017419 - 2
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
Masonry and CMU.
Lumber.
Metals.
Roofing.
Insulation.
Gypsum board.
Piping.
Electrical conduit.
Packaging: Regardless of salvage/recycle goal indicated in "General" Paragraph
above, salvage or recycle 100 percent of the following uncontaminated packaging
materials:
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
7)
1.5
Paper.
Cardboard.
Boxes.
Plastic sheet and film.
Polystyrene packaging.
Wood crates.
Plastic pails.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
1.6
Waste Management Plan: Submit plan within seven (7) days of date established for the Notice
to Proceed.
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A.
Waste Reduction Progress Reports: Concurrent with each Application for Payment, submit two
(2) reports, which include the following information:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Material category.
Generation point of waste.
Total quantity of waste in tons (tonnes).
Quantity of waste salvaged, both estimated and actual in tons (tonnes).
Quantity of waste recycled, both estimated and actual in tons (tonnes).
Total quantity of waste recovered (salvaged plus recycled) in tons (tonnes).
Total quantity of waste recovered (salvaged plus recycled) as a percentage of total
waste.
B.
Recycling and Processing Facility Records: Indicate receipt and acceptance of recyclable waste
by recycling and processing facilities licensed to accept them. Include manifests, weight tickets,
receipts, and invoices.
C.
Landfill and Incinerator Disposal Records: Indicate receipt and acceptance of waste by landfills
and incinerator facilities licensed to accept them. Include manifests, weight tickets, receipts, and
invoices.
CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL
017419 - 3
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
1.7
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Regulatory Requirements: Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities having
jurisdiction.
B.
Waste Management Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with
requirements in Section 013100 "Project Management and Coordination." Review methods and
procedures related to waste management including, but not limited to, the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
1.8
Review and discuss waste management plan including responsibilities of waste
management coordinator.
Review requirements for documenting quantities of each type of waste and its
disposition.
Review and finalize procedures for materials separation and verify availability of
containers and bins needed to avoid delays.
Review procedures for periodic waste collection and transportation to recycling and
disposal facilities.
Review waste management requirements for each trade.
WASTE MANAGEMENT PLAN
A.
General: Develop a waste management plan according to ASTM E 1609 and requirements in
this Section. Plan shall consist of waste identification, waste reduction work plan, and
cost/revenue analysis. Indicate quantities by weight or volume, but use same units of measure
throughout waste management plan.
B.
Waste Identification: Indicate anticipated types and quantities of demolition, site-clearing, and
construction waste generated by the Work. Include estimated quantities and assumptions for
estimates.
C.
Waste Reduction Work Plan: List each type of waste and whether it will be salvaged, recycled,
or disposed of in landfill or incinerator. Include points of waste generation, total quantity of each
type of waste, quantity for each means of recovery, and handling and transportation
procedures.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Salvaged Materials for Reuse: For materials that will be salvaged and reused in this
Project, describe methods for preparing salvaged materials before incorporation into the
Work.
Recycled Materials: Include list of local receivers and processors and type of recycled
materials each will accept. Include names, addresses, and telephone numbers.
Disposed Materials: Indicate how and where materials will be disposed of. Include name,
address, and telephone number of each landfill and incinerator facility.
Handling and Transportation Procedures: Include method that will be used for separating
recyclable waste including sizes of containers, container labeling, and designated
location where materials separation will be performed.
CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL
017419 - 4
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
PLAN IMPLEMENTATION
A.
General: Implement approved waste management plan. Provide handling, containers, storage,
signage, transportation, and other items as required to implement waste management plan
during the entire duration of the Contract.
1.
B.
Training: Train workers, subcontractors, and suppliers on proper waste management
procedures, as appropriate for the Work.
1.
2.
C.
Distribute waste management plan to everyone concerned within three (3) days of
submittal return.
Distribute waste management plan to entities when they first begin work on-site. Review
plan procedures and locations established for salvage, recycling, and disposal.
Site Access and Temporary Controls: Conduct waste management operations to ensure
minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, walkways, and other adjacent occupied and
used facilities.
1.
2.
3.2
Comply with operation, termination, and removal requirements in Section 015000
"Temporary Facilities and Controls."
Designate and label specific areas on Project site necessary for separating materials that
are to be salvaged, recycled, reused, donated, and sold.
Comply with Section 015000 "Temporary Facilities and Controls" for controlling dust and
dirt, environmental protection, and noise control.
SALVAGING DEMOLITION WASTE
A.
Salvaged Items for Reuse in the Work: Salvage items for reuse and handle as follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
B.
Clean salvaged items.
Pack or crate items after cleaning. Identify contents of containers with label indicating
elements, date of removal, quantity, and location where removed.
Store items in a secure area until installation.
Protect items from damage during transport and storage.
Install salvaged items to comply with installation requirements for new materials and
equipment. Provide connections, supports, and miscellaneous materials necessary to
make items functional for use indicated.
Lighting Fixtures: Separate lamps by type and protect from breakage.
CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL
017419 - 5
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
C.
3.3
Electrical Devices: Separate switches, receptacles, switchgear, transformers, meters,
panelboards, circuit breakers, and other devices by type.
RECYCLING DEMOLITION AND CONSTRUCTION WASTE, GENERAL
A.
General: Recycle paper and beverage containers used by on-site workers.
B.
Preparation of Waste: Prepare and maintain recyclable waste materials according to recycling
or reuse facility requirements. Maintain materials free of dirt, adhesives, solvents, petroleum
contamination, and other substances deleterious to the recycling process.
C.
Procedures: Separate recyclable waste from other waste materials, trash, and debris. Separate
recyclable waste by type at Project site to the maximum extent practical according to approved
construction waste management plan.
1.
Provide appropriately marked containers or bins for controlling recyclable waste until
removed from Project site. Include list of acceptable and unacceptable materials at each
container and bin.
a.
2.
3.
4.
5.
3.4
Inspect containers and bins for contamination and remove contaminated materials
if found.
Stockpile processed materials on-site without intermixing with other materials. Place,
grade, and shape stockpiles to drain surface water. Cover to prevent windblown dust.
Stockpile materials away from construction area. Do not store within drip line of
remaining trees.
Store components off the ground and protect from the weather.
Remove recyclable waste from Owner's property and transport to recycling receiver or
processor.
RECYCLING DEMOLITION WASTE
A.
Concrete: Remove reinforcement and other metals from concrete and sort with other metals.
1.
2.
3.5
Pulverize concrete to maximum 1-1/2-inch (38-mm) or 4-inch (100-mm) size.
Crush concrete and screen to comply with requirements in Section 312000 "Earth
Moving" for use as satisfactory soil for fill or subbase.
RECYCLING CONSTRUCTION WASTE
A.
Packaging:
1.
2.
Cardboard and Boxes: Break down packaging into flat sheets. Bundle and store in a dry
location.
Polystyrene Packaging: Separate and bag materials.
CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL
017419 - 6
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
3.
4.
B.
Pallets: As much as possible, require deliveries using pallets to remove pallets from
Project site. For pallets that remain on-site, break down pallets into component wood
pieces and comply with requirements for recycling wood.
Crates: Break down crates into component wood pieces and comply with requirements
for recycling wood.
Wood Materials:
1.
2.
Clean Cut-Offs of Lumber: Grind or chip into small pieces.
Clean Sawdust: Bag sawdust that does not contain painted or treated wood.
a.
C.
Gypsum Board: Stack large clean pieces on wood pallets or in container and store in a dry
location.
1.
Clean Gypsum Board: Grind scraps of clean gypsum board using small mobile chipper or
hammer mill. Screen out paper after grinding.
a.
3.6
Comply with requirements in Section 329300 "Plants" for use of clean sawdust as
organic mulch.
Comply with requirements in Section 329300 "Plants" for use of clean ground
gypsum board as inorganic soil amendment.
DISPOSAL OF WASTE
A.
General: Except for items or materials to be salvaged, recycled, or otherwise reused, remove
waste materials from Project site and legally dispose of them in a landfill or incinerator
acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
1.
2.
Except as otherwise specified, do not allow waste materials that are to be disposed of
accumulate on-site.
Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent surfaces
and areas.
B.
Burning: Do not burn waste materials.
C.
Burning: Burning of waste materials is permitted only at designated areas on Owner's property,
provided required permits are obtained. Provide full-time monitoring for burning materials until
fires are extinguished.
D.
Disposal: Remove waste materials and dispose of at designated spoil areas on Owner's
property.
E.
Disposal: Remove waste materials from Owner's property and legally dispose of them.
CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL
017419 - 7
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
3.7
SCHEDULE OF MATERIALS TO REUSE AND INCORPORATE INTO THE WORK
A.
Existing site lighting and poles as delineated in site plan.
END OF SECTION 017419
CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL
017419 - 8
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
SECTION 017700 - CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for contract closeout, including,
but not limited to, the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
B.
Related Requirements:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
1.3
Substantial Completion procedures.
Final completion procedures.
Warranties.
Final cleaning.
Repair of the Work.
Section 013233 "Photographic Documentation" for submitting final completion
construction photographic documentation.
Section 017300 "Execution" for progress cleaning of Project site.
Section 017823 "Operation and Maintenance Data" for operation and maintenance
manual requirements.
Section 017839 "Project Record Documents" for submitting record Drawings, record
Specifications, and record Product Data.
Section 017900 "Demonstration and Training" for requirements for instructing Owner's
personnel.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For cleaning agents.
B.
Contractor's List of Incomplete Items: Initial submittal at Substantial Completion.
C.
Certified List of Incomplete Items: Final submittal at Final Completion.
1.4
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A.
Certificates of Release: From authorities having jurisdiction.
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
017700 - 1
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
B.
Certificate of Insurance: For continuing coverage.
C.
Field Report: For pest control inspection.
1.5
MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS
A.
1.6
Schedule of Maintenance Material Items: For maintenance material submittal items specified in
other Sections.
SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION PROCEDURES
A.
Contractor's List of Incomplete Items: Prepare and submit a list of items to be completed and
corrected (Contractor's punch list), indicating the value of each item on the list and reasons why
the Work is incomplete.
B.
Submittals Prior to Substantial Completion: Complete the following a minimum of 10 days prior
to requesting inspection for determining date of Substantial Completion. List items below that
are incomplete at time of request.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Certificates of Release: Obtain and submit releases from authorities having jurisdiction
permitting Owner unrestricted use of the Work and access to services and utilities.
Include occupancy permits, operating certificates, and similar releases.
Submit closeout submittals specified in other Division 01 Sections, including project
record documents, operation and maintenance manuals, final completion construction
photographic documentation, damage or settlement surveys, property surveys, and
similar final record information.
Submit closeout submittals specified in individual Sections, including specific warranties,
workmanship bonds, maintenance service agreements, final certifications, and similar
documents.
Submit maintenance material submittals specified in individual Sections, including tools,
spare parts, extra materials, and similar items, and deliver to location designated by
Architect. Label with manufacturer's name and model number where applicable.
a.
5.
6.
C.
Schedule of Maintenance Material Items: Prepare and submit schedule of
maintenance material submittal items, including name and quantity of each item
and name and number of related Specification Section. Obtain Architect's
signature for receipt of submittals.
Submit test/adjust/balance records.
Submit changeover information related to Owner's occupancy, use, operation, and
maintenance.
Procedures Prior to Substantial Completion: Complete the following a minimum of 10 days prior
to requesting inspection for determining date of Substantial Completion. List items below that
are incomplete at time of request.
1.
Advise Owner of pending insurance changeover requirements.
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
017700 - 2
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
D.
Inspection: Submit a written request for inspection to determine Substantial Completion a
minimum of 10 days prior to date the work will be completed and ready for final inspection and
tests. On receipt of request, Architect will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of
unfulfilled requirements. Architect will prepare the Certificate of Substantial Completion after
inspection or will notify Contractor of items, either on Contractor's list or additional items
identified by Architect, that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued.
1.
2.
1.7
Make final changeover of permanent locks and deliver keys to Owner. Advise Owner's
personnel of changeover in security provisions.
Complete startup and testing of systems and equipment.
Perform preventive maintenance on equipment used prior to Substantial Completion.
Instruct Owner's personnel in operation, adjustment, and maintenance of products,
equipment, and systems. Submit demonstration and training video recordings specified in
Section 017900 "Demonstration and Training."
Advise Owner of changeover in heat and other utilities.
Participate with Owner in conducting inspection and walkthrough with local emergency
responders.
Terminate and remove temporary facilities from Project site, along with mockups,
construction tools, and similar elements.
Complete final cleaning requirements, including touchup painting.
Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred exposed finishes to eliminate visual
defects.
Reinspection: Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as
incomplete is completed or corrected.
Results of completed inspection will form the basis of requirements for final completion.
FINAL COMPLETION PROCEDURES
A.
Submittals Prior to Final Completion: Before requesting final inspection for determining final
completion, complete the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
Submit a final Application for Payment according to Section 012900 "Payment
Procedures."
Certified List of Incomplete Items: Submit certified copy of Architect's Substantial
Completion inspection list of items to be completed or corrected (punch list), endorsed
and dated by Architect. Certified copy of the list shall state that each item has been
completed or otherwise resolved for acceptance.
Certificate of Insurance: Submit evidence of final, continuing insurance coverage
complying with insurance requirements.
Submit pest-control final inspection report.
Inspection: Submit a written request for final inspection to determine acceptance a minimum of
10 days prior to date the work will be completed and ready for final inspection and tests. On
receipt of request, Architect will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled
requirements. Architect will prepare a final Certificate for Payment after inspection or will notify
Contractor of construction that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued.
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
017700 - 3
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
1.
1.8
Reinspection: Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as
incomplete is completed or corrected.
LIST OF INCOMPLETE ITEMS (PUNCH LIST)
A.
Organization of List: Include name and identification of each space and area affected by
construction operations for incomplete items and items needing correction including, if
necessary, areas disturbed by Contractor that are outside the limits of construction.
1.
2.
3.
Organize list of spaces in sequential order, starting with exterior areas first and
proceeding from lowest floor to highest floor.
Organize items applying to each space by major element, including categories for ceiling,
individual walls, floors, equipment, and building systems.
Include the following information at the top of each page:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
4.
Submit list of incomplete items in the following format:
a.
b.
c.
1.9
Project name.
Date.
Name of Architect and COR.
Name of Contractor.
Page number.
MS Excel electronic file. Architect will return annotated file.
PDF electronic file. Architect will return annotated file.
Three (3) paper copies. Architect will return two (2) copies.
SUBMITTAL OF PROJECT WARRANTIES
A.
Time of Submittal: Submit written warranties on request of Architect for designated portions of
the Work where commencement of warranties other than date of Substantial Completion is
indicated, or when delay in submittal of warranties might limit Owner's rights under warranty.
B.
Partial Occupancy: Submit properly executed warranties within 15 days of completion of
designated portions of the Work that are completed and occupied or used by Owner during
construction period by separate agreement with Contractor.
C.
Organize warranty documents into an orderly sequence based on the table of contents of
Project Manual.
1.
2.
Bind warranties and bonds in heavy-duty, three-ring, vinyl-covered, loose-leaf binders,
thickness as necessary to accommodate contents, and sized to receive 8-1/2-by-11-inch
(215-by-280-mm) paper.
Provide heavy paper dividers with plastic-covered tabs for each separate warranty. Mark
tab to identify the product or installation. Provide a typed description of the product or
installation, including the name of the product and the name, address, and telephone
number of Installer.
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
017700 - 4
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
3.
4.
D.
Identify each binder on the front and spine with the typed or printed title "WARRANTIES,"
Project name, and name of Contractor.
Warranty Electronic File: Scan warranties and bonds and assemble complete warranty
and bond submittal package into a single indexed electronic PDF file with links enabling
navigation to each item. Provide bookmarked table of contents at beginning of document.
Provide additional copies of each warranty to include in operation and maintenance manuals.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
A.
Cleaning Agents: Use cleaning materials and agents recommended by manufacturer or
fabricator of the surface to be cleaned. Do not use cleaning agents that are potentially
hazardous to health or property or that might damage finished surfaces.
1.
Use cleaning products that comply with Green Seal's GS-37, or if GS-37 is not
applicable, use products that comply with the California Code of Regulations maximum
allowable VOC levels.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
FINAL CLEANING
A.
General: Perform final cleaning. Conduct cleaning and waste-removal operations to comply with
local laws and ordinances and Federal and local environmental and antipollution regulations.
B.
Cleaning: Employ experienced workers or professional cleaners for final cleaning. Clean each
surface or unit to condition expected in an average commercial building cleaning and
maintenance program. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.
1.
Complete the following cleaning operations before requesting inspection for certification
of Substantial Completion for entire Project or for a designated portion of Project:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
Clean Project site, yard, and grounds, in areas disturbed by construction activities,
including landscape development areas, of rubbish, waste material, litter, and
other foreign substances.
Sweep paved areas broom clean. Remove petrochemical spills, stains, and other
foreign deposits.
Rake grounds that are neither planted nor paved to a smooth, even-textured
surface.
Remove tools, construction equipment, machinery, and surplus material from
Project site.
Clean exposed exterior and interior hard-surfaced finishes to a dirt-free condition,
free of stains, films, and similar foreign substances. Avoid disturbing natural
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
017700 - 5
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
k.
l.
m.
n.
weathering of exterior surfaces. Restore reflective surfaces to their original
condition.
Remove debris and surface dust from limited access spaces, including roofs,
plenums, shafts, trenches, equipment vaults, manholes, attics, and similar spaces.
Sweep concrete floors broom clean in unoccupied spaces.
Vacuum carpet and similar soft surfaces, removing debris and excess nap; clean
according to manufacturer's recommendations if visible soil or stains remain.
Clean transparent materials, including mirrors and glass in doors and windows.
Remove glazing compounds and other noticeable, vision-obscuring materials.
Polish mirrors and glass, taking care not to scratch surfaces.
Remove labels that are not permanent.
Wipe surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment and similar equipment.
Remove excess lubrication, paint and mortar droppings, and other foreign
substances.
Clean plumbing fixtures to a sanitary condition, free of stains, including stains
resulting from water exposure.
Replace disposable air filters and clean permanent air filters. Clean exposed
surfaces of diffusers, registers, and grills.
Clean ducts, blowers, and coils if units were operated without filters during
construction or that display contamination with particulate matter on inspection.
1)
o.
p.
C.
3.2
Clean HVAC system in compliance with NADCA Standard 1992-01. Provide
written report on completion of cleaning.
Clean light fixtures, lamps, globes, and reflectors to function with full efficiency.
Leave Project clean and ready for occupancy.
Construction Waste Disposal: Comply with waste disposal requirements in Section 017419
"Construction Waste Management and Disposal."
REPAIR OF THE WORK
A.
Complete repair and restoration operations before requesting inspection for determination of
Substantial Completion.
B.
Repair or remove and replace defective construction. Repairing includes replacing defective
parts, refinishing damaged surfaces, touching up with matching materials, and properly
adjusting operating equipment. Where damaged or worn items cannot be repaired or restored,
provide replacements. Remove and replace operating components that cannot be repaired.
Restore damaged construction and permanent facilities used during construction to specified
condition.
1.
2.
Remove and replace chipped, scratched, and broken glass, reflective surfaces, and other
damaged transparent materials.
Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred or exposed finishes and surfaces.
Replace finishes and surfaces that that already show evidence of repair or restoration.
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
017700 - 6
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
a.
3.
4.
Do not paint over "UL" and other required labels and identification, including
mechanical and electrical nameplates. Remove paint applied to required labels
and identification.
Replace parts subject to operating conditions during construction that may impede
operation or reduce longevity.
Replace burned-out bulbs, bulbs noticeably dimmed by hours of use, and defective and
noisy starters in fluorescent and mercury vapor fixtures to comply with requirements for
new fixtures.
END OF SECTION 017700
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
017700 - 7
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
SECTION 017823 - OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for preparing operation and
maintenance manuals, including the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
B.
Related Requirements:
1.
2.
1.3
Operation and maintenance documentation directory.
Emergency manuals.
Operation manuals for systems, subsystems, and equipment.
Product maintenance manuals.
Systems and equipment maintenance manuals.
Section 013300 "Submittal Procedures" for submitting copies of submittals for operation
and maintenance manuals.
Section 019113 "General Commissioning Requirements" for verification and compilation
of data into operation and maintenance manuals.
DEFINITIONS
A.
System: An organized collection of parts, equipment, or subsystems united by regular
interaction.
B.
Subsystem: A portion of a system with characteristics similar to a system.
1.4
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A.
Manual Content: Operations and maintenance manual content is specified in individual
Specification Sections to be reviewed at the time of Section submittals. Submit reviewed
manual content formatted and organized as required by this Section.
1.
2.
Architect will comment on whether content of operations and maintenance submittals are
acceptable.
Where applicable, clarify and update reviewed manual content to correspond to revisions
and field conditions.
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
017823 - 1
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
B.
Format: Submit operations and maintenance manuals in the following format:
1.
PDF electronic file. Assemble each manual into a composite electronically indexed file.
Submit on digital media acceptable to Architect.
a.
b.
2.
Name each indexed document file in composite electronic index with applicable
item name. Include a complete electronically linked operation and maintenance
directory.
Enable inserted reviewer comments on draft submittals.
Three (3) paper copies. Include a complete operation and maintenance directory.
Enclose title pages and directories in clear plastic sleeves. Architect will return two (2)
copies.
C.
Initial Manual Submittal: Submit draft copy of each manual at least 30 days before commencing
demonstration and training. Architect and Commissioning Authority will comment on whether
general scope and content of manual are acceptable.
D.
Final Manual Submittal: Submit each manual in final form prior to requesting inspection for
Substantial Completion and at least 15 days before commencing demonstration and training.
Architect and Commissioning Authority will return copy with comments.
1.
Correct or revise each manual to comply with Architect's and Commissioning Authority's
comments. Submit copies of each corrected manual within 15 days of receipt of
Architect's and Commissioning Authority's comments and prior to commencing
demonstration and training.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DOCUMENTATION DIRECTORY
A.
Directory: Prepare a single, comprehensive directory of emergency, operation, and
maintenance data and materials, listing items and their location to facilitate ready access to
desired information. Include a section in the directory for each of the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
List of documents.
List of systems.
List of equipment.
Table of contents.
B.
List of Systems and Subsystems: List systems alphabetically. Include references to operation
and maintenance manuals that contain information about each system.
C.
List of Equipment: List equipment for each system, organized alphabetically by system. For
pieces of equipment not part of system, list alphabetically in separate list.
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
017823 - 2
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
D.
Tables of Contents: Include a table of contents for each emergency, operation, and
maintenance manual.
E.
Identification: In the documentation directory and in each operation and maintenance manual,
identify each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment with same designation used in the
Contract Documents. If no designation exists, assign a designation according to
ASHRAE Guideline 4, "Preparation of Operating and Maintenance Documentation for Building
Systems."
2.2
REQUIREMENTS FOR EMERGENCY, OPERATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
A.
Organization: Unless otherwise indicated, organize each manual into a separate section for
each system and subsystem, and a separate section for each piece of equipment not part of a
system. Each manual shall contain the following materials, in the order listed:
1.
2.
3.
B.
Title Page: Include the following information:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
C.
Title page.
Table of contents.
Manual contents.
Subject matter included in manual.
Name and address of Project.
Name and address of Owner.
Date of submittal.
Name and contact information for Contractor.
Name and contact information for Construction Manager.
Name and contact information for Architect.
Name and contact information for Commissioning Authority.
Names and contact information for major consultants to the Architect that designed the
systems contained in the manuals.
Cross-reference to related systems in other operation and maintenance manuals.
Table of Contents: List each product included in manual, identified by product name, indexed to
the content of the volume, and cross-referenced to Specification Section number in Project
Manual.
1.
If operation or maintenance documentation requires more than one volume to
accommodate data, include comprehensive table of contents for all volumes in each
volume of the set.
D.
Manual Contents: Organize into sets of manageable size. Arrange contents alphabetically by
system, subsystem, and equipment. If possible, assemble instructions for subsystems,
equipment, and components of one system into a single binder.
E.
Manuals, Electronic Files: Submit manuals in the form of a multiple file composite electronic
PDF file for each manual type required.
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
017823 - 3
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
1.
2.
F.
Electronic Files: Use electronic files prepared by manufacturer where available. Where
scanning of paper documents is required, configure scanned file for minimum readable
file size.
File Names and Bookmarks: Enable bookmarking of individual documents based on file
names. Name document files to correspond to system, subsystem, and equipment
names used in manual directory and table of contents. Group documents for each system
and subsystem into individual composite bookmarked files, then create composite
manual, so that resulting bookmarks reflect the system, subsystem, and equipment
names in a readily navigated file tree. Configure electronic manual to display bookmark
panel on opening file.
Manuals, Paper Copy: Submit manuals in the form of hard copy, bound and labeled volumes.
1.
Binders: Heavy-duty, three-ring, vinyl-covered, loose-leaf binders, in thickness necessary
to accommodate contents, sized to hold 8-1/2-by-11-inch (215-by-280-mm) paper; with
clear plastic sleeve on spine to hold label describing contents and with pockets inside
covers to hold folded oversize sheets.
a.
b.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Dividers: Heavy-paper dividers with plastic-covered tabs for each section of the manual.
Mark each tab to indicate contents. Include typed list of products and major components
of equipment included in the section on each divider, cross-referenced to Specification
Section number and title of Project Manual.
Protective Plastic Sleeves: Transparent plastic sleeves designed to enclose diagnostic
software storage media for computerized electronic equipment.
Supplementary Text: Prepared on 8-1/2-by-11-inch (215-by-280-mm) white bond paper.
Drawings: Attach reinforced, punched binder tabs on drawings and bind with text.
a.
b.
2.3
If two or more binders are necessary to accommodate data of a system, organize
data in each binder into groupings by subsystem and related components. Crossreference other binders if necessary to provide essential information for proper
operation or maintenance of equipment or system.
Identify each binder on front and spine, with printed title "OPERATION AND
MAINTENANCE MANUAL," Project title or name, subject matter of contents.
Indicate volume number for multiple-volume sets.
If oversize drawings are necessary, fold drawings to same size as text pages and
use as foldouts.
If drawings are too large to be used as foldouts, fold and place drawings in labeled
envelopes and bind envelopes in rear of manual. At appropriate locations in
manual, insert typewritten pages indicating drawing titles, descriptions of contents,
and drawing locations.
EMERGENCY MANUALS
A.
Content: Organize manual into a separate section for each of the following:
1.
2.
Type of emergency.
Emergency instructions.
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
017823 - 4
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
3.
B.
Emergency procedures.
Type of Emergency: Where applicable for each type of emergency indicated below, include
instructions and procedures for each system, subsystem, piece of equipment, and component:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Fire.
Flood.
Gas leak.
Water leak.
Power failure.
Water outage.
System, subsystem, or equipment failure.
Chemical release or spill.
C.
Emergency Instructions: Describe and explain warnings, trouble indications, error messages,
and similar codes and signals. Include responsibilities of Owner's operating personnel for
notification of Installer, supplier, and manufacturer to maintain warranties.
D.
Emergency Procedures: Include the following, as applicable:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
2.4
Instructions on stopping.
Shutdown instructions for each type of emergency.
Operating instructions for conditions outside normal operating limits.
Required sequences for electric or electronic systems.
Special operating instructions and procedures.
OPERATION MANUALS
A.
Content: In addition to requirements in this Section, include operation data required in individual
Specification Sections and the following information:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
B.
System, subsystem, and equipment descriptions. Use designations for systems and
equipment indicated on Contract Documents.
Performance and design criteria if Contractor has delegated design responsibility.
Operating standards.
Operating procedures.
Operating logs.
Wiring diagrams.
Control diagrams.
Piped system diagrams.
Precautions against improper use.
License requirements including inspection and renewal dates.
Descriptions: Include the following:
1.
2.
Product name and model number. Use designations for products indicated on Contract
Documents.
Manufacturer's name.
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
017823 - 5
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
C.
Equipment identification with serial number of each component.
Equipment function.
Operating characteristics.
Limiting conditions.
Performance curves.
Engineering data and tests.
Complete nomenclature and number of replacement parts.
Operating Procedures: Include the following, as applicable:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Startup procedures.
Equipment or system break-in procedures.
Routine and normal operating instructions.
Regulation and control procedures.
Instructions on stopping.
Normal shutdown instructions.
Seasonal and weekend operating instructions.
Required sequences for electric or electronic systems.
Special operating instructions and procedures.
D.
Systems and Equipment Controls: Describe the sequence of operation, and diagram controls as
installed.
E.
Piped Systems: Diagram piping as installed, and identify color-coding where required for
identification.
2.5
PRODUCT MAINTENANCE MANUALS
A.
Content: Organize manual into a separate section for each product, material, and finish. Include
source information, product information, maintenance procedures, repair materials and sources,
and warranties and bonds, as described below.
B.
Source Information: List each product included in manual, identified by product name and
arranged to match manual's table of contents. For each product, list name, address, and
telephone number of Installer or supplier and maintenance service agent, and cross-reference
Specification Section number and title in Project Manual and drawing or schedule designation or
identifier where applicable.
C.
Product Information: Include the following, as applicable:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
D.
Product name and model number.
Manufacturer's name.
Color, pattern, and texture.
Material and chemical composition.
Reordering information for specially manufactured products.
Maintenance Procedures: Include manufacturer's written recommendations and the following:
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
017823 - 6
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Inspection procedures.
Types of cleaning agents to be used and methods of cleaning.
List of cleaning agents and methods of cleaning detrimental to product.
Schedule for routine cleaning and maintenance.
Repair instructions.
E.
Repair Materials and Sources: Include lists of materials and local sources of materials and
related services.
F.
Warranties and Bonds: Include copies of warranties and bonds and lists of circumstances and
conditions that would affect validity of warranties or bonds.
1.
2.6
Include procedures to follow and required notifications for warranty claims.
SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT MAINTENANCE MANUALS
A.
Content: For each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system, include
source information, manufacturers' maintenance documentation, maintenance procedures,
maintenance and service schedules, spare parts list and source information, maintenance
service contracts, and warranty and bond information, as described below.
B.
Source Information: List each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment included in manual,
identified by product name and arranged to match manual's table of contents. For each product,
list name, address, and telephone number of Installer or supplier and maintenance service
agent, and cross-reference Specification Section number and title in Project Manual and
drawing or schedule designation or identifier where applicable.
C.
Manufacturers' Maintenance Documentation: Manufacturers' maintenance documentation
including the following information for each component part or piece of equipment:
1.
2.
3.
4.
D.
Standard maintenance instructions and bulletins.
Drawings, diagrams, and instructions required for maintenance, including disassembly
and component removal, replacement, and assembly.
Identification and nomenclature of parts and components.
List of items recommended to be stocked as spare parts.
Maintenance Procedures: Include the following information and items that detail essential
maintenance procedures:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Test and inspection instructions.
Troubleshooting guide.
Precautions against improper maintenance.
Disassembly; component removal, repair, and replacement; and reassembly instructions.
Aligning, adjusting, and checking instructions.
Demonstration and training video recording, if available.
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
017823 - 7
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
E.
Maintenance and Service Schedules: Include service and lubrication requirements, list of
required lubricants for equipment, and separate schedules for preventive and routine
maintenance and service with standard time allotment.
1.
2.
Scheduled Maintenance and Service: Tabulate actions for daily, weekly, monthly,
quarterly, semiannual, and annual frequencies.
Maintenance and Service Record: Include manufacturers' forms for recording
maintenance.
F.
Spare Parts List and Source Information: Include lists of replacement and repair parts, with
parts identified and cross-referenced to manufacturers' maintenance documentation and local
sources of maintenance materials and related services.
G.
Maintenance Service Contracts: Include copies of maintenance agreements with name and
telephone number of service agent.
H.
Warranties and Bonds: Include copies of warranties and bonds and lists of circumstances and
conditions that would affect validity of warranties or bonds.
1.
Include procedures to follow and required notifications for warranty claims.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
MANUAL PREPARATION
A.
Operation and Maintenance Documentation Directory: Prepare a separate manual that provides
an organized reference to emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.
B.
Emergency Manual: Assemble a complete set of emergency information indicating procedures
for use by emergency personnel and by Owner's operating personnel for types of emergencies
indicated.
C.
Product Maintenance Manual: Assemble a complete set of maintenance data indicating care
and maintenance of each product, material, and finish incorporated into the Work.
D.
Operation and Maintenance Manuals: Assemble a complete set of operation and maintenance
data indicating operation and maintenance of each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment
not part of a system.
1.
2.
E.
Engage a factory-authorized service representative to assemble and prepare information
for each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system.
Prepare a separate manual for each system and subsystem, in the form of an
instructional manual for use by Owner's operating personnel.
Manufacturers' Data: Where manuals contain manufacturers' standard printed data, include only
sheets pertinent to product or component installed. Mark each sheet to identify each product or
component incorporated into the Work. If data include more than one item in a tabular format,
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
017823 - 8
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
identify each item using appropriate references from the Contract Documents. Identify data
applicable to the Work and delete references to information not applicable.
1.
F.
Drawings: Prepare drawings supplementing manufacturers' printed data to illustrate the
relationship of component parts of equipment and systems and to illustrate control sequence
and flow diagrams. Coordinate these drawings with information contained in record Drawings to
ensure correct illustration of completed installation.
1.
2.
G.
Prepare supplementary text if manufacturers' standard printed data are not available and
where the information is necessary for proper operation and maintenance of equipment
or systems.
Do not use original project record documents as part of operation and maintenance
manuals.
Comply with requirements of newly prepared record Drawings in Section 017839 "Project
Record Documents."
Comply with Section 017700 "Closeout Procedures" for schedule for submitting operation and
maintenance documentation.
END OF SECTION 017823
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
017823 - 9
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
SECTION 017839 - PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for project record documents,
including the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
Related Requirements:
1.
2.
3.
1.3
Record Drawings.
Record Specifications.
Record Product Data.
Miscellaneous record submittals.
Section 017300 "Execution" for final property survey.
Section 017700 "Closeout Procedures" for general closeout procedures.
Section 017823 "Operation and Maintenance Data" for operation and maintenance
manual requirements.
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A.
Record Drawings: Comply with the following:
1.
2.
Number of Copies: Submit one (1) set of marked-up record prints.
Number of Copies: Submit copies of record Drawings as follows:
a.
Initial Submittal:
1)
2)
3)
4)
b.
Submit one (1) paper-copy set of marked-up record prints.
Submit PDF electronic files of scanned record prints and one (1) of file
prints.
Submit record digital data files and one (1) set of plots.
Architect will indicate whether general scope of changes, additional
information recorded, and quality of drafting are acceptable.
Final Submittal:
1)
Submit three (3) paper-copy set of marked-up record prints.
PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
017839 - 1
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
2)
3)
c.
Submit PDF electronic files of scanned record prints and three (3) set of
prints.
Print each drawing, whether or not changes and additional information were
recorded.
Final Submittal:
1)
2)
3)
Submit one (1) paper-copy set of marked-up record prints.
Submit record digital data files and three (3) sets of record digital data file
plots.
Plot each drawing file, whether or not changes and additional information
were recorded.
B.
Record Specifications: Submit one (1) paper copy and annotated PDF electronic files of
Project's Specifications, including addenda and contract modifications.
C.
Record Product Data: Submit one (1) paper copy and annotated PDF electronic files and
directories of each submittal.
1.
Where record Product Data are required as part of operation and maintenance manuals,
submit duplicate marked-up Product Data as a component of manual.
D.
Miscellaneous Record Submittals: See other Specification Sections for miscellaneous recordkeeping requirements and submittals in connection with various construction activities. Submit
one (1) paper copy and annotated PDF electronic files and directories of each submittal.
E.
Reports: Submit written report weekly indicating items incorporated into project record
documents concurrent with progress of the Work, including revisions, concealed conditions,
field changes, product selections, and other notations incorporated.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
RECORD DRAWINGS
A.
Record Prints: Maintain one set of marked-up paper copies of the Contract Drawings and Shop
Drawings, incorporating new and revised drawings as modifications are issued.
1.
Preparation: Mark record prints to show the actual installation where installation varies
from that shown originally. Require individual or entity who obtained record data, whether
individual or entity is Installer, subcontractor, or similar entity, to provide information for
preparation of corresponding marked-up record prints.
a.
b.
c.
d.
Give particular attention to information on concealed elements that would be
difficult to identify or measure and record later.
Accurately record information in an acceptable drawing technique.
Record data as soon as possible after obtaining it.
Record and check the markup before enclosing concealed installations.
PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
017839 - 2
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
e.
2.
4.
5.
6.
B.
prints
to
corresponding
archive
photographic
Dimensional changes to Drawings.
Revisions to details shown on Drawings.
Depths of foundations below first floor.
Locations and depths of underground utilities.
Revisions to routing of piping and conduits.
Revisions to electrical circuitry.
Actual equipment locations.
Duct size and routing.
Locations of concealed internal utilities.
Changes made by Change Order or Construction Change Directive.
Changes made following Architect's written orders.
Details not on the original Contract Drawings.
Field records for variable and concealed conditions.
Record information on the Work that is shown only schematically.
Mark the Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings completely and accurately. Use
personnel proficient at recording graphic information in production of marked-up record
prints.
Mark record sets with erasable, red-colored pencil. Use other colors to distinguish
between changes for different categories of the Work at same location.
Mark important additional information that was either shown schematically or omitted
from original Drawings.
Note Construction Change Directive numbers, alternate numbers, Change Order
numbers, and similar identification, where applicable.
Record Digital Data Files: Immediately before inspection for Certificate of Substantial
Completion, review marked-up record prints with Architect. When authorized, prepare a full set
of corrected digital data files of the Contract Drawings, as follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
2.2
record
Content: Types of items requiring marking include, but are not limited to, the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
k.
l.
m.
n.
3.
Cross-reference
documentation.
Format: Same digital data software program, version, and operating system as the
original Contract Drawings.
Format: DWG, Version Autocad 10 or later, Microsoft Windows operating system.
Incorporate changes and additional information previously marked on record prints.
Delete, redraw, and add details and notations where applicable.
Refer instances of uncertainty to Architect for resolution.
Architect will furnish Contractor one set of digital data files of the Contract Drawings for
use in recording information.
RECORD SPECIFICATIONS
A.
Preparation: Mark Specifications to indicate the actual product installation where installation
varies from that indicated in Specifications, addenda, and contract modifications.
PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
017839 - 3
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
B.
2.3
Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations that
cannot be readily identified and recorded later.
Mark copy with the proprietary name and model number of products, materials, and
equipment furnished, including substitutions and product options selected.
Record the name of manufacturer, supplier, Installer, and other information necessary to
provide a record of selections made.
For each principal product, indicate whether record Product Data has been submitted in
operation and maintenance manuals instead of submitted as record Product Data.
Note related Change Orders, record Product Data, and record Drawings where
applicable.
Format: Submit record Specifications as scanned PDF electronic file(s) of marked-up paper
copy of Specifications.
RECORD PRODUCT DATA
A.
Preparation: Mark Product Data to indicate the actual product installation where installation
varies substantially from that indicated in Product Data submittal.
1.
2.
3.
B.
Format: Submit record Product Data as scanned PDF electronic file(s) of marked-up paper copy
of Product Data.
1.
2.4
Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations that
cannot be readily identified and recorded later.
Include significant changes in the product delivered to Project site and changes in
manufacturer's written instructions for installation.
Note related Change Orders, record Specifications, and record Drawings where
applicable.
Include record Product Data directory organized by Specification Section number and
title, electronically linked to each item of record Product Data.
MISCELLANEOUS RECORD SUBMITTALS
A.
Assemble miscellaneous records required by other Specification Sections for miscellaneous
record keeping and submittal in connection with actual performance of the Work. Bind or file
miscellaneous records and identify each, ready for continued use and reference.
B.
Format: Submit miscellaneous record submittals as scanned PDF electronic file(s) of marked-up
miscellaneous record submittals.
1.
Include miscellaneous record submittals directory organized by Specification Section
number and title, electronically linked to each item of miscellaneous record submittals.
PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
017839 - 4
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
RECORDING AND MAINTENANCE
A.
Recording: Maintain one copy of each submittal during the construction period for project record
document purposes. Post changes and revisions to project record documents as they occur; do
not wait until end of Project.
B.
Maintenance of Record Documents and Samples: Store record documents and Samples in the
field office apart from the Contract Documents used for construction. Do not use project record
documents for construction purposes. Maintain record documents in good order and in a clean,
dry, legible condition, protected from deterioration and loss. Provide access to project record
documents for Architect's reference during normal working hours.
END OF SECTION 017839
PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
017839 - 5
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
SECTION 017900 - DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for instructing Owner's personnel,
including the following:
1.
2.
3.
Demonstration of operation of systems, subsystems, and equipment.
Training in operation and maintenance of systems, subsystems, and equipment.
Demonstration and training video recordings.
B.
Allowances: Furnish demonstration and training instruction time under the Demonstration and
Training Allowance as specified in Section 012100 "Allowances."
C.
Unit Price for Instruction Time: Length of instruction time will be measured by actual time spent
performing demonstration and training in required location. No payment will be made for time
spent assembling educational materials, setting up, or cleaning up. See requirements in
Section 012200 "Unit Prices."
1.3
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A.
Instruction Program: Submit outline of instructional program for demonstration and training,
including a list of training modules and a schedule of proposed dates, times, length of
instruction time, and instructors' names for each training module. Include learning objective and
outline for each training module.
1.
Indicate proposed training modules using manufacturer-produced demonstration and
training video recordings for systems, equipment, and products in lieu of video recording
of live instructional module.
B.
Qualification Data: For instructor.
C.
Attendance Record: For each training module, submit list of participants and length of
instruction time.
D.
Evaluations: For each participant and for each training module, submit results and
documentation of performance-based test.
DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING
017900 - 1
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
1.4
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A.
Demonstration and Training Video Recordings: Submit two (2) copies within 14 days of end of
each training module.
1.
Identification: On each copy, provide an applied label with the following information:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
1.5
Name of Project.
Name and address of videographer.
Name of Architect.
Name of Construction Manager.
Name of Contractor.
Date of video recording.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Instructor Qualifications: A factory-authorized service representative, complying with
requirements in Section 014000 "Quality Requirements," experienced in operation and
maintenance procedures and training.
B.
Videographer Qualifications: A professional videographer who is experienced photographing
demonstration and training events similar to those required.
C.
Preinstruction Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in
Section 013100 "Project Management and Coordination." Review methods and procedures
related to demonstration and training including, but not limited to, the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
1.6
Inspect and discuss locations and other facilities required for instruction.
Review and finalize instruction schedule and verify availability of educational materials,
instructors' personnel, audiovisual equipment, and facilities needed to avoid delays.
Review required content of instruction.
For instruction that must occur outside, review weather and forecasted weather
conditions and procedures to follow if conditions are unfavorable.
COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate instruction schedule with Owner's operations. Adjust schedule as required to
minimize disrupting Owner's operations and to ensure availability of Owner's personnel.
B.
Coordinate instructors, including providing notification of dates, times, length of instruction time,
and course content.
C.
Coordinate content of training modules with content of approved emergency, operation, and
maintenance manuals. Do not submit instruction program until operation and maintenance data
has been reviewed and approved by Architect.
DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING
017900 - 2
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
INSTRUCTION PROGRAM
A.
Program Structure: Develop an instruction program that includes individual training modules for
each system and for equipment not part of a system, as required by individual Specification
Sections.
B.
Training Modules: Develop a learning objective and teaching outline for each module. Include a
description of specific skills and knowledge that participant is expected to master. For each
module, include instruction for the following as applicable to the system, equipment, or
component:
1.
Basis of System Design, Operational Requirements, and Criteria: Include the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
2.
Documentation: Review the following items in detail:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
3.
Emergency manuals.
Operations manuals.
Maintenance manuals.
Project record documents.
Identification systems.
Warranties and bonds.
Maintenance service agreements and similar continuing commitments.
Emergencies: Include the following, as applicable:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
4.
System, subsystem, and equipment descriptions.
Performance and design criteria if Contractor is delegated design responsibility.
Operating standards.
Regulatory requirements.
Equipment function.
Operating characteristics.
Limiting conditions.
Performance curves.
Instructions on meaning of warnings, trouble indications, and error messages.
Instructions on stopping.
Shutdown instructions for each type of emergency.
Operating instructions for conditions outside of normal operating limits.
Sequences for electric or electronic systems.
Special operating instructions and procedures.
Operations: Include the following, as applicable:
a.
b.
c.
Startup procedures.
Equipment or system break-in procedures.
Routine and normal operating instructions.
DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING
017900 - 3
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
k.
l.
m.
5.
Adjustments: Include the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
6.
Diagnostic instructions.
Test and inspection procedures.
Maintenance: Include the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
8.
Alignments.
Checking adjustments.
Noise and vibration adjustments.
Economy and efficiency adjustments.
Troubleshooting: Include the following:
a.
b.
7.
Regulation and control procedures.
Control sequences.
Safety procedures.
Instructions on stopping.
Normal shutdown instructions.
Operating procedures for emergencies.
Operating procedures for system, subsystem, or equipment failure.
Seasonal and weekend operating instructions.
Required sequences for electric or electronic systems.
Special operating instructions and procedures.
Inspection procedures.
Types of cleaning agents to be used and methods of cleaning.
List of cleaning agents and methods of cleaning detrimental to product.
Procedures for routine cleaning
Procedures for preventive maintenance.
Procedures for routine maintenance.
Instruction on use of special tools.
Repairs: Include the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
Diagnosis instructions.
Repair instructions.
Disassembly; component removal, repair, and replacement; and reassembly
instructions.
Instructions for identifying parts and components.
Review of spare parts needed for operation and maintenance.
DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING
017900 - 4
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
PREPARATION
A.
Assemble educational materials necessary for instruction, including documentation and training
module. Assemble training modules into a training manual organized in coordination with
requirements in Section 017823 "Operation and Maintenance Data."
B.
Set up instructional equipment at instruction location.
3.2
INSTRUCTION
A.
Engage qualified instructors to instruct Owner's personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain
systems, subsystems, and equipment not part of a system.
1.
2.
3.
B.
Scheduling: Provide instruction at mutually agreed on times. For equipment that requires
seasonal operation, provide similar instruction at start of each season.
1.
C.
3.3
Architect will furnish an instructor to describe basis of system design, operational
requirements, criteria, and regulatory requirements.
Owner will furnish an instructor to describe Owner's operational philosophy.
Owner will furnish Contractor with names and positions of participants.
Schedule training with Owner with at least 14 days' advance notice.
Training Location and Reference Material: Conduct training on-site in the completed and fully
operational facility using the actual equipment in-place. Conduct training using final operation
and maintenance data submittals.
DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING VIDEO RECORDINGS
A.
General: Engage a qualified commercial videographer to record demonstration and training
video recordings. Record each training module separately. Include classroom instructions and
demonstrations, board diagrams, and other visual aids, but not student practice.
1.
B.
At beginning of each training module, record each chart containing learning objective and
lesson outline.
Video: Provide minimum 640 x 480 video resolution converted to format file type acceptable to
Owner, on electronic media.
1.
2.
Electronic Media: Read-only format compact disc acceptable to Owner, with commercialgrade graphic label.
File Hierarchy: Organize folder structure and file locations according to project manual
table of contents. Provide complete screen-based menu.
DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING
017900 - 5
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
3.
4.
File Names: Utilize file names based upon name of equipment generally described in
video segment, as identified in Project specifications.
Contractor and Installer Contact File: Using appropriate software, create a file for
inclusion on the Equipment Demonstration and Training DVD that describes the following
for each Contractor involved on the Project, arranged according to Project table of
contents:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
C.
Recording: Mount camera on tripod before starting recording, unless otherwise necessary to
adequately cover area of demonstration and training. Display continuous running time.
1.
Film training session(s) in segments not to exceed 15 minutes.
a.
b.
c.
D.
Name of Contractor/Installer.
Business address.
Business phone number.
Point of contact.
E-mail address.
Produce segments to present a single significant piece of equipment per segment.
Organize segments with multiple pieces of equipment to follow order of Project
Manual table of contents.
Where a training session on a particular piece of equipment exceeds 15 minutes,
stop filming and pause training session. Begin training session again upon
commencement of new filming segment.
Light Levels: Verify light levels are adequate to properly light equipment. Verify equipment
markings are clearly visible prior to recording.
1.
Furnish additional portable lighting as required.
E.
Transcript: Provide a transcript of the narration. Display images and running time captured from
videotape opposite the corresponding narration segment.
F.
Preproduced Video Recordings: Provide video recordings used as a component of training
modules in same format as recordings of live training.
END OF SECTION 017900
DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING
017900 - 6
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
SECTION 024110 - SITE DEMOLITION
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes the following:
1.
2.
3.
B.
Disconnecting, capping or sealing, and removing site utilities. Remove existing elements if
removal is necessary to accommodate the new design. These elements include, but are not
limited to:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
1.2
Demolition and removal of structures.
Removal of below-grade construction.
Demolition and removal of site elements necessary to accommodate the new design.
These elements include, but are not limited to:
a.
Pavement, walkways, slabs, pavers, etc
b.
Fence and gates
c.
Light poles, flag poles, sign poles, etc.
d.
Landscaping and trees
e.
Underground storage tanks
Manholes and covers.
Fences and gates.
Utility meters and other equipment and exposed piping.
All abandoned pipes, ducts, and conduits, whether above or below ground.
Relocate existing construction and utilities designated to remain as required for the
design.
DEFINITIONS
A.
Remove: Detach items from existing construction and legally dispose of them off-site unless
indicated to be removed and salvaged.
1.
B.
1.3
Remove and Salvage: Detach items from existing construction and deliver them to
location predetermined by the Government.
Existing to Remain: Existing items of construction that are not to be removed and that are not
otherwise indicated to be removed, removed and salvaged.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Proposed Dust-Control Measures: Submit statement or drawing that indicates the measures
proposed for use, proposed locations, and proposed time frame for their operation. Identify
options if proposed measures are later determined to be inadequate.
B.
Schedule of Site Demolition Activities: Indicate the following:
SITE DEMOLITION
024110 - 1
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
1.
2.
3.
4.
Detailed sequence of demolition and removal work, with starting and ending dates for
each activity.
Interruption of utility services.
Coordination for shutoff, capping, and continuation of utility services.
Locations of temporary protection and means of egress, including for other tenants
affected by building demolition operations.
a.
1.4
Coordination of the government's continuing occupancy of adjacent buildings and
partial use of premises.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Regulatory Requirements:
1.
Health Hazards:
a.
b.
c.
2.
Whenever construction operations could result in worker contact with hazardous
materials, follow recommendations of an American Board of Industrial Hygiene
Certified Industrial Hygienist (CIH) employed by Contractor.
Existing Asbestos and Asbestos-Containing Materials: Comply with 29 CFR
1926.1101; complete removal is required.
Existing Lead-Based Paint: Comply with 29 CFR 1926.62; either removal or
recoating is acceptable.
Pollution Control (if present):
a.
Underground Storage Tank Removal: Comply with 40 CFR 280.70 and applicable
state and local regulations, including all responsibilities of the government,
including emptying, closure, and removal of tank, and removal of all contaminated
soil found.
1)
2)
1.5
Surplus tank contents, including petroleum products and toxic liquids, may
not be disposed of on site.
The government will accept surplus tank contents if delivered in containers
to location in same city to be determined.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Site features/structures to be demolished will be vacated and their use discontinued before start
of Work.
1.
B.
The government assumes no responsibility for structures to be demolished.
Storage or sale of removed items or materials on-site is not permitted.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
SITE DEMOLITION
024110 - 2
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Survey existing conditions and correlate with requirements indicated to determine extent of site
demolition required.
B.
Review Project Record Documents of existing construction provided by the government. The
government does not guarantee that existing conditions are the same as those indicated in
Project Record Documents.
C.
Inventory and record the condition of items to be removed and salvaged.
D.
When unanticipated mechanical, electrical, or structural elements are encountered, investigate
and measure the nature and extent of the element.
E.
Verify that hazardous materials have been remediated before proceeding with building
demolition operations.
3.2
PREPARATION
A.
Existing Utilities: Locate, identify, disconnect, and seal or cap off indicated site utilities serving
buildings and structures to be demolished.
1.
2.
3.
B.
Removed and Salvaged Items: Comply with the following:
1.
2.
3.
3.3
Arrange to shut off indicated utilities with the government project director and applicable
personnel.
If utility services are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, before proceeding
with site demolition provide temporary utilities that bypass demolition work area and that
maintain continuity of service to other buildings and structures.
Cut off pipe or conduit a minimum of 610 mm below grade. Cap, valve, or plug and seal
remaining portion of pipe or conduit after bypassing.
Clean salvaged items of dirt and demolition debris.
Pack or crate items after cleaning. Identify contents of containers.
a.
Store items in a secure area until delivery to the government.
b.
Transport items to the government's storage area designated by the government.
Protect items from damage during transport and storage.
PROTECTION
A.
Existing Facilities: Protect adjacent walkways, loading docks, building entries, and other
building facilities during demolition operations.
SITE DEMOLITION
024110 - 3
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
1.
B.
Existing Utilities: Maintain utility services indicated to remain and protect them against damage
during demolition operations.
1.
2.
3.
C.
Do not interrupt existing utilities serving adjacent occupied or operating facilities unless
authorized in writing by the government and authorities having jurisdiction.
Provide temporary services during interruptions to existing utilities, as acceptable to the
government and to authorities having jurisdiction.
Provide at least 72 hours' notice to the government if shutdown of service is required
during changeover.
Temporary Protection: Erect temporary protection, such as walks, fences, railings, canopies,
and covered passageways and as indicated.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
3.4
Existing Items to Remain: Protect construction indicated to remain against damage and
soiling during demolition. When permitted by the government, items may be removed to
a suitable, protected storage location during demolition and reinstalled in their original
locations after demolition operations are complete.
Protect existing site improvements, appurtenances, and landscaping to remain.
Erect a plainly visible fence around drip line of individual trees or around perimeter drip
line of groups of trees to remain.
Provide temporary barricades and other protection required to prevent injury to people
and damage to adjacent buildings and facilities to remain.
Protect walls, windows, roofs, and other adjacent exterior construction that are to remain
and that are exposed to building demolition operations.
Erect and maintain temporary enclosures to limit dust and dirt migration and to separate
areas from fumes and noise from occupied portions of adjacent buildings.
DEMOLITION
A.
Demolish indicated existing structures and site improvements as noted on the drawings. Use
methods required to complete the Work within limitations of governing regulations and as
follows:
1.
Do not use cutting torches until work area is cleared of flammable materials. Maintain
portable fire-suppression devices during flame-cutting operations.
B.
Engineering Surveys: Perform surveys ahead of work progress to pre-detect hazards that may
result from building demolition activities.
C.
Site Access and Temporary Controls: Conduct site demolition and debris-removal operations to
ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, walkways, and other adjacent occupied
and used facilities.
1.
Do not close or obstruct streets, walks, walkways, or other adjacent occupied or used
facilities without permission from the government and authorities having jurisdiction.
Provide alternate routes around closed or obstructed traffic ways if required by authorities
having jurisdiction.
SITE DEMOLITION
024110 - 4
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
2.
Use water mist and other suitable methods to limit spread of dust and dirt. Comply with
governing environmental-protection regulations. Do not use water when it may damage
adjacent construction or create hazardous or objectionable conditions, such as ice,
flooding, and pollution.
D.
Concrete: Cut concrete full depth at junctures with construction indicated to remain, using
power-driven saw, then remove concrete between saw cuts.
E.
Masonry: Cut masonry at junctures with construction indicated to remain, using power-driven
saw, then remove masonry between saw cuts.
F.
Equipment: Disconnect equipment at nearest fitting connection to services, complete with
service valves. Remove as whole units, complete with controls.
G.
Below-Grade Construction: Demolish below-grade construction that is within 1.5 m outside of
footprint indicated for new construction. Abandon below-grade construction outside this area.
1.
H.
Remove below-grade construction elements in their entirety.
Existing Utilities: Demolish existing utilities and below-grade utility structures that are within 1.5
m outside of footprint indicated for new construction. Abandon utilities outside this area.
1.
Fill abandoned utility structures and former utility trenches as outlined below:
i. Proof-roll subgrade with trench compaction equipment to identify soft pockets
and areas of excess yielding in accordance with Section 312000 Earth Moving.
Do not proof-roll wet or saturated subgrades.
1. Excavate soft spots, unsatisfactory soils, and areas of excessive
pumping or rutting, as determined by COR, and replace with compacted
backfill or fill as directed.
ii. Stockpile borrow soil materials and excavated satisfactory soil materials without
intermixing. Place, grade, and shape stockpiles to drain surface water. Cover to
prevent windblown dust.
1. Stockpile soil materials away from edge of excavations and existing
structures to remain. Do not store within drip line of remaining trees.
iii. Place backfill on subgrades free of mud, standing water, frost, snow, or ice.
Reconstruct subgrades damaged by freezing temperatures, frost, rain,
accumulated water, or construction activities, as directed by COR.
iv. Place and compact all backfill of satisfactory soil, in accordance with Section
2300 Earthwork.
v. Place and compact final backfill of satisfactory soil to final subgrade elevation.
I.
Existing Utilities: Demolish and remove existing utilities and below-grade utility structures.
SITE DEMOLITION
024110 - 5
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
J.
3.5
Explosives: Use of explosives is not permitted.
SITE RESTORATION
A.
3.6
Site Grading: Uniformly rough grade area of demolished construction to a smooth surface, free
from irregular surface changes. Provide a smooth transition between adjacent existing grades
and new grades.
REPAIRS
A.
General: Promptly repair damage to adjacent construction caused by site demolition
operations.
B.
Where repairs to existing surfaces are required, patch to match existing surrounding areas.
C.
Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and extend restoration into adjoining construction in
a manner that eliminates evidence of patching and refinishing.
3.7
DISPOSAL OF DEMOLISHED MATERIALS
A.
Except for items or materials indicated to be reused, salvaged, reinstalled, or otherwise
indicated to remain the government's property, remove demolished materials from Project site
and legally dispose of them.
1.
2.
Do not allow demolished materials to accumulate on-site.
Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent surfaces
and areas.
B.
Burning: Do not burn demolished materials.
C.
Disposal: Transport demolished materials off the Enmore site property and legally dispose of
them.
3.8
CLEANING
A.
Clean adjacent structures and improvements of dust, dirt, and debris caused by site demolition
operations. Return adjacent areas to condition existing before site demolition operations began.
END OF SECTION 024110
SITE DEMOLITION
024110 - 6
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
SECTION 024116 - STRUCTURE DEMOLITION
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes the following:
1.
2.
3.
B.
Disconnecting, capping or sealing, and removing site utilities. Remove existing elements as
indicated on Drawings, if removal is necessary to accommodate the new design, or as identified
elsewhere in project requirement documents. These elements include, but are not limited to:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
1.2
Demolition and removal of buildings and structures.
Demolition and removal of site improvements adjacent to a building or structure to be
demolished.
Removing below-grade construction.
Foundation walls and footings.
Concrete slabs on grade.
Pavements and curbs. Manholes and covers.
Curb inlets and catch basins.
Underground storage tanks.
Underground petroleum products piping.
Fences and gates.
Utility meters and other equipment and exposed piping.
All abandoned pipes, ducts, and conduits, whether above or below ground.
Relocate existing construction and utilities designated to remain as required for the
design.
DEFINITIONS
A.
Remove: Detach items from existing construction and legally dispose of them off-site unless
indicated to be removed and salvaged.
1.
B.
1.3
Remove and Salvage:
Project Director/COR.
Detach items from existing construction and deliver them to
Existing to Remain: Existing items of construction that are not to be removed and that are not
otherwise indicated to be removed, removed and salvaged.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Proposed Environmental-Protection, Dust-Control, and] Noise-Control Measures: Submit
statement or drawing that indicates the measures proposed for use, proposed locations, and
proposed time frame for their operation. Identify options if proposed measures are later
determined to be inadequate.
B.
Schedule of Building Demolition Activities: Indicate the following:
STRUCTURE DEMOLITION
024116 - 1
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
1.
2.
3.
4.
Detailed sequence of demolition and removal work, with starting and ending dates for
each activity.
Interruption of utility services.
Coordination for shutoff, capping, and continuation of utility services.
Locations of temporary protection and means of egress, including for other tenants
affected by building demolition operations.
a.
1.4
Coordination of the Government's continuing occupancy of adjacent buildings and
partial use of premises.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Regulatory Requirements:
1.
Health Hazards:
a.
b.
c.
2.
Whenever construction operations could result in worker contact with hazardous
materials, follow recommendations of an American Board of Industrial Hygiene
Certified Industrial Hygienist (CIH) employed by Contractor.
Existing Asbestos and Asbestos-Containing Materials: Comply with 29 CFR
1926.1101; complete removal is required.
Existing Lead-Based Paint: Comply with 29 CFR 1926.62; either removal or
recoating is acceptable.
Pollution Control:
a.
Underground Storage Tank Removal: Comply with 40 CFR 280.70 and applicable
state and local regulations, including all responsibilities of the government,
including emptying, closure, and removal of tank, and removal of all contaminated
soil found.
1)
2)
1.5
Surplus tank contents, including petroleum products and toxic liquids, may
not be disposed of on site.
Surplus tank contents will be accepted if delivered in containers to location
in same city to be determined.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Buildings to be demolished will be vacated and their use discontinued before start of the Work.
1.
B.
The Government assumes no responsibility for buildings and structures to be
demolished.
Storage or sale of removed items or materials on-site is not permitted.
STRUCTURE DEMOLITION
024116 - 2
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Survey existing conditions and correlate with requirements indicated to determine extent of
building demolition required.
B.
Review Project Record Documents of existing construction provided by the Government. The
Government does not guarantee that existing conditions are the same as those indicated in
Project Record Documents.
C.
Inventory and record the condition of items to be removed and salvaged.
D.
When unanticipated mechanical, electrical, or structural elements are encountered, investigate
and measure the nature and extent of the element.
E.
Perform an engineering survey of condition of building to determine whether removing any
element might result in structural deficiency or unplanned collapse of any portion of structure or
adjacent structures during building demolition operations.
F.
Verify that hazardous materials have been remediated before proceeding with building
demolition operations.
3.2
PREPARATION
A.
Refrigerant: Remove and store refrigerant according to 40 CFR 82.
B.
Existing Utilities: Locate, identify, disconnect, and seal or cap off indicated utilities serving
buildings and structures to be demolished.
1.
2.
3.
C.
Arrange to shut off indicated utilities with utility companies.
If utility services are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, before proceeding
with building demolition provide temporary utilities that bypass buildings and structures to
be demolished and that maintain continuity of service to other buildings and structures.
Cut off pipe or conduit a minimum of 610 mm below grade. Cap, valve, or plug and seal
remaining portion of pipe or conduit after bypassing.
Temporary Shoring: Provide and maintain interior and exterior shoring, bracing, or structural
support to preserve stability and prevent unexpected movement or collapse of construction
being demolished.
1.
Strengthen or add new supports when required during progress of demolition.
STRUCTURE DEMOLITION
024116 - 3
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
D.
Removed and Salvaged Items: Comply with the following:
1.
2.
Clean salvaged items of dirt and demolition debris.
Pack or crate items after cleaning. Identify contents of containers.
a.
b.
3.
3.3
Store items in a secure area until delivery to Project Director/COR.
Transport items to Government's storage area designated
Director/COR.
by
Project
Protect items from damage during transport and storage.
PROTECTION
A.
Existing Facilities: Protect adjacent walkways, loading docks, building entries, and other
building facilities during demolition operations.
1.
B.
Existing Utilities: Maintain utility services indicated to remain and protect them against damage
during demolition operations.
1.
2.
3.
C.
Existing Items to Remain: Protect construction indicated to remain against damage and
soiling during demolition. When permitted by Project Director/COR, items may be
removed to a suitable, protected storage location during demolition and cleaned and
reinstalled in their original locations after demolition operations are complete.
Do not interrupt existing utilities serving adjacent occupied or operating facilities unless
authorized in writing by Project Director/COR and local authorities having jurisdiction.
Provide temporary services during interruptions to existing utilities, as acceptable to the
government and to authorities having jurisdiction.
Provide at least 72 hours' notice to Project Director if shutdown of service is required
during changeover.
Temporary Protection: Erect temporary protection, such as walks, fences, railings, canopies,
and covered passageways and as indicated.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Protect existing site improvements, appurtenances, and landscaping to remain.
Erect a plainly visible fence around drip line of individual trees or around perimeter drip
line of groups of trees to remain.
Provide temporary barricades and other protection required to prevent injury to people
and damage to adjacent buildings and facilities to remain.
Provide protection to ensure safe passage of people around building demolition area and
to and from occupied portions of adjacent buildings and structures.
Protect walls, windows, roofs, and other adjacent exterior construction that are to remain
and that are exposed to building demolition operations.
Erect and maintain dustproof partitions and temporary enclosures to limit dust and dirt
migration and to separate areas from fumes and noise from occupied portions of adjacent
buildings.
STRUCTURE DEMOLITION
024116 - 4
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
3.4
DEMOLITION
A.
Demolish indicated existing buildings, structure and site improvements completely. Use
methods required to complete the Work within limitations of governing regulations and as
follows:
1.
2.
3.
Do not use cutting torches until work area is cleared of flammable materials. Maintain fire
watch and portable fire-suppression devices during flame-cutting operations.
Maintain adequate ventilation when using cutting torches.
Locate building demolition equipment and remove debris and materials so as not to
impose excessive loads on supporting walls, floors, or framing.
B.
Engineering Surveys: Perform surveys as the Work progresses to detect hazards that may
result from building demolition activities.
C.
Site Access and Temporary Controls: Conduct building demolition and debris-removal
operations to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, walkways, and other
adjacent occupied and used facilities.
1.
2.
Do not close or obstruct streets, walks, walkways, or other adjacent occupied or used
facilities without permission from Project Director/COR and local authorities having
jurisdiction. Provide alternate routes around closed or obstructed traffic ways if required
by authorities having jurisdiction.
Use water mist and other suitable methods to limit spread of dust and dirt. Comply with
governing environmental-protection regulations. Do not use water when it may damage
adjacent construction or create hazardous or objectionable conditions, such as ice,
flooding, and pollution.
D.
Proceed with demolition of structural framing members systematically, from higher to lower
level. Complete building demolition operations above each floor or tier before disturbing
supporting members on the next lower level.
E.
Remove debris from elevated portions by chute, hoist, or other device that will convey debris to
grade level in a controlled descent.
1.
Remove structural framing members and lower to ground by method suitable to minimize
ground impact or dust generation.
F.
Concrete: Cut concrete full depth at junctures with construction indicated to remain, using
power-driven saw, then remove concrete between saw cuts.
G.
Masonry: Cut masonry at junctures with construction indicated to remain, using power-driven
saw, then remove masonry between saw cuts.
STRUCTURE DEMOLITION
024116 - 5
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
H.
Concrete Slabs-on-Grade: Saw-cut perimeter of area to be demolished at junctures with
construction indicated to remain, then break up and remove.
1.
2.
Structural Steel: Dismantle field connections without bending or damaging steel
members. Do not use flame-cutting torches unless otherwise authorized by Project
Director/COR.
Transport steel trusses and joists as whole units without dismantling them further.
I.
Carpet and Pad: Remove in large pieces and roll tightly after removing demolition debris, trash,
adhesive, and tack strips.
J.
Building Components: Remove metal gratings, metal ladders, doors, windows, door hardware,
cabinets, mirrors, chalkboards and marker boards, tackboards, toilet accessories, plumbing
fixtures, and light fixtures.
K.
Equipment: Disconnect equipment at nearest fitting connection to services, complete with
service valves. Remove as whole units, complete with controls.
L.
Below-Grade Construction: Abandon foundation walls and other below-grade construction. Cut
below-grade construction flush with grade.
M.
Below-Grade Construction: Demolish foundation walls and other below-grade construction as
shown on the drawings.
1.
Remove below-grade construction, including basements, foundation walls, and footings,
completely.
N.
Existing Utilities: Demolish and remove existing utilities and below-grade utility structures as
shown on the drawings.
O.
Explosives: Use of explosives is not permitted.
3.5
SITE RESTORATION
A.
Below-Grade Areas:
construction.
B.
Site Grading: Uniformly rough grade area of demolished construction to a smooth surface, free
from irregular surface changes. Provide a smooth transition between adjacent existing grades
and new grades.
3.6
Rough grade below-grade areas ready for further excavation or new
REPAIRS
A.
General: Promptly repair damage to adjacent construction caused by building demolition
operations.
STRUCTURE DEMOLITION
024116 - 6
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
B.
Where repairs to existing surfaces are required, patch to produce surfaces suitable for new
materials.
C.
Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and extend restoration into adjoining construction in
a manner that eliminates evidence of patching and refinishing.
3.7
DISPOSAL OF DEMOLISHED MATERIALS
A.
Except for items or materials indicated to be reused, salvaged, reinstalled, or otherwise
indicated to remain Governments property, remove demolished materials from Project site and
legally dispose of them.
1.
2.
Do not allow demolished materials to accumulate on-site.
Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent surfaces
and areas.
B.
Burning: Do not burn demolished materials.
C.
Disposal: Transport demolished materials off the Government's property and legally dispose of
them.
3.8
CLEANING
A.
Clean adjacent structures and improvements of dust, dirt, and debris caused by building
demolition operations. Return adjacent areas to condition existing before building demolition
operations began.
END OF SECTION 024116
STRUCTURE DEMOLITION
024116 - 7
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
SECTION 024119 - SELECTIVE DEMOLITION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
2.
B.
Related Requirements:
1.
2.
3.
4.
1.3
Demolition and removal of selected portions of building or structure.
Demolition and removal of selected site elements.
Section 011000 "Summary" for restrictions on the use of the premises, Owner-occupancy
requirements, and phasing requirements.
Section 015639 "Temporary Tree and Plant Protection" for temporary protection of
existing trees and plants that are affected by selective demolition.
Section 017300 "Execution" for cutting and patching procedures.
Section 311000 "Site Clearing" for site clearing and removal of above- and below-grade
improvements.
DEFINITIONS
A.
Remove: Detach items from existing construction and legally dispose of them off-site unless
indicated to be removed and salvaged or removed and reinstalled.
B.
Remove and Salvage: Carefully detach from existing construction, in a manner to prevent
damage, and deliver to Owner.
C.
Remove and Reinstall: Detach items from existing construction, prepare for reuse, and reinstall
where indicated.
D.
Existing to Remain: Existing items of construction that are not to be permanently removed and
that are not otherwise indicated to be removed, removed and salvaged, or removed and
reinstalled.
1.4
MATERIALS OWNERSHIP
A.
Unless otherwise indicated, demolition waste becomes property of Contractor.
SELECTIVE DEMOLITION
024119 - 1
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
B.
Historic items, relics, antiques, and similar objects including, but not limited to, cornerstones and
their contents, commemorative plaques and tablets, and other items of interest or value to
Owner that may be uncovered during demolition remain the property of Owner.
1.
1.5
Carefully salvage in a manner to prevent damage and promptly return to Owner.
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A.
Qualification Data: For refrigerant recovery technician.
B.
Proposed Protection Measures: Submit report that indicates the measures proposed for
protecting individuals and property, for environmental protection, for dust control and, for noise
control. Indicate proposed locations and construction of barriers.
C.
Schedule of Selective Demolition Activities: Indicate the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Detailed sequence of selective demolition and removal work, with starting and ending
dates for each activity. Ensure Owner's other tenants' on-site operations are
uninterrupted.
Interruption of utility services. Indicate how long utility services will be interrupted.
Coordination for shutoff, capping, and continuation of utility services.
Use of elevator and stairs.
Coordination of Owner's continuing occupancy of portions of existing building, to remain
until Phase II Demolition, and of Owner's partial occupancy of completed Work.
D.
Inventory: Submit a list of items to be removed and salvaged and deliver to Owner prior to start
of demolition: Aluminum light poles and fixtures.
E.
Predemolition Photographs or Video: Submit before Work begins.
1.6
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A.
Inventory: Submit a list of items that have been removed and salvaged.
B.
Landfill Records: Indicate receipt and acceptance of hazardous wastes by a landfill facility
licensed to accept hazardous wastes.
1.7
FIELD CONDITIONS
A.
Owner will occupy portions of building immediately adjacent to selective demolition area.
Conduct selective demolition so Owner's operations will not be disrupted.
B.
Conditions existing at time of inspection for bidding purpose will be maintained by Owner as far
as practical.
SELECTIVE DEMOLITION
024119 - 2
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
C.
Notify Architect of discrepancies between existing conditions and Drawings before proceeding
with selective demolition.
D.
Hazardous Materials: It is not expected that hazardous materials will be encountered in the
Work.
1.
2.
E.
Hazardous materials will be removed by Owner before start of the Work.
If suspected hazardous materials are encountered, do not disturb; immediately notify
Architect and Owner. Hazardous materials will be removed by Owner under a separate
contract.
Utility Service: Maintain existing utilities indicated to remain in service and protect them against
damage during selective demolition operations.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
Regulatory Requirements: Comply with governing EPD notification regulations before beginning
selective demolition. Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities having
jurisdiction.
B.
Standards: Comply with ANSI/ASSE A10.6 and NFPA 241.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Verify that utilities have been disconnected and capped before starting selective demolition
operations.
B.
Review record documents of existing construction provided by Owner. Owner does not
guarantee that existing conditions are same as those indicated in record documents.
C.
Survey existing conditions and correlate with requirements indicated to determine extent of
selective demolition required.
D.
When unanticipated mechanical, electrical, or structural elements that conflict with intended
function or design are encountered, investigate and measure the nature and extent of conflict.
Promptly submit a written report to Architect.
E.
Survey of Existing Conditions: Record existing conditions by use of preconstruction
photographs.
SELECTIVE DEMOLITION
024119 - 3
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
1.
2.
3.2
Inventory and record the condition of items to be removed and salvaged. Provide
photographs of conditions that might be misconstrued as damage caused by salvage
operations.
Before selective demolition or removal of existing building elements that will be
reproduced or duplicated in final Work, make permanent record of measurements,
materials, and construction details required to make exact reproduction.
UTILITY SERVICES AND MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
A.
Existing Services/Systems to Remain: Maintain services/systems indicated to remain and
protect them against damage.
1.
B.
Comply with requirements for existing services/systems interruptions specified in
Section 011000 "Summary."
Existing Services/Systems to Be Removed, Relocated, or Abandoned: Locate, identify,
disconnect, and seal or cap off indicated utility services and mechanical/electrical systems
serving areas to be selectively demolished.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Contractor will arrange to shut off indicated services/systems when requested by Subcontractor.
Arrange to shut off indicated utilities with utility companies.
If services/systems are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, provide
temporary services/systems that bypass area of selective demolition and that maintain
continuity of services/systems to other parts of building.
Disconnect, demolish, and remove fire-suppression systems, plumbing, and HVAC
systems, equipment, and components indicated to be removed.
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
Piping to Be Removed: Remove portion of piping indicated to be removed and cap
or plug remaining piping with same or compatible piping material.
Piping to Be Abandoned in Place: Drain piping and cap or plug piping with same or
compatible piping material.
Equipment to Be Removed: Disconnect and cap services and remove equipment.
Equipment to Be Removed and Reinstalled: Disconnect and cap services and
remove, clean, and store equipment; when appropriate, reinstall, reconnect, and
make equipment operational.
Equipment to Be Removed and Salvaged: Disconnect and cap services and
remove equipment and deliver to Owner.
Ducts to Be Removed: Remove portion of ducts indicated to be removed and plug
remaining ducts with same or compatible ductwork material.
Ducts to Be Abandoned in Place: Cap or plug ducts with same or compatible
ductwork material.
SELECTIVE DEMOLITION
024119 - 4
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
3.3
PREPARATION
A.
Site Access and Temporary Controls: Conduct selective demolition and debris-removal
operations to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, walkways, and other
adjacent occupied and used facilities.
1.
B.
Temporary Facilities: Provide temporary barricades and other protection required to prevent
injury to people and damage to adjacent buildings and facilities to remain.
1.
3.4
Comply with requirements for access and protection specified in Section 015000
"Temporary Facilities and Controls."
Provide protection to ensure safe passage of people around selective demolition area
and to and from occupied portions of building.
SELECTIVE DEMOLITION, GENERAL
A.
General: Demolish and remove existing construction only to the extent required by new
construction and as indicated. Use methods required to complete the Work within limitations of
governing regulations and as follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Proceed with selective demolition systematically, from higher to lower level. Complete
selective demolition operations above each floor or tier before disturbing supporting
members on the next lower level.
Neatly cut openings and holes plumb, square, and true to dimensions required. Use
cutting methods least likely to damage construction to remain or adjoining construction.
Use hand tools or small power tools designed for sawing or grinding, not hammering and
chopping, to minimize disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings to
remain.
Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces to avoid marring
existing finished surfaces.
Do not use cutting torches until work area is cleared of flammable materials. At
concealed spaces, such as duct and pipe interiors, verify condition and contents of
hidden space before starting flame-cutting operations. Maintain[ fire watch and] portable
fire-suppression devices during flame-cutting operations.
Maintain adequate ventilation when using cutting torches.
Remove decayed, vermin-infested, or otherwise dangerous or unsuitable materials and
promptly dispose of off-site.
Remove structural framing members and lower to ground by method suitable to avoid
free fall and to prevent ground impact or dust generation.
Locate selective demolition equipment and remove debris and materials so as not to
impose excessive loads on supporting walls, floors, or framing.
Dispose of demolished items and materials promptly.
SELECTIVE DEMOLITION
024119 - 5
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
3.5
SELECTIVE DEMOLITION PROCEDURES FOR SPECIFIC MATERIALS
A.
Concrete: Demolish in small sections. Using power-driven saw, cut concrete to a depth of at
least 3/4 inch (19 mm) at junctures with construction to remain. Dislodge concrete from
reinforcement at perimeter of areas being demolished, cut reinforcement, and then remove
remainder of concrete. Neatly trim openings to dimensions indicated.
B.
Masonry: Demolish in small sections. Cut masonry at junctures with construction to remain,
using power-driven saw, then remove masonry between saw cuts.
C.
Concrete Slabs-on-Grade: Saw-cut perimeter of area to be demolished, then break up and
remove.
3.6
DISPOSAL OF DEMOLISHED MATERIALS
A.
General: Except for items or materials indicated to be recycled, reused, salvaged, reinstalled, or
otherwise indicated to remain Owner's property, remove demolished materials from Project
site and legally dispose of them in an EPD-approved landfill.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Do not allow demolished materials to accumulate on-site.
Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent surfaces
and areas.
Remove debris from elevated portions of building by chute, hoist, or other device that will
convey debris to grade level in a controlled descent.
Comply with requirements specified in Section 017419 "Construction Waste Management
and Disposal."
B.
Burning: Do not burn demolished materials.
C.
Disposal: Transport demolished materials and dispose of at designated spoil areas on Owner's
property.
D.
Disposal: Transport demolished materials off Owner's property and legally dispose of them.
3.7
CLEANING
A.
3.8
Clean adjacent structures and improvements of dust, dirt, and debris caused by selective
demolition operations. Return adjacent areas to condition existing before selective demolition
operations began.
SELECTIVE DEMOLITION SCHEDULE
A.
Demolition Phase I: Five (5) existing buildngs have been raised to the ground, and one (1)
building, the Lepto Spiro Laboratory, shall remain in operation until Phase II demolition.
SELECTIVE DEMOLITION
024119 - 6
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
1.
Phase I demolition activities include the removal of all foundations slabs, utility structures,
and other site elements identified on the Site Demolition Plan.
2.
Phase II demolition activities will include the removal of similar sub-structure and
undergraound items associated with the Lepto Spiro Laboratory. The Ministry of Health
will be responsible for building demolition and hazardous material abatement and
removal of this structure.
END OF SECTION 024119
SELECTIVE DEMOLITION
024119 - 7
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
SECTION 033000 - CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
Section includes cast-in-place concrete, including formwork, reinforcement, concrete materials,
mixture design, placement procedures, and finishes, for the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
B.
Related Sections:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
1.3
Footings.
Foundation walls.
Slabs-on-grade.
Suspended slabs.
Concrete toppings.
Building frame members.
Building walls.
Section 033300 "Architectural Concrete" for general building applications of specially
finished formed concrete.
Section 035300 "Concrete Topping" for emery- and iron-aggregate concrete floor
toppings.
Section 312000 "Earth Moving" for drainage fill under slabs-on-grade.
Section 321313 "Concrete Paving" for concrete pavement and walks.
Section 321316 "Decorative Concrete Paving" for decorative concrete pavement and
walks.
DEFINITIONS
A.
1.4
Cementitious Materials: Portland cement alone or in combination with one or more of the
following: blended hydraulic cement, fly ash and other pozzolans, ground granulated blastfurnace slag, and silica fume; subject to compliance with requirements.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
033000 - 1
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
B.
Design Mixtures: For each concrete mixture. Submit alternate design mixtures when
characteristics of materials, Project conditions, weather, test results, or other circumstances
warrant adjustments.
1.
Indicate amounts of mixing water to be withheld for later addition at Project site.
C.
Steel Reinforcement Shop Drawings: Placing drawings that detail fabrication, bending, and
placement. Include bar sizes, lengths, material, grade, bar schedules, stirrup spacing, bent bar
diagrams, bar arrangement, splices and laps, mechanical connections, tie spacing, hoop
spacing, and supports for concrete reinforcement.
D.
Formwork Shop Drawings: Prepared by or under the supervision of a qualified professional
engineer detailing fabrication, assembly, and support of formwork.
1.
E.
Construction Joint Layout:
structure.
1.
1.5
Shoring and Reshoring: Indicate proposed schedule and sequence of stripping
formwork, shoring removal, and reshoring installation and removal.
Indicate proposed construction joints required to construct the
Location of construction joints is subject to approval of the Architect.
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A.
Qualification Data: For Installer, manufacturer and testing agency.
B.
Welding certificates.
C.
Material Certificates: For each of the following, signed by manufacturers:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
D.
Cementitious materials.
Admixtures.
Form materials and form-release agents.
Steel reinforcement and accessories.
Waterstops.
Curing compounds.
Floor and slab treatments.
Bonding agents.
Adhesives.
Vapor retarders.
Semirigid joint filler.
Joint-filler strips.
Repair materials.
Material Test Reports: For the following, from a qualified testing agency, indicating compliance
with requirements:
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
033000 - 2
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
1.
Aggregates. Include service record data indicating absence of deleterious expansion of
concrete due to alkali aggregate reactivity.
E.
Floor surface flatness and levelness measurements indicating compliance with specified
tolerances.
F.
Field quality-control reports.
G.
Minutes of preinstallation conference.
1.6
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who employs on Project personnel qualified as ACIcertified Flatwork Technician and Finisher and a supervisor who is an ACI-certified Concrete
Flatwork Technician.
B.
Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing ready-mixed concrete
products and that complies with ASTM C 94/C 94M requirements for production facilities and
equipment.
1.
C.
Manufacturer certified according to NRMCA's "Certification of Ready Mixed Concrete
Production Facilities."
Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency, acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction, qualified according to ASTM C 1077 and ASTM E 329 for testing indicated.
1.
Personnel conducting field tests shall be qualified as ACI Concrete Field Testing
Technician, Grade 1, according to ACI CP-1 or an equivalent certification program.
2.
Personnel performing laboratory tests shall be ACI-certified Concrete Strength Testing
Technician and Concrete Laboratory Testing Technician - Grade I. Testing Agency
laboratory supervisor shall be an ACI-certified Concrete Laboratory Testing Technician Grade II.
D.
Source Limitations: Obtain each type or class of cementitious material of the same brand from
the same manufacturer's plant, obtain aggregate from single source, and obtain admixtures
from single source from single manufacturer.
E.
Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.4/D 1.4M,
"Structural Welding Code - Reinforcing Steel."
F.
ACI Publications: Comply with the following unless modified by requirements in the Contract
Documents:
1.
2.
ACI 301, "Specifications for Structural Concrete," Sections 1 through 5.
ACI 117, "Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials."
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
033000 - 3
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
G.
Concrete Testing Service: Engage a qualified independent testing agency to perform material
evaluation tests and to design concrete mixtures.
H.
Mockups: Cast concrete slab-on-grade and formed-surface panels to demonstrate typical
joints, surface finish, texture, tolerances, floor treatments, and standard of workmanship.
1.
2.
I.
Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site
1.
1.7
Build panel approximately 200 sq. ft. (18.6 sq. m) for slab-on-grade and 100 sq. ft. (9.3
sq. m) for formed surface in the location indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by
Architect.
Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of
Substantial Completion.
Review special inspection and testing and inspecting agency procedures for field quality
control, concrete finishes and finishing, hot-weather concreting procedures, curing
procedures, construction contraction and isolation joints, and joint-filler strips, semirigid
joint fillers, forms and form removal limitations, shoring and reshoring procedures, vaporretarder installation, [anchor rod and anchorage device installation tolerances, steel
reinforcement installation, floor and slab flatness and levelness measurement, concrete
repair procedures, and concrete protection.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Steel Reinforcement: Deliver, store, and handle steel reinforcement to prevent bending and
damage.
B.
Waterstops: Store waterstops under cover to protect from moisture, sunlight, dirt, oil, and other
contaminants.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
FORM-FACING MATERIALS
A.
Smooth-Formed Finished Concrete: Form-facing panels that will provide continuous, true, and
smooth concrete surfaces. Furnish in largest practicable sizes to minimize number of joints.
1.
2.
Plywood, metal, or other approved panel materials.
Exterior-grade plywood panels, suitable for concrete forms, complying with DOC PS 1,
and as follows:
a.
b.
c.
d.
High-density overlay, Class 1 or better.
Medium-density overlay, Class 1 or better; mill-release agent treated and edge
sealed.
Structural 1, B-B or better; mill oiled and edge sealed.
B-B (Concrete Form), Class 1 or better; mill oiled and edge sealed.
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
033000 - 4
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
B.
Rough-Formed Finished Concrete: Plywood, lumber, metal, or another approved material.
Provide lumber dressed on at least two edges and one side for tight fit.
C.
Chamfer Strips: Wood, metal, PVC, or rubber strips, 3/4 by 3/4 inch (19 by 19 mm), minimum.
D.
Rustication Strips: Wood, metal, PVC, or rubber strips, kerfed for ease of form removal.
E.
Form-Release Agent: Commercially formulated form-release agent that will not bond with,
stain, or adversely affect concrete surfaces and will not impair subsequent treatments of
concrete surfaces.
1.
F.
2.2
Formulate form-release agent with rust inhibitor for steel form-facing materials.
Form Ties: Factory-fabricated, removable or snap-off metal or glass-fiber-reinforced plastic
form ties designed to resist lateral pressure of fresh concrete on forms and to prevent spalling of
concrete on removal.
STEEL REINFORCEMENT
A.
Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60 (Grade 420), deformed.
B.
Low-Alloy-Steel Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 706/A 706M, deformed.
C.
Epoxy-Coated Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60 (Grade 420) epoxy coated,
with less than 2 percent damaged coating in each 12-inch (300-mm) bar length.
D.
Plain-Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 185/A 185M, plain, fabricated from as-drawn
steel wire into flat sheets.
E.
Epoxy-Coated Welded Wire Reinforcement:
plain steel.
2.3
ASTM A 884/A 884M, Class A coated, Type 1,
REINFORCEMENT ACCESSORIES
A.
Joint Dowel Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60 (Grade 420), plain-steel bars, cut true to
length with ends square and free of burrs.
B.
Epoxy-Coated Joint Dowel Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60 (Grade 420), plain-steel bars,
ASTM A 775/A 775M epoxy coated.
C.
Epoxy Repair Coating: Liquid, two-part, epoxy repair coating; compatible with epoxy coating on
reinforcement and complying with ASTM A 775/A 775M.
D.
Bar Supports: Bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing, supporting, and
fastening reinforcing bars and welded wire reinforcement in place. Manufacture bar supports
from steel wire, plastic, or precast concrete according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice,"
of greater compressive strength than concrete and as follows:
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
033000 - 5
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
1.
2.
2.4
For concrete surfaces exposed to view where legs of wire bar supports contact forms,
use CRSI Class 1 plastic-protected steel wire or CRSI Class 2 stainless-steel bar
supports.
For epoxy-coated reinforcement, use epoxy-coated or other dielectric-polymer-coated
wire bar supports.
CONCRETE MATERIALS
A.
Cementitious Material: Use the following cementitious materials, of the same type, brand, and
source, throughout Project:
1.
Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I/II, white. Supplement with the following:
a.
b.
B.
Normal-Weight Aggregates: ASTM C 33, coarse aggregate or better, graded. Provide
aggregates from a single source with documented service record data of at least 10 years'
satisfactory service in similar applications and service conditions using similar aggregates and
cementitious materials.
1.
2.
C.
2.5
Fly Ash: ASTM C 618, Class F or C.
Ground Granulated Blast-Furnace Slag: ASTM C 989, Grade 100 or 120.
Maximum Coarse-Aggregate Size: 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) nominal.
Fine Aggregate: Free of materials with deleterious reactivity to alkali in cement.
Water: ASTM C 94/C 94M and potable.
ADMIXTURES
A.
Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260.
B.
Chemical Admixtures: Provide admixtures certified by manufacturer to be compatible with other
admixtures and that will not contribute water-soluble chloride ions exceeding those permitted in
hardened concrete. Do not use calcium chloride or admixtures containing calcium chloride.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
C.
Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type A.
Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type B.
Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type D.
High-Range, Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type F.
High-Range, Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type G.
Plasticizing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 1017/C 1017M, Type II.
Set-Accelerating Corrosion-Inhibiting Admixture: Commercially formulated, anodic inhibitor or
mixed cathodic and anodic inhibitor; capable of forming a protective barrier and minimizing
chloride reactions with steel reinforcement in concrete and complying with
ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type C.
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
033000 - 6
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
1.
Products: Available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not
limited to, the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
2.6
Axim Italcementi Group, Inc.; CATEXOL CN-CI.
BASF Construction Chemicals - Building Systems; Rheocrete CNI.
Euclid Chemical Company (The), an RPM company; [ARRMATECT] [EUCON
BCN] [EUCON CIA].
Grace Construction Products, W. R. Grace & Co.; DCI.
Sika Corporation; Sika CNI.
WATERSTOPS
A.
Flexible Rubber Waterstops:
CE CRD-C 513, with factory-installed metal eyelets, for
embedding in concrete to prevent passage of fluids through joints. Factory fabricate corners,
intersections, and directional changes.
1.
Manufacturers: Available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into
the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a.
b.
2.
3.
B.
Profile: Flat, dumbbell with center bulb
Dimensions: 6 inches by 3/8 inch thick (150 mm by 10 mm thick); nontapered.
Flexible PVC Waterstops: CE CRD-C 572, with factory-installed metal eyelets, for embedding
in concrete to prevent passage of fluids through joints. Factory fabricate corners, intersections,
and directional changes.
1.
Manufacturers: Available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into
the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
2.
3.
2.7
Greenstreak.
Williams Products, Inc.
BoMetals, Inc.
Greenstreak.
Paul Murphy Plastics Company.
Vinylex Corp.
Profile: Flat, dumbbell with center bulb.
Dimensions: 6 inches by 3/8 inch thick (150 mm by 10 mm thick); nontapered.
VAPOR RETARDERS
A.
Sheet Vapor Retarder: ASTM E 1745, Class A. Include manufacturer's recommended adhesive
or pressure-sensitive tape.
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
033000 - 7
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
1.
Products: available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not
limited to, the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
Fortifiber Building Systems Group; Moistop Ultra 15.
Grace Construction Products, W. R. Grace & Co.; Florprufe 120.
Meadows, W. R., Inc.; Perminator 15 mil.
Stego Industries, LLC; Stego Wrap 15 mil Class A
B.
Granular Fill: Clean mixture of crushed stone or crushed or uncrushed gravel; ASTM D 448,
Size 57, with 100 percent passing a 1-1/2-inch (37.5-mm) sieve and 0 to 5 percent passing a
No. 8 (2.36-mm) sieve.
C.
Fine-Graded Granular Material: Clean mixture of crushed stone, crushed gravel, and
manufactured or natural sand; ASTM D 448, Size 10, with 100 percent passing a 3/8-inch (9.5mm) sieve, 10 to 30 percent passing a No. 100 (0.15-mm) sieve, and at least 5 percent passing
No. 200 (0.075-mm) sieve; complying with deleterious substance limits of ASTM C 33 for fine
aggregates.
2.8
FLOOR AND SLAB TREATMENTS
A.
Slip-Resistive Aluminum Granule Finish: Factory-graded, packaged, rustproof, nonglazing,
abrasive aggregate of not less than 95 percent fused aluminum-oxide granules.
1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, Available products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a.
b.
c.
B.
2.9
Anti-Hydro International, Inc.; A-H Alox.
BASF Construction Chemicals - Building Systems; Frictex NS.
L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc.; Grip It AO.
Emery Dry-Shake Floor Hardener: Unpigmented, factory-packaged, dry combination of
portland cement, graded emery aggregate, and plasticizing admixture; with emery aggregate
consisting of no less than 60 percent of total aggregate content.
LIQUID FLOOR TREATMENTS
A.
Penetrating Liquid Floor Treatment: Clear, chemically reactive, waterborne solution of inorganic
silicate or siliconate materials and proprietary components; odorless; that penetrates, hardens,
and densifies concrete surfaces.
1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, [provide the following] [provide one
of the following] [available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but
are not limited to, the following]:
a.
b.
c.
Curecrete Distribution Inc.; Ashford Formula.
Euclid Chemical Company (The), an RPM company; Euco Diamond Hard.
Meadows, W. R., Inc.; LIQUI-HARD.
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
033000 - 8
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
2.10
A.
CURING MATERIALS
Evaporation Retarder: Waterborne, monomolecular film forming, manufactured for application
to fresh concrete.
1.
Products: Available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not
limited to, the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
BASF Construction Chemicals - Building Systems; Confilm.
Euclid Chemical Company (The), an RPM company; Eucobar.
Meadows, W. R., Inc.; EVAPRE.
Sika Corporation; SikaFilm.
B.
Absorptive Cover: AASHTO M 182, Class 2, burlap cloth made from jute or kenaf, weighing
approximately 9 oz./sq. yd. (305 g/sq. m) when dry.
C.
Moisture-Retaining Cover: ASTM C 171, polyethylene film or white burlap-polyethylene sheet.
D.
Water: Potable.
E.
Clear, Waterborne, Membrane-Forming Curing Compound:
dissipating.
1.
Products: Available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not
limited to, the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
F.
ASTM C 309, Type 1, Class B,
BASF Construction Chemicals - Building Systems; Kure 200.
Euclid Chemical Company (The), an RPM company; Kurez W VOX; TAMMSCURE
WB 30C.
Meadows, W. R., Inc.; 1100-CLEAR.
Vexcon Chemicals, Inc.; Certi-Vex Enviocure 100.
Clear, Waterborne, Membrane-Forming Curing Compound: ASTM C 309, Type 1, Class B,
nondissipating, certified by curing compound manufacturer to not interfere with bonding of floor
covering.
1.
Products: Available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not
limited to, the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
BASF Construction Chemicals - Building Systems; Kure-N-Seal WB.
Euclid Chemical Company (The), an RPM company; Aqua
Clearseal WB 150.
Meadows, W. R., Inc.; Vocomp-20.
Vexcon Chemicals, Inc.; Starseal 309.
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
Cure VOX;
033000 - 9
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
2.11
RELATED MATERIALS
A.
Expansion- and Isolation-Joint-Filler Strips: ASTM D 1751, asphalt-saturated cellulosic fiber or
ASTM D 1752, cork or self-expanding cork.
B.
Semirigid Joint Filler: Two-component, semirigid, 100 percent solids, epoxy resin with a Type A
shore durometer hardness of 80 per ASTM D 2240.
C.
Bonding Agent: ASTM C 1059/C 1059M, Type II, non-redispersible, acrylic emulsion or styrene
butadiene.
D.
Epoxy Bonding Adhesive: ASTM C 881, two-component epoxy resin, capable of humid curing
and bonding to damp surfaces, of class suitable for application temperature and of grade to suit
requirements, and as follows:
1.
Types IV and V, load bearing, for bonding hardened or freshly mixed concrete to
hardened concrete.
E.
Reglets: Fabricate reglets of not less than 0.022-inch- (0.55-mm-) thick, galvanized-steel sheet.
Temporarily fill or cover face opening of reglet to prevent intrusion of concrete or debris.
F.
Dovetail Anchor Slots: Hot-dip galvanized-steel sheet, not less than 0.034 inch (0.85 mm) thick,
with bent tab anchors. Temporarily fill or cover face opening of slots to prevent intrusion of
concrete or debris.
2.12
A.
REPAIR MATERIALS
Repair Underlayment: Cement-based, polymer-modified, self-leveling product that can be
applied in thicknesses from 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) and that can be feathered at edges to match
adjacent floor elevations.
1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
Cement Binder: ASTM C 150, portland cement or hydraulic or blended hydraulic cement
as defined in ASTM C 219.
Primer: Product of underlayment manufacturer recommended for substrate, conditions,
and application.
Aggregate: Well-graded, washed gravel, 1/8 to 1/4 inch (3.2 to 6 mm) or coarse sand as
recommended by underlayment manufacturer.
Compressive Strength: Not less than 4100 psi (29 MPa) at 28 days when tested
according to ASTM C 109/C 109M.
Repair Overlayment: Cement-based, polymer-modified, self-leveling product that can be
applied in thicknesses from 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) and that can be filled in over a scarified surface to
match adjacent floor elevations.
1.
2.
Cement Binder: ASTM C 150, portland cement or hydraulic or blended hydraulic cement
as defined in ASTM C 219.
Primer: Product of topping manufacturer recommended for substrate, conditions, and
application.
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
033000 - 10
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
3.
4.
2.13
A.
CONCRETE MIXTURES, GENERAL
Prepare design mixtures for each type and strength of concrete, proportioned on the basis of
laboratory trial mixture or field test data, or both, according to ACI 301.
1.
B.
Aggregate: Well-graded, washed gravel, 1/8 to 1/4 inch (3.2 to 6 mm) or coarse sand as
recommended by topping manufacturer.
Compressive Strength: Not less than 5000 psi (34.5 MPa) at 28 days when tested
according to ASTM C 109/C 109M.
Use a qualified independent testing agency for preparing and reporting proposed mixture
designs based on laboratory trial mixtures.
Cementitious Materials: Limit percentage, by weight, of cementitious materials other than
portland cement in concrete as follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Fly Ash: 25 percent.
Combined Fly Ash and Pozzolan: 25 percent.
Ground Granulated Blast-Furnace Slag: 50 percent.
Combined Fly Ash or Pozzolan and Ground Granulated Blast-Furnace Slag: 50 percent
portland cement minimum, with fly ash or pozzolan not exceeding 25 percent.
C.
Limit water-soluble, chloride-ion content in hardened concrete to 1.00 percent by weight of
cement.
D.
Admixtures: Use admixtures according to manufacturer's written instructions.
1.
2.
3.
2.14
A.
CONCRETE MIXTURES FOR BUILDING ELEMENTS
Footings: Proportion normal-weight concrete mixture as follows:
1.
2.
3.
B.
Use water-reducing, high-range water-reducing, or plasticizing admixture in concrete, as
required, for placement and workability.
Use water-reducing and retarding admixture when required by high temperatures, low
humidity, or other adverse placement conditions.
Use water-reducing admixture in pumped concrete, concrete for heavy-use industrial
slabs and parking structure slabs, concrete required to be watertight, and concrete with a
water-cementitious materials ratio below 0.50.
Minimum Compressive Strength: 4000 psi (27.6 MPa) at 28 days.
Maximum Water-Cementitious Materials Ratio: 0.48.
Slump Limit: 8 inches (200 mm) for concrete with verified slump of 2 to 4 inches (50 to
100 mm) before adding high-range water-reducing admixture or plasticizing admixture],
plus or minus 1 inch (25 mm).
Foundation Walls: Proportion normal-weight concrete mixture as follows:
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
033000 - 11
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
1.
2.
3.
C.
Slabs-on-Grade: Proportion normal-weight concrete mixture as follows:
1.
2.
3.
D.
3.
A.
Minimum Compressive Strength: 4000 psi (27.6 MPa) at 28 days.
Maximum Water-Cementitious Materials Ratio: 0.48.
Slump Limit: 8 inches (200 mm) for concrete with verified slump of 2 to 4 inches (50 to
100 mm) before adding high-range water-reducing admixture or plasticizing admixture],
plus or minus 1 inch (25 mm).
Building Walls: Proportion normal-weight concrete mixture as follows:
1.
2.
3.
2.15
Minimum Compressive Strength: 4000 psi (27.6 MPa) at 28 days.
Minimum Cementitious Materials Content: [470 lb/cu. yd. (279 kg/cu. m)] [520 lb/cu. yd.
(309 kg/cu. m)] [540 lb/cu. yd. (320 kg/cu. m)].
Slump Limit: 8 inches (200 mm) for concrete with verified slump of 2 to 4 inches (50 to
100 mm) before adding high-range water-reducing admixture or plasticizing admixture],
plus or minus 1 inch (25 mm).
Building Frame Members: Proportion normal-weight concrete mixture as follows:
1.
2.
3.
F.
Minimum Compressive Strength: 4000 psi (27.6 MPa at 28 days.
Minimum Cementitious Materials Content: [470 lb/cu. yd. (279 kg/cu. m)] [520 lb/cu. yd.
(309 kg/cu. m)] [540 lb/cu. yd. (320 kg/cu. m)].
Slump Limit: 8 inches (200 mm) for concrete with verified slump of 2 to 4 inches (50 to
100 mm) before adding high-range water-reducing admixture or plasticizing admixture],
plus or minus 1 inch (25 mm).
Suspended Slabs: Proportion normal-weight concrete mixture as follows:
1.
2.
E.
Minimum Compressive Strength: 4000 psi (27.6 MPa) at 28 days.
Maximum Water-Cementitious Materials Ratio: 0.45.
Slump Limit: 8 inches (200 mm) for concrete with verified slump of 2 to 4 inches (50 to
100 mm) before adding high-range water-reducing admixture or plasticizing admixture],
plus or minus 1 inch (25 mm).
Minimum Compressive Strength: 4000 psi (27.6 MPa) at 28 days.
Maximum Water-Cementitious Materials Ratio: 0.48 [0.40].
Slump Limit: 8 inches (200 mm) for concrete with verified slump of 2 to 4 inches (50 to
100 mm) before adding high-range water-reducing admixture or plasticizing admixture,
plus or minus 1 inch (25 mm).
FABRICATING REINFORCEMENT
Fabricate steel reinforcement according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice."
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
033000 - 12
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
2.16
A.
CONCRETE MIXING
Ready-Mixed Concrete:
Measure, batch, mix, and deliver concrete according to
ASTM C 94/C 94M, and furnish batch ticket information.
1.
B.
When air temperature is between 85 and 90 deg F (30 and 32 deg C), reduce mixing and
delivery time from 1-1/2 hours to 75 minutes; when air temperature is above 90 deg F (32
deg C), reduce mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes.
Project-Site Mixing: Measure, batch, and mix concrete materials and concrete according to
ASTM C 94/C 94M. Mix concrete materials in appropriate drum-type batch machine mixer.
1.
2.
3.
For mixer capacity of 1 cu. yd. (0.76 cu. m) or smaller, continue mixing at least 1-1/2
minutes, but not more than 5 minutes after ingredients are in mixer, before any part of
batch is released.
For mixer capacity larger than 1 cu. yd. (0.76 cu. m), increase mixing time by 15 seconds
for each additional 1 cu. yd. (0.76 cu. m).
Provide batch ticket for each batch discharged and used in the Work, indicating Project
identification name and number, date, mixture type, mixture time, quantity, and amount of
water added. Record approximate location of final deposit in structure.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
FORMWORK
A.
Design, erect, shore, brace, and maintain formwork, according to ACI 301, to support vertical,
lateral, static, and dynamic loads, and construction loads that might be applied, until structure
can support such loads.
B.
Construct formwork so concrete members and structures are of size, shape, alignment,
elevation, and position indicated, within tolerance limits of ACI 117.
C.
Limit concrete surface irregularities, designated by ACI 347 as abrupt or gradual, as follows:
1.
2.
Class A, 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) for smooth-formed finished surfaces.
Class B, 1/4 inch (6 mm) Class C, 1/2 inch (13 mm)] [Class D, 1 inch (25 mm)] <Insert
dimension> for rough-formed finished surfaces.
D.
Construct forms tight enough to prevent loss of concrete mortar.
E.
Fabricate forms for easy removal without hammering or prying against concrete surfaces.
Provide crush or wrecking plates where stripping may damage cast concrete surfaces. Provide
top forms for inclined surfaces steeper than 1.5 horizontal to 1 vertical.
1.
2.
Install keyways, reglets, recesses, and the like, for easy removal.
Do not use rust-stained steel form-facing material.
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
033000 - 13
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
F.
Set edge forms, bulkheads, and intermediate screed strips for slabs to achieve required
elevations and slopes in finished concrete surfaces. Provide and secure units to support screed
strips; use strike-off templates or compacting-type screeds.
G.
Provide temporary openings for cleanouts and inspection ports where interior area of formwork
is inaccessible. Close openings with panels tightly fitted to forms and securely braced to
prevent loss of concrete mortar. Locate temporary openings in forms at inconspicuous
locations.
H.
Chamfer exterior corners and edges of permanently exposed concrete.
I.
Form openings, chases, offsets, sinkages, keyways, reglets, blocking, screeds, and bulkheads
required in the Work. Determine sizes and locations from trades providing such items.
J.
Clean forms and adjacent surfaces to receive concrete. Remove chips, wood, sawdust, dirt,
and other debris just before placing concrete.
K.
Retighten forms and bracing before placing concrete, as required, to prevent mortar leaks and
maintain proper alignment.
L.
Coat contact surfaces of forms with form-release agent, according to manufacturer's written
instructions, before placing reinforcement.
3.2
EMBEDDED ITEMS
A.
Place and secure anchorage devices and other embedded items required for adjoining work
that is attached to or supported by cast-in-place concrete. Use setting drawings, templates,
diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded.
1.
2.
3.
3.3
Install anchor rods, accurately located, to elevations required and complying with
tolerances in Section 7.5 of AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and
Bridges."
Install reglets to receive waterproofing and to receive through-wall flashings in outer face
of concrete frame at exterior walls, where flashing is shown at lintels, shelf angles, and
other conditions.
Install dovetail anchor slots in concrete structures as indicated.
REMOVING AND REUSING FORMS
A.
General: Formwork for sides of beams, walls, columns, and similar parts of the Work that does
not support weight of concrete may be removed after cumulatively curing at not less than 50
deg F (10 deg C) for 24 hours after placing concrete. Concrete has to be hard enough to not
be damaged by form-removal operations and curing and protection operations need to be
maintained.
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
033000 - 14
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
1.
2.
Leave formwork for beam soffits, joists, slabs, and other structural elements that supports
weight of concrete in place until concrete has achieved at least 70 percent of its 28-day
design compressive strength.
Remove forms only if shores have been arranged to permit removal of forms without
loosening or disturbing shores.
B.
Clean and repair surfaces of forms to be reused in the Work. Split, frayed, delaminated, or
otherwise damaged form-facing material will not be acceptable for exposed surfaces. Apply
new form-release agent.
C.
When forms are reused, clean surfaces, remove fins and laitance, and tighten to close joints.
Align and secure joints to avoid offsets. Do not use patched forms for exposed concrete
surfaces unless approved by Architect.
3.4
SHORES AND RESHORES
A.
Comply with ACI 318 (ACI 318M) and ACI 301 for design, installation, and removal of shoring
and reshoring.
1.
Do not remove shoring or reshoring until measurement of slab tolerances is complete..
B.
In multistory construction, extend shoring or reshoring over a sufficient number of stories to
distribute loads in such a manner that no floor or member will be excessively loaded or will
induce tensile stress in concrete members without sufficient steel reinforcement.
C.
Plan sequence of removal of shores and reshore to avoid damage to concrete. Locate and
provide adequate reshoring to support construction without excessive stress or deflection.
3.5
VAPOR RETARDERS
A.
Sheet Vapor Retarders: Place, protect, and repair sheet vapor retarder according to
ASTM E 1643 and manufacturer's written instructions.
1.
B.
3.6
Lap joints 6 inches (150 mm) and seal with manufacturer's recommended tape.
Granular Course: Cover vapor retarder with granular fill, moisten, and compact with mechanical
equipment to elevation tolerances of plus 0 inch (0 mm) or minus 3/4 inch (19 mm).
STEEL REINFORCEMENT
A.
General: Comply with CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" for placing reinforcement.
1.
Do not cut or puncture vapor retarder. Repair damage and reseal vapor retarder before
placing concrete.
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
033000 - 15
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
B.
Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, ice, and other foreign materials that
would reduce bond to concrete.
C.
Accurately position, support, and secure reinforcement against displacement. Locate and
support reinforcement with bar supports to maintain minimum concrete cover. Do not tack weld
crossing reinforcing bars.
D.
Set wire ties with ends directed into concrete, not toward exposed concrete surfaces.
E.
Install welded wire reinforcement in longest practicable lengths on bar supports spaced to
minimize sagging. Lap edges and ends of adjoining sheets at least one mesh spacing. Offset
laps of adjoining sheet widths to prevent continuous laps in either direction. Lace overlaps with
wire.
F.
Epoxy-Coated Reinforcement: Repair cut and damaged epoxy coatings with epoxy repair
coating according to ASTM D 3963/D 3963M. Use epoxy-coated steel wire ties to fasten epoxycoated steel reinforcement.
3.7
JOINTS
A.
General: Construct joints true to line with faces perpendicular to surface plane of concrete.
B.
Construction Joints: Install so strength and appearance of concrete are not impaired, at
locations indicated or as approved by Architect.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
C.
Place joints perpendicular to main reinforcement. Continue reinforcement across
construction joints unless otherwise indicated. Do not continue reinforcement through
sides of strip placements of floors and slabs.
Form keyed joints as indicated. Embed keys at least 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) into concrete.
Locate joints for beams, slabs, joists, and girders in the middle third of spans. Offset
joints in girders a minimum distance of twice the beam width from a beam-girder
intersection.
Locate horizontal joints in walls and columns at underside of floors, slabs, beams, and
girders and at the top of footings or floor slabs.
Space vertical joints in walls at 20’-0” maximum. Locate joints beside piers integral with
walls, near corners, and in concealed locations where possible.
Use epoxy-bonding adhesive at locations where fresh concrete is placed against
hardened or partially hardened concrete surfaces.
Contraction Joints in Slabs-on-Grade: Form weakened-plane contraction joints, sectioning
concrete into areas as indicated. Construct contraction joints for a depth equal to at least onefourth of concrete thickness as follows:
1.
2.
Grooved Joints: Form contraction joints after initial floating by grooving and finishing
each edge of joint to a radius of 1/8 inch (3.2 mm). Repeat grooving of contraction joints
after applying surface finishes. Eliminate groover tool marks on concrete surfaces.
Sawed Joints: Form contraction joints with power saws equipped with shatterproof
abrasive or diamond-rimmed blades. Cut 1/8-inch- (3.2-mm-) wide joints into concrete
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
033000 - 16
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
when cutting action will not tear, abrade, or otherwise damage surface and before
concrete develops random contraction cracks.
D.
Isolation Joints in Slabs-on-Grade: After removing formwork, install joint-filler strips at slab
junctions with vertical surfaces, such as column pedestals, foundation walls, grade beams, and
other locations, as indicated.
1.
E.
3.8
Extend joint-filler strips full width and depth of joint, terminating flush with finished
concrete surface unless otherwise indicated.
Doweled Joints: Install dowel bars and support assemblies at joints where indicated. Lubricate
or asphalt coat one-half of dowel length to prevent concrete bonding to one side of joint.
WATERSTOPS
A.
3.9
Flexible Waterstops: Install in construction joints and at other joints indicated to form a
continuous diaphragm. Install in longest lengths practicable. Support and protect exposed
waterstops during progress of the Work. Field fabricate joints in waterstops according to
manufacturer's written instructions.
CONCRETE PLACEMENT
A.
Before placing concrete, verify that installation of formwork, reinforcement, and embedded items
is complete and that required inspections have been performed.
B.
Before test sampling and placing concrete, water may be added at Project site, subject to
limitations of ACI 301.
1.
C.
Do not add water to concrete after adding high-range water-reducing admixtures to
mixture.
Deposit concrete continuously in one layer or in horizontal layers of such thickness that no new
concrete will be placed on concrete that has hardened enough to cause seams or planes of
weakness. If a section cannot be placed continuously, provide construction joints as indicated.
Deposit concrete to avoid segregation.
1.
2.
3.
Deposit concrete in horizontal layers of depth to not exceed formwork design pressures
and in a manner to avoid inclined construction joints.
Consolidate placed concrete with mechanical vibrating equipment according to ACI 301.
Do not use vibrators to transport concrete inside forms. Insert and withdraw vibrators
vertically at uniformly spaced locations to rapidly penetrate placed layer and at least 6
inches (150 mm) into preceding layer. Do not insert vibrators into lower layers of
concrete that have begun to lose plasticity. At each insertion, limit duration of vibration to
time necessary to consolidate concrete and complete embedment of reinforcement and
other embedded items without causing mixture constituents to segregate.
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
033000 - 17
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
D.
Deposit and consolidate concrete for floors and slabs in a continuous operation, within limits of
construction joints, until placement of a panel or section is complete.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
E.
Hot-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 301 and as follows:
1.
2.
3.10
A.
Rough-Formed Finish: As-cast concrete texture imparted by form-facing material with tie holes
and defects repaired and patched. Remove fins and other projections that exceed specified
limits on formed-surface irregularities.
Apply to concrete surfaces not exposed to public view.
Smooth-Formed Finish: As-cast concrete texture imparted by form-facing material, arranged in
an orderly and symmetrical manner with a minimum of seams. Repair and patch tie holes and
defects. Remove fins and other projections that exceed specified limits on formed-surface
irregularities.
1.
C.
Maintain concrete temperature below 90 deg F (32 deg C) at time of placement. Chilled
mixing water or chopped ice may be used to control temperature, provided water
equivalent of ice is calculated to total amount of mixing water. Using liquid nitrogen to
cool concrete is Contractor's option.
Fog-spray forms, steel reinforcement, and subgrade just before placing concrete. Keep
subgrade uniformly moist without standing water, soft spots, or dry areas.
FINISHING FORMED SURFACES
1.
B.
Consolidate concrete during placement operations so concrete is thoroughly worked
around reinforcement and other embedded items and into corners.
Maintain reinforcement in position on chairs during concrete placement.
Screed slab surfaces with a straightedge and strike off to correct elevations.
Slope surfaces uniformly to drains where required.
Begin initial floating using bull floats or darbies to form a uniform and open-textured
surface plane, before excess bleedwater appears on the surface. Do not further disturb
slab surfaces before starting finishing operations.
Apply to concrete surfaces exposed to public view, to receive a rubbed finish, to be
covered with a coating or covering material applied directly to concrete.
Rubbed Finish:
indicated:
1.
2.
Apply the following to smooth-formed finished as-cast concrete where
Smooth-Rubbed Finish: Not later than one day after form removal, moisten concrete
surfaces and rub with carborundum brick or another abrasive until producing a uniform
color and texture. Do not apply cement grout other than that created by the rubbing
process.
Grout-Cleaned Finish: Wet concrete surfaces and apply grout of a consistency of thick
paint to coat surfaces and fill small holes. Mix one part portland cement to one and onehalf parts fine sand with a 1:1 mixture of bonding admixture and water. Add white
portland cement in amounts determined by trial patches so color of dry grout will match
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
033000 - 18
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
3.
D.
3.11
adjacent surfaces. Scrub grout into voids and remove excess grout. When grout
whitens, rub surface with clean burlap and keep surface damp by fog spray for at least 36
hours.
Cork-Floated Finish: Wet concrete surfaces and apply a stiff grout. Mix one part portland
cement and one part fine sand with a 1:1 mixture of bonding agent and water. Add white
portland cement in amounts determined by trial patches so color of dry grout will match
adjacent surfaces. Compress grout into voids by grinding surface. In a swirling motion,
finish surface with a cork float.
Related Unformed Surfaces: At tops of walls, horizontal offsets, and similar unformed surfaces
adjacent to formed surfaces, strike off smooth and finish with a texture matching adjacent
formed surfaces. Continue final surface treatment of formed surfaces uniformly across adjacent
unformed surfaces unless otherwise indicated.
FINISHING FLOORS AND SLABS
A.
General: Comply with ACI 302.1R recommendations for screeding, restraightening, and
finishing operations for concrete surfaces. Do not wet concrete surfaces.
B.
Float Finish: Consolidate surface with power-driven floats or by hand floating if area is small or
inaccessible to power driven floats. Restraighten, cut down high spots, and fill low spots.
Repeat float passes and restraightening until surface is left with a uniform, smooth, granular
texture.
1.
C.
Apply float finish to surfaces to receive trowel finish and to be covered with fluid-applied
or sheet waterproofing, built-up or membrane roofing, or sand-bed terrazzo.
Trowel Finish: After applying float finish, apply first troweling and consolidate concrete by hand
or power-driven trowel. Continue troweling passes and restraighten until surface is free of
trowel marks and uniform in texture and appearance. Grind smooth any surface defects that
would telegraph through applied coatings or floor coverings.
1.
2.
Apply a trowel finish to surfaces exposed to view or to be covered with resilient flooring,
carpet, ceramic or quarry tile set over a cleavage membrane, paint, or another thin-filmfinish coating system.
Finish surfaces to the following tolerances, according to ASTM E 1155 (ASTM E 1155M),
for a randomly trafficked floor surface:
a.
b.
c.
d.
Specified overall values of flatness, F(F) 25; and of levelness, F(L) 20; with
minimum local values of flatness, F(F) 17; and of levelness, F(L) 15.
Specified overall values of flatness, F(F) 35; and of levelness, F(L) 25; with
minimum local values of flatness, F(F) 24; and of levelness, F(L) 17; for slabs-ongrade.
Specified overall values of flatness, F(F) 30; and of levelness, F(L) 20; with
minimum local values of flatness, F(F) 24; and of levelness, F(L) 15; for suspended
slabs.
Specified overall values of flatness, F(F) 45; and of levelness, F(L) 35; with
minimum local values of flatness, F(F) 30; and of levelness, F(L) 24.
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
033000 - 19
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
D.
Trowel and Fine-Broom Finish: Apply a first trowel finish to surfaces where ceramic or quarry
tile is to be installed by either thickset or thin-set method. While concrete is still plastic, slightly
scarify surface with a fine broom.
1.
E.
Broom Finish: Apply a broom finish to exterior concrete platforms, steps, ramps, and elsewhere
as indicated.
1.
F.
2.
3.
Uniformly spread 25 lb/100 sq. ft. (12 kg/10 sq. m) of dampened slip-resistive aluminum
granules over surface in one or two applications. Tamp aggregate flush with surface, but
do not force below surface.
After broadcasting and tamping, apply float finish.
After curing, lightly work surface with a steel wire brush or an abrasive stone and water to
expose slip-resistive aluminum granules.
Dry-Shake Floor Hardener Finish: After initial floating, apply dry-shake floor hardener to
surfaces according to manufacturer's written instructions and as follows:
1.
2.
3.
3.12
Immediately after float finishing, slightly roughen trafficked surface by brooming with
fiber-bristle broom perpendicular to main traffic route. Coordinate required final finish
with Architect before application.
Slip-Resistive Finish: Before final floating, apply slip-resistive aluminum granule finish where
indicated and to concrete stair treads, platforms, and ramps. Apply according to manufacturer's
written instructions and as follows:
1.
G.
Comply with flatness and levelness tolerances for trowel-finished floor surfaces.
Uniformly apply dry-shake floor hardener at a rate of 100 lb/100 sq. ft. (49 kg/10 sq. m)
unless greater amount is recommended by manufacturer.
Uniformly distribute approximately two-thirds of dry-shake floor hardener over surface by
hand or with mechanical spreader, and embed by power floating. Follow power floating
with a second dry-shake floor hardener application, uniformly distributing remainder of
material, and embed by power floating.
After final floating, apply a trowel finish. Cure concrete with curing compound
recommended by dry-shake floor hardener manufacturer and apply immediately after
final finishing.
MISCELLANEOUS CONCRETE ITEMS
A.
Filling In: Fill in holes and openings left in concrete structures after work of other trades is in
place unless otherwise indicated. Mix, place, and cure concrete, as specified, to blend with inplace construction. Provide other miscellaneous concrete filling indicated or required to
complete the Work.
B.
Curbs: Provide monolithic finish to interior curbs by stripping forms while concrete is still green
and by steel-troweling surfaces to a hard, dense finish with corners, intersections, and
terminations slightly rounded.
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
033000 - 20
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
C.
3.13
Equipment Bases and Foundations: Provide machine and equipment bases and foundations as
shown on Drawings. Set anchor bolts for machines and equipment at correct elevations,
complying with diagrams or templates from manufacturer furnishing machines and equipment.
CONCRETE PROTECTING AND CURING
A.
General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot
temperatures. Comply with ACI 306.1 for cold-weather protection and ACI 301 for hot-weather
protection during curing.
B.
Evaporation Retarder: Apply evaporation retarder to unformed concrete surfaces if hot, dry, or
windy conditions cause moisture loss approaching 0.2 lb/sq. ft. x h (1 kg/sq. m x h) before and
during finishing operations. Apply according to manufacturer's written instructions after placing,
screeding, and bull floating or darbying concrete, but before float finishing.
C.
Formed Surfaces: Cure formed concrete surfaces, including underside of beams, supported
slabs, and other similar surfaces. If forms remain during curing period, moist cure after
loosening forms. If removing forms before end of curing period, continue curing for the
remainder of the curing period.
D.
Unformed Surfaces: Begin curing immediately after finishing concrete. Cure unformed
surfaces, including floors and slabs, concrete floor toppings, and other surfaces.
E.
Cure concrete according to ACI 308.1, by one or a combination of the following methods:
1.
Moisture Curing: Keep surfaces continuously moist for not less than seven days with the
following materials:
a.
b.
c.
2.
Water.
Continuous water-fog spray.
Absorptive cover, water saturated, and kept continuously wet. Cover concrete
surfaces and edges with 12-inch (300-mm) lap over adjacent absorptive covers.
Moisture-Retaining-Cover Curing: Cover concrete surfaces with moisture-retaining cover
for curing concrete, placed in widest practicable width, with sides and ends lapped at
least 12 inches (300 mm), and sealed by waterproof tape or adhesive. Cure for not less
than seven days. Immediately repair any holes or tears during curing period using cover
material and waterproof tape.
a.
b.
c.
Moisture cure or use moisture-retaining covers to cure concrete surfaces to
receive floor coverings.
Moisture cure or use moisture-retaining covers to cure concrete surfaces to
receive penetrating liquid floor treatments.
Cure concrete surfaces to receive floor coverings with either a moisture-retaining
cover or a curing compound that the manufacturer certifies will not interfere with
bonding of floor covering used on Project.
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
033000 - 21
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
3.
Curing Compound: Apply uniformly in continuous operation by power spray or roller
according to manufacturer's written instructions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall
within three hours after initial application. Maintain continuity of coating and repair
damage during curing period.
a.
4.
3.14
A.
Penetrating Liquid Floor Treatment: Prepare, apply, and finish penetrating liquid floor treatment
according to manufacturer's written instructions.
2.
3.
A.
Curing and Sealing Compound: Apply uniformly to floors and slabs indicated in a
continuous operation by power spray or roller according to manufacturer's written
instructions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall within three hours after initial
application. Repeat process 24 hours later and apply a second coat. Maintain continuity
of coating and repair damage during curing period.
LIQUID FLOOR TREATMENTS
1.
3.15
Removal: After curing period has elapsed, remove curing compound without
damaging concrete surfaces by method recommended by curing compound
manufacturer unless manufacturer certifies curing compound will not interfere with
bonding of floor covering used on Project.
Remove curing compounds, sealers, oil, dirt, laitance, and other contaminants and
complete surface repairs.
Do not apply to concrete that is less than [three] [seven] [14] [28] days' old.
Apply liquid until surface is saturated, scrubbing into surface until a gel forms; rewet; and
repeat brooming or scrubbing. Rinse with water; remove excess material until surface is
dry. Apply a second coat in a similar manner if surface is rough or porous.
JOINT FILLING
Prepare, clean, and install joint filler according to manufacturer's written instructions.
1.
Defer joint filling until concrete has aged at least one month(s). Do not fill joints until
construction traffic has permanently ceased.
B.
Remove dirt, debris, saw cuttings, curing compounds, and sealers from joints; leave contact
faces of joint clean and dry.
C.
Install semirigid joint filler full depth in saw-cut joints and at least 2 inches (50 mm) deep in
formed joints. Overfill joint and trim joint filler flush with top of joint after hardening.
3.16
A.
CONCRETE SURFACE REPAIRS
Defective Concrete: Repair and patch defective areas when approved by Architect. Remove
and replace concrete that cannot be repaired and patched to Architect's approval.
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
033000 - 22
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
B.
Patching Mortar: Mix dry-pack patching mortar, consisting of one part portland cement to two
and one-half parts fine aggregate passing a No. 16 (1.18-mm) sieve, using only enough water
for handling and placing.
C.
Repairing Formed Surfaces: Surface defects include color and texture irregularities, cracks,
spalls, air bubbles, honeycombs, rock pockets, fins and other projections on the surface, and
stains and other discolorations that cannot be removed by cleaning.
1.
2.
3.
D.
Immediately after form removal, cut out honeycombs, rock pockets, and voids more than
1/2 inch (13 mm) in any dimension to solid concrete. Limit cut depth to 3/4 inch (19 mm).
Make edges of cuts perpendicular to concrete surface. Clean, dampen with water, and
brush-coat holes and voids with bonding agent. Fill and compact with patching mortar
before bonding agent has dried. Fill form-tie voids with patching mortar or cone plugs
secured in place with bonding agent.
Repair defects on surfaces exposed to view by blending white portland cement and
standard portland cement so that, when dry, patching mortar will match surrounding
color. Patch a test area at inconspicuous locations to verify mixture and color match
before proceeding with patching. Compact mortar in place and strike off slightly higher
than surrounding surface.
Repair defects on concealed formed surfaces that affect concrete's durability and
structural performance as determined by Architect.
Repairing Unformed Surfaces: Test unformed surfaces, such as floors and slabs, for finish and
verify surface tolerances specified for each surface. Correct low and high areas. Test surfaces
sloped to drain for trueness of slope and smoothness; use a sloped template.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Repair finished surfaces containing defects. Surface defects include spalls, popouts,
honeycombs, rock pockets, crazing and cracks in excess of 0.01 inch (0.25 mm) wide or
that penetrate to reinforcement or completely through unreinforced sections regardless of
width, and other objectionable conditions.
After concrete has cured at least 14 days, correct high areas by grinding.
Correct localized low areas during or immediately after completing surface finishing
operations by cutting out low areas and replacing with patching mortar. Finish repaired
areas to blend into adjacent concrete.
Correct other low areas scheduled to receive floor coverings with a repair underlayment.
Prepare, mix, and apply repair underlayment and primer according to manufacturer's
written instructions to produce a smooth, uniform, plane, and level surface. Feather
edges to match adjacent floor elevations.
Correct other low areas scheduled to remain exposed with a repair topping. Cut out low
areas to ensure a minimum repair topping depth of 1/4 inch (6 mm) to match adjacent
floor elevations. Prepare, mix, and apply repair topping and primer according to
manufacturer's written instructions to produce a smooth, uniform, plane, and level
surface.
Repair defective areas, except random cracks and single holes 1 inch (25 mm) or less in
diameter, by cutting out and replacing with fresh concrete. Remove defective areas with
clean, square cuts and expose steel reinforcement with at least a 3/4-inch (19-mm)
clearance all around. Dampen concrete surfaces in contact with patching concrete and
apply bonding agent. Mix patching concrete of same materials and mixture as original
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
033000 - 23
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
7.
concrete except without coarse aggregate. Place, compact, and finish to blend with
adjacent finished concrete. Cure in same manner as adjacent concrete.
Repair random cracks and single holes 1 inch (25 mm) or less in diameter with patching
mortar. Groove top of cracks and cut out holes to sound concrete and clean off dust, dirt,
and loose particles. Dampen cleaned concrete surfaces and apply bonding agent. Place
patching mortar before bonding agent has dried. Compact patching mortar and finish to
match adjacent concrete. Keep patched area continuously moist for at least 72 hours.
E.
Perform structural repairs of concrete, subject to Architect's approval, using epoxy adhesive and
patching mortar.
F.
Repair materials and installation not specified above may be used, subject to Architect's
approval.
3.17
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Testing and Inspecting: Owner will engage a qualified testing and inspecting agency to perform
field tests and inspections and prepare test reports.
B.
Inspections:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
C.
Steel reinforcement placement.
Steel reinforcement welding.
Headed bolts and studs.
Verification of use of required design mixture.
Concrete placement, including conveying and depositing.
Curing procedures and maintenance of curing temperature.
Verification of concrete strength before removal of shores and forms from beams and
slabs.
Concrete Tests: Testing of composite samples of fresh concrete obtained according to
ASTM C 172 shall be performed according to the following requirements:
1.
Testing Frequency: Obtain one composite sample for each day's pour of each concrete
mixture exceeding 5 cu. yd. (4 cu. m), but less than 25 cu. yd. (19 cu. m), plus one set for
each additional 50 cu. yd. (38 cu. m) or fraction thereof.
a.
2.
3.
When frequency of testing will provide fewer than five compressive-strength tests
for each concrete mixture, testing shall be conducted from at least five randomly
selected batches or from each batch if fewer than five are used.
Slump: ASTM C 143/C 143M; one test at point of placement for each composite sample,
but not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete mixture. Perform
additional tests when concrete consistency appears to change.
Air Content: ASTM C 231, pressure method, for normal-weight concrete; one test for
each composite sample, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete
mixture.
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
033000 - 24
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
4.
5.
Concrete Temperature: ASTM C 1064/C 1064M; one test hourly when air temperature is
40 deg F (4.4 deg C) and below and when 80 deg F (27 deg C) and above, and one test
for each composite sample.
Compression Test Specimens: ASTM C 31/C 31M.
a.
b.
6.
Compressive-Strength Tests: ASTM C 39/C 39M; test one set of two laboratory-cured
specimens at 7 days and one set of two specimens at 28 days.
a.
b.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
D.
Cast and laboratory cure two sets of two standard cylinder specimens for each
composite sample.
Cast and field cure two sets of two standard cylinder specimens for each
composite sample.
Test one set of two field-cured specimens at 7 days and one set of two specimens
at 28 days.
A compressive-strength test shall be the average compressive strength from a set
of two specimens obtained from same composite sample and tested at age
indicated.
When strength of field-cured cylinders is less than 85 percent of companion laboratorycured cylinders, Contractor shall evaluate operations and provide corrective procedures
for protecting and curing in-place concrete.
Strength of each concrete mixture will be satisfactory if every average of any three
consecutive compressive-strength tests equals or exceeds specified compressive
strength and no compressive-strength test value falls below specified compressive
strength by more than 500 psi (3.4 MPa).
Test results shall be reported in writing to Architect, concrete manufacturer, and
Contractor within 48 hours of testing. Reports of compressive-strength tests shall contain
Project identification name and number, date of concrete placement, name of concrete
testing and inspecting agency, location of concrete batch in Work, design compressive
strength at 28 days, concrete mixture proportions and materials, compressive breaking
strength, and type of break for both 7- and 28-day tests.
Nondestructive Testing: Impact hammer, sonoscope, or other nondestructive device may
be permitted by Architect but will not be used as sole basis for approval or rejection of
concrete.
Additional Tests: Testing and inspecting agency shall make additional tests of concrete
when test results indicate that slump, air entrainment, compressive strengths, or other
requirements have not been met, as directed by Architect. Testing and inspecting
agency may conduct tests to determine adequacy of concrete by cored cylinders
complying with ASTM C 42/C 42M or by other methods as directed by Architect.
Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine
compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements.
Correct deficiencies in the Work that test reports and inspections indicate do not comply
with the Contract Documents.
Measure floor and slab flatness and levelness according to ASTM E 1155 (ASTM E 1155M)
within 48 hours of finishing.
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
033000 - 25
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
3.18
A.
PROTECTION OF LIQUID FLOOR TREATMENTS
Protect liquid floor treatment from damage and wear during the remainder of construction
period. Use protective methods and materials, including temporary covering, recommended in
writing by liquid floor treatments installer.
END OF SECTION 033000
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
033000 - 26
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
SECTION 042200 - CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
B.
Related Sections:
1.
2.
3.
1.3
Concrete masonry units.
Mortar and grout.
Steel reinforcing bars.
Masonry joint reinforcement.
Ties and anchors.
Embedded flashing.
Miscellaneous masonry accessories.
Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for installing dovetail slots for masonry
anchors.
Section 071900 "Water Repellents" for water repellents applied to concrete unit masonry.
Section 076200 "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for sheet metal flashing and for
furnishing manufactured reglets installed in masonry joints.
DEFINITIONS
A.
CMU(s): Concrete masonry unit(s).
B.
Reinforced Masonry: Masonry containing reinforcing steel in grouted cells.
1.4
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
Provide structural unit masonry that develops indicated net-area compressive strengths at 28
days.
1.
Determine net-area compressive strength of masonry from average net-area
compressive strengths of masonry units and mortar types (unit-strength method)
according to Tables 1 and 2 in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602.
CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY
042200 - 1
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
2.
1.5
Determine net-area compressive strength of masonry by testing masonry prisms
according to ASTM C 1314.
PRECONSTRUCTION TESTING
A.
Preconstruction Testing Service: Contractor will engage a qualified independent testing agency
to perform preconstruction testing indicated below. Retesting of materials that fail to comply with
specified requirements shall be done at Contractor's expense.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
1.6
Concrete Masonry Unit Test: For each type of unit required, according to ASTM C 140 for
compressive strength.
Mortar Test (Property Specification): For each mix required, according to
ASTM C 109/C 109M for compressive strength.
Mortar Test (Property Specification): For each mix required, according to ASTM C 780 for
compressive strength.
Grout Test (Compressive Strength): For each mix required, according to ASTM C 1019.
Prism Test: For each type of construction required, according to ASTM C 1314.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B.
Shop Drawings: For the following:
1.
Reinforcing Steel: Detail bending and placement of unit masonry reinforcing bars.
Comply with ACI 315, "Details and Detailing of Concrete Reinforcement."
2.
Fabricated Flashing: Detail corner units, end-dam units, and other special applications.
1.7
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A.
List of Materials Used: List generic product names together with manufacturers, manufacturers'
product names, model numbers, lot numbers, batch numbers, source of supply, and other
information as required to identify materials used. Include mix proportions for mortar and grout
and source of aggregates.
1.
Submittal is for information only. Neither receipt of list nor approval of mockup constitutes
approval of deviations from the Contract Documents unless such deviations are
specifically brought to the attention of Architect and approved in writing.
B.
Qualification Data: For testing agency.
C.
Material Certificates: For each type and size of the following:
1.
Masonry units.
a.
Include data on material properties, material test reports substantiating compliance
with requirements.
CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY
042200 - 2
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
D.
Cementitious materials. Include brand, type, and name of manufacturer.
Preblended, dry mortar mixes. Include description of type and proportions of ingredients.
Grout mixes. Include description of type and proportions of ingredients.
Reinforcing bars.
Joint reinforcement.
Anchors, ties, and metal accessories.
Mix Designs: For each type of mortar and grout. Include description of type and proportions of
ingredients.
1.
2.
Include test reports for mortar mixes required to comply with property specification. Test
according to ASTM C 109/C 109M for compressive strength, ASTM C 1506 for water
retention, and ASTM C 91 for air content.
Include test reports, according to ASTM C 1019, for grout mixes required to comply with
compressive strength requirement.
E.
Statement of Compressive Strength of Masonry: For each combination of masonry unit type and
mortar type, provide statement of average net-area compressive strength of masonry units,
mortar type, and resulting net-area compressive strength of masonry determined according to
Tables 1 and 2 in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602.
F.
Hot-Weather Procedures: Detailed description of methods, materials, and equipment to be used
to comply with requirements.
1.8
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to ASTM C 1093 for testing indicated.
B.
Source Limitations for Masonry Units: Obtain exposed masonry units of a uniform texture and
color, or a uniform blend within the ranges accepted for these characteristics, from single
source from single manufacturer for each product required.
C.
Source Limitations for Mortar Materials: Obtain mortar ingredients of a uniform quality, including
color for exposed masonry, from single manufacturer for each cementitious component and
from single source or producer for each aggregate.
D.
Masonry Standard: Comply with ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 unless modified by requirements
in the Contract Documents.
1.9
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Store masonry units on elevated platforms in a dry location. If units are not stored in an
enclosed location, cover tops and sides of stacks with waterproof sheeting, securely tied. If units
become wet, do not install until they are dry.
B.
Store cementitious materials including sand and aggregate on elevated platforms, under cover,
and in a dry location. Do not use cementitious materials that have become damp.
CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY
042200 - 3
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
C.
Store aggregates where grading and other required characteristics can be maintained and
contamination avoided.
D.
Deliver preblended, dry mortar mix in moisture-resistant containers designed for use with
dispensing silos. Store preblended, dry mortar mix in delivery containers on elevated platforms,
under cover, and in a dry location or in covered weatherproof dispensing silos.
E.
Store masonry accessories, including metal items, to prevent corrosion and accumulation of dirt
and oil.
1.10
A.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
Protection of Masonry: During construction, cover tops of walls, projections, and sills with
waterproof sheeting at end of each day's work. Cover partially completed masonry every day
when construction is not in progress.
1.
Extend cover a minimum of 24 inches (600 mm) down both sides of walls and hold cover
securely in place.
B.
Do not apply uniform floor or roof loads for at least 12 hours and concentrated loads for at least
three days after building masonry walls or columns.
C.
Stain Prevention: Prevent grout, mortar, and soil from staining the face of masonry to be left
exposed or painted. Immediately remove grout, mortar, and soil that come in contact with such
masonry.
1.
2.
3.
4.
D.
Protect base of walls from rain-splashed mud and from mortar splatter by spreading
coverings on ground and over wall surface.
Protect sills, ledges, and projections from mortar droppings.
Protect surfaces of window and door frames, as well as similar products with painted and
integral finishes, from mortar droppings.
Turn scaffold boards near the wall on edge at the end of each day to prevent rain from
splashing mortar and dirt onto completed masonry.
Hot-Weather Requirements: Comply with hot-weather construction requirements contained in
ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MASONRY UNITS, GENERAL
A.
Defective Units: Referenced masonry unit standards may allow a certain percentage of units to
contain chips, cracks, or other defects exceeding limits stated in the standard. Do not use units
where such defects will be exposed in the completed Work.
CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY
042200 - 4
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
B.
2.2
Fire-Resistance Ratings: Where indicated, provide units that comply with requirements for fireresistance ratings indicated as determined by testing according to ASTM E 119, by equivalent
masonry thickness, or by other means, as acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS
A.
Regional Materials: CMUs shall be manufactured within 500 miles of Project site from
aggregates and cement that have been extracted, harvested, or recovered, as well as
manufactured, within 500 miles of Project site.
B.
Shapes: Provide shapes indicated and as follows, with exposed surfaces matching exposed
faces of adjacent units unless otherwise indicated.
1.
2.
C.
CMUs: ASTM C 90.
1.
2.
3.
4.
2.3
Provide special shapes for corners, bonding, and other special conditions.
Provide bullnose units for outside corners unless otherwise indicated.
Unit Compressive Strength: Provide units with minimum average net-area compressive
strength of 2800 psi (19.3 MPa).
Density Classification: Normal weight.
Size (Width): Manufactured to dimensions 3/8 inch less than nominal dimensions.
Faces to Receive Plaster: Where units are indicated to receive a direct application of
plaster, provide textured-face units made with gap-graded aggregates.
CONCRETE LINTELS
A.
General: Provide one of the following:
B.
Concrete Lintels: Precast or formed-in-place concrete lintels complying with requirements in
Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete," and with reinforcing bars indicated.
2.4
MORTAR AND GROUT MATERIALS
A.
Regional Materials: Aggregate for mortar and grout, cement, and lime shall be extracted,
harvested, or recovered, as well as manufactured, within 500 miles (800 km) of Project site, if
possible.
B.
Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I or II, except Type III may be used for cold-weather
construction. Provide natural color or white cement as required to produce mortar color
indicated.
C.
Hydrated Lime: ASTM C 207, Type S.
D.
Mortar Cement: ASTM C 1329.
CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY
042200 - 5
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a.
b.
E.
Lafarge North America Inc.; Lafarge Mortar Cement or Magnolia Superbond Mortar
Cement.
Approved equal.
Aggregate for Mortar: ASTM C 144.
1.
2.
3.
For mortar that is exposed to view, use washed aggregate consisting of natural sand or
crushed stone.
For joints less than 1/4 inch (6 mm) thick, use aggregate graded with 100 percent
passing the No. 16 (1.18-mm) sieve.
White-Mortar Aggregates: Natural white sand or crushed white stone.
F.
Aggregate for Grout: ASTM C 404.
G.
Water: Potable.
2.5
REINFORCEMENT
A.
Uncoated Steel Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M or ASTM A 996/A 996M, Grade 60
(Grade 420).
B.
Masonry Joint Reinforcement, General: ASTM A 951/A 951M.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
C.
2.6
Interior Walls: Hot-dip galvanized, carbon steel.
Exterior Walls: Hot-dip galvanized, carbon steel.
Wire Size for Side Rods: 0.187-inch (4.76-mm) diameter.
Wire Size for Cross Rods: 0.187-inch (4.76-mm) diameter.
Wire Size for Veneer Ties: 0.187-inch (4.76-mm) diameter.
Spacing of Cross Rods, Tabs, and Cross Ties: Not more than 16 inches (407 mm) o.c.
Provide in lengths of not less than 10 feet (3 m), with prefabricated corner and tee units.
Masonry Joint Reinforcement for Single-Wythe Masonry: Either ladder or truss type with single
pair of side rods.
TIES AND ANCHORS
A.
Materials: Provide ties and anchors specified in this article that are made from materials that
comply with the following unless otherwise indicated.
1.
2.
Hot-Dip Galvanized, Carbon-Steel Wire: ASTM A 82/A 82M; with ASTM A 153/A 153M,
Class B-2 coating.
Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Commercial Steel, G60 (Z180) zinc
coating.
CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY
042200 - 6
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
B.
Adjustable Anchors for Connecting to Concrete: Provide anchors that allow vertical or horizontal
adjustment but resist tension and compression forces perpendicular to plane of wall.
1.
Connector Section: Dovetail tabs for inserting into dovetail slots in concrete and attached
to tie section; formed from 0.109-inch- (2.78-mm-) thick, stainless-steel sheet.
a.
2.
2.7
0.108-inch- (2.74-mm-) thick, galvanized sheet may be used at interior walls
unless otherwise indicated.
Tie Section: Triangular-shaped wire tie, sized to extend within 1 inch (25 mm) of masonry
face, made from 0.25-inch- (6.35-mm-) diameter, stainless-steel wire.
MISCELLANEOUS ANCHORS
A.
Unit Type Inserts in Concrete: Cast-iron or malleable-iron wedge-type inserts.
B.
Dovetail Slots in Concrete: Furnish dovetail slots with filler strips, of slot size indicated,
fabricated from 0.034-inch (0.86-mm), galvanized steel sheet.
C.
Anchor Bolts: L-shaped steel bolts complying with ASTM A 307, Grade A (ASTM F 568M,
Property Class 4.6); with ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M) hex nuts and, where indicated, flat
washers; hot-dip galvanized to comply with ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class C; of dimensions
indicated.
D.
Postinstalled Anchors: Torque-controlled expansion anchors.
1.
2.
3.
2.8
Load Capacity: Capable of sustaining, without failure, a load equal to six times the load
imposed when installed in unit masonry and four times the load imposed when installed
in concrete, as determined by testing according to ASTM E 488, conducted by a qualified
independent testing agency.
Material for Interior Locations: Carbon-steel components zinc plated to comply with
ASTM B 633 or ASTM F 1941 (ASTM F 1941M), Class Fe/Zn 5 unless otherwise
indicated.
Material for Exterior Locations and Where Stainless Steel Is Indicated: Alloy Group 1 (A1)
stainless-steel bolts, ASTM F 593 (ASTM F 738M), and nuts, ASTM F 594
(ASTM F 836M).
EMBEDDED FLASHING MATERIALS
A.
Metal Flashing: Provide metal flashing complying with SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal
Manual" and Section 076200 "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" and as follows:
1.
2.
Stainless Steel: ASTM A 240/A 240M, Type 304, 0.016 inch (0.40 mm) thick.
Fabricate continuous flashings in sections 96 inches (2400 mm) long minimum, but not
exceeding 12 feet (3.7 m). Provide splice plates at joints of formed, smooth metal
flashing.
CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY
042200 - 7
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
3.
Fabricate through-wall metal flashing embedded in masonry from stainless steel, with ribs
at 3-inch (76-mm) intervals along length of flashing to provide an integral mortar bond.
4.
Fabricate through-wall flashing with snaplock receiver on exterior face where indicated to
receive counterflashing.
Fabricate through-wall flashing with drip edge unless otherwise indicated. Fabricate by
extending flashing 1/2 inch (13 mm) out from wall, with outer edge bent down 30
degrees.
Metal Drip Edge: Fabricate from stainless steel. Extend at least 3 inches (76 mm) into
wall and 1/2 inch (13 mm) out from wall, with outer edge bent down 30 degrees.
Metal Expansion-Joint Strips: Fabricate from stainless steel to shapes indicated.
5.
6.
7.
B.
Application: Unless otherwise indicated, use the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
C.
Solder and Sealants for Sheet Metal Flashings
1.
2.
D.
2.9
Where flashing is indicated to receive counterflashing, use metal flashing.
Where flashing is indicated to be turned down at or beyond the wall face, use metal
flashing.
Where flashing is partly exposed and is indicated to terminate at the wall face, use metal
flashing with a drip edge.
Where flashing is fully concealed, use metal flashing.
Solder for Stainless Steel: ASTM B 32, Grade Sn60, with acid flux of type recommended
by stainless-steel sheet manufacturer.
Elastomeric Sealant: ASTM C 920, chemically curing polysulfide sealant; of type, grade,
class, and use classifications required to seal joints in sheet metal flashing and trim and
remain watertight.
Adhesives, Primers, and Seam Tapes for Flashings: Flashing manufacturer's standard products
or products recommended by flashing manufacturer for bonding flashing sheets to each other
and to substrates.
MISCELLANEOUS MASONRY ACCESSORIES
A.
Compressible Filler: Premolded filler strips complying with ASTM D 1056, Grade 2A1;
compressible up to 35 percent; of width and thickness indicated; formulated from urethane.
B.
Preformed Control-Joint Gaskets: Made from styrene-butadiene-rubber compound, complying
with ASTM D 2000, Designation M2AA-805 and designed to fit standard sash block and to
maintain lateral stability in masonry wall; size and configuration as indicated.
C.
Bond-Breaker Strips: Asphalt-saturated, organic roofing felt complying with ASTM D 226, Type I
(No. 15 asphalt felt).
CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY
042200 - 8
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
2.10
A.
MORTAR AND GROUT MIXES
General: Do not use admixtures, including pigments, air-entraining agents, accelerators,
retarders, water-repellent agents, antifreeze compounds, or other admixtures unless otherwise
indicated.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Do not use calcium chloride in mortar or grout.
Use mortar cement mortar unless otherwise indicated.
For exterior masonry, use mortar cement mortar.
For reinforced masonry, use mortar cement mortar.
B.
Preblended, Dry Mortar Mix: Furnish dry mortar ingredients in form of a preblended mix.
Measure quantities by weight to ensure accurate proportions, and thoroughly blend ingredients
before delivering to Project site.
C.
Mortar for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 270, Property Specification. Provide the
following types of mortar for applications stated unless another type is indicated or needed to
provide required compressive strength of masonry.
1.
2.
3.
4.
D.
For masonry below grade or in contact with earth, use Type S.
For reinforced masonry, use Type S.
For mortar parge coats, use Type N.
For interior non-load-bearing partitions, Type O may be used instead of Type N.
Grout for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 476.
1.
2.
3.
Use grout of type indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, of type (fine or coarse) that will
comply with Table 1.15.1 in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 for dimensions of grout spaces
and pour height.
Proportion grout in accordance with ASTM C 476, Table 1 paragraph 4.2.2 for specified
28-day compressive strength indicated, but not less than 2000 psi (14 MPa).
Provide grout with a slump of 8 to 11 inches (203 to 279 mm) as measured according to
ASTM C 143/C 143M.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation
tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
1.
2.
3.
For the record, prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental
to performance of work.
Verify that foundations are within tolerances specified.
Verify that reinforcing dowels are properly placed.
CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY
042200 - 9
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
B.
Before installation, examine rough-in and built-in construction for piping systems to verify actual
locations of piping connections.
C.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2
INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A.
Build chases and recesses to accommodate items specified in this and other Sections.
B.
Leave openings for equipment to be installed before completing masonry. After installing
equipment, complete masonry to match the construction immediately adjacent to opening.
C.
Use full-size units without cutting if possible. If cutting is required to provide a continuous
pattern or to fit adjoining construction, cut units with motor-driven saws; provide clean, sharp,
unchipped edges. Allow units to dry before laying unless wetting of units is specified. Install cut
units with cut surfaces and, where possible, cut edges concealed.
3.3
TOLERANCES
A.
Dimensions and Locations of Elements:
1.
2.
3.
B.
Lines and Levels:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
C.
For dimensions in cross section or elevation do not vary by more than 1/4 inch (6 mm).
For location of elements in plan do not vary from that indicated by more than plus or
minus 1/4 inch (12 mm).
For location of elements in elevation do not vary from that indicated by more than plus or
minus 1/4 inch (6 mm) in a story height.
For bed joints and top surfaces of bearing walls do not vary from level by more than 1/4
inch in 10 feet (6 mm in 3 m) maximum.
For conspicuous horizontal lines, such as lintels, sills, parapets, and reveals, do not vary
from level by more than 1/4 inch in 20 feet (6 mm in 6 m).
For vertical lines and surfaces do not vary from plumb by more than 1/4 inch in 10 feet (6
mm in 3 m) maximum.
For conspicuous vertical lines, such as external corners, door jambs, reveals, and
expansion and control joints, do not vary from plumb by more than 1/8 inch in 10 feet (3
mm in 3 m) maximum.
For lines and surfaces do not vary from straight by more than 1/4 inch in 10 feet (6 mm in
3 m) maximum.
For vertical alignment of exposed head joints, do not vary from plumb by more than 1/4
inch in 10 feet (6 mm in 3 m) maximum.
Joints:
1.
For bed joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus or minus 1/8 inch
(3 mm), with a maximum thickness limited to 1/2 inch (12 mm).
CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY
042200 - 10
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
2.
3.
4.
3.4
For exposed bed joints, do not vary from bed-joint thickness of adjacent courses by more
than 1/8 inch (3 mm).
For head and collar joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus 3/8
inch (9 mm) or minus 1/4 inch (6 mm).
For exposed head joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus or minus
1/8 inch (3 mm).
LAYING MASONRY WALLS
A.
Lay out walls in advance for accurate spacing of surface bond patterns with uniform joint
thicknesses and for accurate location of openings, movement-type joints, returns, and offsets.
Avoid using less-than-half-size units, particularly at corners, jambs, and, where possible, at
other locations.
B.
Bond Pattern for Exposed Masonry: Unless otherwise indicated, lay exposed masonry in
running bond; do not use units with less than nominal 4-inch (100-mm) horizontal face
dimensions at corners or jambs.
C.
Lay concealed masonry with all units in a wythe in running bond or bonded by lapping not less
than 4-inches (100-mm). Bond and interlock each course of each wythe at corners. Do not use
units with less than nominal 4-inch (100-mm) horizontal face dimensions at corners or jambs.
D.
Stopping and Resuming Work: Stop work by racking back units in each course from those in
course below; do not tooth. When resuming work, clean masonry surfaces that are to receive
mortar before laying fresh masonry.
E.
Built-in Work: As construction progresses, build in items specified in this and other Sections. Fill
in solidly with masonry around built-in items.
F.
Fill space between steel frames and masonry solidly with mortar unless otherwise indicated.
G.
Where built-in items are to be embedded in cores of hollow masonry units, place a layer of
metal lath, wire mesh, or plastic mesh in the joint below and rod mortar or grout into core.
H.
Fill cores in hollow CMUs with grout 24 inches (600 mm) under bearing plates, beams, lintels,
posts, and similar items unless otherwise indicated.
I.
Build non-load-bearing interior partitions full height of story to underside of solid floor or roof
structure above unless otherwise indicated.
1.
2.
Install compressible filler in joint between top of partition and underside of structure
above.
Fasten partition top anchors to structure above and build into top of partition. Grout cells
of CMUs solidly around plastic tubes of anchors and push tubes down into grout to
provide 1/2-inch (13-mm) clearance between end of anchor rod and end of tube. Space
anchors [48 inches (1200 mm)] <Insert spacing> o.c. unless otherwise indicated.
CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY
042200 - 11
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
3.
4.
3.5
Wedge non-load-bearing partitions against structure above with small pieces of tile, slate,
or metal. Fill joint with mortar after dead-load deflection of structure above approaches
final position.
At fire-rated partitions, treat joint between top of partition and underside of structure
above to comply with Section 078446 "Fire-Resistive Joint Systems."
MORTAR BEDDING AND JOINTING
A.
Lay hollow CMUs as follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
With face shells fully bedded in mortar and with head joints of depth equal to bed joints.
With webs fully bedded in mortar in all courses of piers, columns, and pilasters.
With webs fully bedded in mortar in grouted masonry, including starting course on
footings.
With entire units, including areas under cells, fully bedded in mortar at starting course on
footings where cells are not grouted.
B.
Tool exposed joints slightly concave when thumbprint hard, using a jointer larger than joint
thickness unless otherwise indicated.
C.
Cut joints flush for masonry walls to receive plaster or other direct-applied finishes (other than
paint) unless otherwise indicated.
3.6
MASONRY JOINT REINFORCEMENT
A.
General: Install entire length of longitudinal side rods in mortar with a minimum cover of 5/8 inch
(16 mm) on exterior side of walls, 1/2 inch (13 mm) elsewhere. Lap reinforcement a minimum of
6 inches (150 mm).
1.
2.
3.
Space reinforcement not more than 16 inches (406 mm) o.c.
Space reinforcement not more than 8 inches (203 mm) o.c. in foundation walls and
parapet walls.
Provide reinforcement not more than 8 inches (203 mm) above and below wall openings
and extending 12 inches (305 mm) beyond openings in addition to continuous
reinforcement.
B.
Interrupt joint reinforcement at control and expansion joints unless otherwise indicated.
C.
Provide continuity at wall intersections by using prefabricated T-shaped units.
D.
Provide continuity at corners by using prefabricated L-shaped units.
E.
Cut and bend reinforcing units as directed by manufacturer for continuity at[ corners,] returns,
offsets, column fireproofing, pipe enclosures, and other special conditions.
CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY
042200 - 12
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
3.7
ANCHORING MASONRY TO CONCRETE
A.
Anchor masonry to structural steel and concrete where masonry abuts or faces concrete to
comply with the following:
1.
2.
3.
3.8
Provide an open space not less than 1/2 inch (13 mm) wide between masonry and
concrete unless otherwise indicated. Keep open space free of mortar and other rigid
materials.
Anchor masonry with anchors embedded in masonry joints and attached to structure.
Space anchors as indicated, but not more than 24 inches (610 mm) o.c. vertically and 36
inches (915 mm) o.c. horizontally.
CONTROL AND EXPANSION JOINTS
A.
General: Install control and expansion joint materials in unit masonry as masonry progresses.
Do not allow materials to span control and expansion joints without provision to allow for inplane wall or partition movement.
B.
Form control joints in concrete masonry as follows:
1.
Install preformed control-joint gaskets designed to fit standard sash block.
2.
Install interlocking units designed for control joints. Install bond-breaker strips at joint.
Keep head joints free and clear of mortar or rake out joint for application of sealant.
3.
Install temporary foam-plastic filler in head joints and remove filler when unit masonry is
complete for application of sealant.
3.9
LINTELS
A.
Provide concrete lintels where shown and where openings of more than 12 inches (305 mm) for
brick-size units and 24 inches (610 mm) for block-size units are shown without structural steel
or other supporting lintels.
B.
Provide minimum bearing of 8 inches (200 mm) at each jamb unless otherwise indicated.
3.10
FLASHING
A.
General: Install embedded flashing in masonry at lintels, ledges, other obstructions to
downward flow of water in wall, and where indicated.
B.
Install flashing as follows unless otherwise indicated:
1.
Prepare masonry surfaces so they are smooth and free from projections that could
puncture flashing. Where flashing is within mortar joint, place through-wall flashing on
sloping bed of mortar and cover with mortar. Before covering with mortar, seal
penetrations in flashing with adhesive, sealant, or tape as recommended by flashing
manufacturer.
CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY
042200 - 13
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
At lintels, extend flashing a minimum of 6 inches (150 mm) into masonry at each end. At
heads and sills, extend flashing 6 inches (150 mm) at ends and turn up not less than 2
inches (50 mm) to form end dams.
Interlock end joints of ribbed sheet metal flashing by overlapping ribs not less than 1-1/2
inches (38 mm) or as recommended by flashing manufacturer, and seal lap with
elastomeric sealant complying with requirements in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants" for
application indicated.
Install metal drip edges with ribbed sheet metal flashing by interlocking hemmed edges to
form hooked seam. Seal seam with elastomeric sealant complying with requirements in
Section 079200 "Joint Sealants" for application indicated.
Install metal drip edges beneath flexible flashing at exterior face of wall. Stop flexible
flashing 1/2 inch (13 mm) back from outside face of wall and adhere flexible flashing to
top of metal drip edge.
Install metal flashing termination beneath flexible flashing at exterior face of wall. Stop
flexible flashing 1/2 inch (13 mm) back from outside face of wall and adhere flexible
flashing to top of metal flashing termination.
Cut flexible flashing off flush with face of wall after masonry wall construction is
completed.
C.
Install single-wythe CMU flashing system in bed joints of CMU walls where indicated to comply
with manufacturer's written instructions.
D.
Install reglets and nailers for flashing and other related construction where they are shown to be
built into masonry.
3.11
A.
REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY INSTALLATION
Temporary Formwork and Shores: Construct formwork and shores as needed to support
reinforced masonry elements during construction.
1.
2.
Construct formwork to provide shape, line, and dimensions of completed masonry as
indicated. Make forms sufficiently tight to prevent leakage of mortar and grout. Brace, tie,
and support forms to maintain position and shape during construction and curing of
reinforced masonry.
Do not remove forms and shores until reinforced masonry members have hardened
sufficiently to carry their own weight and other loads that may be placed on them during
construction.
B.
Placing Reinforcement: Comply with requirements in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602.
C.
Grouting: Do not place grout until entire height of masonry to be grouted has attained enough
strength to resist grout pressure.
1.
2.
Comply with requirements in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 for cleanouts and for grout
placement, including minimum grout space and maximum pour height.
Limit height of vertical grout pours to not more than 60 inches (1520 mm).
CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY
042200 - 14
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
3.12
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Testing and Inspecting: Contractor will engage special inspectors to perform tests and
inspections and prepare reports. Allow inspectors access to scaffolding and work areas, as
needed to perform tests and inspections. Retesting of materials that fail to meet specified
requirements shall be done at Contractor's expense.
B.
Inspections: Level 1 special inspections according to the "International Building Code."
1.
2.
3.
Begin masonry construction only after inspectors have verified proportions of siteprepared mortar.
Place grout only after inspectors have verified compliance of grout spaces and of grades,
sizes, and locations of reinforcement.
Place grout only after inspectors have verified proportions of site-prepared grout.
C.
Testing Prior to Construction: One set of tests.
D.
Testing Frequency: One set of tests for each 5,000 sq. ft. (464 sq. m) of wall area or portion
thereof.
E.
Concrete Masonry Unit Test: For each type of unit provided, according to ASTM C 140 for
compressive strength.
F.
Mortar Aggregate Ratio Test (Proportion Specification): For each mix provided, according to
ASTM C 780.
G.
Mortar Test (Property Specification): For each mix provided, according to ASTM C 780. Test
mortar for compressive strength.
H.
Grout Test (Compressive Strength): For each mix provided, according to ASTM C 1019.
I.
Prism Test: For each type of construction provided, according to ASTM C 1314 at 7 days and
at 28 days.
3.13
PARGING
A.
Parge exterior faces of below-grade masonry walls, where indicated, in 2 uniform coats to a
total thickness of 3/4 inch (19 mm). Dampen wall before applying first coat and scarify first coat
to ensure full bond to subsequent coat.
B.
Use a steel-trowel finish to produce a smooth, flat, dense surface with a maximum surface
variation of 1/8 inch per foot (3 mm per 300 mm). Form a wash at top of parging and a cove at
bottom.
C.
Damp-cure parging for at least 24 hours and protect parging until cured.
CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY
042200 - 15
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
3.14
REPAIRING, POINTING, AND CLEANING
A.
Remove and replace masonry units that are loose, chipped, broken, stained, or otherwise
damaged or that do not match adjoining units. Install new units to match adjoining units; install
in fresh mortar, pointed to eliminate evidence of replacement.
B.
Pointing: During the tooling of joints, enlarge voids and holes, except weep holes, and
completely fill with mortar. Point up joints, including corners, openings, and adjacent
construction, to provide a neat, uniform appearance. Prepare joints for sealant application,
where indicated.
C.
In-Progress Cleaning: Clean unit masonry as work progresses by dry brushing to remove
mortar fins and smears before tooling joints.
D.
Final Cleaning: After mortar is thoroughly set and cured, clean exposed masonry as follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
3.15
Remove large mortar particles by hand with wooden paddles and nonmetallic scrape
hoes or chisels.
Test cleaning methods on sample wall panel; leave one-half of panel uncleaned for
comparison purposes. Obtain Architect's approval of sample cleaning before proceeding
with cleaning of masonry.
Protect adjacent stone and nonmasonry surfaces from contact with cleaner by covering
them with liquid strippable masking agent or polyethylene film and waterproof masking
tape.
Wet wall surfaces with water before applying cleaners; remove cleaners promptly by
rinsing surfaces thoroughly with clear water.
Clean concrete masonry by cleaning method indicated in NCMA TEK 8-2A applicable to
type of stain on exposed surfaces.
MASONRY WASTE DISPOSAL
A.
Salvageable Materials: Unless otherwise indicated, excess masonry materials are Contractor's
property. At completion of unit masonry work, remove from Project site.
B.
Excess Masonry Waste: Remove excess clean masonry waste that cannot be used as fill, as
described above, and other masonry waste, and legally dispose of off Owner's property.
END OF SECTION 042200
CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY
042200 - 16
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
SECTION 051200 - STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
2.
3.
B.
Related Sections:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
1.3
Structural steel.
Prefabricated building columns.
Grout.
Section 014000 "Quality Requirements" for independent testing agency procedures and
administrative requirements.
Section 053100 "Steel Decking" for field installation of shear connectors through deck.
Section 055000 "Metal Fabrications" for steel lintels and shelf angles not attached to
structural-steel frame, miscellaneous steel fabrications, and other metal items not defined
as structural steel.
Section 099113 "Exterior Painting" and Section 099123 "Interior Painting" and]
Section 099600 "High-Performance Coatings" for surface-preparation and priming
requirements.
Section 133419 "Metal Building Systems" for structural steel.
DEFINITIONS
A.
1.4
Structural Steel: Elements of structural-steel frame, as classified by AISC 303, "Code of
Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges."
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS.
A.
Connections:
Provide details of[ simple shear] connections required by the Contract
Documents to be selected or completed by structural-steel fabricator, including comprehensive
engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, to withstand loads indicated and
comply with other information and restrictions indicated.
1.
2.
Select and complete connections using schematic details indicated and AISC 360.
Use LRFD; data are given at factored-load level.
STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING
051200 - 1
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
B.
Moment Connections: Type FR, fully restrained.
C.
Construction: Shear wall system.
1.5
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B.
Shop Drawings: Show fabrication of structural-steel components.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
C.
Welding Procedure Specifications (WPSs) and Procedure Qualification Records (PQRs):
Provide according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel," for each welded joint
whether prequalified or qualified by testing, including the following:
1.
2.
1.6
Include details of cuts, connections, splices, camber, holes, and other pertinent data.
Include embedment drawings.
Indicate welds by standard AWS symbols, distinguishing between shop and field welds,
and show size, length, and type of each weld. Show backing bars that are to be removed
and supplemental fillet welds where backing bars are to remain.
Indicate type, size, and length of bolts, distinguishing between shop and field bolts.
Identify pretensioned and slip-critical high-strength bolted connections.
Identify members and connections of the seismic-load-resisting system.
Indicate locations and dimensions of protected zones.
Identify demand critical welds.
For structural-steel connections indicated to comply with design loads, include structural
analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for
their preparation.
Power source (constant current or constant voltage).
Electrode manufacturer and trade name, for demand critical welds.
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A.
Qualification Data: For qualified Installer, fabricator, and testing agency.
B.
Welding certificates.
C.
Paint Compatibility Certificates: From manufacturers of topcoats applied over shop primers,
certifying that shop primers are compatible with topcoats.
D.
Mill test reports for structural steel, including chemical and physical properties.
E.
Product Test Reports: For the following:
1.
2.
3.
Bolts, nuts, and washers including mechanical properties and chemical analysis.
Direct-tension indicators.
Tension-control, high-strength bolt-nut-washer assemblies.
STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING
051200 - 2
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
4.
5.
6.
F.
1.7
Shear stud connectors.
Shop primers.
Nonshrink grout.
Source quality-control reports.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Fabricator Qualifications: A qualified fabricator that participates in the AISC Quality Certification
Program and is designated an AISC-Certified Plant, Category STD.
B.
Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who participates in the AISC Quality Certification
Program and is designated an AISC-Certified Erector, Category [ACSE] [CSE].
C.
Shop-Painting Applicators: Qualified according to AISC's Sophisticated Paint Endorsement P3
or SSPC-QP 3, "Standard Procedure for Evaluating Qualifications of Shop Painting
Applicators."
D.
Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M,
"Structural Welding Code - Steel."
1.
E.
Comply with applicable provisions of the following specifications and documents:
1.
2.
3.
4.
F.
1.8
Welders and welding operators performing work on bottom-flange, demand-critical welds
shall pass the supplemental welder qualification testing, as required by AWS D1.8.
FCAW-S and FCAW-G shall be considered separate processes for welding personnel
qualification.
AISC 303.
AISC 341 and AISC 341s1.
AISC 360.
RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts."
Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Store materials to permit easy access for inspection and identification. Keep steel members off
ground and spaced by using pallets, dunnage, or other supports and spacers. Protect steel
members and packaged materials from corrosion and deterioration.
1.
B.
Do not store materials on structure in a manner that might cause distortion, damage, or
overload to members or supporting structures. Repair or replace damaged materials or
structures as directed.
Store fasteners in a protected place in sealed containers with manufacturer's labels intact.
STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING
051200 - 3
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
1.
2.
3.
1.9
Fasteners may be repackaged provided Owner's testing and inspecting agency observes
repackaging and seals containers.
Clean and relubricate bolts and nuts that become dry or rusty before use.
Comply with manufacturers' written recommendations for cleaning and lubricating
ASTM F 1852 fasteners and for retesting fasteners after lubrication.
COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate selection of shop primers with topcoats to be applied over them. Comply with paint
and coating manufacturers' recommendations to ensure that shop primers and topcoats are
compatible with one another.
B.
Coordinate installation of anchorage items to be embedded in or attached to other construction
without delaying the Work. Provide setting diagrams, sheet metal templates, instructions, and
directions for installation.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
STRUCTURAL-STEEL MATERIALS
A.
W-Shapes: ASTM A 992/A 992M, Grade 50 (345).
B.
Channels, Angles-Shapes: ASTM A 36/A 36M.
C.
Plate and Bar: ASTM A 36/A 36M.
D.
Cold-Formed Hollow Structural Sections: ASTM A 500, Grade B, structural tubing.
E.
Welding Electrodes: Comply with AWS requirements.
2.2
BOLTS, CONNECTORS, AND ANCHORS
A.
High-Strength Bolts, Nuts, and Washers:
steel structural bolts.
1.
B.
ASTM A 325 (ASTM A 325M), Type 1, heavy-hex
Direct-Tension Indicators:
ASTM F 959,
compressible-washer type with plain finish.
Type 325
(ASTM F 959M,
Type 8.8),
High-Strength Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A 490 (ASTM A 490M), Type 1, heavy-hex
steel structural bolts or tension-control, bolt-nut-washer assemblies with splined ends.
1.
Direct-Tension Indicators:
ASTM F 959,
compressible-washer type with plain finish.
STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING
Type 490
(ASTM F 959M,
Type 10.9),
051200 - 4
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
C.
Zinc-Coated High-Strength Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A 325 (ASTM A 325M), Type 1,
heavy-hex steel structural bolts.
1.
2.
D.
Finish: Hot-dip zinc coating.
Direct-Tension Indicators:
ASTM F 959, Type 325 (ASTM F 959M,
compressible-washer type with mechanically deposited zinc coating finish.
Type 8.8),
Tension-Control, High-Strength Bolt-Nut-Washer Assemblies: ASTM F 1852, Type 1, heavyhex head assemblies consisting of steel structural bolts with splined ends, heavy-hex carbonsteel nuts, and hardened carbon-steel washers.
1.
Finish: Plain
E.
Shear Connectors: ASTM A 108, Grades 1015 through 1020, headed-stud type, cold-finished
carbon steel; AWS D1.1/D1.1M, Type B.
F.
Unheaded Anchor Rods: ASTM F 1554, Grade 36.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
G.
Headed Anchor Rods: ASTM F 1554, Grade 36
1.
2.
3.
4.
H.
Configuration: Straight.
Nuts: ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M) heavy-hex carbon steel.
Plate Washers: ASTM A 36/A 36M carbon steel.
Washers: ASTM F 436 (ASTM F 436M), Type 1, hardened carbon steel.
Finish: Plain
Nuts: ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M) heavy-hex carbon steel.
Plate Washers: ASTM A 36/A 36M carbon steel.
Washers: ASTM F 436 (ASTM F 436M), Type 1, hardened carbon steel.
Finish: Plain
Structural Slide Bearings: Low-friction assemblies, of configuration indicated, that provide
vertical transfer of loads and allow horizontal movement perpendicular to plane of expansion
joint while resisting movement within plane of expansion joint.
1.
2.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
the following:
Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product
indicated on Drawings <Insert manufacturer's name; product name or designation> or
comparable product by one of the following:
a.
b.
c.
3.
4.
5.
Amscot Structural Products Corp.
Fluorocarbon Company Limited.
R.J. Watson Bridge & Structural Engineered Systems.
Mating Surfaces: PTFE and PTFE.
Coefficient of Friction: Not more than 0.04.
Design Load: Not less than 5,000 psi (34 MPa).
STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING
051200 - 5
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
6.
2.3
Total Movement Capability: 2 inches (50 mm).
PRIMER
A.
Primer: SSPC-Paint 25, Type II, zinc oxide, alkyd, linseed oil primer.
B.
Primer: Fabricator's standard lead- and chromate-free, nonasphaltic, rust-inhibiting primer
complying with MPI#79 and compatible with topcoat.
C.
Galvanizing Repair Paint: ASTM A 780.
2.4
GROUT
A.
Metallic, Shrinkage-Resistant Grout: ASTM C 1107, factory-packaged, metallic aggregate
grout, mixed with water to consistency suitable for application and a 30-minute working time.
B.
Nonmetallic, Shrinkage-Resistant Grout:
ASTM C 1107, factory-packaged, nonmetallic
aggregate grout, noncorrosive and nonstaining, mixed with water to consistency suitable for
application and a 30-minute working time.
2.5
FABRICATION
A.
Structural Steel: Fabricate and assemble in shop to greatest extent possible. Fabricate
according to AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges" and AISC 360.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
B.
Camber structural-steel members where indicated.
Fabricate beams with rolling camber up.
Identify high-strength structural steel according to ASTM A 6/A 6M and maintain
markings until structural steel has been erected.
Mark and match-mark materials for field assembly.
Complete structural-steel assemblies, including welding of units, before starting shoppriming operations.
Thermal Cutting: Perform thermal cutting by machine to greatest extent possible.
1.
Plane thermally cut
AWS D1.1/D1.1M.
edges
to
be
welded
to
comply
with
requirements
in
C.
Bolt Holes: Cut, drill, or punch standard bolt holes perpendicular to metal surfaces.
D.
Finishing: Accurately finish ends of columns and other members transmitting bearing loads.
E.
Cleaning: Clean and prepare steel surfaces that are to remain unpainted according to SSPCSP 1, "Solvent Cleaning, SSPC-SP 2, "Hand Tool Cleaning, or SSPC-SP 3, "Power Tool
Cleaning."
STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING
051200 - 6
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
F.
2.6
Shear Connectors: Prepare steel surfaces as recommended by manufacturer of shear
connectors. Use automatic end welding of headed-stud shear connectors according to
AWS D1.1/D1.1M and manufacturer's written instructions.
SHOP CONNECTIONS
A.
High-Strength Bolts: Shop install high-strength bolts according to RCSC's "Specification for
Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts" for type of bolt and type of joint specified,
1.
B.
2.7
Joint Type: Snug tightened or Slip critical.
Weld Connections: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M for tolerances, appearances, welding
procedure specifications, weld quality, and methods used in correcting welding work.
SHOP PRIMING
A.
Shop prime steel surfaces except the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
Surface Preparation: Clean surfaces to be painted. Remove loose rust and mill scale and
spatter, slag, or flux deposits. Prepare surfaces according to the following specifications and
standards:
1.
2.
C.
2.8
Surfaces embedded in concrete or mortar. Extend priming of partially embedded
members to a depth of 2 inches (50 mm).
Surfaces to be field welded.
Surfaces to be high-strength bolted with slip-critical connections.
Galvanized surfaces.
SSPC-SP 2, "Hand Tool Cleaning."
SSPC-SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning."
Priming: Immediately after surface preparation, apply primer according to manufacturer's
written instructions and at rate recommended by SSPC to provide a minimum dry film thickness
of 1.5 mils (0.038 mm). Use priming methods that result in full coverage of joints, corners,
edges, and exposed surfaces.
GALVANIZING
A.
Hot-Dip Galvanized Finish: Apply zinc coating by the hot-dip process to structural steel
according to ASTM A 123/A 123M.
1.
2.
3.
Fill vent and drain holes that will be exposed in the finished Work unless they will function
as weep holes, by plugging with zinc solder and filing off smooth.
Galvanize all exterior exposed structural steel.
Galvanize lintels, shelf angles, and welded door frames attached to structural-steel frame
and located in exterior walls.
STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING
051200 - 7
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
2.9
SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Verify, with steel Erector present, elevations of concrete- and masonry-bearing surfaces and
locations of anchor rods, bearing plates, and other embedments for compliance with
requirements.
1.
B.
3.2
Prepare a certified survey of bearing surfaces, anchor rods, bearing plates, and other
embedments showing dimensions, locations, angles, and elevations.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
PREPARATION
A.
3.3
Provide temporary shores, guys, braces, and other supports during erection to keep structural
steel secure, plumb, and in alignment against temporary construction loads and loads equal in
intensity to design loads. Remove temporary supports when permanent structural steel,
connections, and bracing are in place unless otherwise indicated.
ERECTION
A.
Set structural steel accurately in locations and to elevations indicated and according to
AISC 303 and AISC 360.
B.
Base Plates: Clean concrete- and masonry-bearing surfaces of bond-reducing materials, and
roughen surfaces prior to setting plates. Clean bottom surface of plates.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Set plates for structural members on wedges, shims, or setting nuts as required.
Weld plate washers to top of baseplate.
Snug-tighten anchor rods after supported members have been positioned and plumbed.
Do not remove wedges or shims but, if protruding, cut off flush with edge of plate before
packing with grout.
Promptly pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and plates so no voids remain.
Neatly finish exposed surfaces; protect grout and allow to cure. Comply with
manufacturer's written installation instructions for shrinkage-resistant grouts.
C.
Maintain erection tolerances of structural steel within AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for
Steel Buildings and Bridges."
D.
Align and adjust various members that form part of complete frame or structure before
permanently fastening. Before assembly, clean bearing surfaces and other surfaces that will be
STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING
051200 - 8
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
in permanent contact with members. Perform necessary adjustments to compensate for
discrepancies in elevations and alignment.
1.
2.
Level and plumb individual members of structure.
Make allowances for difference between temperature at time of erection and mean
temperature when structure is completed and in service.
E.
Splice members only where indicated.
F.
Do not use thermal cutting during erection unless approved by Architect.
G.
Do not enlarge unfair holes in members by burning or using drift pins. Ream holes that must be
enlarged to admit bolts.
H.
Shear Connectors: Prepare steel surfaces as recommended by manufacturer of shear
connectors. Use automatic end welding of headed-stud shear connectors according to
AWS D1.1/D1.1M and manufacturer's written instructions.
3.4
FIELD CONNECTIONS
A.
High-Strength Bolts: Install high-strength bolts according to RCSC's "Specification for Structural
Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts" for type of bolt and type of joint specified.
1.
B.
Weld Connections: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M for tolerances, appearances, welding
procedure specifications, weld quality, and methods used in correcting welding work.
1.
2.
3.
3.5
Joint Type: Snug tightened or Slip critical.
Comply with AISC 303 and AISC 360 for bearing, alignment, adequacy of temporary
connections, and removal of paint on surfaces adjacent to field welds.
Remove backing bars or runoff tabs where indicated, back gouge, and grind steel
smooth.
Assemble and weld built-up sections by methods that will maintain true alignment of axes
without exceeding tolerances in AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings
and Bridges" for mill material.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to
inspect field welds and high-strength bolted connections.
B.
Bolted Connections: Bolted connections will be tested and inspected according to RCSC's
"Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts."
C.
Welded Connections: Field welds will be visually inspected according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M.
STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING
051200 - 9
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
1.
In addition to visual inspection, field welds will be tested and inspected according to
AWS D1.1/D1.1M and the following inspection procedures, at testing agency's option:
a.
b.
c.
d.
D.
3.6
Liquid Penetrant Inspection: ASTM E 165.
Magnetic Particle Inspection: ASTM E 709; performed on root pass and on
finished weld. Cracks or zones of incomplete fusion or penetration will not be
accepted.
Ultrasonic Inspection: ASTM E 164.
Radiographic Inspection: ASTM E 94.
Correct deficiencies in Work that test reports and inspections indicate does not comply with the
Contract Documents.
REPAIRS AND PROTECTION
A.
Galvanized Surfaces: Clean areas where galvanizing is damaged or missing and repair
galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780.
B.
Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean exposed areas where primer is damaged
or missing and paint with the same material as used for shop painting to comply with SSPCPA 1 for touching up shop-painted surfaces.
1.
C.
Clean and prepare surfaces by SSPC-SP 2 hand-tool cleaning or SSPC-SP 3 power-tool
cleaning.
Touchup Painting: Cleaning and touchup painting are specified in Section 099113 "Exterior
Painting"Section 099123 "Interior Painting."
END OF SECTION 051200
STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING
051200 - 10
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
SECTION 054000 - COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
B.
Related Requirements:
1.
2.
1.3
Ceiling joist framing.
Section 055000 "Metal Fabrications" for masonry shelf angles and connections.
Section 092216 "Non-Structural Metal Framing" for interior non-load-bearing, metal-stud
framing and ceiling-suspension assemblies.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of cold-formed steel framing product and accessory.
B.
Shop Drawings:
1.
2.
C.
1.4
Include layout, spacings, sizes, thicknesses, and types of cold-formed steel framing;
fabrication; and fastening and anchorage details, including mechanical fasteners.
Indicate reinforcing channels, opening framing, supplemental framing, strapping, bracing,
bridging, splices, accessories, connection details, and attachment to adjoining work.
Delegated-Design Submittal: For cold-formed steel framing.
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A.
Qualification Data: For testing agency.
B.
Welding certificates.
C.
Product Test Reports: For each listed product, for tests performed by manufacturer and
witnessed by a qualified testing agency.
COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING
054000 - 1
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
D.
1.5
Steel sheet.
Expansion anchors.
Power-actuated anchors.
Mechanical fasteners.
Vertical deflection clips.
Horizontal drift deflection clips
Miscellaneous structural clips and accessories.
Research Reports: For non-standard cold-formed steel framing, from ICC-ES.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to ASTM E 329 for testing indicated.
B.
Product Tests: Mill certificates or data from a qualified independent testing agency or in-house
testing with calibrated test equipment indicating steel sheet complies with requirements,
including base-metal thickness, yield strength, tensile strength, total elongation, chemical
requirements, and metallic-coating thickness.
C.
Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following:
1.
2.
D.
1.6
AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."
AWS D1.3/D1.3M, "Structural Welding Code - Sheet Steel."
Comply with AISI S230 "Standard for Cold-Formed Steel Framing - Prescriptive Method for One
and Two Family Dwellings."
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Protect cold-formed steel framing from corrosion, moisture staining, deformation, and other
damage during delivery, storage, and handling.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
AllSteel & Gypsum Products, Inc.
Custom Stud Inc.
Dietrich Metal Framing; a Worthington Industries Company.
MarinoWARE.
Nuconsteel; a Nucor Company.
Southeastern Stud & Components, Inc.
COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING
054000 - 2
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
2.2
State Building Products, Inc.
Steel Construction Systems.
Steel Structural Systems.
Super Stud Building Products, Inc.
United Steel Manufacturing.
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer, as defined in Section 014000
"Quality Requirements," to design cold-formed steel framing.
B.
Structural Performance: Provide cold-formed steel framing capable of withstanding design loads
within limits and under conditions indicated.
1.
2.
Design Loads: In accordance with ASCE 7 as appropriate for the Barbados region.
Deflection Limits: Design framing systems to withstand design loads without deflections
greater than the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
3.
4.
Design framing systems to provide for movement of framing members located outside the
insulated building envelope without damage or overstressing, sheathing failure,
connection failure, undue strain on fasteners and anchors, or other detrimental effects
when subject to a maximum ambient temperature change of 120 deg F (67 deg C).
Design framing system to maintain clearances at openings, to allow for construction
tolerances, and to accommodate live load deflection of primary building structure as
follows:
a.
5.
C.
Exterior Load-Bearing Wall Framing: Horizontal deflection of 1/600 of the wall
height.
Interior Load-Bearing Wall Framing: Horizontal deflection of 1/360 of the wall
height under a horizontal load of 5 lbf/sq. ft. (239 Pa).
Exterior Non-Load-Bearing Framing: Horizontal deflection of 1/360 of the wall
height.
Roof Rafter Framing: Vertical deflection of 1/240 of the horizontally projected span
for live loads.
Ceiling Joist Framing: Vertical deflection of 1/240 of the span for live loads and
1/240 for total loads of the span.
Upward and downward movement of 1/2 inch (13 mm).
Design exterior non-load-bearing wall framing to accommodate horizontal deflection
without regard for contribution of sheathing materials.
Cold-Formed Steel Framing Design Standards:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Floor and Roof Systems: AISI S210.
Wall Studs: AISI S211.
Headers: AISI S212.
Lateral Design: AISI S213.
COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING
054000 - 3
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
D.
2.3
AISI Specifications and Standards: Unless more stringent requirements are indicated, comply
with AISI S100 and AISI S200.
COLD-FORMED STEEL FRAMING, GENERAL
A.
Recycled Content of Steel Products: Postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of
preconsumer recycled content not less than 25 percent.
B.
Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1003/A 1003M, Structural Grade, Type H, metallic coated, of grade and
coating weight as follows:
1.
2.
C.
Steel Sheet for Vertical Deflection, Drift Clips: ASTM A 653/A 653M, structural steel, zinc
coated, of grade and coating as follows:
1.
2.
2.4
Grade: ST50H (ST340H), as required by structural performance.
Coating: G90 (Z275) or equivalent.
Grade: 50 (340), Class 1 as required by structural performance.
Coating: G90 (Z275).
LOAD-BEARING WALL FRAMING
A.
Steel Studs: Manufacturer's standard C-shaped steel studs, of web depths indicated, punched,
with stiffened flanges, and as follows:
1.
2.
B.
Steel Track: Manufacturer's standard U-shaped steel track, of web depths indicated,
unpunched, with straight flanges, and as follows:
1.
2.
C.
Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.0428 inch (1.09 mm) Matching steel studs.
Flange Width: 2 inches (51 mm).
Steel Box or Back-to-Back Headers: Manufacturer's standard C-shapes used to form header
beams, of web depths indicated, unpunched, with stiffened flanges, and as follows:
1.
2.
D.
Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.0428 inch (1.09 mm).
Flange Width: 1-3/8 inches (35 mm), 2 inches (51 mm).
Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.0428 inch (1.09 mm).
Flange Width: 1-3/8 inches (35 mm), 2 inches (51 mm).
Steel Single- or Double-L Headers: Manufacturer's standard L-shapes used to form header
beams, of web depths indicated, and as follows:
1.
2.
Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.0428 inch (1.09 mm).
Top Flange Width: 2 inches (51 mm).
COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING
054000 - 4
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
2.5
EXTERIOR NON-LOAD-BEARING WALL FRAMING
A.
Steel Studs: Manufacturer's standard C-shaped steel studs, of web depths indicated, punched,
with stiffened flanges, and as follows:
1.
2.
B.
Steel Track: Manufacturer's standard U-shaped steel track, of web depths indicated,
unpunched, with unstiffened flanges, and as follows:
1.
2.
C.
Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.0428 inch (1.09 mm).
Flange Width: 2 inches (51 mm).
Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: Matching steel studs.
Flange Width: 2 inches (51 mm).
Vertical Deflection Clips: Manufacturer's standard head clips, capable of accommodating
upward and downward vertical displacement of primary structure through positive mechanical
attachment to stud web.
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
the following:
a.
b.
c.
ClarkWestern Building Systems, Inc.
Dietrich Metal Framing; a Worthington Industries company.
MarinoWARE.
D.
Single Deflection Track: Manufacturer's single, deep-leg, U-shaped steel track; unpunched, with
unstiffened flanges, of web depth to contain studs while allowing free vertical movement, with
flanges designed to support horizontal loads and transfer them to the primary structure, and as
follows:
E.
Drift Clips: Manufacturer's standard bypass or head clips, capable of isolating wall stud from
upward and downward vertical displacement and lateral drift of primary structure through
positive mechanical attachment to stud web and structure.
2.6
CEILING JOIST FRAMING
A.
Steel Ceiling Joists: Manufacturer's standard C-shaped steel sections, of web depths indicated,
unpunched or punched with standard holes, with stiffened flanges, and as follows:
1.
2.
2.7
Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.0428 inch (1.09 mm).
Flange Width: 2 inches (51 mm).
SOFFIT FRAMING
A.
Exterior Soffit Frame: Manufacturer's standard C-shaped steel sections, of web depths
indicated, with stiffened flanges, and as follows:
COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING
054000 - 5
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
1.
2.
2.8
Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.0428 inch (1.09 mm).
Flange Width: 2 inches (51 mm) minimum.
FRAMING ACCESSORIES
A.
Fabricate steel-framing accessories from steel sheet, ASTM A 1003/A 1003M, Structural Grade,
Type H, metallic coated, of same grade and coating weight used for framing members.
B.
Provide accessories of manufacturer's standard thickness and configuration, unless otherwise
indicated, as follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
2.9
Supplementary framing.
Bracing, bridging, and solid blocking.
Web stiffeners.
Anchor clips.
End clips.
Joist hangers and end closures.
ANCHORS, CLIPS, AND FASTENERS
A.
Steel Shapes and Clips: ASTM A 36/A 36M, zinc coated by hot-dip process according to
ASTM A 123/A 123M.
B.
Anchor Bolts: ASTM F 1554, Grade 36, threaded carbon-steel hex-headed bolts and carbonsteel nuts; and flat, hardened-steel washers; zinc coated by hot-dip process according to
ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class C.
C.
Expansion Anchors: Fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with allowable load or
strength design capacities calculated according to ICC-ES AC193 and ACI 318 greater than or
equal to the design load, as determined by testing per ASTM E 488 conducted by a qualified
testing agency.
D.
Power-Actuated Anchors: Fastener system of type suitable for application indicated, fabricated
from corrosion-resistant materials, with allowable load capacities calculated according to ICCES AC70, greater than or equal to the design load, as determined by testing per ASTM E 1190
conducted by a qualified testing agency.
E.
Mechanical Fasteners: ASTM C 1513, corrosion-resistant-coated, self-drilling, self-tapping, steel
drill screws.
1.
F.
Head Type: Low-profile head beneath sheathing, manufacturer's standard elsewhere.
Welding Electrodes: Comply with AWS standards.
COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING
054000 - 6
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
2.10
MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A.
Galvanizing Repair Paint: SSPC-Paint 20 or MIL-P-21035B.
B.
Shims: Load bearing, high-density multimonomer plastic, and nonleaching; or of cold-formed
steel of same grade and coating as framing members supported by shims.
C.
Sealer Gaskets: Closed-cell neoprene foam, 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) thick, selected from
manufacturer's standard widths to match width of bottom track or rim track members.
2.11
A.
FABRICATION
Fabricate cold-formed steel framing and accessories plumb, square, and true to line, and with
connections securely fastened, according to referenced AISI's specifications and standards,
manufacturer's written instructions, and requirements in this Section.
1.
2.
3.
Fabricate framing assemblies using jigs or templates.
Cut framing members by sawing or shearing; do not torch cut.
Fasten cold-formed steel framing members by welding, screw fastening, clinch fastening,
pneumatic pin fastening, or riveting as standard with fabricator. Wire tying of framing
members is not permitted.
a.
b.
4.
Comply with AWS D1.3/D1.3M requirements and procedures for welding,
appearance and quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work.
Locate mechanical fasteners and install according to Shop Drawings, with screw
penetrating joined members by no fewer than three exposed screw threads.
Fasten other materials to cold-formed steel framing by welding, bolting, pneumatic pin
fastening, or screw fastening, according to Shop Drawings.
B.
Reinforce, stiffen, and brace framing assemblies to withstand handling, delivery, and erection
stresses. Lift fabricated assemblies to prevent damage or permanent distortion.
C.
Fabrication Tolerances: Fabricate assemblies level, plumb, and true to line to a maximum
allowable tolerance variation of 1/8 inch in 10 feet (1:960) and as follows:
1.
2.
Spacing: Space individual framing members no more than plus or minus 1/8 inch (3 mm)
from plan location. Cumulative error shall not exceed minimum fastening requirements of
sheathing or other finishing materials.
Squareness: Fabricate each cold-formed steel framing assembly to a maximum out-ofsquare tolerance of 1/8 inch (3 mm).
COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING
054000 - 7
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine supporting substrates and abutting structural framing for compliance with requirements
for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
B.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2
PREPARATION
A.
Install load bearing shims or grout between the underside of load-bearing wall bottom track and
the top of foundation wall or slab at locations with a gap larger than 1/4 inch (6 mm) to ensure a
uniform bearing surface on supporting concrete or masonry construction.
B.
Install sealer gaskets at the underside of wall bottom track or rim track and at the top of
foundation wall or slab at stud or joist locations.
3.3
INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A.
Cold-formed steel framing may be shop or field fabricated for installation, or it may be field
assembled.
B.
Install cold-formed steel framing according to AISI S200 and to manufacturer's written
instructions unless more stringent requirements are indicated.
C.
Install shop- or field-fabricated, cold-formed framing and securely anchor to supporting
structure.
1.
D.
Screw, bolt, or weld wall panels at horizontal and vertical junctures to produce flush,
even, true-to-line joints with maximum variation in plane and true position between
fabricated panels not exceeding 1/16 inch (1.6 mm).
Install cold-formed steel framing and accessories plumb, square, and true to line, and with
connections securely fastened.
1.
2.
Cut framing members by sawing or shearing; do not torch cut.
Fasten cold-formed steel framing members by welding, screw fastening, clinch fastening,
or riveting. Wire tying of framing members is not permitted.
a.
b.
Comply with AWS D1.3/D1.3M requirements and procedures for welding,
appearance and quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work.
Locate mechanical fasteners and install according to Shop Drawings, and
complying with requirements for spacing, edge distances, and screw penetration.
COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING
054000 - 8
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
E.
Install framing members in one-piece lengths unless splice connections are indicated for track
or tension members.
F.
Install temporary bracing and supports to secure framing and support loads comparable in
intensity to those for which structure was designed. Maintain braces and supports in place,
undisturbed, until entire integrated supporting structure has been completed and permanent
connections to framing are secured.
G.
Do not bridge building expansion joints with cold-formed steel framing. Independently frame
both sides of joints.
H.
Install insulation, specified in Section 072100 "Thermal Insulation," in built-up exterior framing
members, such as headers, sills, boxed joists, and multiple studs at openings, that are
inaccessible on completion of framing work.
I.
Erection Tolerances: Install cold-formed steel framing level, plumb, and true to line to a
maximum allowable tolerance variation of 1/8 inch in 10 feet (1:960) and as follows:
1.
3.4
Space individual framing members no more than plus or minus 1/8 inch (3 mm) from plan
location. Cumulative error shall not exceed minimum fastening requirements of sheathing
or other finishing materials.
EXTERIOR NON-LOAD-BEARING WALL INSTALLATION
A.
Install continuous tracks sized to match studs. Align tracks accurately and securely anchor to
supporting structure as indicated.
B.
Fasten both flanges of studs to top and bottom track unless otherwise indicated. Space studs as
follows:
1.
Stud Spacing: 16 inches (406 mm), 24 inches (610 mm) As indicated.
C.
Set studs plumb, except as needed for diagonal bracing or required for nonplumb walls or
warped surfaces and similar requirements.
D.
Isolate non-load-bearing steel framing from building structure to prevent transfer of vertical
loads while providing lateral support.
1.
Connect drift clips to cold-formed metal framing and anchor to building structure.
E.
Bridging: Cold-rolled steel channel, welded or mechanically fastened to webs of punched studs.
F.
Bridging: Proprietary bridging bars installed according to manufacturer's written instructions.
G.
Install miscellaneous framing and connections, including stud kickers, web stiffeners, clip
angles, continuous angles, anchors, and fasteners, to provide a complete and stable wallframing system.
COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING
054000 - 9
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
3.5
JOIST INSTALLATION
A.
Install perimeter joist track sized to match joists. Align and securely anchor or fasten track to
supporting structure at corners, ends, and spacings indicated on Shop Drawings.
B.
Install joists bearing on supporting frame, level, straight, and plumb; adjust to final position,
brace, and reinforce. Fasten joists to both flanges of joist track.
1.
2.
C.
Install joists over supporting frame with a minimum end bearing of 1-1/2 inches (38 mm).
Reinforce ends and bearing points of joists with web stiffeners, end clips, joist hangers,
steel clip angles, or steel-stud sections as indicated on Shop Drawings.
Space joists not more than 2 inches (51 mm) from abutting walls, and as follows:
1.
Joist Spacing: 24 inches (610 mm), as indicated.
D.
Frame openings with built-up joist headers consisting of joist and joist track, or another
combination of connected joists if indicated.
E.
Install joist reinforcement at interior supports with single, short length of joist section located
directly over interior support, with lapped joists of equal length to joist reinforcement, or as
indicated on Shop Drawings.
1.
F.
Install bridging at intervals indicated on Shop Drawings. Fasten bridging at each joist
intersection as follows:
1.
G.
3.6
Install web stiffeners to transfer axial loads of walls above.
Bridging: Joist-track solid blocking of width and thickness indicated, secured to joist
webs.
Install miscellaneous joist framing and connections, including web stiffeners, closure pieces, clip
angles, continuous angles, hold-down angles, anchors, and fasteners, to provide a complete
and stable joist-framing assembly.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Field and shop welds will be subject to testing and inspecting.
B.
Remove and replace work where test results indicate that it does not comply with specified
requirements.
C.
Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine
compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements.
COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING
054000 - 10
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
3.7
REPAIRS AND PROTECTION
A.
Galvanizing Repairs: Prepare and repair damaged galvanized coatings on fabricated and
installed cold-formed steel framing with galvanized repair paint according to ASTM A 780 and
manufacturer's written instructions.
B.
Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to manufacturer and
Installer, that ensure that cold-formed steel framing is without damage or deterioration at time of
Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION 054000
COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING
054000 - 11
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
SECTION 055000 - METAL FABRICATIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
B.
Products furnished, but not installed, under this Section:
1.
C.
Loose steel lintels.
Related Sections:
1.
2.
1.3
Steel framing and supports for countertops.
Steel framing and supports for mechanical and electrical equipment.
Steel framing and supports for applications where framing and supports are not specified
in other Sections.
Steel shapes for supporting elevator door sills.
Metal ladders.
Abrasive nosings.
Miscellaneous steel trim.
Section 042200 "Concrete Unit Masonry" for installing loose lintels, anchor bolts, and
other items built into unit masonry.
Section 055213 "Pipe and Tube Railings."
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature
changes acting on exterior metal fabrications by preventing buckling, opening of joints,
overstressing of components, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects.
1.
Temperature Change: 120 deg F (67 deg C), ambient; 180 deg F (100 deg C), material
surfaces.
METAL FABRICATIONS
055000 - 1
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
1.4
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For the following:
1.
2.
B.
Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for metal fabrications.
1.
1.5
Paint products.
Grout.
Include plans, elevations, sections, and details of metal fabrications and their
connections. Show anchorage and accessory items.
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A.
Qualification Data: For qualified professional engineer.
B.
Welding certificates.
C.
Paint Compatibility Certificates: From manufacturers of topcoats applied over shop primers
certifying that shop primers are compatible with topcoats.
1.6
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M,
"Structural Welding Code - Steel."
B.
Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following:
1.
2.
3.
1.7
AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."
AWS D1.2/D1.2M, "Structural Welding Code - Aluminum."
AWS D1.6, "Structural Welding Code - Stainless Steel."
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
1.8
Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of walls and other construction contiguous with
metal fabrications by field measurements before fabrication.
COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate selection of shop primers with topcoats to be applied over them. Comply with paint
and coating manufacturers' written recommendations to ensure that shop primers and topcoats
are compatible with one another.
B.
Coordinate installation of anchorages. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for
installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral
METAL FABRICATIONS
055000 - 2
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in
time for installation.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
METALS, GENERAL
A.
2.2
Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth, flat surfaces unless otherwise
indicated. For metal fabrications exposed to view in the completed Work, provide materials
without seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, or blemishes.
FERROUS METALS
A.
Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.
B.
Stainless-Steel Sheet, Strip, and Plate: ASTM A 240/A 240M or ASTM A 666, Type 304.
C.
Stainless-Steel Bars and Shapes: ASTM A 276, Type 304.
D.
Steel Tubing: ASTM A 500, cold-formed steel tubing.
E.
Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, standard weight (Schedule 40) unless otherwise indicated.
F.
Cast Iron: Either gray iron, ASTM A 48/A 48M, or malleable iron, ASTM A 47/A 47M, unless
otherwise indicated.
2.3
NONFERROUS METALS
A.
Aluminum Plate and Sheet: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M), Alloy 6061-T6.
B.
Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M), Alloy 6063-T6.
2.4
FASTENERS
A.
General: Unless otherwise indicated, provide Type 304 stainless-steel fasteners for exterior
use and zinc-plated fasteners with coating complying with ASTM B 633 or ASTM F 1941
(ASTM F 1941M), Class Fe/Zn 5, at exterior walls. Select fasteners for type, grade, and class
required.
1.
2.
Provide stainless-steel fasteners for fastening aluminum.
Provide stainless-steel fasteners for fastening stainless steel.
METAL FABRICATIONS
055000 - 3
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
B.
Stainless-Steel Bolts and Nuts:
Regular hexagon-head annealed stainless-steel bolts,
ASTM F 593 (ASTM F 738M); with hex nuts, ASTM F 594 (ASTM F 836M); and, where
indicated, flat washers; Alloy Group 1 (A1).
C.
Anchor Bolts: ASTM F 1554, Grade 36, of dimensions indicated; with nuts, ASTM A 563; and,
where indicated, flat washers.
1.
Hot-dip galvanize or provide mechanically deposited, zinc coating where item being
fastened is indicated to be galvanized.
D.
Eyebolts: ASTM A 489.
E.
Machine Screws: ASME B18.6.3 (ASME B18.6.7M).
F.
Lag Screws: ASME B18.2.1 (ASME B18.2.3.8M).
G.
Wood Screws: Flat head, ASME B18.6.1.
H.
Plain Washers: Round, ASME B18.22.1 (ASME B18.22M).
I.
Lock Washers: Helical, spring type, ASME B18.21.1 (ASME B18.21.2M).
J.
Anchors, General: Anchors capable of sustaining, without failure, a load equal to six times the
load imposed when installed in unit masonry and four times the load imposed when installed in
concrete, as determined by testing according to ASTM E 488, conducted by a qualified
independent testing agency.
K.
Cast-in-Place Anchors in Concrete: Either threaded type or wedge type unless otherwise
indicated; galvanized ferrous castings, either ASTM A 47/A 47M malleable iron or
ASTM A 27/A 27M cast steel. Provide bolts, washers, and shims as needed, all hot-dip
galvanized per ASTM F 2329.
L.
Post-Installed Anchors: Torque-controlled expansion anchors.
1.
2.
2.5
Material for Interior Locations: Carbon-steel components zinc plated to comply with
ASTM B 633 or ASTM F 1941 (ASTM F 1941M), Class Fe/Zn 5, unless otherwise
indicated.
Material for Exterior Locations and Where Stainless Steel is Indicated: Alloy Group 1
(A1) stainless-steel bolts, ASTM F 593 (ASTM F 738M), and nuts, ASTM F 594
(ASTM F 836M).
MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A.
Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: Select according to AWS specifications for metal alloy
welded.
B.
Universal Shop Primer: Fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free, universal modified-alkyd primer
complying with MPI#79 and compatible with topcoat.
METAL FABRICATIONS
055000 - 4
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
1.
Use primer containing pigments that make it easily distinguishable from zinc-rich primer.
C.
Galvanizing Repair Paint: High-zinc-dust-content paint complying with SSPC-Paint 20 and
compatible with paints specified to be used over it.
D.
Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187.
E.
Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Factory-packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous grout
complying with ASTM C 1107. Provide grout specifically recommended by manufacturer for
interior and exterior applications.
2.6
FABRICATION, GENERAL
A.
Shop Assembly: Preassemble items in the shop to greatest extent possible. Disassemble units
only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Use connections that maintain
structural value of joined pieces. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation.
B.
Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges to a radius
of approximately 1/32 inch (1 mm) unless otherwise indicated. Remove sharp or rough areas
on exposed surfaces.
C.
Form bent-metal corners to smallest radius possible without causing grain separation or
otherwise impairing work.
D.
Form exposed work with accurate angles and surfaces and straight edges.
E.
Weld corners and seams continuously to comply with the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion
resistance of base metals.
Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.
Remove welding flux immediately.
At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so no
roughness shows after finishing.
F.
Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using concealed fasteners or
welds where possible.
Where exposed fasteners are required, use Phillips flat-head
(countersunk) fasteners unless otherwise indicated. Locate joints where least conspicuous.
G.
Fabricate seams and other connections that will be exposed to weather in a manner to exclude
water. Provide weep holes where water may accumulate.
H.
Cut, reinforce, drill, and tap metal fabrications as indicated to receive finish hardware, screws,
and similar items.
I.
Provide for anchorage of type indicated; coordinate with supporting structure. Space anchoring
devices to secure metal fabrications rigidly in place and to support indicated loads.
METAL FABRICATIONS
055000 - 5
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
1.
2.7
Where units are indicated to be cast into concrete or built into masonry, equip with
integrally welded steel strap anchors, 1/8 by 1-1/2 inches (3.2 by 38 mm), with a
minimum 6-inch (150-mm) embedment and 2-inch (50-mm) hook, not less than 8 inches
(200 mm) from ends and corners of units and 24 inches (600 mm) o.c., unless otherwise
indicated.
MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS
A.
General: Provide steel framing and supports not specified in other Sections as needed to
complete the Work.
B.
Fabricate units from steel shapes, plates, and bars of welded construction unless otherwise
indicated. Fabricate to sizes, shapes, and profiles indicated and as necessary to receive
adjacent construction.
1.
Furnish inserts for units installed after concrete is placed.
C.
Fabricate supports for operable partitions from continuous steel beams of sizes recommended
by partition manufacturer with attached bearing plates, anchors, and braces as recommended
by partition manufacturer. Drill or punch bottom flanges of beams to receive partition track
hanger rods; locate holes where indicated on operable partition Shop Drawings.
D.
Galvanize miscellaneous framing and supports where indicated.
E.
Prime miscellaneous framing and supports with primer specified where indicated.
2.8
METAL LADDERS
A.
General:
1.
B.
For elevator pit ladders, comply with ASME A17.1.
Steel Ladders:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Space siderails of elevator pit ladders 12 inches (300 mm) apart.
Siderails: Continuous, 3/8-by-2-1/2-inch (9.5-by-64-mm) steel flat bars, with eased
edges.
Rungs: 3/4-inch- (19-mm-) diameter steel bars.
Fit rungs in centerline of siderails; plug-weld and grind smooth on outer rail faces.
Provide nonslip surfaces on top of each rung by coating with abrasive material
metallically bonded to rung.
a.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may
be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following]:
1)
2)
METAL FABRICATIONS
IKG Industries, a division of Harsco Corporation; Mebac.
SlipNOT Metal Safety Flooring, a W. S. Molnar company; SlipNOT.
055000 - 6
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
6.
7.
2.9
Support each ladder at top and bottom and not more than 60 inches (1500 mm) o.c. with
welded or bolted steel brackets.
Galvanize ladders, including brackets and fasteners.
ABRASIVE METAL NOSINGS
A.
Cast-Metal Units: Cast iron, with an integral-abrasive, as-cast finish consisting of aluminum
oxide, silicon carbide, or a combination of both. Fabricate units in lengths necessary to
accurately fit openings or conditions.
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
2.
2.10
American Safety Tread Co., Inc.
Balco, Inc.
Barry Pattern & Foundry Co., Inc.
Granite State Casting Co.
Safe-T-Metal Company, Inc.
Wooster Products Inc.
Nosings: Cross-hatched units, 1-1/2 by 1-1/2 inches (38 by 38 mm), for casting into
concrete.
MISCELLANEOUS STEEL TRIM
A.
Unless otherwise indicated, fabricate units from steel shapes, plates, and bars of profiles shown
with continuously welded joints and smooth exposed edges. Miter corners and use concealed
field splices where possible.
B.
Provide cutouts, fittings, and anchorages as needed to coordinate assembly and installation
with other work.
1.
C.
2.11
A.
Provide with integrally welded steel strap anchors for embedding in concrete or masonry
construction.
Galvanize exterior miscellaneous steel trim.
LOOSE STEEL LINTELS
Fabricate loose steel lintels from steel angles and shapes of size indicated for openings and
recesses in masonry walls and partitions at locations indicated. Fabricate in single lengths for
each opening unless otherwise indicated. Weld adjoining members together to form a single
unit where indicated.
METAL FABRICATIONS
055000 - 7
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
B.
Size loose lintels to provide bearing length at each side of openings equal to 1/12 of clear span
but not less than 8 inches (200 mm) unless otherwise indicated.
C.
Galvanize loose steel lintels located in exterior walls.
D.
Prime loose steel lintels located in exterior walls with zinc-rich primer.
2.12
A.
2.13
STEEL WELD PLATES AND ANGLES
Provide steel weld plates and angles not specified in other Sections, for items supported from
concrete construction as needed to complete the Work. Provide each unit with no fewer than
two integrally welded steel strap anchors for embedding in concrete.
FINISHES, GENERAL
A.
Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for
recommendations for applying and designating finishes.
B.
Finish metal fabrications after assembly.
C.
Finish exposed surfaces to remove tool and die marks and stretch lines, and to blend into
surrounding surface.
2.14
A.
STEEL AND IRON FINISHES
Galvanizing: Hot-dip galvanize items as indicated to comply with ASTM A 153/A 153M for steel
and iron hardware and with ASTM A 123/A 123M for other steel and iron products.
1.
B.
Shop prime iron and steel items not indicated to be galvanized unless they are to be embedded
in concrete, sprayed-on fireproofing, or masonry, or unless otherwise indicated.
1.
C.
Do not quench or apply post galvanizing treatments that might interfere with paint
adhesion.
Shop prime with universal shop primer.
Preparation for Shop Priming: Prepare surfaces to comply with requirements indicated below:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Exterior Items: SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial Blast Cleaning."
Items Indicated to Receive Zinc-Rich Primer: SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial
Blast Cleaning."
Items Indicated to Receive Primers Specified in Section 099600 "High-Performance
Coatings": SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial Blast Cleaning."
Other Items: SSPC-SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning."
METAL FABRICATIONS
055000 - 8
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
D.
Shop Priming: Apply shop primer to comply with SSPC-PA 1, "Paint Application Specification
No. 1: Shop, Field, and Maintenance Painting of Steel," for shop painting.
1.
Stripe paint corners, crevices, bolts, welds, and sharp edges.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A.
Cutting, Fitting, and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing metal
fabrications. Set metal fabrications accurately in location, alignment, and elevation; with edges
and surfaces level, plumb, true, and free of rack; and measured from established lines and
levels.
B.
Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints. Weld connections that are
not to be left as exposed joints but cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations.
Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of exterior units that have been hot-dip galvanized after
fabrication and are for bolted or screwed field connections.
C.
Field Welding: Comply with the following requirements:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion
resistance of base metals.
Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.
Remove welding flux immediately.
At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so no
roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches that of adjacent
surface.
D.
Fastening to In-Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where metal
fabrications are required to be fastened to in-place construction. Provide threaded fasteners for
use with concrete and masonry inserts, toggle bolts, through bolts, lag screws, wood screws,
and other connectors.
E.
Provide temporary bracing or anchors in formwork for items that are to be built into concrete,
masonry, or similar construction.
F.
Corrosion Protection: Coat concealed surfaces of aluminum that will come into contact with
grout, concrete, masonry, wood, or dissimilar metals with the following:
1.
2.
Cast Aluminum: Heavy coat of bituminous paint.
Extruded Aluminum: Two coats of clear lacquer.
METAL FABRICATIONS
055000 - 9
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
3.2
INSTALLING MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS
A.
General: Install framing and supports to comply with requirements of items being supported,
including manufacturers' written instructions and requirements indicated on Shop Drawings.
B.
Anchor supports for operable partitions securely to and rigidly brace from building structure.
C.
Support steel girders on solid grouted masonry, concrete, or steel pipe columns. Secure girders
with anchor bolts embedded in grouted masonry or concrete or with bolts through top plates of
pipe columns.
1.
D.
Install pipe columns on concrete footings with grouted baseplates. Position and grout column
baseplates as specified in "Installing Bearing and Leveling Plates" Article.
1.
E.
3.3
Where grout space under bearing plates is indicated for girders supported on concrete or
masonry, install as specified in "Installing Bearing and Leveling Plates" Article.
Grout baseplates of columns supporting steel girders after girders are installed and
leveled.
Install stainless steel corner guards with construction adhesive, plumb and level, in locations
indicated on Drawings.
ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A.
Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and
abraded areas. Paint uncoated and abraded areas with the same material as used for shop
painting to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-painted surfaces.
1.
B.
Apply by brush or spray to provide a minimum 2.0-mil (0.05-mm) dry film thickness.
Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and repair
galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780.
END OF SECTION 055000
METAL FABRICATIONS
055000 - 10
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
SECTION 055213 - PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
B.
Related Sections:
1.
1.3
Steel pipe and tube railings.
Section 033000 "Cast In Place Concrete" for concrete stairs.
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
Delegated Design: Design railings, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified
professional engineer, using performance requirements and design criteria indicated.
B.
General: In engineering railings to withstand structural loads indicated, determine allowable
design working stresses of railing materials based on the following:
1.
C.
Steel: 72 percent of minimum yield strength.
Structural Performance: Railings shall withstand the effects of gravity loads and the following
loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated:
1.
Handrails and Top Rails of Guards:
a.
b.
c.
2.
Uniform load of 50 lbf/ ft. (0.73 kN/m) applied in any direction.
Concentrated load of 200 lbf (0.89 kN) applied in any direction.
Uniform and concentrated loads need not be assumed to act concurrently.
Infill of Guards:
a.
b.
Concentrated load of 50 lbf (0.22 kN) applied horizontally on an area of 1 sq. ft.
(0.093 sq. m).
Infill load and other loads need not be assumed to act concurrently.
PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS
055213 - 1
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
D.
Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature
changes acting on exterior metal fabrications by preventing buckling, opening of joints,
overstressing of components, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects.
1.
E.
1.4
Temperature Change: 120 deg F (67 deg C), ambient; 180 deg F (100 deg C), material
surfaces.
Control of Corrosion: Prevent galvanic action and other forms of corrosion by insulating metals
and other materials from direct contact with incompatible materials.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For the following:
1.
2.
3.
Manufacturer's product lines of mechanically connected railings.
Railing brackets.
Grout, anchoring cement, and paint products.
B.
Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.
C.
Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required.
1.
2.
3.
Sections of each distinctly different linear railing member, including handrails, top rails,
posts, and balusters.
Fittings and brackets.
Assembled Sample of railing system, made from full-size components, including top rail,
post, handrail, and infill. Sample need not be full height.
a.
D.
1.5
Show method of connecting members at intersections.
Delegated-Design Submittal: For installed products indicated to comply with performance
requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified
professional engineer responsible for their preparation.
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A.
Qualification Data: For qualified professional engineer.
B.
Welding certificates.
C.
Paint Compatibility Certificates: From manufacturers of topcoats applied over shop primers
certifying that shop primers are compatible with topcoats.
D.
Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified
testing agency, according to ASTM E 894 and ASTM E 935.
PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS
055213 - 2
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
1.6
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Source Limitations: Obtain each type of railing from single source from single manufacturer.
B.
Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M,
"Structural Welding Code - Steel."
1.7
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
1.8
Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of walls and other construction contiguous with
metal fabrications by field measurements before fabrication.
COORDINATION AND SCHEDULING
A.
Coordinate selection of shop primers with topcoats to be applied over them. Comply with paint
and coating manufacturers' written recommendations to ensure that shop primers and topcoats
are compatible with one another.
B.
Coordinate installation of anchorages for railings. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and
directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items
with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to
Project site in time for installation.
C.
Schedule installation so wall attachments are made only to completed walls. Do not support
railings temporarily by any means that do not satisfy structural performance requirements.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
METALS, GENERAL
A.
Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth surfaces, without seam marks, roller
marks, rolled trade names, stains, discolorations, or blemishes.
B.
Brackets, Flanges, and Anchors: Cast or formed metal of same type of material and finish as
supported rails unless otherwise indicated.
2.2
STEEL AND IRON
A.
Tubing: ASTM A 500 (cold formed).
B.
Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type F or Type S, Grade A, Standard Weight (Schedule 40), unless
another grade and weight are required by structural loads.
1.
Provide galvanized finish for exterior installations.
PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS
055213 - 3
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
C.
2.3
Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.
FASTENERS
A.
General: Provide the following:
1.
Hot-Dip Galvanized Railings: Type 304 stainless-steel or hot-dip zinc-coated steel
fasteners complying with ASTM A 153/A 153M or ASTM F 2329 for zinc coating.
B.
Fasteners for Anchoring Railings to Other Construction: Select fasteners of type, grade, and
class required to produce connections suitable for anchoring railings to other types of
construction indicated and capable of withstanding design loads.
C.
Fasteners for Interconnecting Railing Components:
1.
D.
Post-Installed Anchors: Torque-controlled expansion anchors capable of sustaining, without
failure, a load equal to six times the load imposed when installed in unit masonry and four times
the load imposed when installed in concrete, as determined by testing according to
ASTM E 488, conducted by a qualified independent testing agency.
1.
2.
2.4
Provide concealed fasteners for interconnecting railing components and for attaching
them to other work, unless otherwise indicated.
Material for Interior Locations: Carbon-steel components zinc-plated to comply with
ASTM B 633 or ASTM F 1941 (ASTM F 1941M), Class Fe/Zn 5, unless otherwise
indicated.
Material for Exterior Locations and Where Stainless Steel is Indicated: Alloy Group 1
(A1)] stainless-steel bolts, ASTM F 593 (ASTM F 738M), and nuts, ASTM F 594
(ASTM F 836M).
MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A.
Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: Select according to AWS specifications for metal alloy
welded.
B.
Low-Emitting Materials: Paints and coatings shall comply with the testing and product
requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing
of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental
Chambers."
C.
Etching Cleaner for Galvanized Metal: Complying with MPI#25.
D.
Shop Primer for Galvanized Steel:
MPI#134.
E.
Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187.
PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS
Water based galvanized metal primer complying with
055213 - 4
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
F.
2.5
Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Factory-packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous grout
complying with ASTM C 1107. Provide grout specifically recommended by manufacturer for
interior and exterior applications.
FABRICATION
A.
General: Fabricate railings to comply with requirements indicated for design, dimensions,
member sizes and spacing, details, finish, and anchorage, but not less than that required to
support structural loads.
B.
Assemble railings in the shop to greatest extent possible to minimize field splicing and
assembly. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Clearly
mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation. Use connections that maintain
structural value of joined pieces.
C.
Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges to a radius
of approximately 1/32 inch (1 mm) unless otherwise indicated. Remove sharp or rough areas
on exposed surfaces.
D.
Form work true to line and level with accurate angles and surfaces.
E.
Fabricate connections that will be exposed to weather in a manner to exclude water. Provide
weep holes where water may accumulate.
F.
Cut, reinforce, drill, and tap as indicated to receive finish hardware, screws, and similar items.
G.
Connections: Fabricate railings with nonwelded connections unless otherwise indicated.
H.
Nonwelded Connections: Connect members with concealed mechanical fasteners and fittings.
Fabricate members and fittings to produce flush, smooth, rigid, hairline joints.
1.
I.
Fabricate splice joints for field connection using an epoxy structural adhesive if this is
manufacturer's standard splicing method.
Form changes in direction as follows:
1.
By inserting prefabricated elbow fittings.
J.
Close exposed ends of railing members with prefabricated end fittings.
K.
Provide wall returns at ends of wall-mounted handrails unless otherwise indicated. Close ends
of returns unless clearance between end of rail and wall is 1/4 inch (6 mm) or less.
L.
Brackets, Flanges, Fittings, and Anchors: Provide wall brackets, flanges, miscellaneous fittings,
and anchors to interconnect railing members to other work unless otherwise indicated.
PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS
055213 - 5
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
1.
At brackets and fittings fastened to plaster or gypsum board partitions, provide crushresistant fillers, or other means to transfer loads through wall finishes to structural
supports and prevent bracket or fitting rotation and crushing of substrate.
M.
Provide inserts and other anchorage devices for connecting railings to concrete or masonry
work. Fabricate anchorage devices capable of withstanding loads imposed by railings.
Coordinate anchorage devices with supporting structure.
N.
For railing posts set in concrete, provide stainless-steel sleeves not less than 6 inches (150
mm) long with inside dimensions not less than 1/2 inch (13 mm) greater than outside
dimensions of post, with metal plate forming bottom closure.
O.
Toe Boards: Where indicated, provide toe boards at railings around openings and at edge of
open-sided floors and platforms. Fabricate to dimensions and details indicated.
2.6
FINISHES, GENERAL
A.
Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for
recommendations for applying and designating finishes.
B.
Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable,
temporary protective covering before shipping.
C.
Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are
acceptable if they are within one-half of the range of approved Samples. Noticeable variations
in the same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of other components are
acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to
minimize contrast.
D.
Provide exposed fasteners with finish matching appearance, including color and texture, of
railings.
2.7
STEEL AND IRON FINISHES
A.
Galvanized Railings:
1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
Hot-dip galvanize exterior steel and iron railings, including hardware, after fabrication.
Comply with ASTM A 123/A 123M for hot-dip galvanized railings.
Do not quench or apply post galvanizing treatments that might interfere with paint
adhesion.
Fill vent and drain holes that will be exposed in the finished Work, unless indicated to
remain as weep holes, by plugging with zinc solder and filing off smooth.
For galvanized railings, provide hot-dip galvanized fittings, brackets, fasteners, sleeves, and
other ferrous components.
PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS
055213 - 6
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
C.
Preparing Galvanized Railings for Shop Priming: After galvanizing, thoroughly clean railings of
grease, dirt, oil, flux, and other foreign matter, and treat with etching cleaner.
D.
Preparation for Shop Priming:
requirements indicated below:
1.
2.
3.
E.
Exterior Railings: SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial Blast Cleaning."
Railings Indicated to Receive Primers Specified in Section 099600 "High-Performance
Coatings": SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial Blast Cleaning."
Other Railings: SSPC-SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning."
Primer Application: Apply shop primer to prepared surfaces of railings unless otherwise
indicated. Comply with requirements in SSPC-PA 1, "Paint Application Specification No. 1:
Shop, Field, and Maintenance Painting of Steel," for shop painting. Primer need not be applied
to surfaces to be embedded in concrete or masonry.
1.
2.
F.
Prepare uncoated ferrous-metal surfaces to comply with
Shop prime uncoated railings with universal shop primer unless indicated.
Do not apply primer to galvanized surfaces.
High-Performance Coating: Apply epoxy intermediate and polyurethane topcoats to primecoated surfaces. Comply with coating manufacturer's written instructions and with requirements
in SSPC-PA 1, "Paint Application Specification No. 1: Shop, Field, and Maintenance Painting of
Steel," for shop painting. Apply at spreading rates recommended by coating manufacturer.
1.
Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. (Match existing Red color
used at EFIS/entrance.)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
3.2
Examine plaster and gypsum board assemblies, where reinforced to receive anchors, to verify
that locations of concealed reinforcements have been clearly marked for Installer. Locate
reinforcements and mark locations if not already done.
INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A.
Fit exposed connections together to form tight, hairline joints.
B.
Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing railings. Set railings accurately in
location, alignment, and elevation; measured from established lines and levels and free of rack.
1.
2.
Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of railing components that have been coated or
finished after fabrication and that are intended for field connection by mechanical or other
means without further cutting or fitting.
Set posts plumb within a tolerance of 1/16 inch in 3 feet (2 mm in 1 m).
PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS
055213 - 7
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
3.
Align rails so variations from level for horizontal members and variations from parallel
with rake of steps and ramps for sloping members do not exceed 1/4 inch in 12 feet (5
mm in 3 m).
C.
Corrosion Protection: Coat concealed surfaces of aluminum that will be in contact with grout,
concrete, masonry, wood, or dissimilar metals, with a heavy coat of bituminous paint.
D.
Adjust railings before anchoring to ensure matching alignment at abutting joints.
E.
Fastening to In-Place Construction: Use anchorage devices and fasteners where necessary for
securing railings and for properly transferring loads to in-place construction.
3.3
RAILING CONNECTIONS
A.
Nonwelded Connections: Use mechanical or adhesive joints for permanently connecting railing
components. Seal recessed holes of exposed locking screws using plastic cement filler colored
to match finish of railings.
B.
Expansion Joints: Install expansion joints at locations indicated but not farther apart than
required to accommodate thermal movement. Provide slip-joint internal sleeve extending 2
inches (50 mm) beyond joint on either side, fasten internal sleeve securely to one side, and
locate joint within 6 inches (150 mm) of post.
3.4
ANCHORING POSTS
A.
Use metal sleeves preset and anchored into concrete for installing posts. After posts have been
inserted into sleeves, fill annular space between post and sleeve with nonshrink, nonmetallic
grout mixed and placed to comply with anchoring material manufacturer's written instructions.
B.
Form or core-drill holes not less than 5 inches (125 mm) deep and 3/4 inch (20 mm) larger than
OD of post for installing posts in concrete. Clean holes of loose material, insert posts, and fill
annular space between post and concrete with nonshrink, nonmetallic grout mixed and placed
to comply with anchoring material manufacturer's written instructions.
C.
Cover anchorage joint with flange of same metal as post, attached to post with set screws.
D.
Anchor posts to metal surfaces with oval flanges, angle type, or floor type as required by
conditions, connected to posts and to metal supporting members as follows:
1.
E.
For steel pipe railings, weld flanges to post and bolt to metal supporting surfaces.
Install removable railing sections, where indicated, in slip-fit metal sockets cast in concrete.
PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS
055213 - 8
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
3.5
ATTACHING RAILINGS
A.
Anchor railing ends at walls with round flanges anchored to wall construction and connected to
railing ends using nonwelded connections.
B.
Anchor railing ends to metal surfaces with flanges bolted to metal surfaces and connected to
railing ends using nonwelded connections.
C.
Attach railings to wall with wall brackets, except where end flanges are used. Provide brackets
with 1-1/2-inch (38-mm) clearance from inside face of handrail and finished wall surface.
Locate brackets as indicated or, if not indicated, at spacing required to support structural loads.
D.
Secure wall brackets and railing end flanges to building construction as follows:
1.
2.
3.
3.6
For concrete and solid masonry anchorage, use drilled-in expansion shields and hanger
or lag bolts.
For hollow masonry anchorage, use toggle bolts.
For steel-framed partitions, use self-tapping screws fastened to steel framing or to
concealed steel reinforcements.
ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A.
Clean by washing thoroughly with clean water and soap and rinsing with clean water.
B.
Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and
abraded areas of shop paint, and paint exposed areas with the same material as used for shop
painting to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-painted surfaces.
1.
C.
3.7
Apply by brush or spray to provide a minimum 2.0-mil (0.05-mm) dry film thickness.
Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and repair
galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780.
PROTECTION
A.
Protect finishes of railings from damage during construction period with temporary protective
coverings approved by railing manufacturer. Remove protective coverings at time of
Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION 055213
PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS
055213 - 9
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
SECTION 057300 - DECORATIVE METAL RAILINGS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
B.
Related Sections:
1.
2.
3.
1.3
Steel and iron decorative railings with stainless-steel, glass infill.
Section 061000 "Rough Carpentry".
Section 062023 "Interior Finish Carpentry" for wood railings.
Section 092216 "Non-Structural Metal Framing" for metal backing for anchoring railings.
DEFINITIONS
A.
1.4
Railings: Guards, handrails, and similar devices used for protection of occupants at open-sided
floor areas, pedestrian guidance and support, visual separation, or wall protection.
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
Delegated Design: Design railings, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified
professional engineer, using performance requirements and design criteria indicated.
B.
General: In engineering railings to withstand structural loads indicated, determine allowable
design working stresses of railing materials based on the following:
1.
2.
C.
Steel: 72 percent of minimum yield strength.
Glass: 25 percent of mean modulus of rupture (50 percent probability of breakage), as
listed in "Mechanical Properties" in AAMA's Aluminum Curtain Wall Series No. 12,
"Structural Properties of Glass."
Structural Performance: Railings shall withstand the effects of gravity loads and the following
loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated:
1.
Handrails and Top Rails of Guards:
DECORATIVE METAL RAILINGS
057300 - 1
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
a.
b.
c.
2.
Infill of Guards:
a.
b.
D.
1.5
Concentrated load of 50 lbf (0.22 kN) applied horizontally on an area of 1 sq. ft.
(0.093 sq. m).
Infill load and other loads need not be assumed to act concurrently.
Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature
changes acting on exterior metal fabrications by preventing buckling, opening of joints,
overstressing of components, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects.
1.
E.
Uniform load of 50 lbf/ft. (0.73 kN/m) applied in any direction.
Concentrated load of 200 lbf (0.89 kN) applied in any direction.
Uniform and concentrated loads need not be assumed to act concurrently.
Temperature Change: 120 deg F (67 deg C), ambient; 180 deg F (100 deg C), material
surfaces.
Control of Corrosion: Prevent galvanic action and other forms of corrosion by insulating metals
and other materials from direct contact with incompatible materials.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For the following:
1.
2.
Manufacturer's product lines of railings assembled from standard components.
Grout, anchoring cement, and paint products.
B.
Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.
C.
Samples for Initial Selection: For products involving selection of color, texture, or design.
D.
Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required.
1.
2.
3.
4.
E.
Sections of each distinctly different linear railing member, including handrails, top rails,
posts, and balusters.
Each type of glass required.
Fittings and brackets.
Assembled Samples of railing systems, made from full-size components, including top
rail, post, handrail, and infill. Show method of finishing members at intersections.
Samples need not be full height.
Delegated-Design Submittal: For installed products indicated to comply with performance
requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified
professional engineer responsible for their preparation.
DECORATIVE METAL RAILINGS
057300 - 2
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
1.6
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A.
Qualification Data: For qualified professional engineer.
B.
Mill Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of stainless-steel products certifying that products
furnished comply with requirements.
C.
Welding certificates.
D.
Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified
testing agency, according to ASTM E 894 and ASTM E 935.
1.7
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Source Limitations: Obtain each type of railing from single source from single manufacturer.
B.
Product Options: Information on Drawings and in Specifications establishes requirements for
system's aesthetic effects and performance characteristics. Aesthetic effects are indicated by
dimensions, arrangements, alignment, and profiles of components and assemblies as they
relate to sightlines, to one another, and to adjoining construction. Performance characteristics
are indicated by criteria subject to verification by one or more methods including structural
analysis, preconstruction testing, field testing, and in-service performance.
1.
C.
Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of railings and
are based on the specific system indicated. Refer to Section 016000 "Product Requirements."
1.
D.
Do not modify intended aesthetic effects, as judged solely by Architect, except with
Architect's approval. If modifications are proposed, submit comprehensive explanatory
data to Architect for review.
Do not modify intended aesthetic effects, as judged solely by Architect, except with
Architect's approval. If modifications are proposed, submit comprehensive explanatory
data to Architect for review.
Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following:
1.
AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."
E.
Safety Glazing Labeling: Permanently mark glass with certification label of the SGCC or another
certification agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction or manufacturer. Label shall
indicate manufacturer's name, type of glass, thickness, and safety glazing standard with which
glass complies.
F.
Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate
aesthetic effects and set quality standards for fabrication and installation.
DECORATIVE METAL RAILINGS
057300 - 3
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
1.
2.
1.8
Build mockups for each form and finish of railing consisting of two posts, top rail, infill
area, and anchorage system components that are full height and are not less than 24
inches (600 mm) in length.
Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of
Substantial Completion.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
1.9
Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of walls and other construction contiguous with
railings by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop
Drawings.
COORDINATION AND SCHEDULING
A.
Coordinate selection of shop primers with topcoats to be applied over them. Comply with paint
and coating manufacturers' written recommendations to ensure that shop primers and topcoats
are compatible with one another.
B.
Coordinate installation of anchorages for railings. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and
directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items
with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to
Project site in time for installation.
C.
Schedule installation so wall attachments are made only to completed walls. Do not support
railings temporarily by any means that do not suit structural performance requirements.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
METALS, GENERAL
A.
Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth surfaces, without seam marks, roller
marks, rolled trade names, stains, discolorations, or blemishes.
B.
Brackets, Flanges, and Anchors: Same metal and finish as supported rails unless otherwise
indicated.
1.
2.2
Provide welded-steel brackets with predrilled hole for bolted anchorage and with snap-on
cover as delineated and conceals bracket base and bolt head.
STEEL AND IRON
A.
Recycled Content of Steel Products: Postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of
preconsumer recycled content not less than 25 percent.
DECORATIVE METAL RAILINGS
057300 - 4
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
B.
Bars: Hot-rolled, carbon steel complying with ASTM A 29/A 29M, Grade 1010.
C.
Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.
2.3
GLASS AND GLAZING MATERIALS
A.
Laminated Glass: ASTM C 1172, Condition A (uncoated), Type I (transparent flat glass),
Quality-Q3 with two plies of glass and polyvinyl butyral interlayer not less than 0.060 inch (1.52
mm) thick.
1.
2.
3.
4.
2.4
Kind: LT (laminated tempered).
Glass Color: Clear.
Interlayer Color: Clear.
Glass Plies for Glass Infill Panels: Thickness required by structural loads, but not less
than 5.0 mm each.
FASTENERS
A.
Fastener Materials: Unless otherwise indicated, provide the following:
1.
2.
3.
Stainless-Steel Components: Type 316 stainless-steel fasteners.
Uncoated Steel Components: Plated-steel fasteners complying with ASTM B 633,
Class Fe/Zn 25 for electrodeposited zinc coating where concealed; Type 304 stainlesssteel fasteners where exposed.
Dissimilar Metals: Type 316 stainless-steel fasteners.
B.
Fasteners for Anchoring to Other Construction: Select fasteners of type, grade, and class
required to produce connections suitable for anchoring railings to other types of construction
indicated and capable of withstanding design loads.
C.
Provide concealed fasteners for interconnecting railing components and for attaching railings to
other work unless otherwise indicated.
D.
Anchors, General: Anchors capable of sustaining, without failure, a load equal to six times the
load imposed when installed in unit masonry and four times the load imposed when installed in
concrete, as determined by testing according to ASTM E 488, conducted by a qualified
independent testing agency.
E.
Post-Installed Anchors: Torque-controlled expansion anchors or chemical anchors.
1.
Material for Interior Locations: Carbon-steel components zinc plated to comply with
ASTM B 633 or ASTM F 1941 (ASTM F 1941M), Class Fe/Zn 5, unless otherwise
indicated.
DECORATIVE METAL RAILINGS
057300 - 5
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
2.5
MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A.
Wood Rails: Clear, straight-grained hardwood rails secured to recessed metal subrail.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Species: Padauk, Goncalo Alves, Cocobolo.
Finish: Penetrating oil.
Staining: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
Profile: Rectangular, 1-3/4 by 5 inches (45 by 127 mm) with edges eased to 1/4-inch (6mm) radius, as indicated.
B.
Wood Rails: Hardwood rails complying with Section 064300 "Wood Stairs and Railings."
C.
Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: Select according to AWS specifications for metal alloy
welded.
D.
Galvanizing Repair Paint: High-zinc-dust-content paint complying with SSPC-Paint 20 and
compatible with paints specified to be used over it.
E.
Shop Primers: Provide primers that comply with Section 099113 "Exterior Painting,"
Section 099123 "Interior Painting," and Section 099600 "High-Performance Coatings."
F.
Universal Shop Primer: Fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free, universal modified-alkyd primer
complying with MPI#79 and compatible with topcoat.
1.
Use primer containing pigments that make it easily distinguishable from zinc-rich primer.
G.
Intermediate Coats and Topcoats: Provide products that comply with Section 099113 "Exterior
Painting," Section 099123 "Interior Painting," and Section 099600 "High-Performance
Coatings."
H.
Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187.
I.
Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Factory-packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous grout
complying with ASTM C 1107. Provide grout specifically recommended by manufacturer for
interior and exterior applications.
2.6
FABRICATION
A.
General: Fabricate railings to comply with requirements indicated for design, dimensions,
member sizes and spacing, details, finish, and anchorage, but not less than that required to
support structural loads.
B.
Assemble railings in the shop to greatest extent possible to minimize field splicing and
assembly. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Clearly
mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation. Use connections that maintain structural
value of joined pieces.
DECORATIVE METAL RAILINGS
057300 - 6
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
C.
Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges to a radius
of approximately 1/32 inch (1 mm) unless otherwise indicated. Remove sharp or rough areas on
exposed surfaces.
D.
Form work true to line and level with accurate angles and surfaces.
E.
Cut, reinforce, drill, and tap as indicated to receive finish hardware, screws, and similar items.
F.
Connections: Fabricate railings with welded connections unless otherwise indicated.
G.
Welded Connections: Cope components at connections to provide close fit, or use fittings
designed for this purpose. Weld all around at connections, including at fittings.
1.
2.
3.
4.
H.
Mechanical Connections: Connect members with concealed mechanical fasteners and fittings.
Fabricate members and fittings to produce flush, smooth, rigid, hairline joints.
1.
I.
Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion
resistance of base metals.
Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.
Remove flux immediately.
At exposed connections, finish exposed welds to comply with NOMMA's "Voluntary Joint
Finish Standards" for Type 1 welds: no evidence of a welded joint.
Fabricate splice joints for field connection using an epoxy structural adhesive if this is
manufacturer's standard splicing method.
Form changes in direction as follows:
1.
As detailed.
J.
Bend members in jigs to produce uniform curvature for each configuration required; maintain
cross section of member throughout entire bend without buckling, twisting, cracking, or
otherwise deforming exposed surfaces of components.
K.
Provide wall returns at ends of wall-mounted handrails unless otherwise indicated. Close ends
of returns, unless clearance between end of rail and wall is 1/4 inch (6 mm) or less.
L.
Brackets, Flanges, Fittings, and Anchors: Provide wall brackets, flanges, miscellaneous fittings,
and anchors to interconnect railing members to other work unless otherwise indicated.
1.
M.
At brackets and fittings fastened to plaster or gypsum board partitions, provide crushresistant fillers, or other means to transfer loads through wall finishes to structural
supports and prevent bracket or fitting rotation and crushing of substrate.
Provide inserts and other anchorage devices for connecting railings to concrete or masonry
work. Fabricate anchorage devices capable of withstanding loads imposed by railings.
Coordinate anchorage devices with supporting structure.
DECORATIVE METAL RAILINGS
057300 - 7
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
2.7
GLAZING PANEL FABRICATION
A.
General: Fabricate to sizes and shapes required; provide for proper edge clearance and bite on
glazing panels.
1.
B.
2.8
Grind smooth exposed edges, including those at open joints, to produce square edges
with slight chamfers at junctions of edges and faces.
Infill Panels: Provide laminated, tempered glass panels for straight sections.
GENERAL FINISH REQUIREMENTS
A.
Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for
recommendations for applying and designating finishes.
B.
Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable,
temporary protective covering before shipment.
C.
Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable.
Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are acceptable if they are within onehalf of the range of approved Samples. Variations in appearance of other components are
acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to
minimize contrast.
D.
Provide exposed fasteners with finish matching appearance, including color and texture, of
railings.
2.9
STEEL AND IRON FINISHES
A.
For nongalvanized-steel railings, provide nongalvanized ferrous-metal fittings, brackets,
fasteners, and sleeves, except galvanize anchors to be embedded in exterior concrete or
masonry.
B.
Preparing Nongalvanized Items for Shop Priming: Prepare uncoated ferrous-metal surfaces to
comply with SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial Blast Cleaning."
C.
Primer Application: Apply shop primer to prepared surfaces of railings unless otherwise
indicated. Comply with requirements in SSPC-PA 1, "Paint Application Specification No. 1:
Shop, Field, and Maintenance Painting of Steel," for shop painting. Primer need not be applied
to surfaces to be embedded in concrete or masonry.
1.
2.
D.
Shop prime uncoated railings with primers specified in Section 099113 "Exterior Painting"
and Section 099123 "Interior Painting" .
Do not apply primer to galvanized surfaces.
Shop-Painted Finish: Comply with Section 099113 "Exterior Painting."
DECORATIVE METAL RAILINGS
057300 - 8
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
1.
Color: Hammerite, Mid-Green hammered finish (Jamestown Distributors, 800-497-0010).
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
3.2
Examine plaster, concrete, and gypsum board assemblies, where reinforced to receive anchors,
to verify that locations of concealed reinforcements have been clearly marked for Installer.
Locate reinforcements and mark locations if not already done.
INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A.
Fit exposed connections together to form tight, hairline joints.
B.
Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing railings. Set railings accurately in
location, alignment, and elevation; measured from established lines and levels and free of rack.
1.
2.
3.
Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of railing components that have been coated or
finished after fabrication and that are intended for field connection by mechanical or other
means without further cutting or fitting.
Set posts plumb within a tolerance of 1/16 inch in 3 feet (2 mm in 1 m).
Align rails so variations from level for horizontal members and variations from parallel
with rake of steps and ramps for sloping members do not exceed 1/4 inch in 12 feet (5
mm in 3 m).
C.
Adjust railings before anchoring to ensure matching alignment at abutting joints.
D.
Fastening to In-Place Construction: Use anchorage devices and fasteners where necessary for
securing railings and for properly transferring loads to in-place construction.
3.3
RAILING CONNECTIONS
A.
Nonwelded Connections: Use mechanical or adhesive joints for permanently connecting railing
components. Use wood blocks and padding to prevent damage to railing members and fittings.
Seal recessed holes of exposed locking screws using plastic cement filler colored to match
finish of railings.
B.
Welded Connections: Use fully welded joints for permanently connecting railing components.
Comply with requirements for welded connections in "Fabrication" Article whether welding is
performed in the shop or in the field.
DECORATIVE METAL RAILINGS
057300 - 9
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
3.4
ANCHORING POSTS
A.
Anchor posts to metal surfaces with flanges, angle type, or floor type as required by conditions,
connected to posts and to metal supporting members as follows:
1.
3.5
For steel railings, weld flanges to posts and bolt to metal-supporting surfaces.
ATTACHING RAILINGS
A.
Anchor railing ends to concrete and masonry with sleeves concealed within flanges connected
to brackets on underside of rails connected to railing ends and anchored to wall construction
with anchors and bolts.
B.
Attach handrails to walls with wall brackets except where end flanges are used. Provide
brackets with 1-1/2-inch (38-mm) clearance from inside face of handrail and finished wall
surface. Locate brackets as indicated or, if not indicated, at spacing required to support
structural loads.
1.
2.
C.
Secure wall brackets and railing end flanges to building construction as follows:
1.
3.6
Use type of bracket with predrilled hole for exposed bolt anchorage.
Locate brackets as indicated or, if not indicated, at spacing required to support structural
loads.
For concrete and solid masonry anchorage, use drilled-in expansion shields and hanger
or lag bolts.
INSTALLING GLASS PANELS
A.
Glass-Supported Railings: Install assembly to comply with railing manufacturer's written
instructions.
B.
Post-Supported Glass Railings: Install assembly to comply with railing manufacturer's written
instructions and with requirements in other Part 3 articles. Erect posts and other metal railing
components, then set factory-cut glass panels. Do not cut, drill, or alter glass panels in field.
Protect edges from damage.
3.7
CLEANING
A.
Clean painted steel railings by washing thoroughly with clean water and soap, rinsing with clean
water, and wiping dry.
B.
Clean and polish glass as recommended in writing by manufacturer. Wash both exposed
surfaces in each area of Project not more than four days before date scheduled for inspections
that establish date of Substantial Completion.
DECORATIVE METAL RAILINGS
057300 - 10
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
C.
Clean wood rails by wiping with a damp cloth and then wiping dry.
D.
Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and
abraded areas of shop paint, and paint exposed areas with the same material as used for shop
painting to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-painted surfaces.
1.
Apply by brush or spray to provide a minimum 2.0-mil (0.05-mm) dry film thickness.
E.
Touchup Painting: Cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections, and
abraded areas of shop paint are specified in Section 099113 "Exterior Painting" and
Section 099123 "Interior Painting."
F.
Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and repair
galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780.
3.8
PROTECTION
A.
Protect finishes of railings from damage during construction period with temporary protective
coverings approved by railing manufacturer. Remove protective coverings at time of Substantial
Completion.
B.
Restore finishes damaged during installation and construction period so no evidence remains of
correction work. Return items that cannot be refinished in the field to the shop; make required
alterations and refinish entire unit, or provide new units.
END OF SECTION 057300
DECORATIVE METAL RAILINGS
057300 - 11
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
SECTION 061053 - MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
1.3
Rooftop equipment bases and support curbs.
Wood blocking and nailers.
Wood furring.
Utility shelving.
Plywood backing panels.
DEFINITIONS
A.
Dimension Lumber: Lumber of 2 inches nominal (38 mm actual) or greater but less than 5
inches nominal (114 mm actual) in least dimension.
B.
Lumber grading agencies, and the abbreviations used to reference them, include the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
1.4
NeLMA: Northeastern Lumber Manufacturers' Association.
NHLA: National Hardwood Lumber Association.
NLGA: National Lumber Grades Authority.
SPIB: The Southern Pine Inspection Bureau.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of process and factory-fabricated product. Indicate component
materials and dimensions and include construction and application details.
1.
2.
Include data for wood-preservative treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and
certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements. Indicate
type of preservative used and net amount of preservative retained.
Include data for fire-retardant treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and
certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements. Include
physical properties of treated materials based on testing by a qualified independent
testing agency.
MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY
061053 - 1
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
3.
4.
5.
1.5
For fire-retardant treatments, include physical properties of treated lumber both before
and after exposure to elevated temperatures, based on testing by a qualified independent
testing agency according to ASTM D 5664.
For products receiving a waterborne treatment, include statement that moisture content
of treated materials was reduced to levels specified before shipment to Project site.
Include copies of warranties from chemical treatment manufacturers for each type of
treatment.
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A.
Evaluation Reports: For the following, from ICC-ES:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
1.6
Preservative-treated wood.
Fire-retardant-treated wood.
Power-driven fasteners.
Expansion anchors.
Metal framing anchors.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
1.7
Testing Agency Qualifications: For testing agency providing classification marking for fireretardant treated material, an inspection agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction that
periodically performs inspections to verify that the material bearing the classification marking is
representative of the material tested.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Stack lumber flat with spacers beneath and between each bundle to provide air circulation.
Protect lumber from weather by covering with waterproof sheeting, securely anchored. Provide
for air circulation around stacks and under coverings.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
WOOD PRODUCTS, GENERAL
A.
Lumber: DOC PS 20 and applicable rules of grading agencies indicated. If no grading agency
is indicated, provide lumber that complies with the applicable rules of any rules-writing agency
certified by the ALSC Board of Review. Provide lumber graded by an agency certified by the
ALSC Board of Review to inspect and grade lumber under the rules indicated.
1.
2.
Factory mark each piece of lumber with grade stamp of grading agency.
Where nominal sizes are indicated, provide actual sizes required by DOC PS 20 for
moisture content specified. Where actual sizes are indicated, they are minimum dressed
sizes for dry lumber.
MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY
061053 - 2
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
3.
B.
2.2
Provide dressed lumber, S4S, unless otherwise indicated.
Maximum Moisture Content of Lumber: 15 percent for 2-inch nominal (38-mm actual) thickness
or less, 19 percent for more than 2-inch nominal (38-mm actual) thickness unless otherwise
indicated.
WOOD-PRESERVATIVE-TREATED MATERIALS
A.
Preservative Treatment by Pressure Process: AWPA U1; Use Category UC2 for interior
construction not in contact with the ground, Use Category UC3b for exterior construction not in
contact with the ground, and Use Category UC4a for items in contact with the ground.
1.
2.
Preservative Chemicals: Acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and containing no
arsenic or chromium. Do not use inorganic boron (SBX) for sill plates.
For exposed items indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, use chemical
formulations that do not require incising, contain colorants, bleed through, or otherwise
adversely affect finishes.
B.
Kiln-dry lumber after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent. Do not use
material that is warped or does not comply with requirements for untreated material.
C.
Mark lumber with treatment quality mark of an inspection agency approved by the ALSC Board
of Review.
1.
D.
Application: Treat items indicated on Drawings, and the following:
1.
2.
2.3
For exposed lumber indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, [mark end or back of
each piece.
Wood cants, nailers, curbs, equipment support bases, blocking, stripping, and similar
members in connection with roofing, flashing, vapor barriers, and waterproofing.
Wood sills, sleepers, blocking, and similar concealed members in contact with masonry
or concrete.
FIRE-RETARDANT-TREATED MATERIALS
A.
General: Where fire-retardant-treated materials are indicated, use materials complying with
requirements in this article, that are acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and with firetest-response characteristics specified as determined by testing identical products per test
method indicated by a qualified testing agency.
B.
Fire-Retardant-Treated Lumber and Plywood by Pressure Process: Products with a flame
spread index of 25 or less when tested according to ASTM E 84, and with no evidence of
significant progressive combustion when the test is extended an additional 20 minutes, and with
the flame front not extending more than 10.5 feet (3.2 m) beyond the centerline of the burners at
any time during the test.
MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY
061053 - 3
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
1.
2.
3.
Use treatment that does not promote corrosion of metal fasteners.
Exterior Type: Treated materials shall comply with requirements specified above for fireretardant-treated lumber and plywood by pressure process after being subjected to
accelerated weathering according to ASTM D 2898. Use for exterior locations and where
indicated.
Interior Type A: Treated materials shall have a moisture content of 28 percent or less
when tested according to ASTM D 3201 at 92 percent relative humidity. Use where
exterior type is not indicated.
C.
Kiln-dry lumber after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent.
D.
Identify fire-retardant-treated wood with appropriate classification marking of testing and
inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
1.
E.
2.4
For exposed lumber indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, mark end or back of
each piece.
Application: Treat all miscellaneous carpentry unless otherwise indicated.
MISCELLANEOUS LUMBER
A.
General: Provide miscellaneous lumber indicated and lumber for support or attachment of other
construction, including the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
B.
Blocking.
Nailers.
Rooftop equipment bases and support curbs.
Cants.
Furring.
Utility shelving.
For items of dimension lumber size, provide Construction or No. 2 grade lumber and any of the
following species:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Hem-fir (north); NLGA.
Mixed southern pine; SPIB.
Spruce-pine-fir; NLGA.
Hem-fir; WCLIB or WWPA.
Spruce-pine-fir (south); NeLMA, WCLIB, or WWPA.
C.
For blocking not used for attachment of other construction, Utility, Stud, or No. 3 grade lumber
of any species may be used provided that it is cut and selected to eliminate defects that will
interfere with its attachment and purpose.
D.
For blocking and nailers used for attachment of other construction, select and cut lumber to
eliminate knots and other defects that will interfere with attachment of other work.
MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY
061053 - 4
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
E.
2.5
For furring strips for installing plywood or hardboard paneling, select boards with no knots
capable of producing bent-over nails and damage to paneling.
PLYWOOD BACKING PANELS
A.
2.6
Equipment Backing Panels: DOC PS 1, fire-retardant treated, in thickness indicated or, if not
indicated, not less than 3/4-inch (19-mm) nominal thickness.
FASTENERS
A.
General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements specified
in this article for material and manufacture.
1.
Where carpentry is exposed to weather, in ground contact, pressure-preservative treated,
or in area of high relative humidity, provide fasteners with hot-dip zinc coating complying
with ASTM A 153/A 153M.
B.
Nails, Brads, and Staples: ASTM F 1667.
C.
Power-Driven Fasteners: NES NER-272.
D.
Wood Screws: ASME B18.6.1.
E.
Lag Bolts: ASME B18.2.1 (ASME B18.2.3.8M).
F.
Bolts: Steel bolts complying with ASTM A 307, Grade A (ASTM F 568M, Property Class 4.6);
with ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M) hex nuts and, where indicated, flat washers.
G.
Expansion Anchors: Anchor bolt and sleeve assembly of material indicated below with
capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 6 times the load imposed when installed in
unit masonry assemblies and equal to 4 times the load imposed when installed in concrete as
determined by testing per ASTM E 488 conducted by a qualified independent testing and
inspecting agency.
1.
Material:
Carbon-steel components, zinc plated to comply with ASTM B 633,
Class Fe/Zn 5.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A.
Set carpentry to required levels and lines, with members plumb, true to line, cut, and fitted. Fit
carpentry to other construction; scribe and cope as needed for accurate fit. Locate nailers,
blocking, and similar supports to comply with requirements for attaching other construction.
MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY
061053 - 5
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
B.
Install plywood backing panels by fastening to studs; coordinate locations with utilities requiring
backing panels. Install fire-retardant treated plywood backing panels with classification marking
of testing agency exposed to view.
C.
Provide blocking and framing as indicated and as required to support facing materials, fixtures,
specialty items, and trim.
D.
Sort and select lumber so that natural characteristics will not interfere with installation or with
fastening other materials to lumber. Do not use materials with defects that interfere with
function of member or pieces that are too small to use with minimum number of joints or
optimum joint arrangement.
E.
Comply with AWPA M4 for applying field treatment to cut surfaces of preservative-treated
lumber.
1.
F.
Securely attach carpentry work to substrate by anchoring and fastening as indicated, complying
with the following:
1.
2.
G.
3.2
Use inorganic boron for items that are continuously protected from liquid water.
NES NER-272 for power-driven fasteners.
Table 2304.9.1, "Fastening Schedule," in ICC's International Building Code.
Use steel common nails unless otherwise indicated. Select fasteners of size that will not fully
penetrate members where opposite side will be exposed to view or will receive finish materials.
Make tight connections between members. Install fasteners without splitting wood. Drive nails
snug but do not countersink nail heads unless otherwise indicated.
WOOD BLOCKING, AND NAILER INSTALLATION
A.
Install where indicated and where required for attaching other work. Form to shapes indicated
and cut as required for true line and level of attached work. Coordinate locations with other
work involved.
B.
Attach items to substrates to support applied loading. Recess bolts and nuts flush with surfaces
unless otherwise indicated.
3.3
WOOD FURRING INSTALLATION
A.
Install level and plumb with closure strips at edges and openings. Shim with wood as required
for tolerance of finish work.
MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY
061053 - 6
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
3.4
PROTECTION
A.
Protect wood that has been treated with inorganic boron (SBX) from weather. If, despite
protection, inorganic boron-treated wood becomes wet, apply EPA-registered borate treatment.
Apply borate solution by spraying to comply with EPA-registered label.
B.
Protect miscellaneous rough carpentry from weather. If, despite protection, miscellaneous
rough carpentry becomes wet, apply EPA-registered borate treatment. Apply borate solution by
spraying to comply with EPA-registered label.
END OF SECTION 061053
MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY
061053 - 7
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
SECTION 062023 - INTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
2.
3.
B.
Related Requirements:
1.
2.
3.
1.3
Interior trim.
Shelving and clothes rods.
Interior railings.
Section 061000 "Rough Carpentry" for furring, blocking, and other carpentry work not
exposed to view and for framing exposed to view.
Section 064400 "Ornamental Woodwork."
Section 099123 "Interior Painting" for priming and backpriming of interior finish carpentry.
DEFINITIONS
A.
MDF: Medium-density fiberboard.
B.
MDO: Plywood with a medium-density overlay on the face.
1.4
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of product involving selection of colors, profiles, or
textures.
B.
Samples for Verification:
1.
2.
For each species and cut of lumber and panel products with non-factory-applied finish,
with 1/2 of exposed surface finished, 50 sq. in. (300 sq. cm) for lumber and 8 by 10
inches (200 by 250 mm) for panels.
For each finish system and color of lumber and panel products with factory-applied finish,
50 sq. in. (300 sq. cm) for lumber and 8 by 10 inches (200 by 250 mm) for panels.
INTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY
062023 - 1
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
1.5
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A.
Evaluation Reports: For fire-retardant-treated wood, from ICC-ES.
B.
Sample Warranty: For manufacturer's warranty.
1.6
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Stack lumber, plywood, and other panels flat with spacers between each bundle to provide air
circulation. Protect materials from weather by covering with waterproof sheeting, securely
anchored. Provide for air circulation around stacks and under coverings.
B.
Deliver interior finish carpentry materials only when environmental conditions meet
requirements specified for installation areas. If interior finish carpentry materials must be stored
in other than installation areas, store only where environmental conditions meet requirements
specified for installation areas.
1.7
FIELD CONDITIONS
A.
Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install interior finish carpentry materials until
building is enclosed and weatherproof, wet work in space is completed and nominally dry, and
HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature and relative humidity at occupancy
levels during the remainder of the construction period.
B.
Do not install finish carpentry materials that are wet, moisture damaged, or mold damaged.
1.
2.
1.8
Indications that materials are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to,
discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape.
Indications that materials are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or
splotchy surface contamination and discoloration.
WARRANTY
A.
Manufacturer's Warranty for Columns: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace columns that
fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.
1.
Warranty Period for Columns: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS, GENERAL
A.
Lumber: DOC PS 20 and the following grading rules:
INTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY
062023 - 2
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
NeLMA: Northeastern Lumber Manufacturers' Association, "Standard Grading Rules for
Northeastern Lumber."
NHLA: National Hardwood Lumber Association, "Rules for the Measurement and
Inspection of Hardwood & Cypress."
NLGA: National Lumber Grades Authority, "Standard Grading Rules for Canadian
Lumber."
SPIB: The Southern Pine Inspection Bureau, "Standard Grading Rules for Southern Pine
Lumber."
WWPA: Western Wood Products Association, "Western Lumber Grading Rules."
B.
Softwood Plywood: DOC PS 1.
C.
Hardboard: AHA A135.4.
D.
MDF: ANSI A208.2, Grade 130, made with binder containing no urea-formaldehyde resin.
2.2
SHELVING AND CLOTHES RODS
A.
Closet Shelving: Made from one of the following materials, 3/4 inch (19 mm) thick.
1.
2.
3.
4.
MDF with radiused or solid-wood front edge.
Wood boards as specified above for lumber trim for opaque finish.
Softwood Boards: Eastern white, Idaho white, lodgepole, ponderosa, radiata, or sugar
pine; C Select (Choice); NeLMA, NLGA, or WWPA; kiln dried.
Softwood Boards: Douglas fir-larch, Douglas fir south, or hem-fir; Prime or D finish;
NLGA, WCLIB, or WWPA; or southern pine, C finish; SPIB; kiln dried.
B.
Shelf Brackets with Rod Support: BHMA A156.16, B04051; prime-painted formed steel.
C.
Shelf Brackets without Rod Support: BHMA A156.16, B04041; prime-painted formed steel.
D.
Standards for Adjustable Shelf Brackets: BHMA A156.9, B04102; powder-coat-finished steel.
E.
Adjustable Shelf Brackets: BHMA A156.9, B04112; powder-coat-finished steel.
F.
Standards for Adjustable Shelf Supports: BHMA A156.9, B04071; powder-coat-finished steel.
2.3
STAIRS RAILINGS
A.
2.4
Interior Railings: Clear, kiln-dried, Pao Lope species as indicated, solid, kiln dried.
MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A.
Fasteners for Interior Finish Carpentry: Nails, screws, and other anchoring devices of type, size,
material, and finish required for application indicated to provide secure attachment, concealed
where possible.
INTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY
062023 - 3
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
B.
Low-Emitting Materials: Adhesives shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the
California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic
Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."
C.
Glue: Aliphatic-resin, polyurethane, or resorcinol wood glue recommended by manufacturer for
general carpentry use.
1.
D.
Multipurpose Construction Adhesive: Formulation complying with ASTM D 3498 that is
recommended for indicated use by adhesive manufacturer.
1.
2.5
Wood glue shall have a VOC content of 30 g/L or less when calculated according to
40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
Adhesive shall have a VOC content of 70 g/L or less when calculated according to
40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
FABRICATION
A.
Ease edges of lumber less than 1 inch (25 mm) in nominal thickness to 1/16-inch (1.5-mm)
radius and edges of lumber 1 inch (25 mm) or more in nominal thickness to 1/8-inch (3-mm)
radius.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation
tolerances and other conditions affecting performance.
B.
Examine finish carpentry materials before installation. Reject materials that are wet, moisture
damaged, and mold damaged.
C.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2
PREPARATION
A.
Clean substrates of projections and substances detrimental to application.
B.
Before installing interior finish carpentry, condition materials to average prevailing humidity in
installation areas for a minimum of 24 hours unless longer conditioning is recommended by
manufacturer.
INTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY
062023 - 4
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
3.3
INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A.
Do not use materials that are unsound, warped, improperly treated or finished, inadequately
seasoned, too small to fabricate with proper jointing arrangements, or with defective surfaces,
sizes, or patterns.
B.
Install interior finish carpentry level, plumb, true, and aligned with adjacent materials. Use
concealed shims where necessary for alignment.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
3.4
Scribe and cut interior finish carpentry to fit adjoining work. Refinish and seal cuts as
recommended by manufacturer.
Where face fastening is unavoidable, countersink fasteners, fill surface flush, and sand
unless otherwise indicated.
Install to tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches (3 mm in 2438 mm) for level and plumb. Install
adjoining interior finish carpentry with 1/32-inch (0.8-mm) maximum offset for flush
installation and 1/16-inch (1.5-mm) maximum offset for reveal installation.
Install stairs with no more than 3/16-inch (4.7-mm) variation between adjacent treads and
risers and with no more than 3/8-inch (9.5-mm) variation between largest and smallest
treads and risers within each flight.
Coordinate interior finish carpentry with materials and systems in or adjacent to it.
Provide cutouts for mechanical and electrical items that penetrate interior finish
carpentry.
STANDING AND RUNNING TRIM INSTALLATION
A.
Install with minimum number of joints practical, using full-length pieces from maximum lengths
of lumber available. Do not use pieces less than 24 inches (610 mm) long, except where
necessary. Stagger joints in adjacent and related standing and running trim. Miter at returns,
miter at outside corners, and cope at inside corners to produce tight-fitting joints with full-surface
contact throughout length of joint. Use scarf joints for end-to-end joints. Plane backs of casings
to provide uniform thickness across joints where necessary for alignment.
1.
2.
3.5
Match color and grain pattern of trim for transparent finish (stain or clear finish) across
joints.
Install without splitting; drill pilot holes before fastening where necessary to prevent
splitting. Fasten to prevent movement or warping. Countersink fastener heads on
exposed carpentry work and fill holes.
SHELVING AND CLOTHES ROD INSTALLATION
A.
Cut shelf cleats at ends of shelves about 1/2 inch (13 mm) less than width of shelves and sand
exposed ends smooth.
B.
Install shelf brackets according to manufacturer's written instructions, spaced not more than 32
inches (800 mm) o.c. Fasten to framing members, blocking, or metal backing, or use toggle
bolts or hollow wall anchors.
INTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY
062023 - 5
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
C.
Install standards for adjustable shelf supports according to manufacturer's written instructions.
Fasten to framing members, blocking, or metal backing, or use toggle bolts or hollow wall
anchors. Space fasteners not more than 12 inches (300 mm) o.c.
D.
Install standards for adjustable shelf brackets according to manufacturer's written instructions,
spaced not more than 36 inches (900 mm) o.c. and within 6 inches (150 mm) of end of shelves.
Fasten to framing members, blocking, or metal backing, or use toggle bolts or hollow wall
anchors.
E.
Cut shelves to neatly fit openings with only enough gap to allow shelves to be removed and
reinstalled. Install shelves, fully seated on cleats, brackets, and supports.
1.
2.
F.
3.6
Fasten shelves to cleats with finish nails or trim screws, set flush.
Fasten shelves to brackets to comply with bracket manufacturer's written instructions.
Install rod flanges for rods as indicated. Fasten to shelf cleats, framing members, blocking, or
metal backing, or use toggle bolts or hollow wall anchors. Install rods in rod flanges.
STAIR RAILING INSTALLATION
A.
3.7
Railings: Secure wall rails with metal brackets. Fasten freestanding railings to newel posts and
to trim at walls with countersunk-head wood screws or rail bolts, and glue. Assemble railings at
goosenecks, easements, and splices with rail bolts and glue.
ADJUSTING
A.
3.8
Replace interior finish carpentry that is damaged or does not comply with requirements. Interior
finish carpentry may be repaired or refinished if work complies with requirements and shows no
evidence of repair or refinishing. Adjust joinery for uniform appearance.
CLEANING
A.
3.9
Clean interior finish carpentry on exposed and semiexposed surfaces. Restore damaged or
soiled areas and touch up factory-applied finishes, if any.
PROTECTION
A.
Protect installed products from damage from weather and other causes during construction.
B.
Remove and replace finish carpentry materials that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold
damaged.
1.
Indications that materials are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to,
discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape.
INTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY
062023 - 6
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
2.
Indications that materials are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or
splotchy surface contamination and discoloration.
END OF SECTION 062023
INTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY
062023 - 7
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
SECTION 064116 - PLASTIC-LAMINATE-FACED ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
2.
B.
Related Requirements:
1.
2.
1.3
Plastic-laminate-faced architectural cabinets.
Wood furring, blocking, shims, and hanging strips for installing plastic-laminate-faced
architectural cabinets unless concealed within other construction before cabinet
installation.
Section 061000 "Rough Carpentry" for wood furring, blocking, shims, and hanging strips
required for installing cabinets and concealed within other construction before cabinet
installation.
Section 123623.13 "Plastic-Laminate-Clad Countertops."
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product, including panel products, high-pressure decorative
laminate, adhesive for bonding plastic laminate, and cabinet hardware and accessories.
B.
Shop Drawings: Show location of each item, dimensioned plans and elevations, large-scale
details, attachment devices, and other components.
1.
2.
3.
C.
Show details full size.
Show locations and sizes of furring, blocking, and hanging strips, including concealed
blocking and reinforcement specified in other Sections.
Show locations and sizes of cutouts and holes for electrical switches and outlets and
other items installed in architectural plastic-laminate cabinets.
Samples for Verification:
1.
2.
Plastic laminates, 8 by 10 inches (200 by 250 mm), for each type, color, pattern, and
surface finish, with one sample applied to core material.
Thermoset decorative panels, 8 by 10 inches (200 by 250 mm), for each color, pattern,
and surface finish, with edge banding on one edge.
PLASTIC-LAMINATE-FACED ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS
064116 - 1
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
3.
1.4
Exposed cabinet hardware and accessories, one unit for each type.
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A.
Qualification Data: For fabricator.
B.
Product Certificates: For the following:
1.
2.
1.5
High-pressure decorative laminate.
Adhesives.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
1.6
Fabricator Qualifications: Shop that employs skilled workers who custom fabricate products
similar to those required for this Project and whose products have a record of successful inservice performance. Shop is a certified participant in AWI's Quality Certification Program or
equivalent.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
1.7
Do not deliver cabinets until painting and similar operations that could damage woodwork have
been completed in installation areas. If cabinets must be stored in other than installation areas,
store only in areas where environmental conditions comply with requirements specified in "Field
Conditions" Article.
FIELD CONDITIONS
A.
Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install cabinets until building is enclosed, wet work
is complete, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature and relative humidity
at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period.
B.
Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install cabinets until building is enclosed, wet work
is complete, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature between 60 and 90
deg F (16 and 32 deg C) and relative humidity between 25 and 55 percent during the remainder
of the construction period.
C.
Field Measurements: Where cabinets are indicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions
of other construction by field measurements before fabrication, and indicate measurements on
Shop Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying
the Work.
1.
Locate concealed framing, blocking, and reinforcements that support cabinets by field
measurements before being enclosed, and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings.
PLASTIC-LAMINATE-FACED ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS
064116 - 2
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
D.
1.8
Established Dimensions: Where cabinets are indicated to fit to other construction, establish
dimensions for areas where cabinets are to fit. Provide allowance for trimming at site, and
coordinate construction to ensure that actual dimensions correspond to established dimensions.
COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate sizes and locations of framing, blocking, furring, reinforcements, and other related
units of Work specified in other Sections to ensure that cabinets can be supported and installed
as indicated.
B.
Hardware Coordination: Distribute copies of approved hardware schedule specified in
Section 087111 "Door Hardware (Descriptive Specification)" to fabricator of architectural
woodwork; coordinate Shop Drawings and fabrication with hardware requirements.
C.
Coordinate location of the Lobby Desk with the floor conduits and other voice, data, power, and
security requirements.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
PLASTIC-LAMINATE-FACED ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS
A.
Quality Standard: Unless otherwise indicated, comply with the "Architectural Woodwork
Standards" for grades of architectural plastic-laminate cabinets indicated for construction,
finishes, installation, and other requirements.
1.
2.
Provide labels from AWI certification program indicating that woodwork complies with
requirements of grades specified.
The Contract Documents contain selections chosen from options in the quality standard
and additional requirements beyond those of the quality standard. Comply with those
selections and requirements in addition to the quality standard.
B.
Grade: Custom.
C.
Type of Construction: Face frame.
D.
Cabinet, Door, and Drawer Front Interface Style: Flush overlay.
E.
High-Pressure Decorative Laminate: NEMA LD 3, grades as indicated or if not indicated, as
required by woodwork quality standard.
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
the following:
a.
b.
Abet Laminati, Inc.
Formica Corporation.
PLASTIC-LAMINATE-FACED ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS
064116 - 3
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
c.
d.
e.
F.
Laminate Cladding for Exposed Surfaces:
1.
2.
3.
4.
G.
Lamin-Art, Inc.
Panolam Industries International, Inc.
Wilsonart International; Div. of Premark International, Inc.
Horizontal Surfaces: Grade HGL.
Postformed Surfaces: Grade HGP.
Vertical Surfaces: Grade VGS.
Edges: Grade VGS PVC edge banding, 0.12 inch (3 mm) thick, matching laminate in
color, pattern, and finish.
Materials for Semiexposed Surfaces:
1.
Surfaces Other Than Drawer Bodies: High-pressure decorative laminate, NEMA LD 3,
Grade VGS or Thermoset decorative panels.
a.
b.
c.
2.
3.
Edges of Plastic-Laminate Shelves: PVC tape, 0.018-inch (0.460-mm) minimum
thickness, matching laminate in color, pattern, and finish.
Edges of Thermoset Decorative Panel Shelves: PVC or polyester edge banding.
For semiexposed backs of panels with exposed plastic-laminate surfaces, provide
surface of high-pressure decorative laminate, NEMA LD 3, Grade VGS.
Drawer Sides and Backs: Solid-hardwood lumber.
Drawer Bottoms: Hardwood plywood.
H.
Concealed Backs of Panels with Exposed Plastic-Laminate Surfaces: High-pressure decorative
laminate, NEMA LD 3, Grade BKL.
I.
Drawer Construction: Fabricate with exposed fronts fastened to subfront with mounting screws
from interior of body.
1.
J.
Join subfronts, backs, and sides with glued rabbeted joints supplemented by mechanical
fasteners.
Colors, Patterns, and Finishes: Provide materials and products that result in colors and textures
of exposed laminate surfaces complying with the following requirements:
1.
As selected by Architect from laminate manufacturer's full range in the following
categories:
a.
b.
c.
d.
Solid colors, gloss and matte finish.
Solid colors with core same color as surface, matte finish.
Wood grains, gloss and matte finish.
Patterns, matte finish.
PLASTIC-LAMINATE-FACED ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS
064116 - 4
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
2.2
WOOD MATERIALS
A.
Wood Products: Provide materials that comply with requirements of referenced quality standard
for each type of woodwork and quality grade specified unless otherwise indicated.
1.
B.
Composite Wood and Agrifiber Products: Provide materials that comply with requirements of
referenced quality standard for each type of woodwork and quality grade specified unless
otherwise indicated.
1.
2.
3.
4.
2.3
Wood Moisture Content: 5 to 10 percent.
For Desks - Medium-Density Fiberboard: ANSI A208.2, Grade 130, made with binder
containing no urea formaldehyde.
For Kitchen Cabinets and Countertops - Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade M-2.
Softwood Plywood: DOC PS 1, medium-density overlay.
Thermoset Decorative Panels: Particleboard or medium-density fiberboard finished with
thermally fused, melamine-impregnated decorative paper and complying with
requirements of NEMA LD 3, Grade VGL, for test methods 3.3, 3.4, 3.6, 3.8, and 3.10.
CABINET HARDWARE AND ACCESSORIES
A.
General: Provide cabinet hardware and accessory materials associated with architectural
cabinets except for items specified in Section 087111 "Door Hardware (Descriptive
Specification)."
B.
Frameless Concealed Hinges (European Type): BHMA A156.9, B01602, 135 degrees of
opening, self-closing.
C.
Back-Mounted Pulls: BHMA A156.9, B02011.
D.
Wire Pulls: Back mounted, solid metal, 4 inches (100 mm) long, 5/16 inch (8 mm) in diameter.
E.
Catches: Magnetic catches, BHMA A156.9, B03141.
F.
Shelf Rests: BHMA A156.9, B04013; metal.
G.
Drawer Slides: BHMA A156.9.
1.
2.
3.
H.
Grade 1HD-100 and Grade 1HD-200: Side mounted; full-extension type; zinc-plated-steel
ball-bearing slides.
For drawers not more than 3 inches (75 mm) high and not more than 24 inches (600 mm)
wide, provide Grade 1.
For drawers more than 3 inches (75 mm) high but not more than 6 inches (150 mm) high
and not more than 24 inches (600 mm) wide, provide Grade 1HD-100.
Door and Drawer Silencers: BHMA A156.16, L03011.
PLASTIC-LAMINATE-FACED ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS
064116 - 5
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
I.
Exposed Hardware Finishes: For exposed hardware, provide finish that complies with
BHMA A156.18 for BHMA finish number indicated.
J.
For concealed hardware, provide manufacturer's standard finish that complies with product
class requirements in BHMA A156.9.
2.4
MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A.
Furring, Blocking, Shims, and Hanging Strips: Softwood or hardwood lumber, kiln dried to less
than 15 percent moisture content.
B.
Anchors: Select material, type, size, and finish required for each substrate for secure
anchorage. Provide metal expansion sleeves or expansion bolts for post-installed anchors. Use
nonferrous-metal or hot-dip galvanized anchors and inserts at inside face of exterior walls and
at floors.
C.
Adhesives: Do not use adhesives that contain urea formaldehyde.
D.
Adhesive for Bonding Plastic Laminate: Contact cement.
1.
2.5
Adhesive for Bonding Edges: Hot-melt adhesive or adhesive specified above for faces.
FABRICATION
A.
Fabricate cabinets to dimensions, profiles, and details indicated.
B.
Complete fabrication, including assembly and hardware application, to maximum extent
possible before shipment to Project site. Disassemble components only as necessary for
shipment and installation. Where necessary for fitting at site, provide ample allowance for
scribing, trimming, and fitting.
1.
C.
Trial fit assemblies at fabrication shop that cannot be shipped completely assembled.
Install dowels, screws, bolted connectors, and other fastening devices that can be
removed after trial fitting. Verify that various parts fit as intended and check
measurements of assemblies against field measurements before disassembling for
shipment.
Shop-cut openings to maximum extent possible to receive hardware, appliances, electrical
work, and similar items. Locate openings accurately and use templates or roughing-in diagrams
to produce accurately sized and shaped openings. Sand edges of cutouts to remove splinters
and burrs.
PLASTIC-LAMINATE-FACED ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS
064116 - 6
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
PREPARATION
A.
Before installation, condition cabinets to average prevailing humidity conditions in installation
areas.
B.
Before installing cabinets, examine shop-fabricated work for completion and complete work as
required.
3.2
INSTALLATION
A.
Grade: Install cabinets to comply with same grade as item to be installed.
B.
Assemble cabinets and complete fabrication at Project site to the extent that it was not
completed in the shop.
C.
Install cabinets level, plumb, true, and straight. Shim as required with concealed shims. Install
level and plumb to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches (3 mm in 2400 mm).
D.
Scribe and cut cabinets to fit adjoining work, refinish cut surfaces, and repair damaged finish at
cuts.
E.
Anchor cabinets to anchors or blocking built in or directly attached to substrates. Secure with
countersunk, concealed fasteners and blind nailing. Use fine finishing nails or finishing screws
for exposed fastening, countersunk and filled flush with woodwork.
1.
F.
Cabinets: Install without distortion so doors and drawers fit openings properly and are
accurately aligned. Adjust hardware to center doors and drawers in openings and to provide
unencumbered operation. Complete installation of hardware and accessory items as indicated.
1.
2.
3.3
Use filler matching finish of items being installed.
Install cabinets with no more than 1/8 inch in 96-inch (3 mm in 2400-mm) sag, bow, or
other variation from a straight line.
Fasten wall cabinets through back, near top and bottom, and at ends not more than 16
inches (400 mm) o.c. with No. 10 wafer-head screws sized for not less than 1-1/2-inch
(38-mm) penetration into wood framing, blocking, or hanging strips or No. 10 wafer-head
sheet metal screws through metal backing or metal framing behind wall finish.
ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A.
Repair damaged and defective cabinets, where possible, to eliminate functional and visual
defects; where not possible to repair, replace woodwork. Adjust joinery for uniform appearance.
B.
Clean, lubricate, and adjust hardware.
PLASTIC-LAMINATE-FACED ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS
064116 - 7
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
C.
Clean cabinets on exposed and semiexposed surfaces.
END OF SECTION 064116
PLASTIC-LAMINATE-FACED ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS
064116 - 8
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
SECTION 072100 - THERMAL INSULATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
2.
3.
B.
Related Sections:
1.
2.
3.
4.
1.3
Foam-plastic board insulation.
Mineral-wool blanket insulation.
Vapor retarders.
Section 042000 "Unit Masonry" for insulation installed in masonry cells.
Section 072419 "Water-Drainage Exterior Insulation and Finish System (EIFS)" for
insulation specified as part of these systems.
Section 075419 “Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Roofing” or Section 075423 "Thermoplastic
Polyolefin (TPO) Roofing" for insulation specified as part of roofing construction.
Section 078446 "Fire-Resistive Joint Systems" for insulation installed as part of a
perimeter fire-resistive joint system.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
1.4
Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified
testing agency, for each product.
B.
Research/Evaluation Reports: For foam-plastic insulation, from ICC-ES.
THERMAL INSULATION
072100 - 1
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
1.5
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
1.6
Surface-Burning Characteristics: As determined by testing identical products according to
ASTM E 84 by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of
applicable testing agency.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Protect insulation materials from physical damage and from deterioration due to moisture,
soiling, and other sources. Store inside and in a dry location. Comply with manufacturer's
written instructions for handling, storing, and protecting during installation.
B.
Protect foam-plastic board insulation as follows:
1.
2.
3.
Do not expose to sunlight except to necessary extent for period of installation and
concealment.
Protect against ignition at all times. Do not deliver foam-plastic board materials to Project
site before installation time.
Quickly complete installation and concealment of foam-plastic board insulation in each
area of construction.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MINERAL-WOOL BLANKET INSULATION
A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
2.2
Fibrex Insulations Inc.
Owens Corning.
Roxul Inc.
Thermafiber.
Unfaced, Mineral-Wool Blanket Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane
facing); consisting of fibers; with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 25
and 50, respectively, per ASTM E 84; passing ASTM E 136 for combustion characteristics.
INSULATION FASTENERS
A.
Adhesively Attached, Spindle-Type Anchors: Plate welded to projecting spindle; capable of
holding insulation of specified thickness securely in position indicated with self-locking washer in
place.
1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
THERMAL INSULATION
072100 - 2
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
a.
b.
2.
B.
AGM Industries, Inc.; Series T TACTOO Insul-Hangers.
Gemco; Spindle Type.
Plate: Perforated, galvanized carbon-steel sheet, 0.030 inch (0.762 mm) thick by 2 inches
(50 mm) square.
Anchor Adhesive: Product with demonstrated capability to bond insulation anchors securely to
substrates indicated without damaging insulation, fasteners, and substrates.
1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a.
b.
AGM Industries, Inc.; TACTOO Adhesive.
Gemco; Tuff Bond Hanger Adhesive.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
PREPARATION
A.
3.2
Clean substrates of substances that are harmful to insulation or that interfere with insulation
attachment.
INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A.
Comply with insulation manufacturer's written instructions applicable to products and
applications indicated.
B.
Install insulation that is undamaged, dry, and unsoiled and that has not been left exposed to ice,
rain, or snow at any time.
C.
Extend insulation to envelop entire area to be insulated. Cut and fit tightly around obstructions
and fill voids with insulation. Remove projections that interfere with placement.
D.
Provide sizes to fit applications indicated and selected from manufacturer's standard
thicknesses, widths, and lengths. Apply single layer of insulation units to produce thickness
indicated unless multiple layers are otherwise shown or required to make up total thickness.
3.3
INSTALLATION OF INSULATION FOR CONCRETE SUBSTRATES
A.
Install board insulation on concrete substrates by adhesively attached, spindle-type insulation
anchors as follows:
1.
Fasten insulation anchors to concrete substrates with insulation anchor adhesive
according to anchor manufacturer's written instructions. Space anchors according to
THERMAL INSULATION
072100 - 3
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
2.
3.
4.
3.4
insulation manufacturer's written instructions for insulation type, thickness, and
application indicated.
Apply insulation standoffs to each spindle to create cavity width indicated between
concrete substrate and insulation.
After adhesive has dried, install board insulation by pressing insulation into position over
spindles and securing it tightly in place with insulation-retaining washers, taking care not
to compress insulation below indicated thickness.
Where insulation will not be covered by other building materials, apply capped washers to
tips of spindles.
PROTECTION
A.
Protect installed insulation and vapor retarders from damage due to harmful weather exposures,
physical abuse, and other causes. Provide temporary coverings or enclosures where insulation
is subject to abuse and cannot be concealed and protected by permanent construction
immediately after installation.
END OF SECTION 072100
THERMAL INSULATION
072100 - 4
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
SECTION 072419 - WATER-DRAINAGE EXTERIOR INSULATION AND FINISH SYSTEM (EIFS)
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
2.
B.
Related Requirements:
1.
1.3
EIFS-clad drainage-wall assemblies that are field applied over substrate.
Water-resistive coatings.
Section 079200 "Joint Sealants" for sealing joints in EIFS with elastomeric joint sealants
and for perimeter joints between system and other materials.
DEFINITIONS
A.
Definitions in ASTM E 2110 apply to Work of this Section.
B.
EIFS: Exterior insulation and finish system(s).
C.
IBC: International Building Code.
1.4
PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS
A.
1.5
Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each EIFS component, trim, and accessory.
B.
Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified, 8 inches (200
mm) square in size.
WATER-DRAINAGE EXTERIOR INSULATION AND FINISH SYSTEM (EIFS)
072419 - 1
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
C.
Samples for Verification: 24-inch- (600-mm-) square panels for each type of finish-coat color
and texture indicated, prepared using same tools and techniques intended for actual work
including custom trim, each profile.
1.
2.
1.6
Include exposed trim and accessory Samples to verify color selected.
Include a typical control joint filled with sealant of color selected, as specified in
Section 079200 "Joint Sealants."
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A.
Qualification Data: For Installer.
B.
Manufacturer Certificates: Signed by EIFS manufacturer certifying the following:
1.
2.
3.
EIFS complies with requirements.
Substrates to which EIFS is indicated to be attached are acceptable to EIFS
manufacturer.
Accessory products installed with EIFS, including joint sealants, flashing, whether or not
furnished by EIFS manufacturer and whether or not specified in this Section, are
acceptable to EIFS manufacturer.
C.
Product Certificates: For insulation and joint sealant, from manufacturer.
D.
Product Test Reports: For each EIFS assembly and component, for tests performed by a
qualified testing agency.
E.
Field quality-control reports.
F.
Evaluation Reports: For EIFS, including insulation fasteners, from ICC-ES.
G.
Sample Warranty: For manufacturer's special warranty.
1.7
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A.
1.8
Maintenance Data: For EIFS to include in maintenance manuals.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Installer Qualifications: An installer who is certified in writing by EIFS manufacturer as qualified
to install manufacturer's system using trained workers.
B.
Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals, to demonstrate
aesthetic effects, to set quality standards for materials and execution, and to set quality
standards for fabrication and installation.
1.
Mockup shall consist of a 2’ x 2’ or larger area located at a window.
WATER-DRAINAGE EXTERIOR INSULATION AND FINISH SYSTEM (EIFS)
072419 - 2
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
2.
1.9
Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the
completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Deliver materials in original, unopened packages with manufacturers' labels intact and clearly
identifying products.
B.
Store materials inside and under cover; keep them dry and protected from weather, direct
sunlight, surface contamination, aging, corrosion, damaging temperatures, construction traffic,
and other causes.
1.
2.
3.
1.10
A.
1.11
A.
Stack insulation board flat and off the ground.
Protect plastic insulation against ignition at all times. Do not deliver plastic insulating
materials to Project site before installation time.
Complete installation and concealment of plastic materials as rapidly as possible in each
area of construction.
FIELD CONDITIONS
Weather Limitations: Maintain ambient temperatures above 40 deg F (4.4 deg C) for a minimum
of 24 hours before, during, and after adhesives or coatings are applied. Do not apply EIFS
adhesives or coatings during rainfall. Proceed with installation only when existing and
forecasted weather conditions and ambient outdoor air, humidity, and substrate temperatures
permit EIFS to be applied, dried, and cured according to manufacturers' written instructions and
warranty requirements.
WARRANTY
Manufacturer's Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of
EIFS-clad drainage-wall assemblies that fail in materials or workmanship within specified
warranty period.
1.
Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:
a.
b.
2.
Bond integrity and weathertightness.
Deterioration of EIFS finishes and other EIFS materials beyond normal weathering.
Warranty coverage includes the following components of EIFS-clad drainage-wall
assemblies:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
EIFS finish, including base coats, finish coats, and reinforcing mesh.
Insulation installed as part of EIFS.
Insulation adhesive and mechanical fasteners.
EIFS accessories, including trim components and flashing.
Water-resistive coatings.
WATER-DRAINAGE EXTERIOR INSULATION AND FINISH SYSTEM (EIFS)
072419 - 3
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
f.
3.
EIFS drainage components.
Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
B.
Source Limitations: Obtain EIFS from single source from single EIFS manufacturer and from
sources approved by EIFS manufacturer as compatible with EIFS components.
2.2
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
EIFS Performance: Comply with ASTM E 2568 and ICC-ES AC219 and with the following:
1.
2.
Weathertightness: Resistant to uncontrolled water penetration from exterior, with a
means to drain water entering EIFS to the exterior.
Structural Performance: EIFS assembly and components shall comply with ICCES AC219 when tested according to ASTM E 2568.
a.
3.
4.
5.
6.
2.3
Meet the wind requirements of Miami-Dade Co/ ASCE-7 wind uplift for 120 mph
hurricane conditions.
Impact Performance: ASTM E 2568, High impact resistance.
Bond Integrity: Free from bond failure within EIFS components or between EIFS and
substrates, resulting from exposure to fire, wind loads, weather, or other in-service
conditions.
Abrasion Resistance of Finish Coat: Sample consisting of 1-inch- (25.4-mm-) thick EIFS
mounted on 1/2-inch- (12.7-mm-) thick gypsum board; cured for a minimum of 28 days
and shows no cracking, checking, or loss of film integrity after exposure to 528 quarts
(500 L) of sand when tested according to ASTM D 968, Method A.
Mildew Resistance of Finish Coat: Sample applied to 2-by-2-inch (50.8-by-50.8-mm)
clean glass substrate; cured for 28 days and shows no growth when tested according to
ASTM D 3273 and evaluated according to ASTM D 3274.
EIFS MATERIALS
A.
Water-Resistive Coatings: EIFS manufacturer's standard formulation and accessories for use
as water-resistive barriers; compatible with substrate and complying with physical and
performance criteria of ASTM E 2570.
WATER-DRAINAGE EXTERIOR INSULATION AND FINISH SYSTEM (EIFS)
072419 - 4
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
B.
Flexible-Membrane Flashing: Cold-applied, self-adhering, self-healing, rubberized-asphalt and
polyethylene-film composite sheet or tape and primer; EIFS manufacturer's standard or product
recommended in writing by EIFS manufacturer.
C.
Insulation Adhesive: EIFS manufacturer's standard formulation designed for indicated use;
specifically formulated to be applied to back side of insulation in a manner that creates open
vertical channels designed to serve as an integral part of the water-drainage system of the
EIFS-clad drainage-wall assembly; compatible with substrate; and complying with the following:
1.
D.
Molded, Rigid Cellular Polystyrene Board Insulation: Comply with ASTM C 578, Type I; and
EIFS manufacturer's requirements for most stringent requirements for material performance and
qualities of insulation, including dimensions and permissible variations, and the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
E.
Factory-mixed noncementitious formulation designed for adhesive attachment of
insulation to substrates of type indicated, as recommended by EIFS manufacturer.
Aging: Before cutting and shipping, age insulation in block form by air drying for not less
than six weeks.
Flame-Spread and Smoke-Developed Indexes: 25 and 450 or less, respectively,
according to ASTM E 84.
Dimensions: Provide insulation boards of not more than 24 by 48 inches (610 by 1219
mm) thick or in other thickness indicated, but not more than 4 inches (102 mm) thick or
less than the thickness allowed by ASTM C 1397.
Channeled Board Insulation: EIFS manufacturer's standard factory-fabricated profile with
linear, vertical-drainage channels, slots, or waves on the back side of board.
Reinforcing Mesh: Balanced, alkali-resistant, open-weave, glass-fiber mesh treated for
compatibility with other EIFS materials, made from continuous multiend strands with retained
mesh tensile strength of not less than 120 lbf/in. (21 dN/cm) according to ASTM E 2098 and the
following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Reinforcing Mesh for EIFS, General: Not less than weight required to meet impactperformance level specified in "Performance Requirements" Article.
Strip Reinforcing Mesh: Not less than 3.75 oz./sq. yd. (127 g/sq. m)..
Detail Reinforcing Mesh: Not less than 4.0 oz./sq. yd. (136 g/sq. m) or As recommended
by EIFS manufacturer.
Corner Reinforcing Mesh: Not less than 7.2 oz./sq. yd. (244 g/sq. m) or As recommended
by EIFS manufacturer.
F.
Base-Coat Materials: EIFS manufacturer's standard mixture complying with the following:
1.
Factory-blended dry formulation of portland cement, dry polymer admixture, and inert
fillers to which only water is added at Project site.
G.
Primer: EIFS manufacturer's standard factory-mixed, elastomeric-polymer primer for preparing
base-coat surface for application of finish coat.
H.
Finish-Coat Materials: EIFS manufacturer's standard acrylic-based coating with enhanced
mildew resistance complying with the following:
WATER-DRAINAGE EXTERIOR INSULATION AND FINISH SYSTEM (EIFS)
072419 - 5
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
1.
Factory-mixed formulation of polymer-emulsion binder, colorfast mineral pigments, sound
stone particles, and fillers.
2.
Colors: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
I.
Sealer: Manufacturer's waterproof, clear acrylic-based sealer for protecting finish coat.
J.
Water: Potable.
K.
Trim Accessories: Type as designated or required to suit conditions indicated and to comply
with EIFS manufacturer's written instructions; manufactured from UV-stabilized PVC; and
complying with ASTM D 1784, manufacturer's standard cell class for use intended, and
ASTM C 1063.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
2.4
Casing Bead: Prefabricated, one-piece type for attachment behind insulation, of depth
required to suit thickness of coating and insulation, with face leg perforated for bonding to
coating and back leg.
Drip Screed/Track: Prefabricated, one-piece type for attachment behind insulation with
face leg extended to form a drip, of depth required to suit thickness of coating and
insulation, with face leg perforated for bonding to coating and back leg.
Weep Screed/Track: Prefabricated, one-piece type for attachment behind insulation with
perforated face leg and weep holes in track bottom, of depth required to suit thickness of
coating and insulation, with face leg perforated for bonding to coating and back leg;
designed to drain incidental moisture that gets into wall construction to the exterior at
terminations of EIFS with drainage.
Expansion Joint: Prefabricated, one-piece V profile; designed to relieve stress of
movement.
Windowsill Flashing: Prefabricated type for both flashing and sloping sill over framing
beneath windows; with end and back dams; designed to direct water to exterior.
MIXING
A.
Comply with EIFS manufacturer's requirements for combining and mixing materials. Do not
introduce admixtures, water, or other materials except as recommended by EIFS manufacturer.
Mix materials in clean containers. Use materials within time period specified by EIFS
manufacturer or discard.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
B.
Examine roof edges, wall framing, flashings, openings, substrates, and junctures at other
construction for suitable conditions where EIFS will be installed.
WATER-DRAINAGE EXTERIOR INSULATION AND FINISH SYSTEM (EIFS)
072419 - 6
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
C.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
1.
2.
3.2
Begin coating application only after surfaces are dry.
Application of coating indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions.
PREPARATION
A.
Protect contiguous work from moisture deterioration and soiling caused by application of EIFS.
Provide temporary covering and other protection needed to prevent spattering of exterior finish
coats on other work.
B.
Protect EIFS, substrates, and wall construction behind them from inclement weather during
installation. Prevent penetration of moisture behind drainage plane of EIFS and deterioration of
substrates.
C.
Prepare and clean substrates to comply with EIFS manufacturer's written instructions to obtain
optimum bond between substrate and adhesive for insulation.
1.
3.3
Concrete Substrates: Provide clean, dry, neutral-pH substrate for insulation installation.
Verify suitability of substrate by performing bond and moisture tests recommended by
EIFS manufacturer.
EIFS INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A.
3.4
Comply with ASTM C 1397, ASTM E 2511, and EIFS manufacturer's written instructions for
installation of EIFS as applicable to each type of substrate indicated.
SUBSTRATE PROTECTION APPLICATION
A.
Primer/Sealer: Apply over CMU and concrete substrates and where required by EIFS
manufacturer for improving adhesion of insulation to substrate.
B.
Flexible-Membrane Flashing: Install over weather-resistive barrier, applied and lapped to shed
water; seal at openings, penetrations, terminations, and where required by EIFS manufacturer.
Prime substrates if required and install flashing to comply with EIFS manufacturer's written
instructions and details.
3.5
TRIM INSTALLATION
A.
Trim: Apply trim accessories at perimeter of EIFS, at expansion joints, at windowsills, and
elsewhere as indicated. Coordinate with installation of insulation.
1.
2.
Weep Screed/Track: Use at bottom termination edges, at window and door heads of
water-drainage EIFS unless otherwise indicated.
Windowsill Flashing: Use at windows unless otherwise indicated.
WATER-DRAINAGE EXTERIOR INSULATION AND FINISH SYSTEM (EIFS)
072419 - 7
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
3.
4.
3.6
Expansion Joint: Use where indicated on Drawings.
Casing Bead: Use at other locations.
INSULATION INSTALLATION
A.
Board Insulation: Adhesively attach insulation to substrate in compliance with ASTM C 1397
and the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Apply adhesive to ridges on back of channeled insulation by notched-trowel method in a
manner that results in full adhesive contact over the entire surface of ridges, leaving
channels free of adhesive once insulation is adhered to substrate.
Press and slide insulation into place. Apply pressure over the entire surface of insulation
to accomplish uniform contact, high initial grab, and overall level surface.
Allow adhered insulation to remain undisturbed for not less than 24 hours, before
beginning rasping and sanding insulation or applying base coat and reinforcing mesh.
Apply insulation over substrates in courses with long edges of boards oriented
horizontally.
Begin first course of insulation from a level base line and work upward.
Stagger vertical joints of insulation boards in successive courses to produce running
bond pattern. Locate joints so no piece of insulation is less than 12 inches (300 mm) wide
or 6 inches (150 mm) high. Offset joints not less than 6 inches (150 mm) from corners of
window and door openings.
a.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
Adhesive Attachment: Offset joints of insulation not less than 6 inches (150 mm)
from horizontal and 4 inches (100 mm) from vertical joints in sheathing.
Apply channeled insulation with drainage channels aligned vertically.
Interlock ends at internal and external corners.
Abut insulation tightly at joints within and between each course to produce flush,
continuously even surfaces without gaps or raised edges between boards. If gaps greater
than 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) occur, fill with insulation cut to fit gaps exactly; insert insulation
without using adhesive or other material.
Cut insulation to fit openings, corners, and projections precisely and to produce edges
and shapes complying with details indicated.
Rasp or sand flush entire surface of insulation to remove irregularities projecting more
than 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) from surface of insulation and to remove yellowed areas due to
sun exposure; do not create depressions deeper than 1/16 inch (1.6 mm). Prevent
airborne dispersal and immediately collect insulation raspings or sandings.
Interrupt insulation for expansion joints where indicated.
Form joints for sealant application by leaving gaps between adjoining insulation edges
and between insulation edges and dissimilar adjoining surfaces. Make gaps wide enough
to produce joint widths indicated after encapsulating joint substrates with base coat and
reinforcing mesh.
After installing insulation and before applying field-applied reinforcing mesh, fully wrap
board edges. Cover edges of board and extend encapsulating mesh not less than 2-1/2
inches (64 mm) over front and back face unless otherwise indicated on Drawings.
Treat exposed edges of insulation as follows:
WATER-DRAINAGE EXTERIOR INSULATION AND FINISH SYSTEM (EIFS)
072419 - 8
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
a.
b.
16.
B.
3.7
Except for edges forming substrates of sealant joints, encapsulate with base coat,
reinforcing mesh, and finish coat.
Encapsulate edges forming substrates of sealant joints within EIFS or between
EIFS and other work with base coat and reinforcing mesh.
Coordinate installation of flashing and insulation to produce wall assembly that does not
allow water to penetrate behind flashing and water-resistive barrier.
Expansion Joints: Install at locations indicated, where required by EIFS manufacturer, and as
follows:
1.
Where EIFS adjoin dissimilar substrates, materials, and construction, including other
EIFS.
2.
Where wall height or building shape changes.
3.
Where EIFS manufacturer requires joints in long continuous elevations.
BASE-COAT INSTALLATION
A.
Base Coat: Apply to exposed surfaces of insulation in minimum thickness recommended in
writing by EIFS manufacturer, but not less than 1/16-inch (1.6-mm) dry-coat thickness.
B.
Reinforcing Mesh: Embed reinforcing mesh in wet base coat to produce wrinkle-free installation
with mesh continuous at corners, overlapped not less than 2-1/2 inches (64 mm) or otherwise
treated at joints to comply with ASTM C 1397 and EIFS manufacturer's written instructions. Do
not lap reinforcing mesh within 8 inches (204 mm) of corners. Completely embed mesh,
applying additional base-coat material if necessary, so reinforcing-mesh color and pattern are
invisible.
C.
Double-Layer Reinforcing-Mesh Application: Where indicated or required, apply second base
coat and second layer of reinforcing mesh, overlapped not less than 2-1/2 inches (64 mm) or
otherwise treated at joints to comply with ASTM C 1397 and EIFS manufacturer's written
instructions in same manner as first application. Do not apply until first base coat has cured.
D.
Additional Reinforcing Mesh: Apply strip reinforcing mesh around openings, extending 4 inches
(100 mm) beyond perimeter. Apply additional 9-by-12-inch (230-by-300-mm) strip reinforcing
mesh diagonally at corners of openings (re-entrant corners). Apply 8-inch- (200-mm-) wide, strip
reinforcing mesh at both inside and outside corners unless base layer of mesh is lapped not
less than 4 inches (100 mm) on each side of corners.
E.
Double Base-Coat Application: Where indicated, apply second base coat in same manner and
thickness as first application, except without reinforcing mesh. Do not apply until first base coat
has cured.
3.8
FINISH-COAT INSTALLATION
A.
Primer: Apply over dry base coat according to EIFS manufacturer's written instructions.
WATER-DRAINAGE EXTERIOR INSULATION AND FINISH SYSTEM (EIFS)
072419 - 9
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
B.
Finish Coat: Apply over dry base coat, maintaining a wet edge at all times for uniform
appearance, in thickness required by EIFS manufacturer to produce a uniform finish of color
and texture matching approved sample and free of cold joints, shadow lines, and texture
variations.
C.
Sealer Coat: Apply over dry finish coat, in number of coats and thickness required by EIFS
manufacturer.
3.9
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Special Inspections: Contractor will engage a qualified special inspector to perform the following
special inspections:
1.
As stipulated in Ch. 17 of the IBC.
B.
EIFS Tests and Inspections: According to ASTM E 2359.
C.
EIFS will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.
D.
Prepare test and inspection reports.
3.10
A.
CLEANING AND PROTECTION
Remove temporary covering and protection of other work. Promptly remove coating materials
from window and door frames and other surfaces outside areas indicated to receive EIFS
coatings.
END OF SECTION 072419
WATER-DRAINAGE EXTERIOR INSULATION AND FINISH SYSTEM (EIFS)
072419 - 10
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
SECTION 072726 - FLUID-APPLIED MEMBRANE AIR BARRIERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
1.2
Section includes fluid-applied, vapor-retarding membrane air barriers.
PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS
A.
1.3
Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
1.4
Product Data: For each type of product.
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A.
Product certificates.
B.
Product test reports.
1.5
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Installer Qualifications: An entity that employs installers and supervisors who are trained and
approved by manufacturer.
B.
Mockups: Build mockups to set quality standards for materials and execution.
1.
Build integrated mockups of exterior wall assembly , 150 sq. ft. (14 sq. m), incorporating
backup wall construction, external cladding, window, storefront, door frame and sill,
insulation, ties and other penetrations, and flashing to demonstrate surface preparation,
crack and joint treatment, application of air barriers, and sealing of gaps, terminations,
and penetrations of air-barrier assembly.
a.
b.
Coordinate construction of mockups to permit inspection by Owner's testing
agency of air barrier before external insulation and cladding are installed.
Include junction with roofing membrane, building corner condition, and foundation
wall intersection.
FLUID-APPLIED MEMBRANE AIR BARRIERS
072726 - 1
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS, GENERAL
A.
VOC Content: 250 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA
Method 24) and complying with VOC content limits of authorities having jurisdiction.
B.
Low-Emitting Materials: Air barriers shall comply with the testing and product requirements of
the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile
Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."
2.2
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
2.3
General: Air barrier shall be capable of performing as a continuous vapor-retarding air
barrier and as a liquid-water drainage plane flashed to discharge to the exterior incidental
condensation or water penetration. Air-barrier assemblies shall be capable of accommodating
substrate movement and of sealing substrate expansion and control joints, construction material
changes, penetrations, and transitions at perimeter conditions without deterioration and air
leakage exceeding specified limits.
VAPOR-RETARDING MEMBRANE AIR BARRIER
A.
Fluid-Applied, Vapor-Retarding Membrane Air Barrier:
membrane.
1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a.
Synthetic Polymer Membrane:
1)
2)
3)
2.
Grace, W. R., & Co. - Conn.; Perm-A-Barrier Liquid.
Henry Company; Air-Bloc 32.
Rubber Polymer Corporation, Inc.; Rub-R-Wall Airtight.
Physical and Performance Properties:
a.
b.
c.
2.4
Elastomeric, modified bituminous
Air Permeance: Maximum 0.004 cfm/sq. ft. of surface area at 1.57-lbf/sq. ft.
(0.02 L/s x sq. m of surface area at 75-Pa) pressure difference; ASTM E 2178.
Vapor Permeance: Maximum 0.1 perm (5.8 ng/Pa x s x sq. m); ASTM E 96/E 96M.
Ultimate Elongation: Minimum 500 percent; ASTM D 412, Die C.
ACCESSORY MATERIALS
A.
General: Accessory materials recommended by air-barrier manufacturer to produce a complete
air-barrier assembly and compatible with primary air-barrier material.
FLUID-APPLIED MEMBRANE AIR BARRIERS
072726 - 2
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
B.
Sprayed Polyurethane Foam Sealant: One- or two-component, foamed-in-place, polyurethane
foam sealant, 1.5- to 2.0-lb/cu. ft (24- to 32-kg/cu. m) density; flame-spread index of 25 or less
according to ASTM E 162; with primer and noncorrosive substrate cleaner recommended by
foam sealant manufacturer.
C.
Termination Mastic: Air-barrier manufacturer's standard cold fluid-applied elastomeric liquid;
trowel grade.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
SURFACE PREPARATION
A.
Mask off adjoining surfaces not covered by air barrier to prevent spillage and overspray
affecting other construction.
B.
Remove fins, ridges, mortar, and other projections and fill honeycomb, aggregate pockets,
holes, and other voids in concrete with substrate-patching membrane.
C.
Remove excess mortar from masonry ties, shelf angles, and other obstructions.
D.
At changes in substrate plane, apply sealant or termination mastic beads at sharp corners and
edges to form a smooth transition from one plane to another.
3.2
INSTALLATION
A.
General: Install fluid-applied membrane air-barrier and accessory materials according to airbarrier manufacturer's written instructions to form a seal with adjacent construction and maintain
a continuous air barrier.
1.
2.
B.
Apply primer to substrates at required rate and allow it to dry. Limit priming to areas that will be
covered by fluid air-barrier material on same day. Reprime areas exposed for more than 24
hours.
1.
C.
Coordinate the installation of air barrier with installation of roofing membrane and base
flashing to ensure continuity of air barrier with roofing membrane.
Install air-barrier assembly on roofing membrane or base flashing so that a minimum of 3
inches (75 mm) of coverage is achieved over each substrate.
Prime glass-fiber-surfaced gypsum sheathing with number of prime coats needed to
achieve required bond, with adequate drying time between coats.
Connect and seal exterior wall air-barrier material continuously to roofing-membrane air barrier,
concrete below-grade structures, floor-to-floor construction, exterior glazing and window
systems, glazed curtain-wall systems, storefront systems, exterior louvers, exterior door
framing, and other construction used in exterior wall openings, using accessory materials.
FLUID-APPLIED MEMBRANE AIR BARRIERS
072726 - 3
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
D.
At end of each working day, seal top edge of air barrier to substrate with termination mastic.
E.
Wall Openings: Prime concealed, perimeter frame surfaces of windows, curtain walls,
storefronts, and doors. Apply transitions and flashing so that a minimum of 3 inches (75 mm) of
coverage is achieved over each substrate. Maintain 3 inches (75 mm) of full contact over firm
bearing to perimeter frames with not less than 1 inch (25 mm) of full contact.
F.
Fill gaps in perimeter frame surfaces of windows, curtain walls, storefronts, and doors, and
miscellaneous penetrations of air-barrier material with foam sealant.
G.
Seal air-barrier assembly around masonry reinforcing or ties and penetrations with termination
mastic.
H.
Seal top of through-wall flashings to air barrier.
I.
Seal exposed edges of strips at seams, cuts, penetrations, and terminations not concealed by
metal counterflashings or ending in reglets with termination mastic.
J.
Repair punctures, voids, and deficient lapped seams. Slit and flatten fishmouths and blisters.
Extend patches 6 inches (150 mm) beyond repaired areas.
K.
Fluid-Applied Membrane Material: Apply a continuous unbroken air-barrier membrane to
substrates according to the following thickness. Apply air-barrier membrane in full contact
around protrusions such as masonry ties.
1.
Vapor-Retarding Membrane Air Barrier: Total dry film thickness as recommended in
writing by manufacturer to meet performance requirements, but not less than 40-mil (1.0mm) dry film thickness, applied in two equal coats.
L.
Do not cover air barrier until it has been tested and inspected by Owner's testing agency.
M.
Correct deficiencies in or remove air barrier that does not comply with requirements; repair
substrates and reapply air-barrier components.
3.3
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.
B.
Inspections: Air-barrier materials, accessories, and installation are subject to inspection for
compliance with requirements.
C.
Air barriers will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.
1.
2.
D.
Apply additional air-barrier material, according to manufacturer's written instructions,
where inspection results indicate insufficient thickness.
Remove and replace deficient air-barrier components for retesting as specified above.
Repair damage to air barriers caused by testing; follow manufacturer's written instructions.
FLUID-APPLIED MEMBRANE AIR BARRIERS
072726 - 4
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
E.
Protect air-barrier system from damage during application and remainder of construction period,
according to manufacturer's written instructions.
1.
2.
F.
Protect air barrier from exposure to UV light and harmful weather exposure as required
by manufacturer. If exposed to these conditions for more than 30 days, remove and
replace air barrier or install additional, full-thickness, air-barrier application after repairing
and preparing the overexposed membrane according to air-barrier manufacturer's written
instructions.
Protect air barrier from contact with incompatible materials and sealants not approved by
air-barrier manufacturer.
Remove masking materials after installation.
END OF SECTION 072726
FLUID-APPLIED MEMBRANE AIR BARRIERS
072726 - 5
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
SECTION 074213 - METAL WALL PANELS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
2.
B.
Related Sections:
1.
1.3
Exposed- and Concealed-fastener, lap-seam metal wall panels.
Parapet coping, soffits, sills, border and filler items as in integral components of the panel
system or as designed.
Division 7 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for flashing and other sheet metal
work that is not part of metal wall panel assemblies.
DEFINITION
A.
1.4
Metal Wall Panel Assembly: Metal wall panels, attachment system components, miscellaneous
metal framing, thermal insulation, and accessories necessary for a complete weathertight wall
system.
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
General Performance:
Metal wall panel assemblies shall comply with performance
requirements without failure due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other
defects in construction.
B.
Delegated Design: Design metal wall panel assembly, including comprehensive engineering
analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and design
criteria indicated.
C.
Air Infiltration: Air leakage through assembly of not more than 0.06 cfm/sq. ft. (0.3 L/s per sq.
m) of wall area when tested according to ASTM E 283 at the following test-pressure difference:
1.
Test-Pressure Difference: 1.57 lbf/sq. ft. (75 Pa)
METAL WALL PANELS
074213 - 1
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
D.
Water Penetration under Dynamic Pressure: No evidence of water leakage when tested
according to AAMA 501.1 under dynamic pressure equal to 20 percent of inward-acting, windload design pressure of not less than 6.24 lbf/sq. ft. (300 Pa) and not more than 12 lbf/sq. ft.
(575 Pa).
1.
E.
Water Leakage: As defined according to AAMA 501.1.
Structural Performance: Provide metal wall panel assemblies capable of withstanding the
effects the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated, based on
testing according to ASTM E 1592:
1.
Wind Loads: Determine loads based on the following minimum design wind pressures:
a.
F.
2.
Seismic Loads as indicated on Structural Drawings
3.
Deflection Limits: Metal wall panel assemblies shall withstand wind loads with horizontal
deflections no greater than 1/180 of the span.
Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature
changes by preventing buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of components, failure of joint
sealants, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects. Base calculations on surface
temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss.
1.
1.5
As indicated on Structural Drawings.
Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F (67 deg C), ambient; 180 deg F (100 deg C),
material surfaces.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material
descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for each type of
wall panel and accessory.
B.
Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation layouts of metal wall panels; details of edge
conditions, joints, panel profiles, corners, anchorages, attachment system, trim, flashings,
closures, and accessories; and special details. Distinguish between factory-, shop- and fieldassembled work.
1.
Accessories: Include details of the following items, at a scale of not less than 1-1/2
inches per 12 inches (1:10):
a.
b.
Flashing and trim.
Anchorage systems.
METAL WALL PANELS
074213 - 2
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
C.
Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required, prepared on Samples of
size indicated below.
1.
2.
3.
Metal Wall Panels: 12 inches (305 mm) long by actual panel width. Include fasteners,
closures, and other metal wall panel accessories.
Trim and Closures: 12 inches (305 mm) long. Include fasteners and other exposed
accessories.
Accessories: 12-inch- (305-mm-) long Samples for each type of accessory.
D.
Delegated-Design Submittal: For metal wall panel assembly indicated to comply with
performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the
qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.
E.
Coordination Drawings: Exterior elevations drawn to scale and coordinating penetrations and
wall-mounted items. Show the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Wall panels and attachments.
Girts.
Wall-mounted items including doors, windows, louvers, and lighting fixtures.
Penetrations of wall by pipes and utilities.
F.
Qualification Data: For Installer.
G.
Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified
testing agency, for each product.
H.
Field quality-control reports.
I.
Maintenance Data: For metal wall panels to include in maintenance manuals.
J.
Warranties: Sample of special warranties.
1.6
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Installer Qualifications: An employer of workers trained and approved by manufacturer. Installer
shall have five (5) years documented experience in the installation of this product.
B.
Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to ASTM E 329 for testing indicated.
C.
Source Limitations:
manufacturer.
D.
Fire-Resistance Ratings: Where indicated, provide metal wall panels identical to those of
assemblies tested for fire resistance per ASTM E 119 by a qualified testing agency. Identify
products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.
1.
Obtain each type of metal wall panel from single source from single
Indicate design designations from UL's "Fire Resistance Directory" or from the listings of
another qualified testing agency.
METAL WALL PANELS
074213 - 3
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
E.
Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to
demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for fabrication and installation.
1.
2.
3.
4.
F.
Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
1.7
Build mockup of typical intermediate panel, location to be selected; approximately one
bay wide by one story high by full thickness, including insulation, supports, attachments,
and accessories.
Conduct water spray test of mockup of metal wall panel assembly, testing for water
penetration according to AAMA 501.2.
Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract
Documents contained in mockups unless Architect specifically approves such deviations
in writing.
Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of
Substantial Completion.
Meet with Owner, Architect, Owner's insurer if applicable, testing and inspecting agency
representative, metal wall panel Installer, metal wall panel manufacturer's representative,
structural-support Installer, and installers whose work interfaces with or affects metal wall
panels, including installers of doors, windows, and louvers.
Review and finalize construction schedule and verify availability of materials, Installer's
personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays.
Review methods and procedures related to metal wall panel installation, including
manufacturer's written instructions.
Examine support conditions for compliance with requirements, including alignment
between and attachment to structural members.
Review flashings, special siding details, wall penetrations, openings, and condition of
other construction that will affect metal wall panels.
Review governing regulations and requirements for insurance, certificates, and tests and
inspections if applicable.
Review temporary protection requirements for metal wall panel assembly during and after
installation.
Review wall panel observation and repair procedures after metal wall panel installation.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Deliver components, sheets, metal wall panels, and other manufactured items so as not to be
damaged or deformed. Package metal wall panels for protection during transportation and
handling.
B.
Unload, store, and erect metal wall panels in a manner to prevent bending, warping, twisting,
and surface damage.
C.
Stack metal wall panels horizontally on platforms or pallets, covered with suitable weathertight
and ventilated covering. Store metal wall panels to ensure dryness, with positive slope for
drainage of water. Do not store metal wall panels in contact with other materials that might
cause staining, denting, or other surface damage.
METAL WALL PANELS
074213 - 4
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
D.
Retain strippable protective covering on metal wall panel for period of metal wall panel
installation.
E.
Protect foam-plastic insulation as follows:
1.
2.
3.
1.8
Do not expose to sunlight, except to extent necessary for period of installation and
concealment.
Protect against ignition at all times. Do not deliver foam-plastic insulation materials to
Project site before installation time.
Complete installation and concealment of plastic materials as rapidly as possible in each
area of construction.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation only when existing and forecasted weather
conditions permit assembly of metal wall panels to be performed according to manufacturers'
written instructions and warranty requirements.
B.
Field Measurements: Verify locations of structural members and wall opening dimensions by
field measurements before metal wall panel fabrication, and indicate measurements on Shop
Drawings.
1.9
COORDINATION
A.
1.10
A.
Coordinate metal wall panel assemblies with rain drainage work, flashing, trim, and construction
of girts, studs, soffits, and other adjoining work to provide a leakproof, secure, and noncorrosive
installation.
WARRANTY
Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or
replace components of metal wall panel assemblies that fail in materials or workmanship within
specified warranty period.
1.
Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:
a.
b.
2.
B.
Structural failures including rupturing, cracking, or puncturing.
Deterioration of metals and other materials beyond normal weathering.
Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion.
Special Warranty on Panel Finishes: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer
agrees to repair finish or replace metal wall panels that show evidence of deterioration of
factory-applied finishes within specified warranty period.
1.
Exposed Panel Finish: Deterioration includes, but is not limited to, the following:
METAL WALL PANELS
074213 - 5
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
a.
b.
c.
2.
Color fading more than 5 Hunter units when tested according to ASTM D 2244.
Chalking in excess of a No. 8 rating when tested according to ASTM D 4214.
Cracking, checking, peeling, or failure of paint to adhere to bare metal.
Finish Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
PANEL MATERIALS
A.
Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: Restricted flatness steel sheet metallic coated by the hot-dip
process and prepainted by the coil-coating process to comply with ASTM A 755/A 755M.
1.
2.
3.
Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Steel Sheet:
designation; structural quality.
Surface: [Smooth, flat] [Embossed] finish.
Exposed Coil-Coated Finish:
a.
4.
B.
3-Coat Fluoropolymer: AAMA 621. Fluoropolymer finish containing not less than
70 percent PVDF resin by weight in both color coat and clear topcoat. Prepare,
pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and
resin manufacturers' written instructions.
Concealed Finish: Apply pretreatment and manufacturer's standard white or light-colored
acrylic or polyester backer finish consisting of prime coat and wash coat with a minimum
total dry film thickness of 0.5 mil (0.013 mm).
Panel Sealants:
1.
2.
3.
2.2
ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 (Z275) coating
Sealant Tape: Pressure-sensitive, 100 percent solids, gray polyisobutylene compound
sealant tape with release-paper backing. Provide permanently elastic, nonsag, nontoxic,
nonstaining tape 1/2 inch (13 mm) wide and 1/8 inch (3 mm) thick.
Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920; elastomeric polyurethane, polysulfide, or silicone sealant; of
type, grade, class, and use classifications required to seal joints in metal wall panels and
remain weathertight; and as recommended in writing by metal wall panel manufacturer.
Butyl-Rubber-Based, Solvent-Release Sealant: ASTM C 1311.
MISCELLANEOUS METAL FRAMING
A.
Miscellaneous Metal Framing, General: ASTM C 645, cold-formed metallic-coated steel sheet,
ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60 (Z180) hot-dip galvanized or coating with equivalent corrosion
resistance unless otherwise indicated.
B.
Subgirts: Manufacturer's standard C- or Z-shaped sections, 0.064-inch (1.63-mm) nominal
thickness.
METAL WALL PANELS
074213 - 6
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
C.
Zee Clips: 0.079-inch (2.01-mm) nominal thickness.
D.
Base or Sill Angles or Channels: 0.079-inch (2.01-mm) nominal thickness.
E.
Hat-Shaped, Rigid Furring Channels:
1.
2.
F.
Cold-Rolled Furring Channels: Minimum 1/2-inch- (13-mm-) wide flange. Galvanized G.90
1.
2.
3.
4.
G.
2.3
Nominal Thickness: As indicated.
Depth: As indicated.
Furring Brackets: Adjustable, corrugated-edge type of steel sheet with 0.040-inch (1.02mm) nominal thickness.
Tie Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.062-inch- (1.57-mm) diameter wire, or double strand of 0.048-inch- (1.22-mm-) diameter wire.
Z-Shaped Furring: With slotted or nonslotted web, face flange of 1-1/4 inches (32 mm), wall
attachment flange of 7/8 inch (22 mm), and depth required to fit insulation thickness indicated.
1.
2.
H.
Nominal Thickness: As required to meet performance requirements
Depth: As indicated.
Nominal Thickness: As indicated.
Galvanized G.90.
Fasteners for Miscellaneous Metal Framing: Of type, material, size, corrosion resistance,
holding power, and other properties required to fasten miscellaneous metal framing members to
substrates.
MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A.
2.4
Panel Fasteners: Self-tapping screws, bolts, nuts, self-locking rivets and bolts, end-welded
studs, and other suitable fasteners designed to withstand design loads. Provide exposed
fasteners with heads matching color of metal wall panels by means of plastic caps or factoryapplied coating. Provide EPDM, PVC, or neoprene sealing washers.
CONCEALED-FASTENER, LAP-SEAM METAL WALL PANELS
A.
General: Provide factory-formed metal wall panels designed to be field assembled by lapping
and interconnecting side edges of adjacent panels and mechanically attaching through panel to
supports using concealed fasteners and factory-applied sealant in side laps. Include
accessories required for weathertight installation.
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
the following:
METAL WALL PANELS
074213 - 7
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
2.
Material: Zinc-coated (galvanized) steel sheet, 0.040-inch (1.02-mm) nominal thickness.
a.
b.
3.
4.
2.5
Alcoa Architectural Products (USA).
Architectural Metal Systems.
ATAS International, Inc.
CENTRIA Architectural Systems.
Felxospan Steel Buildings, Inc.
Industrial Building Panels.
MBCI; Div. of NCI Building Systems.
Metal-Fab Manufacturing, L.L.C.
United Steel Deck, Inc,; Subsidiary of Bouras Industries, Inc.
Exterior Finish: 3-coat fluoropolymer.
Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
Panel Coverage: As indicated.
Panel Height: As indicated.
ACCESSORIES
A.
Wall Panel Accessories: Provide components required for a complete metal wall panel
assembly including trim, copings, fasciae, mullions, sills, corner units, clips, flashings, sealants,
gaskets, fillers, closure strips, and similar items. Match material and finish of metal wall panels,
unless otherwise indicated.
1.
2.
3.
B.
2.6
Closures: Provide closures at eaves and rakes, fabricated of same metal as metal wall
panels.
Backing Plates: Provide metal backing plates at panel end splices, fabricated from
material recommended by manufacturer.
Closure Strips: Closed-cell, expanded, cellular, rubber or crosslinked, polyolefin-foam or
closed-cell laminated polyethylene; minimum 1-inch- (25-mm-) thick, flexible closure
strips; cut or premolded to match metal wall panel profile. Provide closure strips where
indicated or necessary to ensure weathertight construction.
Flashing and Trim: Formed from 0.018-inch (0.46-mm) minimum thickness, zinc-coated
(galvanized) steel sheet prepainted with coil coating. Provide flashing and trim as required to
seal against weather and to provide finished appearance. Locations include, but are not limited
to, bases, drips, sills, jambs, corners, endwalls, framed openings, rakes, fasciae, parapet caps,
soffits, reveals, and fillers. Finish flashing and trim with same finish system as adjacent metal
wall panels.
FABRICATION
A.
General: Fabricate and finish metal wall panels and accessories at the factory to greatest
extent possible, by manufacturer's standard procedures and processes, as necessary to fulfill
indicated performance requirements demonstrated by laboratory testing. Comply with indicated
profiles and with dimensional and structural requirements.
METAL WALL PANELS
074213 - 8
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
B.
Fabricate metal wall panels in a manner that eliminates condensation on interior side of panel
and with joints between panels designed to form weathertight seals.
C.
Provide panel profile, including major ribs and intermediate stiffening ribs, if any, for full length
of panel.
D.
Fabricate metal wall panel joints with factory-installed captive gaskets or separator strips that
provide a tight seal and prevent metal-to-metal contact, and that will minimize noise from
movements within panel assembly.
E.
Sheet Metal Accessories: Fabricate flashing and trim to comply with recommendations in
SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" that apply to the design, dimensions, metal, and
other characteristics of item indicated.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Form exposed sheet metal accessories that are without excessive oil canning, buckling,
and tool marks and that are true to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded
back to form hems.
Seams for Other Than Aluminum: Fabricate nonmoving seams in accessories with flatlock seams. Tin edges to be seamed, form seams, and solder.
Sealed Joints: Form nonexpansion but movable joints in metal to accommodate
elastomeric sealant to comply with SMACNA standards.
Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible. Exposed fasteners are not
allowed on faces of accessories exposed to view.
Fabricate cleats and attachment devices from same material as accessory being
anchored or from compatible, noncorrosive metal recommended by metal wall panel
manufacturer.
a.
2.7
Size: As recommended by SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" or
metal wall panel manufacturer for application but not less than thickness of metal
being secured.
GENERAL FINISH REQUIREMENTS
A.
Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for
recommendations for applying and designating finishes.
B.
Protect mechanical and painted finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a
strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping.
C.
Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are
acceptable if they are within one-half of the range of approved Samples. Noticeable variations
in the same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of other components are
acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to
minimize contrast.
METAL WALL PANELS
074213 - 9
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements for installation tolerances, metal wall panel supports, and other conditions
affecting performance of work.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Examine wall framing to verify that girts, angles, channels, studs, and other structural
panel support members and anchorage have been installed within alignment tolerances
required by metal wall panel manufacturer.
Examine wall sheathing to verify that sheathing joints are supported by framing or
blocking and that installation is within flatness tolerances required by metal wall panel
manufacturer.
Verify that weather-resistant sheathing paper has been installed over sheathing or
backing substrate to prevent air infiltration or water penetration.
For the record, prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental
to performance of work.
B.
Examine roughing-in for components and systems penetrating metal wall panels to verify actual
locations of penetrations relative to seam locations of metal wall panels before metal wall panel
installation.
C.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2
PREPARATION
A.
3.3
Miscellaneous Framing: Install subgirts, base angles, sills, furring, and other miscellaneous wall
panel support members and anchorages according to ASTM C 754 and metal wall panel
manufacturer's written recommendations.
METAL WALL PANEL INSTALLATION
A.
General: Install metal wall panels according to manufacturer's written instructions in orientation,
sizes, and locations indicated on Drawings. Install panels perpendicular to girts and subgirts
unless otherwise indicated. Anchor metal wall panels and other components of the Work
securely in place, with provisions for thermal and structural movement.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Commence metal wall panel installation and install minimum of 300 sq. ft. (27.8 sq. m.)
in presence of factory-authorized representative.
Shim or otherwise plumb substrates receiving metal wall panels.
Flash and seal metal wall panels at perimeter of all openings. Fasten with self-tapping
screws. Do not begin installation until weather barrier and flashings that will be
concealed by metal wall panels are installed.
Install screw fasteners in predrilled holes.
Locate and space fastenings in uniform vertical and horizontal alignment.
METAL WALL PANELS
074213 - 10
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
B.
Install flashing and trim as metal wall panel work proceeds.
Locate panel splices over, but not attached to, structural supports. Stagger panel splices
and end laps to avoid a four-panel lap splice condition.
Apply elastomeric sealant continuously between metal base channel (sill angle) and
concrete and elsewhere as indicated or, if not indicated, as necessary for waterproofing.
Align bottom of metal wall panels and fasten with blind rivets, bolts, or self-tapping
screws. Fasten flashings and trim around openings and similar elements with selftapping screws.
Provide weathertight escutcheons for pipe and conduit penetrating exterior walls.
Fasteners:
1.
Steel Wall Panels: Use stainless-steel fasteners for surfaces exposed to the exterior; use
galvanized steel fasteners for surfaces exposed to the interior.
C.
Metal Protection: Where dissimilar metals will contact each other or corrosive substrates,
protect against galvanic action as recommended by metal wall panel manufacturer.
D.
Joint Sealers: Install gaskets, joint fillers, and sealants where indicated and where required for
weathertight performance of metal wall panel assemblies. Provide types of gaskets, fillers, and
sealants indicated or, if not indicated, types recommended by metal wall panel manufacturer.
1.
2.
E.
Seal metal wall panel end laps with double beads of tape or sealant, full width of panel.
Seal side joints where recommended by metal wall panel manufacturer.
Prepare joints and apply sealants to comply with requirements in Division 7 Section "Joint
Sealants."
Lap-Seam Metal Wall Panels: Fasten metal wall panels to supports with fasteners at each
lapped joint at location and spacing recommended by manufacturer.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Lap ribbed or fluted sheets one full rib corrugation. Apply panels and associated items
for neat and weathertight enclosure. Avoid "panel creep" or application not true to line.
Provide metal-backed washers under heads of exposed fasteners bearing on weather
side of metal wall panels.
Locate and space exposed fasteners in uniform vertical and horizontal alignment. Use
proper tools to obtain controlled uniform compression for positive seal without rupture of
washer.
Install screw fasteners with power tools having controlled torque adjusted to compress
washer tightly without damage to washer, screw threads, or panels. Install screws in
predrilled holes.
Provide sealant tape at lapped joints of metal wall panels and between panels and
protruding equipment, vents, and accessories.
Apply a continuous ribbon of sealant tape to weather-side surface of fastenings on end
laps; on side laps of nesting-type panels; on side laps of corrugated nesting-type, ribbed,
or fluted panels; and elsewhere as needed to make panels weathertight.
At panel splices, nest panels with minimum 6-inch (152-mm) end lap, sealed with butylrubber sealant and fastened together by interlocking clamping plates.
METAL WALL PANELS
074213 - 11
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
F.
3.4
Zee Clips: Provide Zee clips of size indicated or, if not indicated, as required to act as standoff
from subgirts for thickness of insulation indicated. Attach to subgirts with fasteners.
ACCESSORY INSTALLATION
A.
General: Install accessories with positive anchorage to building and weathertight mounting, and
provide for thermal expansion. Coordinate installation with flashings and other components.
1.
B.
Flashing and Trim: Comply with performance requirements, manufacturer's written installation
instructions, and SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual." Provide concealed fasteners
where possible, and set units true to line and level as indicated. Install work with laps, joints,
and seams that will be permanently watertight and weather resistant.
1.
2.
3.5
Install components required for a complete metal wall panel assembly including trim,
copings, corners, seam covers, flashings, sealants, gaskets, fillers, closure strips, and
similar items.
Install exposed flashing and trim that is without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool
marks and that is true to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded back to
form hems. Install sheet metal flashing and trim to fit substrates and to result in
waterproof and weather-resistant performance.
Expansion Provisions: Provide for thermal expansion of exposed flashing and trim.
Space movement joints at a maximum of 10 feet (3 m) with no joints allowed within 24
inches (605 mm) of corner or intersection. Where lapped expansion provisions cannot be
used or would not be sufficiently weather resistant and waterproof, form expansion joints
of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch (25 mm) deep, filled with mastic
sealant (concealed within joints).
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Testing Agency: Engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to perform field
tests and inspections and prepare test reports.
B.
Water Penetration: Test areas of installed system indicated on Drawings for compliance with
system performance requirements according to ASTM E 1105 at minimum differential pressure
of 20 percent of inward-acting, wind-load design pressure as defined by SEI/ASCE 7, but not
less than 6.24 lbf/sq. ft. (300 Pa).
C.
Water-Spray Test: After completing the installation of 75-foot- (23-m-) by-2-story minimum area
of metal wall panel assembly, test assembly for water penetration according to AAMA 501.2 in a
2-bay area directed by Architect.
D.
Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect
and test completed metal wall panel installation, including accessories.
E.
Remove and replace metal wall panels where tests and inspections indicate that they do not
comply with specified requirements.
METAL WALL PANELS
074213 - 12
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
F.
3.6
Additional tests and inspections, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine
compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements.
CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A.
Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films, if any, as metal wall panels are
installed, unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written installation instructions. On
completion of metal wall panel installation, clean finished surfaces as recommended by metal
wall panel manufacturer. Maintain in a clean condition during construction.
B.
After metal wall panel installation, clear weep holes and drainage channels of obstructions, dirt,
and sealant.
C.
Replace metal wall panels that have been damaged or have deteriorated beyond successful
repair by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures.
END OF SECTION 074213
METAL WALL PANELS
074213 - 13
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
SECTION 075419 - POLYVINYL-CHLORIDE (PVC) ROOFING (BASE BID)
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
Related Requirements:
1.
2.
3.
4.
1.3
Adhered polyvinyl-chloride (PVC) roofing system.
Mechanically fastened polyvinyl-chloride (PVC) roofing system.
Vapor retarder.
Roof insulation.
Section 061000 "Rough Carpentry" for wood nailers, curbs, and blocking; and for woodbased, structural-use roof deck panels.
Section 072100 "Thermal Insulation" for insulation beneath the roof deck.
Section 076200 "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for metal roof flashings and
counterflashings.
Section 079200 "Joint Sealants" for joint sealants, joint fillers, and joint preparation.
DEFINITIONS
A.
1.4
Roofing Terminology: Definitions in ASTM D 1079 and glossary in NRCA's "The NRCA Roofing
and Waterproofing Manual" apply to work of this Section.
PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS
A.
Preinstallation Roofing Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.
1.
2.
3.
Meet with Owner, Architect, testing and inspecting agency representative, roofing
Installer, roofing system manufacturer's representative, deck Installer, and installers
whose work interfaces with or affects roofing, including installers of roof accessories and
roof-mounted equipment.
Review methods and procedures related to roofing installation, including manufacturer's
written instructions.
Review and finalize construction schedule, and verify availability of materials, Installer's
personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays.
POLYVINYL-CHLORIDE (PVC) ROOFING
075419 - 1
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
1.5
Examine deck substrate conditions and finishes for compliance with requirements,
including flatness and fastening.
Review structural loading limitations of roof deck during and after roofing.
Review base flashings, special roofing details, roof drainage, roof penetrations,
equipment curbs, and condition of other construction that affects roofing system.
Review governing regulations and requirements for insurance and certificates if
applicable.
Review temporary protection requirements for roofing system during and after
installation.
Review roof observation and repair procedures after roofing installation.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product.
B.
Shop Drawings: For roofing system. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and
attachments to other work, including:
1.
2.
3.
C.
Samples for Verification: For the following products:
1.
2.
1.6
Base flashings and membrane terminations.
Tapered insulation, including slopes.
Insulation fastening patterns for corner, perimeter, and field-of-roof locations.
Sheet roofing, of color required.
Walkway pads or rolls, of color required.
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A.
Qualification Data: For Installer and manufacturer.
B.
Manufacturer Certificates: Signed by roofing manufacturer certifying that roofing system
complies with requirements specified in "Performance Requirements" Article.
1.
Submit evidence of compliance with performance requirements.
C.
Product Test Reports: For components of roofing system, for tests performed by manufacturer
and witnessed by a qualified testing agency.
D.
Research/Evaluation Reports: For components of roofing system, from ICC-ES.
E.
Field quality-control reports.
F.
Sample Warranties: For manufacturer's special warranties.
POLYVINYL-CHLORIDE (PVC) ROOFING
075419 - 2
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
1.7
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A.
1.8
Maintenance Data: For roofing system to include in maintenance manuals.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Manufacturer Qualifications: A qualified manufacturer that is FM Global approved for roofing
system identical to that used for this Project.
B.
Installer Qualifications: A qualified firm that is approved, authorized, or licensed by roofing
system manufacturer to install manufacturer's product and that is eligible to receive
manufacturer's special warranty.
1.9
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Deliver roofing materials to Project site in original containers with seals unbroken and labeled
with manufacturer's name, product brand name and type, date of manufacture, approval or
listing agency markings, and directions for storing and mixing with other components.
B.
Store liquid materials in their original undamaged containers in a clean, dry, protected location
and within the temperature range required by roofing system manufacturer. Protect stored liquid
material from direct sunlight.
1.
Discard and legally dispose of liquid material that cannot be applied within its stated shelf
life.
C.
Protect roof insulation materials from physical damage and from deterioration by sunlight,
moisture, soiling, and other sources. Store in a dry location. Comply with insulation
manufacturer's written instructions for handling, storing, and protecting during installation.
D.
Handle and store roofing materials, and place equipment in a manner to avoid permanent
deflection of deck.
1.10
A.
1.11
A.
FIELD CONDITIONS
Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation only when existing and forecasted weather
conditions permit roofing system to be installed according to manufacturer's written instructions
and warranty requirements.
WARRANTY
Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of roofing system that
fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.
POLYVINYL-CHLORIDE (PVC) ROOFING
075419 - 3
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
1.
2.
B.
Special warranty includes membrane roofing, base flashings, roof insulation, fasteners,
cover boards, roofing accessories, and other components of roofing system.
Warranty Period: 15 years from date of Substantial Completion.
Special Project Warranty: Submit roofing Installer's warranty, on warranty form at end of this
Section, signed by Installer, covering the Work of this Section, including all components of
roofing system such as membrane roofing, base flashing, roof insulation, fasteners, cover
boards, substrate boards, vapor retarders, roof pavers, and walkway products, for the following
warranty period:
1.
Warranty Period: Two (2) years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
2.2
Source Limitations: Obtain components including for roofing system from same manufacturer as
membrane roofing or manufacturer approved by membrane roofing manufacturer.
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
General Performance: Installed roofing and base flashings shall withstand specified uplift
pressures, thermally induced movement, and exposure to weather without failure due to
defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction. Roofing and
base flashings shall remain watertight.
1.
2.
Accelerated Weathering: Roofing system shall withstand 2000 hours of exposure when
tested according to ASTM G 152, ASTM G 154, or ASTM G 155.
Impact Resistance: Roofing system shall resist impact damage when tested according to
ASTM D 3746 or ASTM D 4272.
B.
Material Compatibility: Roofing materials shall be compatible with one another and adjacent
materials under conditions of service and application required, as demonstrated by roofing
manufacturer based on testing and field experience.
C.
Roofing System Design: Tested by a qualified testing agency to resist the following uplift
pressures:
1.
2.
3.
4.
D.
Corner Uplift Pressure: 270 lbf/sq. ft. (kPa/sq. m).
Perimeter Uplift Pressure: 180 lbf/sq. ft. (kPa/sq. m).
Field-of-Roof Uplift Pressure: 105 lbf/sq. ft. (kPa/sq. m).
Wind Speed = 130 mph, Exposure 'C'
FM Global Listing: Roofing, base flashings, and component materials shall comply with
requirements in FM Global 4450 or FM Global 4470 as part of a built-up roofing system, and
POLYVINYL-CHLORIDE (PVC) ROOFING
075419 - 4
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
shall be listed in FM Global's "RoofNav" for Class 1 or noncombustible construction, as
applicable. Identify materials with FM Global markings.
1.
2.
Fire/Windstorm Classification: Class 1A-150.
Hail-Resistance Rating: MH.
E.
Solar Reflectance Index: Not less than 78 when calculated according to ASTM E 1980, based
on testing identical products by a qualified testing agency.
F.
Energy Performance: Roofing system shall have an initial solar reflectance of not less than 0.70
and an emissivity of not less than 0.75 when tested according to CRRC-1.
G.
Exterior Fire-Test Exposure: ASTM E 108 or UL 790, Class A; for application and roof slopes
indicated; testing by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of
applicable testing agency.
H.
Fire-Resistance Ratings: Comply with fire-resistance-rated assembly designs indicated. Identify
products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.
2.3
PVC ROOFING
A.
PVC Sheet: ASTM D 4434/D 4434M, Type II, Grade I, glass-fiber reinforced, felt backed.
1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a.
2.
3.
2.4
Sarnafil Inc; Sarnafil G410 (Basis of Design).
Thickness: 60 mils (1.5 mm), nominal.
Exposed Face Color: White.
AUXILIARY ROOFING MATERIALS
A.
General: Auxiliary materials recommended by roofing system manufacturer for intended use
and compatible with roofing.
1.
2.
Liquid-type auxiliary materials shall comply with VOC limits of authorities having
jurisdiction.
Adhesives and sealants that are not on the exterior side of weather barrier shall comply
with the following limits for VOC content:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
Plastic Foam Adhesives: 50 g/L.
Multipurpose Construction Adhesives: 70 g/L.
Fiberglass Adhesives: 80 g/L.
Single-Ply Roof Membrane Adhesives: 250 g/L.
PVC Welding Compounds: 510 g/L.
Adhesive Primer for Plastic: 650 g/L
POLYVINYL-CHLORIDE (PVC) ROOFING
075419 - 5
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
g.
h.
i.
j.
k.
3.
Single-Ply Roof Membrane Sealants: 450 g/L.
Nonmembrane Roof Sealants: 300 g/L.
Sealant Primers for Nonporous Substrates: 250 g/L.
Sealant Primers for Porous Substrates: 775 g/L.
Other Adhesives and Sealants: 250 g/L.
Adhesives and sealants that are not on the exterior side of weather barrier shall comply
with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Public Health's
(formerly, the California Department of Health Services') "Standard Method for the
Testing and Evaluation of Volatile Organic Chemical Emissions from Indoor Sources
Using Environmental Chambers."
B.
Sheet Flashing: Manufacturer's standard sheet flashing of same material, type, reinforcement,
thickness, and color as PVC sheet.
C.
Bonding Adhesive: Manufacturer's standard.
D.
Slip Sheet: Manufacturer's standard, of thickness required for application.
E.
Metal Termination Bars: Manufacturer's standard, predrilled stainless-steel or aluminum bars,
approximately 1 by 1/8 inch (25 by 3 mm) thick; with anchors.
F.
Metal Battens: Manufacturer's standard, aluminum-zinc-alloy-coated or zinc-coated steel sheet,
approximately 1 inch wide by 0.05 inch (25 mm wide by 1.3 mm) thick, prepunched.
G.
Fasteners: Factory-coated steel fasteners and metal or plastic plates complying with corrosionresistance provisions in FM Global 4470, designed for fastening roofing to substrate, and
acceptable to roofing system manufacturer.
H.
Miscellaneous Accessories: Provide pourable sealers, preformed cone and vent sheet
flashings, preformed inside and outside corner sheet flashings, T-joint covers, lap sealants,
termination reglets, and other accessories.
2.5
SUBSTRATE BOARDS
A.
Substrate Board: ASTM C 1278/C 1278M, cellulosic-fiber-reinforced, water-resistant gypsum
substrate, 1/2 inch (13 mm) thick.
1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a.
B.
USG Corporation; Securock Gypsum-Fiber Roof Board (Basis of Design).
Fasteners: Factory-coated steel fasteners and metal or plastic plates complying with corrosionresistance provisions in FM Global 4470, designed for fastening substrate board to roof deck.
POLYVINYL-CHLORIDE (PVC) ROOFING
075419 - 6
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
2.6
VAPOR RETARDER
A.
Polyethylene Film: ASTM D 4397, 6 mils (0.15 mm) thick, minimum, with maximum permeance
rating of 0.13 perm (7.5 ng/Pa x s x sq. m).
1.
2.
3.
2.7
Tape: Pressure-sensitive tape of type recommended by vapor-retarder manufacturer for
sealing joints and penetrations in vapor retarder.
Adhesive: Manufacturer's standard lap adhesive, FM Global approved for vapor-retarder
application.
Tape: Pressure-sensitive tape of type recommended by vapor-retarder manufacturer for
sealing joints and penetrations in vapor retarder.
ROOF INSULATION
A.
General: Preformed roof insulation boards manufactured or approved by PVC roofing
manufacturer, selected from manufacturer's standard sizes suitable for application, of
thicknesses indicated and that produce FM Global-approved roof insulation.
B.
Polyisocyanurate Board Insulation: ASTM C 1289, Type II, Class 1, Grade 2, felt or glass-fiber
mat facer on both major surfaces.
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
Atlas Roofing Corporation.
Carlisle SynTec Incorporated.
Dyplast Products.
Firestone Building Products.
GAF Materials Corporation.
Hunter Panels.
Insulfoam LLC; a Carlisle company.
Johns Manville.
Rmax, Inc.
C.
Tapered Insulation: Provide factory-tapered insulation boards fabricated to slope of 1/4 inch per
12 inches (1:48) unless otherwise indicated.
D.
Provide preformed saddles, crickets, tapered edge strips, and other insulation shapes where
indicated for sloping to drain. Fabricate to slopes indicated.
2.8
INSULATION ACCESSORIES
A.
General: Roof insulation accessories recommended by insulation manufacturer for intended use
and compatibility with roofing.
POLYVINYL-CHLORIDE (PVC) ROOFING
075419 - 7
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
B.
Fasteners: Factory-coated steel fasteners and metal or plastic plates complying with corrosionresistance provisions in FM Global 4470, designed for fastening roof insulation and cover
boards to substrate, and acceptable to roofing system manufacturer.
C.
Insulation Adhesive: Insulation manufacturer's recommended adhesive formulated to attach roof
insulation to substrate or to another insulation layer as follows:
1.
2.
3.
D.
Modified asphaltic, asbestos-free, cold-applied adhesive.
Bead-applied, low-rise, one-component or multicomponent urethane adhesive.
Full-spread spray-applied, low-rise, two-component urethane adhesive.
Cover Board: ASTM C 1177/C 1177M, glass-mat, water-resistant gypsum substrate, 1/2 inch
(13 mm) thick.
1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
E.
2.9
CertainTeed Corporation; GlasRoc Sheathing.
Georgia-Pacific Corporation; Dens Deck.
National Gypsum Company; Gold Bond eXP Extended Exposure Sheathing.
Temple-Inland, Inc; GreenGlass Exterior Sheathing.
USG Corporation; Securock Glass Mat Roof Board.
Protection Mat: Woven or nonwoven polypropylene, polyolefin, or polyester fabric, water
permeable and resistant to UV degradation, type and weight as recommended by roofing
system manufacturer for application.
ASPHALT MATERIALS
A.
Roofing Asphalt: ASTM D 312, Type III or Type IV.
B.
Asphalt Primer: ASTM D 41/D 41M.
2.10
A.
WALKWAYS
Flexible Walkways: Factory-formed, nonporous, heavy-duty, slip-resisting, surface-textured
walkway pads or rolls, approximately 3/16 inch (5 mm) thick and acceptable to roofing system
manufacturer.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements and other conditions affecting performance of the Work:
POLYVINYL-CHLORIDE (PVC) ROOFING
075419 - 8
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
B.
3.2
Verify that roof openings and penetrations are in place, curbs are set and braced, and
roof-drain bodies are securely clamped in place.
Verify that wood blocking, curbs, and nailers are securely anchored to roof deck at
penetrations and terminations and that nailers match thicknesses of insulation.
Verify that minimum concrete drying period recommended by roofing system
manufacturer has passed.
Verify that concrete substrate is visibly dry and free of moisture. Test for capillary
moisture by plastic sheet method according to ASTM D 4263.
Verify that concrete-curing compounds that will impair adhesion of roofing components to
roof deck have been removed.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
PREPARATION
A.
Clean substrate of dust, debris, moisture, and other substances detrimental to roofing
installation according to roofing system manufacturer's written instructions. Remove sharp
projections.
B.
Prevent materials from entering and clogging roof drains and conductors and from spilling or
migrating onto surfaces of other construction. Remove roof-drain plugs when no work is taking
place or when rain is forecast.
C.
Install insulation strips according to acoustical roof deck manufacturer's written instructions.
3.3
ROOFING INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A.
Install roofing system according to roofing system manufacturer's written instructions.
B.
Complete terminations and base flashings and provide temporary seals to prevent water from
entering completed sections of roofing system at end of workday or when rain is forecast.
Remove and discard temporary seals before beginning work on adjoining roofing.
C.
Install roofing and auxiliary materials to tie in to existing roofing to maintain weathertightness of
transition and to not void warranty for existing roofing system.
3.4
SUBSTRATE BOARD INSTALLATION
A.
Install substrate board with long joints in continuous straight lines, perpendicular to roof slopes
with end joints staggered between rows. Tightly butt substrate boards together.
1.
2.
Fasten substrate board to top flanges of steel deck according to recommendations in FM
Global's "RoofNav" and FM Global Loss Prevention Data Sheet 1-29 for specified
Windstorm Resistance Classification.
Fasten substrate board concrete deck to resist uplift pressure at corners, perimeter, and
field of roof according to roofing system manufacturers' written instructions.
POLYVINYL-CHLORIDE (PVC) ROOFING
075419 - 9
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
3.5
VAPOR-RETARDER INSTALLATION
A.
Polyethylene Film: Loosely lay polyethylene-film vapor retarder in a single layer over area to
receive vapor retarder, side and end lapping each sheet a minimum of 2 inches (50 mm) and 6
inches (150 mm), respectively. Continuously seal side and end laps with adhesive.
B.
Completely seal vapor retarder at terminations, obstructions, and penetrations to prevent air
movement into roofing system.
3.6
INSULATION INSTALLATION
A.
Coordinate installing roofing system components so insulation is not exposed to precipitation or
left exposed at the end of the workday.
B.
Comply with roofing system and insulation manufacturer's written instructions for installing roof
insulation.
C.
Install tapered insulation under area of roofing to conform to slopes indicated.
D.
Install insulation under area of roofing to achieve required thickness. Where overall insulation
thickness is 2.7 inches (68 mm) or greater, install two or more layers with joints of each
succeeding layer staggered from joints of previous layer a minimum of 6 inches (150 mm) in
each direction.
1.
Where installing composite and noncomposite insulation in two or more layers, install
noncomposite board insulation for bottom layer and intermediate layers, if applicable, and
install composite board insulation for top layer.
E.
Trim surface of insulation where necessary at roof drains so completed surface is flush and
does not restrict flow of water.
F.
Install insulation with long joints of insulation in a continuous straight line with end joints
staggered between rows, abutting edges and ends between boards. Fill gaps exceeding 1/4
inch (6 mm) with insulation.
1.
G.
Cut and fit insulation within 1/4 inch (6 mm) of nailers, projections, and penetrations.
Adhered Insulation: Install each layer of insulation and adhere to substrate as follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Prime surface of concrete deck with asphalt primer at rate of 3/4 gal./100 sq. ft.
(0.3 L/sq. m), and allow primer to dry.
Set each layer of insulation in a solid mopping of hot roofing asphalt, applied within plus
or minus 25 deg F (14 deg C) of equiviscous temperature.
Set each layer of insulation in ribbons of bead-applied insulation adhesive, firmly pressing
and maintaining insulation in place.
Set each layer of insulation in a uniform coverage of full-spread insulation adhesive,
firmly pressing and maintaining insulation in place.
POLYVINYL-CHLORIDE (PVC) ROOFING
075419 - 10
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
H.
Mechanically Fastened Insulation: Install each layer of insulation and secure to deck using
mechanical fasteners specifically designed and sized for fastening specified board-type roof
insulation to deck type.
1.
2.
I.
Mechanically Fastened and Adhered Insulation: Install each layer of insulation to deck using
mechanical fasteners specifically designed and sized for fastening specified board-type roof
insulation to deck type.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
J.
Fasten first layer of insulation according to requirements in FM Global's "RoofNav" for
specified Windstorm Resistance Classification.
Fasten first layer of insulation to resist uplift pressure at corners, perimeter, and field of
roof.
Set each subsequent layer of insulation in a solid mopping of hot roofing asphalt, applied
within plus or minus 25 deg F (14 deg C) of equiviscous temperature.
Set each subsequent layer of insulation in ribbons of bead-applied insulation adhesive,
firmly pressing and maintaining insulation in place.
Set each subsequent layer of insulation in a uniform coverage of full-spread insulation
adhesive, firmly pressing and maintaining insulation in place.
Install cover boards over insulation with long joints in continuous straight lines with end joints
staggered between rows. Offset joints of insulation below a minimum of 6 inches (150 mm) in
each direction. Loosely butt cover boards together and fasten to roof deck.
1.
2.
3.7
Fasten insulation according to requirements in FM Global's "RoofNav" for specified
Windstorm Resistance Classification.
Fasten insulation to resist uplift pressure at corners, perimeter, and field of roof.
Fasten cover boards according to requirements in FM Global's "RoofNav" for specified
Windstorm Resistance Classification.
Fasten cover boards to resist uplift pressure at corners, perimeter, and field of roof.
ADHERED ROOFING INSTALLATION
A.
Adhere roofing over area to receive roofing according to roofing system manufacturer's written
instructions. Unroll roofing and allow to relax before retaining.
1.
Install sheet according to ASTM D 5036.
B.
Start installation of roofing in presence of roofing system manufacturer's technical personnel.
C.
Accurately align roofing, and maintain uniform side and end laps of minimum dimensions
required by manufacturer. Stagger end laps.
D.
Bonding Adhesive: Apply to substrate and underside of roofing at rate required by
manufacturer, and allow to partially dry before installing roofing. Do not apply to splice area of
roofing.
POLYVINYL-CHLORIDE (PVC) ROOFING
075419 - 11
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
E.
In addition to adhering, mechanically fasten roofing securely at terminations, penetrations, and
perimeter of roofing.
F.
Apply roofing with side laps shingled with slope of roof deck where possible.
G.
Seams: Clean seam areas, overlap roofing, and hot-air weld side and end laps of roofing and
sheet flashings according to manufacturer's written instructions, to ensure a watertight seam
installation.
1.
2.
3.
H.
3.8
Test lap edges with probe to verify seam weld continuity. Apply lap sealant to seal cut
edges of sheet.
Verify field strength of seams a minimum of twice daily, and repair seam sample areas.
Repair tears, voids, and lapped seams in roofing that do not comply with requirements.
Spread sealant bed over deck-drain flange at roof drains, and securely seal roofing in place with
clamping ring.
BASE FLASHING INSTALLATION
A.
Install sheet flashings and preformed flashing accessories, and adhere to substrates according
to roofing system manufacturer's written instructions.
B.
Apply bonding adhesive to substrate and underside of sheet flashing at required rate, and allow
to partially dry. Do not apply to seam area of flashing.
C.
Flash penetrations and field-formed inside and outside corners with cured or uncured sheet
flashing.
D.
Clean seam areas, overlap, and firmly roll sheet flashings into the adhesive. Hot-air weld side
and end laps to ensure a watertight seam installation.
E.
Terminate and seal top of sheet flashings and mechanically anchor to substrate through
termination bars.
3.9
WALKWAY INSTALLATION
A.
3.10
A.
Flexible Walkways: Install walkway products in locations indicated. Heat weld to substrate or
adhere walkway products to substrate with compatible adhesive according to roofing system
manufacturer's written instructions.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to inspect substrate conditions, surface
preparation, membrane application, flashings, protection, and drainage components, and to
furnish reports to Architect.
POLYVINYL-CHLORIDE (PVC) ROOFING
075419 - 12
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
B.
Final Roof Inspection: Arrange for roofing system manufacturer's technical personnel to inspect
roofing installation on completion.
C.
Repair or remove and replace components of roofing system where inspections indicate that
they do not comply with specified requirements.
D.
Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine if
replaced or additional work complies with specified requirements.
3.11
PROTECTING AND CLEANING
A.
Protect roofing system from damage and wear during remainder of construction period. When
remaining construction does not affect or endanger roofing, inspect roofing for deterioration and
damage, describing its nature and extent in a written report, with copies to Architect and Owner.
B.
Correct deficiencies in or remove roofing system that does not comply with requirements, repair
substrates, and repair or reinstall roofing system to a condition free of damage and deterioration
at time of Substantial Completion and according to warranty requirements.
C.
Clean overspray and spillage from adjacent construction using cleaning agents and procedures
recommended by manufacturer of affected construction.
3.12
A.
ROOFING INSTALLER'S WARRANTY
WHEREAS _______________________________ of ___________________________, herein
called the "Roofing Installer," has performed roofing and associated work ("work") on the
following project:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Owner: .
Address: .
Building Name/Type: .
Address: .
Area of Work: .
Acceptance Date: _________________.
Warranty Period: .
Expiration Date: __________________.
B.
AND WHEREAS Roofing Installer has contracted (either directly with Owner or indirectly as a
subcontractor) to warrant said work against leaks and faulty or defective materials and
workmanship for designated Warranty Period,
C.
NOW THEREFORE Roofing Installer hereby warrants, subject to terms and conditions herein
set forth, that during Warranty Period he will, at his own cost and expense, make or cause to be
made such repairs to or replacements of said work as are necessary to correct faulty and
defective work and as are necessary to maintain said work in a watertight condition.
D.
This Warranty is made subject to the following terms and conditions:
POLYVINYL-CHLORIDE (PVC) ROOFING
075419 - 13
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
1.
Specifically excluded from this Warranty are damages to work and other parts of the
building, and to building contents, caused by:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
E.
lightning;
peak gust wind speed exceeding 120 mph;
fire;
failure of roofing system substrate, including cracking, settlement, excessive
deflection, deterioration, and decomposition;
faulty construction of parapet walls, copings, chimneys, skylights, vents, equipment
supports, and other edge conditions and penetrations of the work;
vapor condensation on bottom of roofing; and
activity on roofing by others, including construction contractors, maintenance
personnel, other persons, and animals, whether authorized or unauthorized by
Owner.
When work has been damaged by any of foregoing causes, Warranty shall be null and
void until such damage has been repaired by Roofing Installer and until cost and expense
thereof have been paid by Owner or by another responsible party so designated.
Roofing Installer is responsible for damage to work covered by this Warranty but is not
liable for consequential damages to building or building contents resulting from leaks or
faults or defects of work.
During Warranty Period, if Owner allows alteration of work by anyone other than Roofing
Installer, including cutting, patching, and maintenance in connection with penetrations,
attachment of other work, and positioning of anything on roof, this Warranty shall become
null and void on date of said alterations, but only to the extent said alterations affect work
covered by this Warranty. If Owner engages Roofing Installer to perform said alterations,
Warranty shall not become null and void unless Roofing Installer, before starting said
work, shall have notified Owner in writing, showing reasonable cause for claim, that said
alterations would likely damage or deteriorate work, thereby reasonably justifying a
limitation or termination of this Warranty.
During Warranty Period, if original use of roof is changed and it becomes used for, but
was not originally specified for, a promenade, work deck, spray-cooled surface, flooded
basin, or other use or service more severe than originally specified, this Warranty shall
become null and void on date of said change, but only to the extent said change affects
work covered by this Warranty.
Owner shall promptly notify Roofing Installer of observed, known, or suspected leaks,
defects, or deterioration and shall afford reasonable opportunity for Roofing Installer to
inspect work and to examine evidence of such leaks, defects, or deterioration.
This Warranty is recognized to be the only warranty of Roofing Installer on said work and
shall not operate to restrict or cut off Owner from other remedies and resources lawfully
available to Owner in cases of roofing failure. Specifically, this Warranty shall not operate
to relieve Roofing Installer of responsibility for performance of original work according to
requirements of the Contract Documents, regardless of whether Contract was a contract
directly with Owner or a subcontract with Owner's General Contractor.
IN WITNESS THEREOF, this instrument has been duly executed this ___________ day of
___________________, ________________.
1.
Authorized Signature: _______________________________________.
POLYVINYL-CHLORIDE (PVC) ROOFING
075419 - 14
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
2.
3.
Name: ______________________________________.
Title: _______________________________________.
END OF SECTION 075419
POLYVINYL-CHLORIDE (PVC) ROOFING
075419 - 15
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
SECTION 077100 - ROOF SPECIALTIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
2.
3.
B.
Related Requirements:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
C.
Section 055000 "Metal Fabrications" for downspout guards and downspout boots.
Section 061000 "Rough Carpentry" for wood nailers, curbs, and blocking.
Section 076200 "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for custom- and site-fabricated sheet
metal flashing and trim.
Section 077200 "Roof Accessories" for set-on-type curbs, equipment supports, roof
hatches, vents, and other manufactured roof accessory units.
Section 079200 "Joint Sealants" for field-applied sealants between roof specialties and
adjacent materials.
Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site..
1.
2.
3.
1.3
Copings.
Roof-edge specialties.
Roof-edge drainage systems.
Meet with Owner, Architect, Owner's insurer if applicable, roofing-system testing and
inspecting agency representative, roofing Installer, roofing-system manufacturer's
representative, Installer, structural-support Installer, and installers whose work interfaces
with or affects roof specialties, including installers of roofing materials and accessories.
Examine substrate conditions for compliance with requirements, including flatness and
attachment to structural members.
Review special roof details, roof drainage, and condition of other construction that will
affect roof specialties.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product.
ROOF SPECIALTIES
077100 - 1
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
1.
B.
Shop Drawings: For roof specialties.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
C.
Include plans, elevations, expansion-joint locations, keyed details, and attachments to
other work. Distinguish between plant- and field-assembled work.
Include details for expansion and contraction; locations of expansion joints, including
direction of expansion and contraction.
Indicate profile and pattern of seams and layout of fasteners, cleats, clips, and other
attachments.
Detail termination points and assemblies, including fixed points.
Include details of special conditions.
Samples for Verification:
1.
2.
1.4
Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components
and profiles, and finishes.
Include Samples of each type of roof specialty to verify finish and color selection, in
manufacturer's standard sizes.
Include copings, roof-edge specialties, and roof-edge drainage systems made from 12inch (300-mm) lengths of full-size components in specified material, and including
fasteners, cover joints, accessories, and attachments.
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A.
Qualification Data: For manufacturer.
B.
Product Certificates: For each type of roof specialty.
C.
Product Test Reports: For copings and roof-edge flashings, for tests performed by a qualified
testing agency.
D.
Sample Warranty: For manufacturer's special warranty.
1.5
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A.
1.6
Maintenance Data: For roofing specialties to include in maintenance manuals.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Manufacturer Qualifications: A qualified manufacturer offering products meeting requirements
that are FM Approvals listed for specified class.
B.
Source Limitations: Obtain roof specialties approved by manufacturer providing roofing-system
warranty specified.
ROOF SPECIALTIES
077100 - 2
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
1.7
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Do not store roof specialties in contact with other materials that might cause staining, denting,
or other surface damage. Store roof specialties away from uncured concrete and masonry.
B.
Protect strippable protective covering on roof specialties from exposure to sunlight and high
humidity, except to extent necessary for the period of roof-specialty installation.
1.8
FIELD CONDITIONS
A.
Field Measurements: Verify profiles and tolerances of roof-specialty substrates by field
measurements before fabrication, and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings.
B.
Coordination: Coordinate roof specialties with flashing, trim, and construction of parapets, roof
deck, roof and wall panels, and other adjoining work to provide a leakproof, secure, and
noncorrosive installation.
1.9
WARRANTY
A.
Special Warranty on Painted Finishes: Manufacturer agrees to repair finish or replace roof
specialties that show evidence of deterioration of factory-applied finishes within specified
warranty period.
1.
Fluoropolymer Finish: Deterioration includes, but is not limited to, the following:
a.
b.
c.
2.
Color fading more than 5 Hunter units when tested according to ASTM D 2244.
Chalking in excess of a No. 8 rating when tested according to ASTM D 4214.
Cracking, checking, peeling, or failure of paint to adhere to bare metal.
Finish Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
General Performance: Roof specialties shall withstand exposure to weather and resist thermally
induced movement without failure, rattling, leaking, or fastener disengagement due to defective
manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction.
B.
Performance shall meet Miami-Dade Co/ ASCE-7 wind uplift for 120 mph hurricane conditions.
C.
Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature
changes to prevent buckling, opening of joints, hole elongation, overstressing of components,
failure of joint sealants, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects. Provide clips that
ROOF SPECIALTIES
077100 - 3
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
resist rotation and avoid shear stress as a result of thermal movements. Base calculations on
surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss.
1.
2.2
Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F (67 deg C), ambient; 180 deg F (100 deg C),
material surfaces.
COPINGS
A.
Metal Copings: Manufactured coping system consisting of metal coping cap in section lengths
not exceeding 12 feet (3.6 m), concealed anchorage; with corner units, end cap units, and
concealed splice plates with finish matching coping caps.
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
2.
Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet Coping Caps: Zinc-coated (galvanized) steel, nominal 0.034inch (0.86-mm) minimum thickness and thickness as required to meet performance
requirements.
a.
b.
c.
3.
4.
Surface: Smooth, flatfinish.
Finish: Three-coat fluoropolymer..
Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
Corners: Factory mitered and continuously welded.
Coping-Cap Attachment Method: Snap-on or face leg hooked to continuous cleat with
back leg fastener exposed, fabricated from coping-cap material.
a.
2.3
Architectural Products Company.
ATAS International, Inc.
Castle Metal Products.
Cheney Flashing Company.
Hickman Company, W. P.
Merchant & Evans, Inc.
Metal-Era, Inc.
Metal-Fab Manufacturing, LLC.
Perimeter Systems; a division of Southern Aluminum Finishing Company, Inc.
Petersen Aluminum Corporation.
Snap-on Coping Anchor Plates: Concealed, galvanized-steel sheet, 12 inches (300
mm) wide, with integral cleats.
ROOF-EDGE SPECIALTIES
A.
Canted Roof-Edge Gravel Stop: Manufactured, two-piece, roof-edge fascia consisting of snapon metal fascia cover in section lengths not exceeding 12 feet (3.6 m and a continuous formed
ROOF SPECIALTIES
077100 - 4
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
galvanized-steel sheet cant, 0.028 inch (0.71 mm) thick, minimum, with extended vertical leg
terminating in a drip-edge cleat. Provide matching corner units.
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
2.
Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet Fascia Covers: Zinc-coated (galvanized) steel, nominal
0.034-inch (0.86-mm) minimum thickness and thickness as required to meet performance
requirements.
a.
b.
c.
3.
4.
5.
2.4
Architectural Products Company.
ATAS International, Inc.
Castle Metal Products.
Cheney Flashing Company.
Hickman Company, W. P.
Merchant & Evans, Inc.
Metal-Era, Inc.
Metal-Fab Manufacturing, LLC.
Petersen Aluminum Corporation.
Surface: Smooth, flat finish.
Finish: Three-coat fluoropolymer.
Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
Corners: Factory mitered and continuously welded.
Splice Plates: Concealed, of same material, finish, and shape as fascia cover.
Fascia Accessories: Fascia extenders with continuous hold-down cleats.
ROOF-EDGE DRAINAGE SYSTEMS
A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
B.
Architectural Products Company.
ATAS International, Inc.
Berger Building Products, Inc.
Castle Metal Products.
Cheney Flashing Company.
CopperCraft by FABRAL; a Euramax company.
Hickman Company, W. P.
Merchant & Evans, Inc.
Metal-Era, Inc.
Metal-Fab Manufacturing, LLC.
Perimeter Systems; a division of Southern Aluminum Finishing Company, Inc.
Gutters: Manufactured in uniform section lengths not exceeding 12 feet (3.6 m), with matching
corner units, ends, outlet tubes, and other accessories. Elevate back edge at least 1 inch (25
ROOF SPECIALTIES
077100 - 5
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
mm) above front edge. Furnish flat-stock gutter straps, gutter brackets, expansion joints, and
expansion-joint covers fabricated from same metal as gutters.
1.
2.
3.
4.
C.
Downspouts: Plain rectangular complete with mitered elbows, manufactured from the following
exposed metal. Furnish with metal hangers, from same material as downspouts, and anchors.
1.
D.
Zinc-Coated Steel: Nominal 0.034-inch (0.86-mm) thickness.
Zinc-Coated Steel Finish: Three-coat fluoropolymer.
1.
2.5
Zinc-Coated Steel: Nominal0.034-inch (0.86-mm) thickness.
Gutter Profile: As indicated on the Drawings.
Corners: Factory mitered and continuously welded.
Gutter Supports: Gutter brackets with finish matching the gutters.
Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
MATERIALS
A.
2.6
Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 (Z275) coating designation.
UNDERLAYMENT MATERIALS
A.
Self-Adhering, High-Temperature Sheet: Minimum 30 to 40 mils (0.76 to 1.0 mm) thick,
consisting of slip-resisting polyethylene-film top surface laminated to layer of butyl or SBSmodified asphalt adhesive, with release-paper backing; cold applied. Provide primer when
recommended by underlayment manufacturer.
1.
2.
3.
Thermal Stability: ASTM D 1970/D 1970M; stable after testing at 240 deg F (116 deg C).
Low-Temperature Flexibility: ASTM D 1970/D 1970M; passes after testing at minus 20
deg F (29 deg C).
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
2.7
Carlisle Coatings & Waterproofing; CCW WIP 300HT.
Grace Construction Products, a unit of W. R. Grace & Co.; [Grace Ice and Water
Shield HT.
Henry Company; Blueskin PE200 HT.
Metal-Fab Manufacturing, LLC; MetShield.
Owens Corning; WeatherLock Metal High Temperature Underlayment.
MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A.
Fasteners: Manufacturer's recommended fasteners, suitable for application and designed to
meet performance requirements. Furnish the following unless otherwise indicated:
ROOF SPECIALTIES
077100 - 6
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
1.
Fasteners for Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Steel Sheet: Series 300 stainless steel or hot-dip
zinc-coated steel according to ASTM A 153/A 153M or ASTM F 2329.
B.
Elastomeric Sealant: ASTM C 920, elastomeric polyurethane polymer sealant of type, grade,
class, and use classifications required by roofing-specialty manufacturer for each application.
C.
Butyl Sealant: ASTM C 1311, single-component, solvent-release butyl rubber sealant;
polyisobutylene plasticized; heavy bodied for hooked-type joints with limited movement.
2.8
FINISHES
A.
Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for
recommendations for applying and designating finishes.
B.
Protect mechanical and painted finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a
strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping.
C.
Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are unacceptable. Variations
in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved
Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.
D.
Coil-Coated Galvanized-Steel Sheet Finishes:
1.
High-Performance Organic Finish: Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal
surfaces to comply with ASTM A 755/A 755M and coating and resin manufacturers'
written instructions.
a.
b.
Three-Coat Fluoropolymer: AAMA 621. Fluoropolymer finish containing not less
than 70 percent PVDF resin by weight in both color coat and clear topcoat.
Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with
coating and resin manufacturers' written instructions.
Concealed Surface Finish: Apply pretreatment and manufacturer's standard acrylic
or polyester backer finish consisting of prime coat and wash coat with a minimum
total dry film thickness of 0.5 mil (0.013 mm).
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, to verify actual locations,
dimensions, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
B.
Examine walls, roof edges, and parapets for suitable conditions for roof specialties.
C.
Verify that substrate is sound, dry, smooth, clean, sloped for drainage where applicable, and
securely anchored.
ROOF SPECIALTIES
077100 - 7
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
D.
3.2
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
UNDERLAYMENT INSTALLATION
A.
Self-Adhering Sheet Underlayment: Apply primer if required by manufacturer. Comply with
temperature restrictions of underlayment manufacturer for installation. Apply wrinkle free, in
shingle fashion to shed water, and with end laps of not less than 6 inches (152 mm) staggered
24 inches (610 mm) between courses. Overlap side edges not less than 3-1/2 inches (90 mm).
Roll laps with roller. Cover underlayment within 14 days.
1.
2.
3.3
Apply continuously under roof-edge specialties.
Coordinate application of self-adhering sheet underlayment under roof specialties with
requirements for continuity with adjacent air barrier materials.
INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A.
General: Install roof specialties according to manufacturer's written instructions. Anchor roof
specialties securely in place, with provisions for thermal and structural movement. Use
fasteners, solder, protective coatings, separators, underlayments, sealants, and other
miscellaneous items as required to complete roof-specialty systems.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Install roof specialties level, plumb, true to line and elevation; with limited oil-canning and
without warping, jogs in alignment, buckling, or tool marks.
Provide uniform, neat seams with minimum exposure of solder and sealant.
Install roof specialties to fit substrates and to result in weathertight performance. Verify
shapes and dimensions of surfaces to be covered before manufacture.
Torch cutting of roof specialties is not permitted.
Do not use graphite pencils to mark metal surfaces.
B.
Metal Protection: Protect metals against galvanic action by separating dissimilar metals from
contact with each other or with corrosive substrates by painting contact surfaces with
bituminous coating or by other permanent separation as recommended by manufacturer.
C.
Expansion Provisions: Allow for thermal expansion of exposed roof specialties.
1.
2.
Space movement joints at a maximum of 12 feet (3.6 m) with no joints within 18 inches
(450 mm) of corners or intersections unless otherwise indicated on Drawings.
When ambient temperature at time of installation is between 40 and 70 deg F (4 and 21
deg C), set joint members for 50 percent movement each way. Adjust setting
proportionately for installation at higher ambient temperatures.
D.
Fastener Sizes: Use fasteners of sizes that penetrate substrate not less than recommended by
fastener manufacturer to achieve maximum pull-out resistance.
E.
Seal concealed joints with butyl sealant as required by roofing-specialty manufacturer.
ROOF SPECIALTIES
077100 - 8
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
F.
Seal joints as required for weathertight construction. Place sealant to be completely concealed
in joint. Do not install sealants at temperatures below 40 deg F (4 deg C).
G.
Soldered Joints: Clean surfaces to be soldered, removing oils and foreign matter. Pre-tin edges
of sheets to be soldered to a width of 1-1/2 inches (38 mm); however, reduce pre-tinning where
pre-tinned surface would show in completed Work. Tin edges of uncoated copper sheets using
solder for copper. Do not use torches for soldering. Heat surfaces to receive solder and flow
solder into joint. Fill joint completely. Completely remove flux and spatter from exposed
surfaces.
3.4
COPING INSTALLATION
A.
Install cleats, anchor plates, and other anchoring and attachment accessories and devices with
concealed fasteners.
B.
Anchor copings with manufacturer's required devices, fasteners, and fastener spacing to meet
performance requirements.
1.
3.5
Interlock face and back leg drip edges of snap-on coping cap into cleated anchor plates
anchored to substrate at manufacturer's required spacing that meets performance
requirements.
ROOF-EDGE SPECIALITIES INSTALLATION
A.
Install cleats, cants, and other anchoring and attachment accessories and devices with
concealed fasteners.
B.
Anchor roof edgings with manufacturer's required devices, fasteners, and fastener spacing to
meet performance requirements.
3.6
ROOF-EDGE DRAINAGE-SYSTEM INSTALLATION
A.
General: Install components to produce a complete roof-edge drainage system according to
manufacturer's written instructions. Coordinate installation of roof perimeter flashing with
installation of roof-edge drainage system.
B.
Gutters: Join and seal gutter lengths. Allow for thermal expansion. Attach gutters to firmly
anchored gutter supports spaced not more than 24 inches (610 mm) apart. Attach ends with
rivets and seal with sealant to make watertight. Slope to downspouts.
1.
C.
Install gutter with expansion joints at locations indicated but not exceeding 50 feet
(15.2 m) apart. Install expansion-joint caps.
Downspouts: Join sections with manufacturer's standard telescoping joints. Provide hangers
with fasteners designed to hold downspouts securely to walls and 1 inch (25 mm) away from
walls; locate fasteners at top and bottom and at approximately 60 inches (1500 mm) o.c.
ROOF SPECIALTIES
077100 - 9
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
1.
2.
3.7
Provide elbows at base of downspouts at grade to direct water away from building.
Connect downspouts to underground drainage system indicated.
CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A.
Clean exposed metal surfaces of substances that interfere with uniform oxidation and
weathering.
B.
Clean and neutralize flux materials. Clean off excess solder and sealants.
C.
Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films as roof specialties are installed. On
completion of installation, clean finished surfaces, including removing unused fasteners, metal
filings, pop rivet stems, and pieces of flashing. Maintain roof specialties in a clean condition
during construction.
D.
Replace roof specialties that have been damaged or that cannot be successfully repaired by
finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures.
END OF SECTION 077100
ROOF SPECIALTIES
077100 - 10
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
SECTION 077200 - ROOF ACCESSORIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
2.
1.3
Equipment supports.
Pipe supports.
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
1.4
General Performance: Roof accessories shall withstand exposure to weather and resist
thermally induced movement without failure, rattling, leaking, or fastener disengagement due to
defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
1.5
Product Data: For each type of roof accessory indicated. Include construction details, material
descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes.
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A.
Coordination Drawings: Roof plans, drawn to scale, and coordinating penetrations and roofmounted items. Show the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
Size and location of roof accessories specified in this Section.
Method of attaching roof accessories to roof or building structure.
Other roof-mounted items including mechanical and electrical equipment, ductwork,
piping, and conduit.
Required clearances.
Warranty: Sample of special warranty.
ROOF ACCESSORIES
077200 - 1
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
1.6
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A.
1.7
Operation and Maintenance Data:
maintenance manuals.
For roof accessories to include in operation and
COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate layout and installation of roof accessories with roofing membrane and base flashing
and interfacing and adjoining construction to provide a leakproof, weathertight, secure, and
noncorrosive installation.
B.
Coordinate dimensions with rough-in information or Shop Drawings of equipment to be
supported.
1.8
WARRANTY
A.
Special Warranty on Painted Finishes: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer
agrees to repair finishes or replace roof accessories that show evidence of deterioration of
factory-applied finishes within specified warranty period.
1.
Fluoropolymer Finish: Deterioration includes, but is not limited to, the following:
a.
b.
c.
2.
Color fading more than 5 Hunter units when tested according to ASTM D 2244.
Chalking in excess of a No. 8 rating when tested according to ASTM D 4214.
Cracking, checking, peeling, or failure of paint to adhere to bare metal.
Finish Warranty Period: 20 years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
METAL MATERIALS
A.
Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 (Z275) coating designation.
1.
2.
B.
Baked-Enamel or Powder-Coat Finish: Immediately after cleaning and pretreating, apply
manufacturer's standard two-coat, baked-on finish consisting of prime coat and
thermosetting topcoat, with a minimum dry film thickness of 1 mil (0.025 mm) for topcoat.
Comply with coating manufacturer's written instructions for applying and baking to
achieve a minimum dry film thickness of 2 mils (0.05 mm).
Concealed Finish: Pretreat with manufacturer's standard white or light-colored acrylic or
polyester-backer finish consisting of prime coat and wash coat, with a minimum total dry
film thickness of 0.5 mil (0.013 mm).
Steel Shapes: ASTM A 36/A 36M, hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 123/A 123M unless
otherwise indicated.
ROOF ACCESSORIES
077200 - 2
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
C.
Galvanized-Steel Tube:
ASTM A 123/A 123M.
D.
Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, galvanized.
2.2
ASTM A 500, round tube, hot-dip galvanized according to
MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A.
General: Provide materials and types of fasteners, protective coatings, sealants, and other
miscellaneous items required by manufacturer for a complete installation.
B.
Wood Nailers:
Softwood lumber, pressure treated with waterborne preservatives for
aboveground use, acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, containing no arsenic or
chromium, and complying with AWPA C2; not less than 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) thick.
C.
Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187.
D.
Fasteners: Roof accessory manufacturer's recommended fasteners suitable for application and
metals being fastened. Match finish of exposed fasteners with finish of material being fastened.
Provide nonremovable fastener heads to exterior exposed fasteners. Furnish the following
unless otherwise indicated:
E.
Gaskets: Manufacturer's standard tubular or fingered design of neoprene, EPDM, PVC, or
silicone or a flat design of foam rubber, sponge neoprene, or cork.
F.
Elastomeric Sealant:
ASTM C 920, elastomeric polyurethane polymer sealant as
recommended by roof accessory manufacturer for installation indicated; low modulus; of type,
grade, class, and use classifications required to seal joints and remain watertight.
G.
Butyl Sealant:
ASTM C 1311, single-component, solvent-release butyl rubber sealant;
polyisobutylene plasticized; heavy bodied for expansion joints with limited movement.
2.3
EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS
A.
Equipment Supports: Internally reinforced metal equipment supports capable of supporting
superimposed live and dead loads, including equipment loads and other construction indicated
on Drawings; with welded or mechanically fastened and sealed corner joints, integral metal
cant, and integrally formed deck-mounting flange at perimeter bottom.
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
AES Industries, Inc.
Curbs Plus, Inc.
Custom Solution Roof and Metal Products.
Greenheck Fan Corporation.
LM Curbs.
ROOF ACCESSORIES
077200 - 3
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
f.
g.
h.
i.
Milcor Inc.; Commercial Products Group of Hart & Cooley, Inc.
Roof Products, Inc.
Thybar Corporation.
Vent Products Co., Inc.
B.
Size: Coordinate dimensions with roughing-in information or Shop Drawings of equipment to be
supported.
C.
Material: Zinc-coated (galvanized) 0.079 inch (2.01 mm) thick.
1.
2.
D.
Construction:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
2.4
Finish: Two-coat fluoropolymer.
Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
Insulation: Factory insulated with 1-1/2-inch- (38-mm-) thick glass-fiber board insulation.
Liner: Same material as equipment support, of manufacturer's standard thickness and
finish.
Factory-installed continuous wood nailers 3-1/2 inches (90 mm) wide at tops of
equipment supports.
Metal Counterflashing: Manufacturer's standard, removable, fabricated of same metal
and finish as equipment support.
Fabricate equipment supports to minimum height of 12 inches (300 mm) unless
otherwise indicated.
PIPE SUPPORTS
A.
Pipe Supports: Adjustable-height, extruded-aluminum tube, filled with urethane insulation; 2
inches (50 mm) in diameter; with aluminum baseplate,
base seal, manufacturer's
recommended hardware for mounting to structure or structural roof deck as indicated, and
extruded-aluminum carrier assemblies; suitable for quantity of pipe runs and sizes.
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
the following:
a.
2.
3.
4.
5.
B.
Thaler Metal USA Inc.
Pipe Support Height: As indicated on Drawings.
Roller Assembly: With stainless-steel roller, sized for supported pipes.
Pipe Support Flashing: Manufacturer's standard insulated sleeve flashing with integral
base flange; aluminum sheet, 0.063 inch (1.60 mm) thick.
Finish: Manufacturer's standard.
Duct Supports: Extruded-aluminum, urethane-insulated supports, 2 inches (50 mm) in
diameter; with manufacturer's recommended hardware for mounting to structure or structural
roof deck.
ROOF ACCESSORIES
077200 - 4
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
the following:
a.
2.
2.5
Thaler Metal USA Inc.
Finish: Manufacturer's standard.
GENERAL FINISH REQUIREMENTS
A.
Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for
recommendations for applying and designating finishes.
B.
Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable.
Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of
approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, to verify actual locations,
dimensions, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
B.
Verify that substrate is sound, dry, smooth, clean, sloped for drainage, and securely anchored.
C.
Verify dimensions of roof openings for roof accessories.
D.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2
INSTALLATION
A.
General: Install roof accessories according to manufacturer's written instructions.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Install roof accessories level, plumb, true to line and elevation, and without warping, jogs
in alignment, excessive oil canning, buckling, or tool marks.
Anchor roof accessories securely in place so they are capable of resisting indicated
loads.
Use fasteners, separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required to
complete installation of roof accessories and fit them to substrates.
Install roof accessories to resist exposure to weather without failing, rattling, leaking, or
loosening of fasteners and seals.
ROOF ACCESSORIES
077200 - 5
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
B.
Metal Protection: Protect metals against galvanic action by separating dissimilar metals from
contact with each other or with corrosive substrates by painting contact surfaces with
bituminous coating or by other permanent separation as recommended by manufacturer.
1.
2.
3.
Coat concealed side of uncoated aluminum roof accessories with bituminous coating
where in contact with wood, ferrous metal, or cementitious construction.
Underlayment: Where installing roof accessories directly on cementitious or wood
substrates, install a course of felt underlayment and cover with a slip sheet, or install a
course of polyethylene sheet.
Bed flanges in thick coat of asphalt roofing cement where required by manufacturers of
roof accessories for waterproof performance.
C.
Equipment Support Installation: Install equipment supports so top surfaces are level with each
other.
D.
Pipe Support Installation: Install pipe supports so top surfaces are in contact with and provide
equally distributed support along length of supported item.
E.
Seal joints with elastomeric sealant as required by roof accessory manufacturer.
3.3
REPAIR AND CLEANING
A.
Clean exposed surfaces according to manufacturer's written instructions.
B.
Clean off excess sealants.
C.
Replace roof accessories that have been damaged or that cannot be successfully repaired by
finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures.
END OF SECTION 077200
ROOF ACCESSORIES
077200 - 6
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
SECTION 078413 - PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Westchester County Healthcare
Corporation General Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes through-penetration firestop systems for penetrations through fireresistance-rated constructions, including both empty openings and openings containing
penetrating items in the following building elements.
1.
2.
B.
Related Sections include the following:
1.
1.3
Floors.
Walls and Partitions.
Applicable Sections of Divisions 1 thru 42.
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
General: For penetrations through the following fire-resistance-rated constructions, including
both empty openings and openings containing penetrating items, provide through-penetration
firestop systems that are produced and installed to resist spread of fire according to
requirements indicated, resist passage of smoke and other gases, and maintain original fireresistance rating of construction penetrated.
1.
2.
B.
Fire-resistance-rated walls including fire partitions and smoke barriers.
Fire-resistance-rated horizontal assemblies including floors assemblies.
Rated Systems: Provide through-penetration firestop systems with the following ratings
determined per UL 1479.
1.
2.
F-Rated Systems: Provide through-penetration firestop systems with F-ratings indicated,
but not less than that equaling or exceeding fire-resistance rating of constructions
penetrated.
T-Rated Systems: For the following conditions, provide through-penetration firestop
systems with T-ratings indicated, as well as F-ratings, where systems protect penetrating
items exposed to potential contact with adjacent materials in occupiable floor areas:
a.
b.
Penetrations located outside wall cavities.
Penetrations located outside fire-resistance-rated shaft enclosures.
PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING
078413 - 1
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
C.
For through-penetration firestop systems exposed to view, traffic, moisture, and physical
damage, provide products that, after curing, do not deteriorate when exposed to these
conditions both during and after construction.
1.
2.
3.
D.
1.4
For piping penetrations for plumbing and wet-pipe sprinkler systems, (provide moistureresistant) through-penetration firestop systems with W-ratings.
For floor penetrations with annular spaces exceeding 4 inches (100 mm) in width and
exposed to possible loading and traffic, provide firestop systems capable of supporting
floor loads involved, either by installing floor plates or by other means.
For penetrations involving insulated piping, provide through-penetration firestop systems
not requiring removal of insulation.
For through-penetration firestop systems exposed to view, provide products with flame-spread
and smoke-developed indexes of less than 25 and 450, respectively, as determined per
ASTM E 84.
REFERENCES
A.
Underwriters Laboratories (UL) of Northbrook, IL publishes tested systems in their "FIRE
RESISTANCE DIRECTORY" that is updated annually.
1.
UL Fire Resistance Directory:
a.
b.
c.
d.
Firestop Devices (XHJI)
Fire Resistance Ratings (BXRH)
Through-Penetration Firestop Systems (XHEZ)
Fill, Voids, or Cavity Material (XHHW)
Forming Materials (XHKU)
B.
International Firestop Council Guidelines for Evaluating Firestop Systems Engineering Judgments
C.
ASTM E 84, Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.
D.
NFPA 101 - Life Safety Code
E.
NFPA 70 - National Electric Code
F.
Inspection Requirements: ASTM E 2174, “Standard Practice for On-site Inspection of Installed Fire
Stops”
1.5
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B.
Shop Drawings: For each through-penetration firestop system, show each type of construction
condition penetrated, relationships to adjoining construction, and type of penetrating item.
PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING
078413 - 2
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
Include firestop design designation of qualified testing and inspecting agency that evidences
compliance with requirements for each condition indicated.
1.
C.
Submit documentation, including illustrations, from a qualified testing and inspecting
agency that is applicable to each through-penetration firestop system configuration for
construction and penetrating items.
Through-Penetration Firestop System Schedule: Indicate locations of each through-penetration
firestop system, along with the following information:
1.
2.
3.
Types of penetrating items.
Types of constructions penetrated, including fire-resistance ratings and, where
applicable, thicknesses of construction penetrated.
Through-penetration firestop systems for each location identified by firestop design
designation of qualified testing and inspecting agency.
D.
Qualification Data: For Installer.
E.
Product Certificates:
manufacturer.
1.6
For through-penetration firestop system products, signed by product
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Installer Qualifications: Acceptable installation to be performed by companies who have
successfully completed FM 4991 accreditation training, UL Qualified Contractor Program,
(training) or a Fire Stopping manufacturer’s accredited training program. Manufacturer's
willingness to sell its through-penetration firestop system products to Contractor or to Installer
engaged by Contractor does not in itself confer qualification on buyer.
B.
Installation Responsibility: Assign installation of through-penetration firestop systems in Project
to a single qualified installer.
C.
Source Limitations: Obtain through-penetration firestop systems, for each kind of penetration
and construction condition indicated, through one source from a single manufacturer.
D.
Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide through-penetration firestop systems that comply
with the following requirements and those specified in Part 1 "Performance Requirements"
Article:
1.
2.
Firestopping tests are performed by a qualified testing and inspecting agency. A qualified
testing and inspecting agency is UL, or another agency performing testing and follow-up
inspection services for firestop systems acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
Through-penetration firestop systems are identical to those tested per testing standard
referenced in "Part 1 Performance Requirements" Article. Provide rated systems
complying with the following requirements:
a.
Through-penetration firestop system products bear classification marking of
qualified testing and inspecting agency.
PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING
078413 - 3
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
b.
Through-penetration firestop systems correspond to those indicated by reference
to through-penetration firestop system designations listed by the following:
1)
E.
UL in its "Fire Resistance Directory."
Preinstallation Conference: Prior to start of installation of firestop systems, meet at a project
site with installers of other work affected or related to building envelope including mechanical
and electrical work.
1.7
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Deliver through-penetration firestop system products to Project site in original, unopened
containers or packages with intact and legible manufacturers' labels identifying product and
manufacturer, date of manufacture, lot number, shelf life if applicable, qualified testing and
inspecting agency's classification marking applicable to Project, curing time, and mixing
instructions for multicomponent materials.
B.
Store and handle materials for through-penetration firestop systems to prevent their
deterioration or damage due to moisture, temperature changes, contaminants, or other causes.
.
1.8
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Environmental Limitations: Do not install through-penetration firestop systems when ambient or
substrate temperatures are outside limits permitted by through-penetration firestop system
manufacturers or when substrates are wet due to rain, frost, condensation, or other causes.
B.
Ventilate through-penetration firestop systems per manufacturer's written instructions by natural
means or, where this is inadequate, forced-air circulation.
C.
Do not use materials that contain flammable solvents
D.
Weather conditions: Do not proceed with installation of firestop materials when temperatures
exceed the manufacturer's recommended limitations for installation printed on product label and
product data sheet
1.9
COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate construction of openings and penetrating items to ensure that through-penetration
firestop systems are installed according to specified requirements.
B.
Coordinate sizing of sleeves, openings, core-drilled holes, or cut openings to accommodate
through-penetration firestop systems.
C.
Notify Owner's inspecting agency at least seven days in advance of through-penetration firestop
system installations; confirm dates and times on days preceding each series of installations.
PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING
078413 - 4
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
D.
Do not cover up through-penetration firestop system installations that will become concealed
behind other construction until each installation has been examined by building inspector, if
required by authorities having jurisdiction.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, through-penetration firestop
systems that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, those systems
indicated in the Through-Penetration Firestop System.
B.
Available Manufacturers:
1.
2.
2.
3.
2.2
Hilti Inc.
Nelson Firestop Products
3M Fire Protection Products Tremco; Sealant/Weatherproofing Division.
Approved equal.
FIRESTOPPING, GENERAL
A.
Compatibility: Provide through-penetration firestop systems that are compatible with one
another; with the substrates forming openings; and with the items, if any, penetrating throughpenetration firestop systems, under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by
through-penetration firestop system manufacturer based on testing and field experience.
B.
Firestopping Materials are either “cast-in-place” (integral with concrete placement) or “post
installed.” Provide cast-in-place firestop devices prior to concrete placement
C.
Accessories: Provide components for each through-penetration firestop system that are
needed to install fill materials and to comply with Part 1 "Performance Requirements" Article.
Use only components specified by through-penetration firestop system manufacturer and
approved by qualified testing and inspecting agency for firestop systems indicated. Accessories
include, but are not limited to, the following items:
1.
Permanent forming/damming/backing materials, including the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
2.
3.
4.
Slag-/rock-Mineral wool fiber insulation.
Sealants used in combination with other forming/damming/backing materials to
prevent leakage of fill materials in liquid state.
Fire-rated form board.
Fillers for sealants.
Temporary forming materials.
Substrate primers.
Collars.
PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING
078413 - 5
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
5.
6.
2.3
Steel sleeves.
Cast in Place Firestop device.
FILL MATERIALS
A.
General: Provide through-penetration firestop systems containing the types of fill materials
indicated in the Through-Penetration Firestop System Schedule at the end of Part 3 by
referencing the types of materials described in this Article. Fill materials are those referred to in
directories of referenced testing and inspecting agencies as "fill," "void," or "cavity" materials.
B.
Cast-in-Place Firestop Devices: Factory-assembled devices for use in cast-in-place concrete
floors and consisting of an outer metallic sleeve lined with an intumescent strip, a radial
extended flange attached to one end of the sleeve for fastening to concrete formwork, and a
neoprene gasket.
C.
Latex Sealants: Single-component latex formulations that after cure do not re-emulsify during
exposure to moisture.
D.
Firestop Devices: Factory-assembled collars formed from galvanized steel and lined with
intumescent material sized to fit specific diameter of penetrant.
E.
Intumescent Composite Sheets: Rigid panels consisting of aluminum-foil-faced elastomeric
sheet bonded to galvanized steel sheet.
F.
Intumescent Putties: Nonhardening dielectric, water-resistant putties containing no solvents,
inorganic fibers, or silicone compounds.
G.
Intumescent Wrap Strips: Single-component intumescent elastomeric sheets with aluminum foil
on one side.
H.
Mortars: Prepackaged dry mixes consisting of a blend of inorganic binders, hydraulic cement,
fillers, and lightweight aggregate formulated for mixing with water at Project site to form a
nonshrinking, homogeneous mortar.
I.
Silicone Foams: Multicomponent, silicone-based liquid elastomers that, when mixed, expand
and cure in place to produce a flexible, nonshrinking foam.
J.
Silicone Sealants: Single-component, silicone-based, neutral-curing elastomeric sealants of
grade indicated below:
1.
2.
3.
Grade: Pourable (self-leveling) formulation for openings in floors and other horizontal
surfaces, and nonsag formulation for openings in vertical and other surfaces requiring a
nonslumping, gunnable sealant, unless indicated firestop system limits use to nonsag
grade for both opening conditions.
Grade for Horizontal Surfaces: Pourable (self-leveling) formulation for openings in floors
and other horizontal surfaces.
Grade for Vertical Surfaces: Nonsag formulation for openings in vertical and other
surfaces.
PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING
078413 - 6
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
2.4
MIXING
A.
For those products requiring mixing before application, comply with through-penetration firestop
system manufacturer's written instructions for accurate proportioning of materials, water (if
required), type of mixing equipment, selection of mixer speeds, mixing containers, mixing time,
and other items or procedures needed to produce products of uniform quality with optimum
performance characteristics for application indicated.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for
opening configurations, penetrating items, substrates, and other conditions affecting
performance of work.
1.
3.2
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
PREPARATION
A.
Surface Cleaning: Clean out openings immediately before installing through-penetration
firestop systems to comply with firestop system manufacturer's written instructions and with the
following requirements:
1.
2.
3.
Remove from surfaces of opening substrates and from penetrating items foreign
materials that could interfere with adhesion of through-penetration firestop systems.
Clean opening substrates and penetrating items to produce clean, sound surfaces
capable of developing optimum bond with through-penetration firestop systems. Remove
loose particles remaining from cleaning operation.
Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete.
B.
Priming: Prime substrates where recommended in writing by through-penetration firestop
system manufacturer using that manufacturer's recommended products and methods. Confine
primers to areas of bond; do not allow spillage and migration onto exposed surfaces.
C.
Masking Tape: Use masking tape to prevent through-penetration firestop systems from
contacting adjoining surfaces that will remain exposed on completion of Work and that would
otherwise be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods used to
remove smears from firestop system materials. Remove tape as soon as possible without
disturbing firestop system's seal with substrates.
PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING
078413 - 7
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
3.3
THROUGH-PENETRATION FIRESTOP SYSTEM INSTALLATION
A.
General: Install through-penetration firestop systems to comply with Part 1 "Performance
Requirements" Article and with firestop system manufacturer's written installation instructions
and published drawings for products and applications indicated.
B.
Regulatory Requirements:
Directory.
C.
Manufacturer's Instructions: Comply with manufacturer's instructions for installation of throughpenetration materials.
1.
2.
3.
3.4
Install firestop materials in accordance with UL Fire Resistance
Seal all holes or voids made by penetrations to ensure an air and water resistant seal.
Consult with mechanical engineer, project manager, and damper manufacturer prior to
installation of UL firestop systems that might hamper the performance of fire dampers as it
pertains to duct work.
Protect materials from damage on surfaces subjected to traffic.
IDENTIFICATION
A.
Identify through-penetration firestop systems with preprinted metal or plastic labels. Attach
labels permanently to surfaces adjacent to and within 6 inches (150 mm) of edge of the firestop
systems so that labels will be visible to anyone seeking to remove penetrating items or firestop
systems. Use mechanical fasteners for metal labels. For plastic labels, use self-adhering type
with adhesives capable of permanently bonding labels to surfaces on which labels are placed
and, in combination with label material, will result in partial destruction of label if removal is
attempted. Include the following information on labels:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
3.5
The words "Warning - Through-Penetration Firestop System - Do Not Disturb. Notify
Building Management of Any Damage."
Contractor's name, address, and phone number.
Through-penetration firestop system designation of applicable testing and inspecting
agency.
Date of installation.
Through-penetration firestop system manufacturer's name.
Installer's name.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Inspecting Agency: Owner will engage a qualified, independent inspecting agency to inspect
through-penetration firestops. Independent inspecting agency shall comply with ASTM E 2174
requirements including those related to qualifications, conducting inspections, and preparing
test reports.
B.
Where deficiencies are found, repair or replace through-penetration firestop systems so they
comply with requirements.
PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING
078413 - 8
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
C.
3.6
Proceed with enclosing through-penetration firestop systems with other construction only after
inspection reports are issued and firestop installations comply with requirements.
CLEANING AND PROTECTING
A.
Clean off excess fill materials adjacent to openings as Work progresses by methods and with
cleaning materials that are approved in writing by through-penetration firestop system
manufacturers and that do not damage materials in which openings occur.
B.
Provide final protection and maintain conditions during and after installation that ensure that
through-penetration firestop systems are without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial
Completion. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, cut out and remove
damaged or deteriorated through-penetration firestop systems immediately and install new
materials to produce systems complying with specified requirements.
3.7
THROUGH-PENETRATION FIRESTOP SYSTEM SCHEDULE
A.
General: All piping, ductwork, conduits, and penetrations extending through any vertical or
horizontal wall or floor surface in a laboratory space shall be sealed and fire stopped.
B.
For penetrations by non-combustible items including steel pipe, copper pipe, rigid steel conduit
and electrical metallic tubing (EMT), the following materials are acceptable:
1.
2.
3.
4.
C.
For fire-rated construction joints and other gaps, the following materials are acceptable:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
D.
Hilti FS One Intumescent Sealant
Hilti CP 606 Acrylic Sealant
3M Fire Stop Sealant 2000
3M Fire Barrier CP25 WB
Hilti CP 672 Speed Spray / CF-SB WB Firestop Spray
Hilti CP 606 Acrylic Sealant
Hilti 601 S Silicone Sealant
Hilti CP 604 Self Leveling Silicone Sealant
Nelson FSC3 Spray
Nelson ES1399 Sealant
3M Firestop Sealant 2000.
For penetrations by combustible items (penetrants consumed by high heat and flame) including
insulated metal pipe, PVC jacketed, flexible cable or cable bundles and plastic pipe (closed
piping systems), the following materials are acceptable:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Hilti FS One Intumescent Sealant
Nelson ES1399 Sealant
3M Fire Barrier CP5 WB
3M Fire Barrier FS-195 Wrap/Strip
PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING
078413 - 9
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
E.
For penetrations by combustible plastic pipe (open piping systems), the following materials are
acceptable:
1.
2.
3.
F.
Hilti FS One Intumescent Sealant
Nelson ES1399 Sealant
3M Fire Barrier PPD Plastic Pipe Device
For large size/complex penetrations made to accommodate cable trays, multiple steel and
copper pipes, electrical busways in raceways, the following materials are acceptable:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Hilti FS 657 Fire Block
Hilti FS 675 Fire Board
Hilti FS One Intumescent Sealant
Hilti CP 637 FS Mortar
Nelson FSC3 Spray
Nelson ES1399 Sealant
3M Fire Barrier CP 25 WB
END OF SECTION 078413
PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING
078413 - 10
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
SECTION 079200 - JOINT SEALANTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
B.
Related Sections:
1.
2.
3.
1.3
Silicone joint sealants.
Urethane joint sealants.
Preformed joint sealants.
Acoustical joint sealants.
Special Note: All penetrations through any wall, ceiling, or floor surface in BSL Laboratory
Rooms (18 A, B, C) shall be fully sealed (silicone) to prevent the passage of air or water.
Division 9 Section "Gypsum Board" for sealing perimeter joints.
Division 9 Section "Ceramic Tile" for sealing tile joints.
Division 9 Section "Acoustical Panel Ceilings" for sealing edge moldings at perimeters
with acoustical sealants.
PRECONSTRUCTION TESTING
A.
1.4
Preconstruction Testing will not be required if joint-sealant manufacturers submit joint
preparation data that are based on previous testing, not older than 24 months, of sealant
products for adhesion to, and compatibility with, joint substrates and other materials matching
those submitted.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each joint-sealant product indicated.
B.
Samples for Verification: For each kind and color of joint sealant required, provide Samples
with joint sealants in 1/2-inch- (13-mm-) wide joints formed between two 6-inch- (150-mm-) long
strips of material matching the appearance of exposed surfaces adjacent to joint sealants.
C.
Joint-Sealant Schedule: Include the following information:
JOINT SEALANTS
079200 - 1
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
1.
2.
3.
4.
Joint-sealant application, joint location, and designation.
Joint-sealant manufacturer and product name.
Joint-sealant formulation.
Joint-sealant color.
D.
Qualification Data: For qualified Installer.
E.
Product Certificates: For each kind of joint sealant and accessory, from manufacturer.
F.
Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified
testing agency, indicating that sealants comply with requirements.
G.
Preconstruction Field-Adhesion Test Reports: Indicate which sealants and joint preparation
methods resulted in optimum adhesion to joint substrates based on testing specified in
"Preconstruction Testing" Article.
H.
Field-Adhesion Test Reports: For each sealant application tested.
I.
Warranties: Sample of special warranties.
1.5
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained and approved
for installation of units required for this Project.
B.
Source Limitations:
manufacturer.
C.
Product Testing: Test joint sealants using a qualified testing agency.
1.
D.
1.6
Obtain each kind of joint sealant from single source from single
Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency qualified according to
ASTM C 1021 to conduct the testing indicated.
Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants under the following conditions:
1.
2.
3.
4.
When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by jointsealant manufacturer.
When joint substrates are wet.
Where joint widths are less than those allowed by joint-sealant manufacturer for
applications indicated.
Where contaminants capable of interfering with adhesion have not yet been removed
from joint substrates.
JOINT SEALANTS
079200 - 2
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
1.7
WARRANTY
A.
Special Installer's Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which Installer agrees to repair or
replace joint sealants that do not comply with performance and other requirements specified in
this Section within specified warranty period.
1.
B.
Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion.
Special Manufacturer's Warranty:
Manufacturer's standard form in which joint-sealant
manufacturer agrees to furnish joint sealants to repair or replace those that do not comply with
performance and other requirements specified in this Section within specified warranty period.
1.
Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS, GENERAL
A.
Compatibility: Provide joint sealants, backings, and other related materials that are compatible
with one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and application, as
demonstrated by joint-sealant manufacturer, based on testing and field experience.
B.
Liquid-Applied Joint Sealants: Comply with ASTM C 920 and other requirements indicated for
each liquid-applied joint sealant specified, including those referencing ASTM C 920
classifications for type, grade, class, and uses related to exposure and joint substrates.
C.
Stain-Test-Response Characteristics: Where sealants are specified to be nonstaining to porous
substrates, provide products that have undergone testing according to ASTM C 1248 and have
not stained porous joint substrates indicated for Project.
D.
Colors of Exposed Joint Sealants: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
2.2
SILICONE JOINT SEALANTS
A.
Single-Component, Nonsag, Neutral-Curing Silicone Joint Sealant:
Grade NS, Class 100/50, for Use NT.
1.
ASTM C 920, Type S,
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following.
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
JOINT SEALANTS
Dow Corning Corporation;790.
GE Advanced Materials - Silicones; SilPruf LM SCS2700.
Pecora Corporation; 301 NS.
Sika Corporation, Construction Products Division; SikaSil-C990.
Tremco Incorporated; Spectrem 1.
079200 - 3
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
B.
Mildew-Resistant, Single-Component, Nonsag, Neutral-Curing
ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, for Use NT.
1.
Joint
Sealant:
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a.
b.
2.3
Silicone
Pecora Corporation; 898.
Approved equal.
URETHANE JOINT SEALANTS
A.
Single-Component, Nonsag, Urethane Joint Sealant:
Class 50, for Use NT.
1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a.
b.
c.
B.
Pacific Polymers International, Inc.; Elasto-Thane 230 LM Type II.
Polymeric Systems, Inc.; PSI-901.
Approved equal.
Single-Component, Nonsag, Traffic-Grade, Urethane Joint Sealant:
Grade NS, Class 25, for Use T.
1.
ASTM C 920.
Type S,
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
2.4
ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS,
BASF Building Systems; Sonolastic NP1.
May National Associates, Inc.; Bondaflex PUR 40 FC.
Pacific Polymers International, Inc.; Elasto-Thane 230 Type II.
Sika Corporation, Construction Products Division; Sikaflex - 1a.
Tremco Incorporated; Vulkem 116.
PREFORMED JOINT SEALANTS
A.
Preformed Foam Joint Sealant: Manufacturer's standard preformed, precompressed, open-cell
foam sealant manufactured from urethane foam with minimum density of 10 lb/cu. ft. (160 kg/cu.
m) and impregnated with a nondrying, water-repellent agent.
Factory produce in
precompressed sizes in roll or stick form to fit joint widths indicated; coated on one side with a
pressure-sensitive adhesive and covered with protective wrapping.
1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
JOINT SEALANTS
Dayton Superior Specialty Chemicals; Polytite Standard.
EMSEAL Joint Systems, Ltd.; Emseal 25V.
Sandell Manufacturing Co., Inc.; Polyseal.
Schul International, Inc.; Sealtite.
Willseal USA, LLC; Willseal 150.
079200 - 4
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
2.5
ACOUSTICAL JOINT SEALANTS
A.
Acoustical Joint Sealant: Manufacturer's standard nonsag, paintable, nonstaining latex sealant
complying with ASTM C 834. Product effectively reduces airborne sound transmission through
perimeter joints and openings in building construction as demonstrated by testing representative
assemblies according to ASTM E 90.
1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a.
b.
2.6
Pecora Corporation; AC-20 FTR.
USG Corporation; SHEETROCK Acoustical Sealant.
JOINT SEALANT BACKING
A.
General: Provide sealant backings of material that are nonstaining; are compatible with joint
substrates, sealants, primers, and other joint fillers; and are approved for applications indicated
by sealant manufacturer based on field experience and laboratory testing.
B.
Cylindrical Sealant Backings:
ASTM C 1330, As approved in writing by joint-sealant
manufacturer for joint application indicated, and of size and density to control sealant depth and
otherwise contribute to producing optimum sealant performance.
C.
Bond-Breaker Tape: Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape recommended by sealant
manufacturer for preventing sealant from adhering to rigid, inflexible joint-filler materials or joint
surfaces at back of joint. Provide self-adhesive tape where applicable.
2.7
MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A.
Primer: Material recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer where required for adhesion of
sealant to joint substrates indicated, as determined from preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate
tests and field tests.
B.
Cleaners for Nonporous Surfaces: Chemical cleaners acceptable to manufacturers of sealants
and sealant backing materials, free of oily residues or other substances capable of staining or
harming joint substrates and adjacent nonporous surfaces in any way, and formulated to
promote optimum adhesion of sealants to joint substrates.
C.
Masking Tape: Nonstaining, nonabsorbent material compatible with joint sealants and surfaces
adjacent to joints.
JOINT SEALANTS
079200 - 5
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine joints indicated to receive joint sealants, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements for joint configuration, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting jointsealant performance.
B.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2
PREPARATION
A.
Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealants to
comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions and the following requirements:
1.
2.
Remove all foreign material from joint substrates that could interfere with adhesion of
joint sealant, including dust, paints (except for permanent, protective coatings tested and
approved for sealant adhesion and compatibility by sealant manufacturer), old joint
sealants, oil, grease, waterproofing, water repellents, water, surface dirt, and frost.
Clean porous joint substrate surfaces by brushing, grinding, mechanical abrading, or a
combination of these methods to produce a clean, sound substrate capable of developing
optimum bond with joint sealants. Remove loose particles remaining after cleaning
operations above by vacuuming or blowing out joints with oil-free compressed air.
Porous joint substrates include the following:
a.
b.
c.
3.
4.
Concrete.
Masonry.
Unglazed surfaces of ceramic tile.
Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete.
Clean nonporous joint substrate surfaces with chemical cleaners or other means that do
not stain, harm substrates, or leave residues capable of interfering with adhesion of joint
sealants. Nonporous joint substrates include the following:
a.
b.
c.
Metal.
Glass.
Glazed surfaces of ceramic tile.
B.
Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates where recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer or as
indicated by preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests or prior experience. Apply primer to
comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions. Confine primers to areas of jointsealant bond; do not allow spillage or migration onto adjoining surfaces.
C.
Masking Tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant or primer with
adjoining surfaces that otherwise would be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or
by cleaning methods required to remove sealant smears. Remove tape immediately after
tooling without disturbing joint seal.
JOINT SEALANTS
079200 - 6
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
3.3
INSTALLATION OF JOINT SEALANTS
A.
General: Comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written installation instructions for products
and applications indicated, unless more stringent requirements apply.
B.
Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with recommendations in ASTM C 1193 for use of joint
sealants as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated.
C.
Install sealant backings of kind indicated and approved bu the sealant manufacturer to support
sealants during application and at position required to produce cross-sectional shapes and
depths of installed sealants relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement
capability.
1.
2.
3.
Do not leave gaps between ends of sealant backings.
Do not stretch, twist, puncture, or tear sealant backings.
Remove absorbent sealant backings that have become wet before sealant application
and replace them with dry materials.
D.
Install bond-breaker tape behind sealants where sealant backings are not used between
sealants and backs of joints.
E.
Install sealants using proven techniques that comply with the following and at the same time
backings are installed:
1.
2.
3.
F.
Place sealants so they directly contact and fully wet joint substrates.
Completely fill recesses in each joint configuration.
Produce uniform, cross-sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths that allow
optimum sealant movement capability.
Tooling of Nonsag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and before skinning or
curing begins, tool sealants according to requirements specified in subparagraphs below to form
smooth, uniform beads of configuration indicated; to eliminate air pockets; and to ensure
contact and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Remove excess sealant from surfaces adjacent to joints.
Use tooling agents that are approved in writing by sealant manufacturer and that do not
discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces.
Provide concave joint profile per Figure 8A in ASTM C 1193, unless otherwise indicated.
Provide flush joint profile where indicated per Figure 8B in ASTM C 1193.
Provide recessed joint configuration of recess depth and at locations indicated per
Figure 8C in ASTM C 1193.
a.
G.
Use masking tape to protect surfaces adjacent to recessed tooled joints.
Installation of Preformed Foam Sealants: Install each length of sealant immediately after
removing protective wrapping. Do not pull or stretch material. Produce seal continuity at ends,
turns, and intersections of joints. For applications at low ambient temperatures, apply heat to
sealant in compliance with sealant manufacturer's written instructions.
JOINT SEALANTS
079200 - 7
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
H.
3.4
Acoustical Sealant Installation: At sound-rated assemblies and elsewhere as indicated, seal
construction at perimeters, behind control joints, and at openings and penetrations with a
continuous bead of acoustical sealant. Install acoustical sealant at both faces of partitions at
perimeters and through penetrations. Comply with ASTM C 919 and with manufacturer's
written recommendations.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Owner will test for the following:
1.
Test Method: Test joint sealants according to Method A, Field-Applied Sealant Joint
Hand Pull Tab, in Appendix X1 in ASTM C 1193 or Method A, Tail Procedure, in
ASTM C 1521.
a.
b.
c.
2.
B.
3.5
Whether sealants filled joint cavities and are free of voids.
Whether sealant dimensions and configurations comply with specified
requirements.
Whether sealants in joints connected to pulled-out portion failed to adhere to joint
substrates or tore cohesively. Include data on pull distance used to test each kind
of product and joint substrate. Compare these results to determine if adhesion
passes sealant manufacturer's field-adhesion hand-pull test criteria.
Record test results in a field-adhesion-test log. Include dates when sealants were
installed, names of persons who installed sealants, test dates, test locations, whether
joints were primed, adhesion results and percent elongations, sealant fill, sealant
configuration, and sealant dimensions.
Evaluation of Field-Adhesion Test Results: Sealants not evidencing adhesive failure from
testing or noncompliance with other indicated requirements will be considered satisfactory.
Remove sealants that fail to adhere to joint substrates during testing or to comply with other
requirements. Retest failed applications until test results prove sealants comply with indicated
requirements.
CLEANING
A.
3.6
Clean off excess sealant or sealant smears adjacent to joints as the Work progresses by
methods and with cleaning materials approved in writing by manufacturers of joint sealants and
of products in which joints occur.
PROTECTION
A.
Protect joint sealants during and after curing period from contact with contaminating substances
and from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so sealants are without
deterioration or damage at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage
or deterioration occurs, cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated joint sealants immediately
so installations with repaired areas are indistinguishable from original work.
JOINT SEALANTS
079200 - 8
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
3.7
JOINT-SEALANT SCHEDULE
A.
Joint-Sealant Application: Exterior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces.
1.
Joint Locations:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
2.
3.
B.
Silicone Joint Sealant: Single component, nonsag, neutral curing, Class 100/50.
Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors.
Joint-Sealant Application:
nontraffic surfaces.
1.
2.
Construction joints in cast-in-place concrete.
Other joints as indicated.
Preformed foam sealant.
Joint-Sealant Application: Interior joints in horizontal traffic surfaces:
1.
Joint Locations:
a.
b.
c.
d.
2.
3.
D.
Exterior and interior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal
Joint Locations:
a.
b.
C.
Joints between metal panels.
Joints between different materials listed above.
Perimeter joints between materials listed above and frames.
Control and expansion joints.
Other joints as indicated.
Isolation joints in cast-in-place concrete slabs.
Control and expansion joints in stone flooring.
Control and expansion joints in tile flooring.
Other joints as indicated.
Urethane Joint Sealant: Single component, nonsag, traffic grade.
Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors.
Joint-Sealant Application: Interior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces:
1.
Joint Locations:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
JOINT SEALANTS
Control and expansion joints on exposed interior surfaces of exterior walls.
Perimeter joints of exterior openings where indicated.
Tile control and expansion joints.
Vertical joints on exposed surfaces of interior unit masonry and partitions.
Perimeter joints between interior wall surfaces and frames of interior doors,
windows and elevator entrances.
Other joints as indicated.
079200 - 9
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
2.
3.
E.
Joint Sealant: Latex.
Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors.
Joint-Sealant Application:
nontraffic surfaces.
1.
Joint Sealant Location:
a.
b.
c.
2.
3.
F.
Mildew-resistant interior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal
Joints between plumbing fixtures and adjoining walls, floors, and counters.
Tile control and expansion joints where indicated.
Other joints as indicated.
Joint Sealant: Mildew resistant, single component, nonsag, neutral curing, Silicone.
Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors.
Joint-Sealant Application: Interior acoustical joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic
surfaces:
1.
Joint Location:
a.
b.
2.
3.
Acoustical joints where indicated.
Other joints as indicated.
Joint Sealant: Acoustical.
Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
END OF SECTION 079200
JOINT SEALANTS
079200 - 10
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
SECTION 081113 - HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
2.
3.
B.
Related Sections:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
C.
Standard and custom hollow metal doors and frames.
Steel sidelight, borrowed lite and transom frames.
Light frames and glazing installed in hollow metal doors.
Division 04 Section "Unit Masonry" for embedding anchors for hollow metal work into
masonry construction.
Division 08 Section "Clad Wood Doors”.
Division 08 Section "Glazing" for glass view panels in hollow metal doors.
Division 08 Section "Door Hardware".
Division 09 Sections "Exterior Painting" and "Interior Painting" for field painting hollow
metal doors and frames.
Division 26 "Electrical" Sections for electrical connections including conduit and wiring for
door controls and operators installed on frames with factory installed electrical knock out
boxes.
Division 28 Section "Access Control" for access control devices installed at door
openings and provided as part of a security access control system.
Codes and References: Comply with the version year adopted by the Authority Having
Jurisdiction.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
ANSI/SDI A250.8 - Recommended Specifications for Standard Steel Doors and Frames.
ANSI/SDI A250.4 - Test Procedure and Acceptance Criteria for Physical Endurance for
Steel Doors, Frames, Frames Anchors and Hardware Reinforcing.
ANSI/SDI A250.6 - Recommended Practice for Hardware Reinforcing on Standard Steel
Doors and Frames.
ANSI/SDI A250.10 - Test Procedure and Acceptance Criteria for Prime Painted Steel
Surfaces for Steel Doors and Frames.
ANSI/SDI A250.11 - Recommended Erection Instructions for Steel Frames.
ANSI/SDI A250.13 - Testing and Rating of Severe Windstorm Resistant Components for
Swing Door Assemblies.
ASTM A1008 - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Cold-Rolled, Carbon, Structural,
High-Strength Low-Alloy and High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved Formability.
HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
081113 - 1
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
22.
1.3
ASTM A653 - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or ZincIron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process.
ASTM A924 - Standard Specification for General Requirements for Steel Sheet, MetallicCoated by the Hot-Dip Process.
ASTM C 1363 - Standard Test Method for Thermal Performance of Building Assemblies by
Means of a Hot Box Apparatus.
ASTM E283 - Standard Test Method for Determining Rate of Air Leakage Through Exterior
Doors Under Specified Pressure Differences Across the Specimens.
ASTM E330 - Standard Test Method for Structural Performance of Exterior Windows,
Curtain Walls, and Doors by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference.
ANSI/BHMA A156.15 - Hardware Preparation in Steel Doors and Frames.
ANSI/SDI 122 - Installation and Troubleshooting Guide for Standard Steel Doors and
Frames.
ANSI/NFPA 80 - Standard for Fire Doors and Fire Windows; National Fire Protection
Association.
ANSI/NFPA 105: Standard for the Installation of Smoke Door Assemblies.
NFPA 252 - Standard Methods of Fire Tests of Door Assemblies; National Fire Protection
Association.
TAS-201-94 - Impact Test Procedures.
TAS-202-94 - Criteria for Testing Impact and Non-Impact Resistant Building Envelope
Components using Uniform Static Air Pressure.
TAS-203-94 - Criteria for Testing Products Subject to Cyclic Wind Pressure Loading.
UL 10C - Positive Pressure Fire Tests of Door Assemblies.
UL 1784 - Standard for Air Leakage Tests of Door Assemblies.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material
descriptions, core descriptions, hardware reinforcements, profiles, anchors, fire-resistance
rating, and finishes.
B.
Door hardware supplier is to furnish templates, template reference number and/or physical
hardware to the steel door and frame supplier in order to prepare the doors and frames to
receive the finish hardware items.
C.
Shop Drawings: Include the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
D.
Elevations of each door design.
Details of doors, including vertical and horizontal edge details and metal thicknesses.
Frame details for each frame type, including dimensioned profiles and metal thicknesses.
Locations of reinforcement and preparations for hardware.
Details of anchorages, joints, field splices, and connections.
Details of accessories.
Details of moldings, removable stops, and glazing.
Details of conduit and preparations for power, signal, and control systems.
Samples for Verification:
HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
081113 - 2
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
1.
E.
Samples are only required by request of the architect and for manufacturers that are not
current members of the Steel Door Institute.
Informational Submittals:
1.
Hurricane Resistant Openings (all exterior openings thus): Exterior (hurricane) opening
assemblies to be tested according to ASTM E330, ASTM E1886, ASTM E1996 standards,
and certified by a qualified independent third party testing agency acceptable to authority
having jurisdiction, with labeling indicating compliance with the wind load and design
pressure level requirements specified for the Project.
2.
Hurricane Resistant Openings: Provide copy of current State of Florida Product Approval or
Metro-Dade County Notice of Acceptance (NOA) as proof of compliance that doors, frames
and hardware for exterior opening assemblies have been tested and approved for use at
the wind load and design pressure level requirements specified for the Project.
a.
1.4
Hurricane Resistant Components: Provide copy of independent, third-party certified
listing conforming to ANSI A250.13.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Source Limitations: Obtain hollow metal doors and frames through one source from a single
manufacturer wherever possible.
B.
Quality Standard: In addition to requirements specified, comply with ANSI/SDI A250.8, latest
edition, "Recommended Specifications for Standard Steel Doors and Frames".
C.
Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by
a qualified testing agency, for fire-protection ratings indicated, based on testing at positive
pressure according to NFPA 252 (neutral pressure at 40” above sill) or UL 10C.
1.
2.
3.
Oversize Fire-Rated Door Assemblies Construction: For units exceeding sizes of tested
assemblies, attach construction label certifying doors are built to standard construction
requirements for tested and labeled fire rated door assemblies except for size.
Temperature-Rise Limit: Where indicated and at vertical exit enclosures (stairwell
openings) and exit passageways, provide doors that have a maximum transmitted
temperature end point of not more than 450 deg F (250 deg C) above ambient after 30
minutes of standard fire-test exposure.
Smoke Control Door Assemblies: Comply with NFPA 105.
a.
D.
Smoke "S" Label: Doors to bear “S” label, and include smoke and draft control
gasketing applied to frame and on meeting stiles of pair doors.
Fire-Rated, Borrowed-Light Frame Assemblies: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are
listed and labeled, by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction, for fire-protection ratings indicated, based on testing according to NFPA 257.
Provide labeled glazing material.
HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
081113 - 3
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
E.
Hurricane Resistant Exterior Openings: Provide exterior hollow metal doors and frames as
complete and tested assemblies, or component assemblies, including approved hardware
specified under Section 087100 "Door Hardware", to meet the wind loads, design pressures,
debris impact resistance, and glass and glazing requirements applicable to the Project.
1.
F.
Hurricane Resistant Exterior Openings (High Velocity Hurricane Zone (HVHZ): Provide exterior
hollow metal doors and frames as complete and tested assemblies, or component assemblies,
including approved hardware specified under Section 087100 "Door Hardware", to meet the
wind loads, design pressures, debris impact resistance, and glass and glazing requirements as
detailed in the current State of Florida building code sections applicable to the Project.
1.
G.
1.5
Test units according to ASTM E330, ASTM E1886, ASTM E1996 standards, certified by a
qualified independent third party testing agency acceptable to authority having jurisdiction,
and bearing a third party certification agency permanent label indicting windstorm approved
product.
Each unit to bear third party permanent label in accordance with Florida Building Code
requirements.
Pre-Submittal Conference: Conduct conference in compliance with requirements in Division 01
Section "Project Meetings" with attendance by representatives of Supplier, Installer, and
Contractor to review proper methods and procedures for installing hollow metal doors and
frames and to verify installation of electrical knockout boxes and conduit at frames with
electrified or access control hardware.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Deliver hollow metal work palletized, wrapped, or crated to provide protection during transit and
Project site storage. Do not use non-vented plastic.
B.
Deliver welded frames with two removable spreader bars across bottom of frames, tack welded
to jambs and mullions.
C.
Store hollow metal work under cover at Project site. Place in stacks of five units maximum in a
vertical position with heads up, spaced by blocking, on minimum 4-inch high wood blocking. Do
not store in a manner that traps excess humidity.
1.
1.6
Provide minimum 1/4-inch space between each stacked door to permit air circulation.
Door and frames to be stacked in a vertical upright position.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Field Measurements: Verify actual dimensions of openings by field measurements before
fabrication.
HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
081113 - 4
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
1.7
COORDINATION
A.
1.8
Coordinate installation of anchorages for hollow metal frames. Furnish setting drawings,
templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor
bolts, and items with integral anchors. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation.
WARRANTY
A.
Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or
replace doors that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.
B.
Warranty includes installation and finishing that may be required due to repair or replacement of
defective doors.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1.
2.
3.
2.2
CECO Door Products.
Curries Company.
Steelcraft.
MATERIALS
A.
Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; suitable for
exposed applications.
B.
Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; with
minimum G90 (Z180) or A60 (ZF180) metallic coating for use in coastal zones.
C.
Frame Anchors: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Commercial Steel (CS), Commercial Steel (CS), Type B;
with minimum G60 (Z180) or A60 (ZF180) metallic coating.
2.3
STANDARD HOLLOW METAL DOORS
A.
General: Provide 1-3/4 inch doors of design indicated, not less than thickness indicated;
fabricated with smooth surfaces, without visible joints or seams on exposed faces unless
otherwise indicated. Comply with ANSI/SDI A250.8.
B.
Exterior Doors: Face sheets fabricated of commercial quality hot-dipped zinc coated steel that
complies with ASTM A 653/A 653M, Coating Designation G90. Provide doors complying with
HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
081113 - 5
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
requirements indicated below by referencing ANSI/SDI A250.8 for level and model and
ANSI/SDI A250.4 for physical performance level:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
C.
Design: Flush panel.
Core Construction: Manufacturer's standard polystyrene. Where indicated, provide doors
fabricated as thermal-rated assemblies with a minimum R-value of 2.8 or better.
Level/Model: Level 3 and Physical Performance Level A (Extra Heavy Duty), Minimum 16
gauge (0.053-inch - 1.3-mm) thick steel, Model 2.
Vertical Edges: Vertical edges to have the face sheets joined by a continuous weld
extending the full height of the door. Welds are to be ground, filled and dressed smooth.
Beveled Lock Edge, 1/8 inch in 2 inches (3 mm in 50 mm).
Top and Bottom Edges: Reinforce tops and bottoms of doors with a continuous steel
channel not less than 16 gauge, extending the full width of the door and welded to the
face sheet. Doors with an inverted top channel to include a steel closure channel, screw
attached, with the web of the channel flush with the face sheets of the door. Plastic or
composite channel fillers are not acceptable.
Hinge Reinforcement: Minimum 7 gauge (3/16") plate 1-1/4" x 9" or minimum 14 gauge
continuous channel with pierced holes, drilled and tapped.
Hardware Reinforcements: Fabricate according to ANSI/SDI A250.6 with reinforcing
plates from same material as door face sheets.
Interior Doors: Face sheets fabricated of commercial quality hot-dipped zinc coated steel that
complies with ASTM A 653/A 653M, Coating Designation A60. Provide doors complying with
requirements indicated below by referencing ANSI/SDI A250.8 for level and model and
ANSI/SDI A250.4 for physical performance level:
1.
2.
Design: Flush panel.
Core Construction: Manufacturer's standard kraft-paper honeycomb, or one-piece
polystyrene core, securely bonded to both faces.
a.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
D.
Fire Door Core: As required to provide fire-protection and temperature-rise ratings
indicated.
Level/Model: Level 2 and Physical Performance Level B (Heavy Duty), Minimum 18 gauge
(0.042-inch - 1.0-mm) thick steel, Model 2.
Vertical Edges: Vertical edges to have the face sheets joined by a continuous weld
extending the full height of the door. Welds are to be ground, filled and dressed smooth.
Beveled Lock Edge, 1/8 inch in 2 inches (3 mm in 50 mm).
Top and Bottom Edges: Reinforce tops and bottoms of doors with a continuous steel
channel not less than 16 gauge, extending the full width of the door and welded to the
face sheet.
Hinge Reinforcement: Minimum 7 gauge (3/16") plate 1-1/4" x 9" or minimum 14 gauge
continuous channel with pierced holes, drilled and tapped.
Hardware Reinforcements: Fabricate according to ANSI/SDI A250.6 with reinforcing
plates from same material as door face sheets.
Manufacturers Basis of Design:
1.
Curries Company 707T Series.
HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
081113 - 6
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
2.4
STANDARD HOLLOW METAL FRAMES
A.
General: Comply with ANSI/SDI A250.8 and with details indicated for type and profile.
B.
Exterior Frames: Fabricated of hot-dipped zinc coated steel that complies with ASTM
A 653/A 653M, Coating Designation A60.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Fabricate frames with mitered or coped corners.
Fabricate frames with "closed and tight" miter seams continuously welded on face,
finished smooth with no visible seam unless otherwise indicated.
Frames for Doors (up to 48 inches in width): Minimum 14 gauge (0.067-inch -1.7-mm)
thick steel sheet.
Manufacturers Basis of Design:
a.
b.
C.
Curries Company M/G Series.
Approved equal.
Interior Frames: Fabricated
ASTM A 1008/A 1008M.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
from
cold-rolled
steel
sheet
that
complies
with
Fabricate frames with mitered or coped corners.
Fabricate frames with "closed and tight" miter seams continuously welded on face,
finished smooth with no visible seam unless otherwise indicated.
Frames for openings (up to 48 inches in width): Minimum 16 gauge (0.053-inch -1.3-mm)
thick steel sheet.]
Frames for openings (48 inches and up in width): Minimum 14 gauge (0.067-inch -1.7mm) thick steel sheet.]
Frames for Borrowed Lights: Minimum 16 gauge (0.053-inch-1.3-mm-) thick steel sheet.
Manufacturers Basis of Design:
a.
b.
Curries Company M/G Series (Masonry Profile).
Approved equal.
D.
Fire rated frames: Fabricate frames in accordance with NFPA 80, listed and labeled by a
qualified testing agency, for fire-protection ratings indicated.
E.
Hardware Reinforcement: Fabricate according to ANSI/SDI A250.6 Table 4 with reinforcement
plates from same material as frames.
2.5
FRAME ANCHORS
A.
Jamb Anchors:
1.
2.
Masonry Type: Adjustable strap-and-stirrup or T-shaped anchors to suit frame size,
formed from A60 metallic coated material, not less than 0.042 inch thick, with corrugated
or perforated straps not less than 2 inches wide by 10 inches long; or wire anchors not
less than 0.177 inch thick.
Stud Wall Type: Designed to engage stud and not less than 0.042 inch thick.
HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
081113 - 7
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
3.
Windstorm Opening Anchors: Types as tested and required for indicated wall types to meet
specified wind load design criteria.
B.
Floor Anchors: Floor anchors to be provided at each jamb, formed from A60 metallic coated
material, not less than 0.042 inches thick.
C.
Mortar Guards: Formed from same material as frames, not less than 0.016 inches thick.
2.6
LIGHT OPENINGS AND GLAZING
A.
Stops and Moldings: Provide stops and moldings around glazed lites where indicated. Form
corners of stops and moldings with butted or mitered hairline joints at fabricator’s shop. Fixed
and removable stops to allow multiple glazed lites each to be removed independently.
Coordinate frame rabbet widths between fixed and removable stops with the type of glazing and
installation indicated.
B.
Moldings for Glazed Lites in Doors and Loose Stops for Glazed Lites in Frames: Minimum 20
gauge thick, fabricated from same material as door face sheet in which they are installed.
C.
Fixed Frame Moldings: Formed integral with hollow metal frames, a minimum of 5/8 inch (16
mm) high unless otherwise indicated. Provide fixed frame moldings and stops on outside of
exterior and on secure side of interior doors and frames
D.
Preformed Metal Frames for Light Openings: Manufacturer's standard frame formed of 0.048inch-thick, cold rolled steel sheet; with baked enamel or powder coated finish; and approved for
use in doors of fire protection rating indicated. Match pre-finished door paint color where
applicable.
E.
Glazing: Comply with requirements in Division 08 Section "Glazing" and with the hollow metal
door manufacturer's written instructions.
1.
2.7
Factory Glazing: Factory install glazing in doors as indicated. Doors with factory installed
glass to include all of the required glazing material.
ACCESSORIES
A.
Mullions and Transom Bars: Join to adjacent members by welding or rigid mechanical anchors.
B.
Grout Guards: Formed from same material as frames, not less than 0.016 inches thick.
2.8
FABRICATION
A.
Fabricate hollow metal work to be rigid and free of defects, warp, or buckle. Accurately form
metal to required sizes and profiles, with minimum radius for thickness of metal. Where
practical, fit and assemble units in manufacturer's plant. When shipping limitations so dictate,
frames for large openings are to be fabricated in sections for splicing or splining in the field by
others.
HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
081113 - 8
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
B.
Tolerances: Fabricate hollow metal work to tolerances indicated in ANSI/SDI A250.8.
C.
Hollow Metal Doors:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
D.
Exterior Doors: Provide optional weep-hole openings in bottom of exterior doors to permit
moisture to escape where specified.
Glazed Lites: Factory cut openings in doors with applied trim or kits to fit. Factory install
glazing where indicated.
Astragals: Provide overlapping astragals as noted in door hardware sets in Division 08
Section "Door Hardware" on one leaf of pairs of doors where required by NFPA 80 for fireperformance rating or where indicated. Extend minimum 3/4 inch beyond edge of door on
which astragal is mounted.
Continuous Hinge Reinforcement: Provide welded continuous 12 gauge strap for
continuous hinges specified in hardware sets in Division 08 Section "Door Hardware".
Electrical Raceways: Provide hollow metal doors to receive electrified hardware with
concealed wiring harness and standardized Molex™ plug connectors on both ends to
accommodate up to twelve wires. Coordinate connectors on end of the wiring harness to
plug directly into the electrified hardware and the through-wire transfer hardware or wiring
harness specified in hardware sets in Division 08 Sections "Door Hardware" and "Access
Control Hardware". Wire nut connections are not acceptable.
Hollow Metal Frames:
1.
2.
Shipping Limitations: Where frames are fabricated in sections due to shipping or handling
limitations, provide alignment plates or angles at each joint, fabricated of same thickness
metal as frames.
Welded Frames: Weld flush face joints continuously; grind, fill, dress, and make smooth,
flush, and invisible.
a.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Welded frames are to be provided with two steel spreaders temporarily attached to
the bottom of both jambs to serve as a brace during shipping and handling.
Spreader bars are for bracing only and are not to be used to size the frame
opening.
Sidelight and Transom Bar Frames: Provide closed tubular members with no visible face
seams or joints, fabricated from same material as door frame. Fasten members at
crossings and to jambs by butt welding.
High Frequency Hinge Reinforcement: Provide high frequency hinge reinforcements at
door openings 48-inches and wider with mortise butt type hinges at top hinge locations.
Continuous Hinge Reinforcement: Provide welded continuous 12 gauge straps for
continuous hinges specified in hardware sets in Division 08 Section "Door Hardware".
Provide countersunk, flat- or oval-head exposed screws and bolts for exposed fasteners
unless otherwise indicated for removable stops, provide security screws at exterior
locations.
Mortar Guards: Provide guard boxes at back of hardware mortises in frames at all hinges
and strike preps regardless of grouting requirements.
Electrical Knock Out Boxes: Factory weld 18 gauge electrical knock out boxes to frame
for electrical hardware preps; including but not limited to, electric through wire transfer
hardware, electrical raceways and wiring harnesses, door position switches, electric
HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
081113 - 9
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
strikes, magnetic locks, and jamb mounted card readers as specified in hardware sets in
Division 08 Sections "Door Hardware" and "Access Control Hardware".
a.
b.
c.
d.
9.
10.
Provide electrical knock out boxes with a dual 1/2-inch and 3/4-inch knockouts.
Conduit to be coordinated and installed in the field (Division 26) from middle hinge
box and strike box to door position box.
Electrical knock out boxes to comply with NFPA requirements and fit electrical
door hardware as specified in hardware sets in Division 08 Section "Door
Hardware".
Electrical knock out boxes for continuous hinges should be located in the center of
the vertical dimension on the hinge jamb.
Floor Anchors: Weld anchors to bottom of jambs and mullions with at least four spot
welds per anchor.
Jamb Anchors: Provide number and spacing of anchors as follows:
a.
Masonry Type: Locate anchors not more than 18 inches from top and bottom of
frame. Space anchors not more than 32 inches o.c. and as follows:
1)
2)
3)
4)
b.
Two anchors per jamb up to 60 inches high.
Three anchors per jamb from 60 to 90 inches high.
Four anchors per jamb from 90 to 120 inches high.
Four anchors per jamb plus 1 additional anchor per jamb for each 24 inches
or fraction thereof above 120 inches high.
Stud Wall Type: Locate anchors not more than 18 inches from top and bottom of
frame. Space anchors not more than 32 inches o.c. and as follows:
1)
2)
3)
4)
11.
12.
E.
Three anchors per jamb up to 60 inches high.
Four anchors per jamb from 60 to 90 inches high.
Five anchors per jamb from 90 to 96 inches high.
Five anchors per jamb plus 1 additional anchor per jamb for each 24 inches
or fraction thereof above 96 inches high.
5)
Two anchors per head for frames above 42 inches wide and mounted in
metal stud partitions.
Door Silencers: Except on weatherstripped or gasketed doors, drill stops to receive door
silencers. Silencers to be supplied by frame manufacturer regardless if specified in
Division 08 Section "Door Hardware".
Bituminous Coating: Where frames are fully grouted with an approved Portland Cement
based grout or mortar, coat inside of frame throat with a water based bituminous or
asphaltic emulsion coating to a minimum thickness of 3 mils DFT, tested in accordance
with UL 10C and applied to the frame under a 3rd party independent follow-up service
procedure.
Hardware Preparation: Factory prepare hollow metal work to receive template mortised
hardware; include cutouts, reinforcement, mortising, drilling, and tapping according to the Door
Hardware Schedule and templates furnished as specified in Division 08 Section "Door
Hardware."
HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
081113 - 10
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
1.
2.
3.
4.
2.9
Locate hardware as indicated, or if not indicated, according to ANSI/SDI A250.8.
Reinforce doors and frames to receive non-template, mortised and surface mounted door
hardware.
Comply with applicable requirements in ANSI/SDI A250.6 and ANSI/DHI A115 Series
specifications for preparation of hollow metal work for hardware.
Coordinate locations of conduit and wiring boxes for electrical connections with
Division 26 Sections.
STEEL FINISHES
A.
Prime Finishes: Doors and frames to be cleaned, and chemically treated to insure maximum
finish paint adhesion. Surfaces of the door and frame exposed to view to receive a factory
applied coat of rust inhibiting shop primer.
1.
Shop Primer: Manufacturer's standard, fast-curing, lead and chromate free primer
complying with ANSI/SDI A250.10 acceptance criteria; recommended by primer
manufacturer for substrate; and compatible with substrate and field-applied coatings.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
B.
General Contractor to verify the accuracy of dimensions given to the steel door and frame
manufacturer for existing openings or existing frames (strike height, hinge spacing, hinge back
set, etc.).
C.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2
PREPARATION
A.
Remove welded in shipping spreaders installed at factory. Restore exposed finish by grinding,
filling, and dressing, as required to make repaired area smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed
faces.
B.
Prior to installation, adjust and securely brace welded hollow metal frames for squareness,
alignment, twist, and plumbness.
C.
Tolerances shall comply with SDI-117 "Manufacturing Tolerances Standard Steel Doors and
Frames."
D.
Drill and tap doors and frames to receive non-template, mortised, and surface-mounted door
hardware.
HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
081113 - 11
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
3.3
INSTALLATION
A.
General: Install hollow metal work plumb, rigid, properly aligned, and securely fastened in place;
comply with Drawings and manufacturer's written instructions.
B.
Hollow Metal Frames: Install hollow metal frames of size and profile indicated. Comply with
ANSI/SDI A250.11 and NFPA 80 at fire rated openings.
1.
Set frames accurately in position, plumbed, aligned, and braced securely until permanent
anchors are set. After wall construction is complete and frames properly set and secured,
remove temporary braces, leaving surfaces smooth and undamaged. Shim as necessary to
comply with installation tolerances.
2.
Floor Anchors: Provide floor anchors for each jamb and mullion that extends to floor, and
secure with post-installed expansion anchors.
Masonry Walls: Coordinate installation of frames to allow for solidly filling space between
frames and masonry with mortar.
Grout Requirements: Do not grout head of frames unless reinforcing has been installed in
head of frame. Do not grout vertical or horizontal closed mullion members.
3.
4.
C.
Hollow Metal Doors: Fit hollow metal doors accurately in frames, within clearances specified
below. Shim as necessary.
1.
Non-Fire-Rated Standard Steel Doors:
a.
b.
c.
d.
2.
D.
3.4
Jambs and Head: 1/8 inch plus or minus 1/16 inch.
Between Edges of Pairs of Doors: 1/8 inch plus or minus 1/16 inch.
Between Bottom of Door and Top of Threshold: Maximum 3/8 inch.
Between Bottom of Door and Top of Finish Floor (No Threshold): Maximum 3/4
inch.
Fire-Rated Doors: Install doors with clearances according to NFPA 80.
Field Glazing: Comply with installation requirements in Division 08 Section "Glazing" and with
hollow metal manufacturer's written instructions.
ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A.
Final Adjustments: Check and readjust operating hardware items immediately before final
inspection. Leave work in complete and proper operating condition. Remove and replace
defective work, including hollow metal work that is warped, bowed, or otherwise unacceptable.
B.
Remove grout and other bonding material from hollow metal work immediately after installation.
C.
Prime-Coat and Painted Finish Touchup: Immediately after erection, sand smooth rusted or
damaged areas of prime coat, or painted finishes, and apply touchup of compatible air drying,
rust-inhibitive primer, zinc rich primer (exterior and galvanized openings) or finish paint.
HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
081113 - 12
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
END OF SECTION 081113
HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
081113 - 13
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
SECTION 081416 - FLUSH WOOD DOORS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
2.
3.
B.
Related Requirements:
1.
2.
3.
1.3
Solid-core doors with plastic-laminate faces.
Factory finishing flush wood doors.
Factory fitting flush wood doors to frames and factory machining for hardware.
Section 062023 "Interior Finish Carpentry" for door frames.
Section 081113 "Hollow Metal Doors and Frames".
Section 088000 "Glazing" for glass view panels in flush wood doors.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of door. Include details of core and edge construction, louvers, and
trim for openings. Include factory-finishing specifications.
B.
Shop Drawings: Indicate location, size, and hand of each door; elevation of each kind of door;
construction details not covered in Product Data; and the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Dimensions and locations of blocking.
Dimensions and locations of mortises and holes for hardware.
Dimensions and locations of cutouts.
Undercuts.
Requirements for veneer matching.
Doors to be factory finished and finish requirements.
Fire-protection ratings for fire-rated doors.
C.
Samples for Initial Selection: For plastic-laminate door faces.
D.
Samples for Verification:
1.
Factory finishes applied to actual door face materials, approximately 8 by 10 inches (200
by 250 mm), for each material and finish.
FLUSH WOOD DOORS
081416 - 1
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
2.
3.
Plastic laminate, 6 inches (150 mm) square, for each color, texture, and pattern selected.
Corner sections of doors, approximately 8 by 10 inches (200 by 250 mm), with door faces
and edges representing actual materials to be used.
a.
4.
5.
1.4
Provide Samples for each color, texture, and pattern of plastic laminate required.
Louver blade and frame sections, 6 inches (150 mm) long, for each material and finish
specified.
Frames for light openings, 6 inches (150 mm) long, for each material, type, and finish
required.
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A.
Sample Warranty: For special warranty.
B.
Quality Standard Compliance Certificates: AWI Quality Certification Program certificates.
1.5
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Manufacturer Qualifications: A qualified manufacturer that is a certified participant in AWI's
Quality Certification Program.
B.
Vendor Qualifications: A vendor that is certified for chain of custody by an FSC-accredited
certification body.
1.6
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Comply with requirements of referenced standard and manufacturer's written instructions.
B.
Package doors individually in cardboard cartons and wrap bundles of doors in plastic sheeting.
C.
Mark each door on top and bottom rail with opening number used on Shop Drawings.
1.7
FIELD CONDITIONS
A.
Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install doors until spaces are enclosed and
weathertight, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, and HVAC system is operating and
maintaining ambient temperature and humidity conditions at occupancy levels during remainder
of construction period.
B.
Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install doors until spaces are enclosed and
weathertight, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, and HVAC system is operating and
maintaining temperature between 60 and 90 deg F (16 and 32 deg C) and relative humidity
between 25 and 55 percent during remainder of construction period.
FLUSH WOOD DOORS
081416 - 2
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
1.8
WARRANTY
A.
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace doors that fail in materials or
workmanship within specified warranty period.
1.
Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:
a.
b.
2.
3.
Warping (bow, cup, or twist) more than 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) in a 42-by-84-inch (1067by-2134-mm) section.
Telegraphing of core construction in face veneers exceeding 0.01 inch in a 3-inch
(0.25 mm in a 76.2-mm) span.
Warranty shall also include installation and finishing that may be required due to repair or
replacement of defective doors.
Warranty Period for Solid-Core Interior Doors: Life of installation.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
2.2
Algoma Hardwoods, Inc.
Ampco.
Chappell Door Co.
Eggers Industries.
Graham Wood Doors; an Assa Abloy Group company.
Marlite.
Mohawk Doors; a Masonite company.
Oshkosh Door Company.
VT Industries, Inc.
Basis of Design: 303H, PC-20-HPDL-3 Particleboard Core/ 20 Minute
FLUSH WOOD DOORS, GENERAL
A.
Quality Standard: In addition to requirements specified, comply with WDMA I.S.1-A,
"Architectural Wood Flush Doors."
B.
WDMA I.S.1-A Performance Grade: Heavy Duty.
C.
WDMA I.S.1-A Performance Grade:
1.
D.
Heavy Duty unless otherwise indicated.
Particleboard-Core Doors:
FLUSH WOOD DOORS
081416 - 3
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
1.
2.
Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade LD-2, made with binder containing no ureaformaldehyde.
Blocking: Provide wood blocking in particleboard-core doors asneeded to eliminate
through-bolting hardware.
a.
b.
c.
3.
E.
Provide doors with structural-composite-lumber cores instead of particleboard cores for
doors indicated to receive exit devices.
Structural-Composite-Lumber-Core Doors:
1.
Structural Composite Lumber: WDMA I.S.10.
a.
b.
2.3
5-inch (125-mm) top-rail blocking, in doors indicated to have closers.
5-inch (125-mm) bottom-rail blocking, in exterior doors and doors indicated to have
kick, mop, or armor plates.
5-inch (125-mm) midrail blocking, in doors indicated to have exit devices.
Screw Withdrawal, Face: 700 lbf (3100 N).
Screw Withdrawal, Edge: 400 lbf (1780 N).
PLASTIC-LAMINATE-FACED DOORS
A.
Interior Solid-Core Doors:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
B.
Grade: Premium.
Plastic-Laminate Faces: High-pressure decorative laminates complying with NEMA LD 3,
Grade HGS.
Colors, Patterns, and Finishes: As selected by Architect from laminate manufacturer's
full range of products. (Wood Grain Laminate)
Exposed Vertical and Top Edges: Plastic laminate that matches faces, applied before
faces.
Core: Particleboard.
Construction: Three plies. Stiles and rails are bonded to core, then entire unit is abrasive
planed before faces are applied.[ Faces are bonded to core using a hot press.]
WDMA I.S.1-A Performance Grade: Extra Heavy Duty.
Interior Hollow-Core Doors: For Sliding Closet Doors Only.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Grade: Premium.
Plastic-Laminate Faces: High-pressure decorative laminates complying with NEMA LD 3,
Grade HGS.
Colors, Patterns, and Finishes: As selected by Architect from laminate manufacturer's
full range of products.
Exposed Vertical[and Top] Edges: Plastic laminate that matches faces, applied before
faces.
WDMA I.S.1-A Performance Grade: Heavy Duty.
FLUSH WOOD DOORS
081416 - 4
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
2.4
LIGHT FRAMES AND LOUVERS
A.
Metal Louvers:
1.
General: Typical at all toilet room doors (4 thus)
2.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
3.
4.
5.
2.5
Air Louvers, Inc.
Anemostat; a Mestek company.
L & L Louvers, Inc.
Louvers & Dampers, Inc.; a division of Mestek, Inc.
McGill Architectural Products.
Blade Type: Vision-proof, inverted V.
Metal and Finish: Hot-dip galvanized steel, 0.040 inch (1.0 mm) thick, with bakedenamel- or powder-coated finish.
Metal and Finish: Extruded aluminum with light bronze, Class II, color anodic finish, AAM12C22A32/A34.
FABRICATION
A.
Factory fit doors to suit frame-opening sizes indicated. Comply with clearance requirements of
referenced quality standard for fitting unless otherwise indicated.
1.
B.
Factory machine doors for hardware that is not surface applied. Locate hardware to comply with
DHI-WDHS-3. Comply with final hardware schedules, door frame Shop Drawings, BHMA156.115-W, and hardware templates.
1.
C.
Comply with NFPA 80 requirements for fire-rated doors.
Coordinate with hardware mortises in metal frames to verify dimensions and alignment
before factory machining.
Openings: Factory cut and trim openings through doors.
1.
2.
3.
Light Openings: Trim openings with moldings of material and profile indicated.
Glazing: Factory install glazing in doors indicated to be factory finished. Comply with
applicable requirements in Section 088000 "Glazing."
Louvers: Factory install louvers in prepared openings.
FLUSH WOOD DOORS
081416 - 5
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine doors and installed door frames, with Installer present, before hanging doors.
1.
2.
B.
3.2
Verify that installed frames comply with indicated requirements for type, size, location,
and swing characteristics and have been installed with level heads and plumb jambs.
Reject doors with defects.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
INSTALLATION
A.
Hardware: For installation, see Section 087100 "Door Hardware."
B.
Installation Instructions: Install doors to comply with manufacturer's written instructions and
referenced quality standard, and as indicated.
1.
2.
C.
Install fire-rated doors according to NFPA 80.
Install smoke- and draft-control doors according to NFPA 105.
Job-Fitted Doors: Align and fit doors in frames with uniform clearances and bevels as indicated
below; do not trim stiles and rails in excess of limits set by manufacturer or permitted for firerated doors. Machine doors for hardware. Seal edges of doors, edges of cutouts, and mortises
after fitting and machining.
1.
Clearances: Provide 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) at heads, jambs, and between pairs of doors.
Provide 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) from bottom of door to top of decorative floor finish or covering
unless otherwise indicated. See Door Schedule for vision light and undercut
requirements.
a.
b.
2.
3.3
Comply with NFPA 80 for fire-rated doors.
2. Bevel non-fire-rated doors 1/8 inch in 2 inches (3-1/2 degrees) at lock and hinge
edges.
Bevel fire-rated doors 1/8 inch in 2 inches (3-1/2 degrees) at lock edge; trim stiles and
rails only to extent permitted by labeling agency.
ADJUSTING
A.
Operation: Rehang or replace doors that do not swing or operate freely.
B.
Finished Doors: Replace doors that are damaged or that do not comply with requirements.
Doors may be repaired or refinished if Work complies with requirements and shows no evidence
of repair or refinishing.
FLUSH WOOD DOORS
081416 - 6
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
END OF SECTION 081416
FLUSH WOOD DOORS
081416 - 7
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
SECTION 081423 - CLAD WOOD DOORS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
2.
3.
B.
Related Sections:
1.
2.
3.
4.
C.
Division 08 Section "Hollow Metal Doors and Frames" for clad wood doors in steel
frames.
Division 08 Section "Glazing" for glass view panels in wood doors.
Division 08 Sections "Door Hardware" and "Access Control Hardware" for door hardware
for clad wood doors.
Division 28 Section "Access Control" for access control devices installed at door
openings and provided as part of a security access system.
Standards and References: Comply with the version year adopted by the Authority Having
Jurisdiction.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
1.3
Flush solid core low pressure clad.
Factory fitting clad wood doors to frames and factory machining for hardware.
Light frames and glazing installed in clad wood doors.
ANSI A208.1 - Particleboard.
Intertek Testing Service (ITS Warnock Hersey) - Certification Listings for Fire Doors.
NFPA 80 - Standard for Fire Doors and Fire Windows; National Fire Protection
Association.
NFPA 252 - Standard Methods of Fire Tests of Door Assemblies; National Fire Protection
Association.
UL 10C - Positive Pressure Fire Tests of Door Assemblies; UL 1784 - Standard for Air
Leakage Tests of Door Assemblies.
Window and Door Manufacturers Association - WDMA I.S.1-A Architectural Wood Flush
Doors.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of door indicated. Include details of core and edge
construction, louvers, trim for openings, and WDMA I.S.1-A or AWS classifications.
CLAD WOOD DOORS
081423 - 1
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
B.
Door hardware supplier is to furnish templates, template reference number and/or physical
hardware to the clad door supplier in order to prepare the doors and frames to receive the finish
hardware items.
C.
Shop Drawings: Indicate location, size, and hand of each door; elevation of each kind of door;
construction details not covered in Product Data; location and extent of hardware blocking; and
other pertinent data.
1.
2.
3.
D.
Samples for Initial Selection: For decorative laminate door faces.
1.
2.
3.
E.
1.4
Indicate dimensions and locations of mortises and holes for hardware.
Indicate dimensions and locations of cutouts.
Indicate fire protection ratings for fire rated doors.
Decorative laminate, 8 by 10 inches, for each color and pattern selected.
Corner sections of doors, 5 x 11 inches, with door faces and edges representing actual
materials to be used.
Frames for light openings, 6 inches long, for each material, type, and finish required.
Warranty: Sample of special warranties.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Source Limitations: Obtain clad wood doors through one source from a single manufacturer
wherever possible.
B.
Quality Standard: In addition to requirements specified, comply with WDMA I.S.1-A, latest
edition, "Industry Standard for Architectural Wood Flush Doors." and the following minimum
values (for particle core doors):
1.
2.
3.
4.
C.
NWWDA TM-7 Cycle Slam Test: 1,000,000 cycles.
NWWDA TM-8 Hinge Loading Test 1,000 lbs.
NWWDA TM-10 Edge Screw Holding Test 850 lbs.
NWWDA TM-10 Face Screw Holding Test 650 lbs.
Fire Rated Wood Doors: Doors complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a testing
and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire ratings indicated,
based on testing at positive pressure according to NFPA 252 (neutral pressure at 40” above sill)
or UL 10C.
1.
2.
3.
Oversize Fire Rated Door Assemblies: For units exceeding sizes of tested assemblies
provide manufacturer’s construction label, indicating compliance to independent 3rd party
certification agency’s procedure, except for size.
Temperature Rise Limit: Where indicated and at vertical exit enclosures (stairwell
openings) and exit passageways, provide doors that have a maximum transmitted
temperature end point of not more than 450 deg F (250 deg C) above ambient after 30
minutes of standard fire test exposure.
Smoke Control Door Assemblies: Comply with NFPA 105.
CLAD WOOD DOORS
081423 - 2
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
1)
4.
Smoke "S" Label: Doors to bear “S” label, and include smoke and draft
control gasketing applied to frame and on meeting stiles of pair doors.
Blocking: When through-bolts are not to be used, indicate size and location of blocking in
45, 60 and 90 minute mineral core doors
D.
Security Rating for Particle Core Doors: ASTM F 476, Grade 40.
E.
Pre-Submittal Conference: Conduct conference in compliance with requirements in Division 01
Section "Project Meetings" with attendance by representatives of Supplier, Installer, and
Contractor to review proper methods and procedures for receiving, handling, and installing clad
wood doors.
1.5
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Comply with requirements of referenced standard and manufacturer's written instructions.
B.
Package clad wood doors individually in plastic bags or cardboard cartons and wrap bundles of
doors in plastic sheeting.
C.
Mark each door on top rail with opening number used on Shop Drawings.
1.6
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
1.7
Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install doors until spaces are enclosed and
weathertight, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, and HVAC system is operating and
maintaining ambient temperature and humidity conditions at occupancy levels during the
remainder of the construction period.
WARRANTY
A.
Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or
replace doors that fail in materials or workmanship within the specified warranty period.
1.
Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:
a.
b.
2.
3.
Warping (bow, cup, or twist) more than 1/4 inch in a 42-by-84-inch section.
Delaminating of face in decorative laminate faced doors.
Warranty includes installation that may be required due to repair or replacement of
defective doors.
Warranty Period for Solid Core Interior Doors: Life of installation according to
manufacturer's written warranty.
CLAD WOOD DOORS
081423 - 3
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
DOOR CONSTRUCTION, GENERAL
A.
WDMA I.S.1-A Performance Grade: Extra Heavy Duty; Aesthetic Grade: Premium.
B.
Particleboard Core Doors:
1.
2.
3.
C.
Mineral Core Doors:
1.
2.
3.
D.
Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade M-2.
Wood Stiles and Rails: As required to meet Extra Heavy Duty Performance level.
Blocking: As required to meet Extra Heavy Duty Performance level.
Core: Non-combustible mineral product complying with requirements of referenced
quality standard and testing and inspecting agency for fire protection rating indicated.
Blocking: Provide composite blocking with improved screw holding capability approved
for use in doors of fire protection ratings indicated as needed to eliminate through-bolting
hardware.
Edge Construction: At hinge stiles, provide laminated edge construction with improved
screw holding capability and split resistance with outer stile matching polymer edging.
Fire Rated Doors: Provide construction and core specified above as needed to provide fire
ratings indicated.
1.
Category A Edge Construction: Provide fire rated door edge construction with
intumescent seals concealed by outer stile (Category A). Comply with specified
requirements for exposed edges.
2.
Pairs: Provide fire retardant stiles that are listed and labeled for applications indicated
without formed steel edges and astragals. Provide stiles with concealed intumescent
seals. Comply with specified requirements for exposed edges.
a.
2.2
Where required or specified, provide formed steel edges and astragals with
intumescent seals. Finish steel edges and astragals with baked enamel.
LOW PRESSURE DECORATIVE LAMINATE (LPDL) FACED DOORS
A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1.
B.
The Maiman Company – Thermal Fused.
Low Pressure Decorative Laminate (LPDL) Thermal Fused Faces:
CLAD WOOD DOORS
081423 - 4
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
1.
Low pressure decorative laminates faces thermally fused to cores under heat and
pressure, complying with Laminating Materials Association’s Product Standard and
Typical Physical Properties of Decorative Overlays. LMA.2003.
2.
Color or Wood Grain Pattern:
a.
Huntington Maple 7929
C.
Exposed Edges: Impact resistant polymer edging, minimum .040” thick, applied to all four edges
after faces.
D.
Polymer Edging Color or Wood Grain Pattern: Manufacturer's standard color that most closely
matches faces.
E.
Provide doors with pilot holes factory drilled for vertical edge hinges and lock sets.
F.
Where continuous hinges are specified, provide coarse thread particle board screws designed
for use in dense wood.
2.3
LIGHT FRAMES AND GLAZING
A.
Wood Beads for Light Openings in Wood Doors up to and including 20-minute rating:
1.
Wood Species: Manufacturer's standard wood beads factory finished to match door face.
2.
Profile: Manufacturer’s standard lipped profile. At wood core doors with 20-minute fire
protection ratings, provide wood beads and metal glazing clips approved for such use
B.
Metal Frames for Light Openings in Fire Rated Doors over 20-minute rating: Manufacturer's
standard frame formed of 0.048-inch-thick, cold rolled steel sheet; with baked enamel or powder
coated finish; and approved for use in doors of fire protection rating indicated.
C.
Glazing: Comply with installation requirements in Division 08 Section "Glazing" and with the
flush wood door manufacturer's written instructions.
2.4
FABRICATION
A.
Factory fit doors to suit frame opening sizes indicated. Comply with clearance requirements of
referenced quality standard for fitting unless otherwise indicated.
1.
B.
Comply with requirements in NFPA 80 for fire rated doors.
Factory machine doors for hardware that is not surface applied. Comply with final hardware
schedules, door frame Shop Drawings, DHI A115-W series standards, and hardware templates.
1.
Coordinate with hardware mortises in metal frames to verify dimensions and alignment
before factory machining.
CLAD WOOD DOORS
081423 - 5
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
2.
C.
Openings: Cut and trim openings through doors in factory.
1.
2.
3.
D.
Metal Astragals: Factory machine astragals and formed steel edges for hardware for
pairs of fire rated doors.
Light Openings: Trim openings with moldings of material and profile indicated.
Glazing: Comply with applicable requirements in Division 08 Section "Glazing."
Louvers: Factory install louvers in prepared openings.
Electrical Raceways: Provide clad wood doors receiving electrified hardware with concealed
wiring harness and standardized Molex™ plug connectors on both ends to accommodate up to
twelve wires. Coordinate connectors on end of the wiring harness to plug directly into the
electrified hardware and the through wire transfer hardware or wiring harness specified in
hardware sets in Division 08 "Door Hardware". Wire nut connections are not acceptable.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine doors and installed door frames before hanging doors.
1.
2.
B.
3.2
Verify that frames comply with indicated requirements for type, size, location, and swing
characteristics and have been installed with level heads and plumb jambs.
Reject doors with defects.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
INSTALLATION
A.
Hardware: For installation, see Division 8 Section "Door Hardware."
B.
Installation Instructions: Install doors to comply with manufacturer's written instructions and the
referenced quality standard, and as indicated.
1.
C.
3.3
Install fire rated doors in corresponding fire rated frames according to NFPA 80.
Factory Fitted Doors: Align in frames for uniform clearance at each edge.
ADJUSTING
A.
Operation: Re-hang or replace doors that do not swing or operate freely.
B.
Replace doors that do not comply with requirements. Doors may be repaired if work complies
with requirements and shows no evidence of repair or refinishing.
CLAD WOOD DOORS
081423 - 6
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
END OF SECTION 081423
CLAD WOOD DOORS
081423 - 7
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
SECTION 083113 - ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
2.
B.
Related Requirements:
1.
1.3
Access doors and frames for walls and ceilings.
Floor access doors and frames.
Division 9 Section Gypsum Board.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product.
1.
B.
Include construction details, fire ratings, materials, individual components and profiles,
and finishes.
Shop Drawings:
1.
2.
Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.
Detail fabrication and installation of access doors and frames for each type of substrate.
C.
Samples: For each door face material, at least 3 by 5 inches (75 by 125 mm) in size, in
specified finish.
D.
Product Schedule: Provide complete access door and frame schedule, including types,
locations, sizes, latching or locking provisions, and other data pertinent to installation.
ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES
083113 - 1
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
Fire-Rated Access Doors and Frames: Units complying with NFPA 80 that are identical to
access door and frame assemblies tested for fire-test-response characteristics according to the
following test method and that are listed and labeled by UL or another testing and inspecting
agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction:
1.
2.
2.2
NFPA 252 or UL 10B for fire-rated access door assemblies installed vertically.
NFPA 288 for fire-rated access door assemblies installed horizontally.
ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES FOR WALLS AND CEILINGS
A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Access Panel Solutions.
Babcock-Davis.
Jensen Industries; Div. of Broan-Nutone, LLC.
J. L. Industries, Inc.; Div. of Activar Construction Products Group.
Karp Associates, Inc.
Larsen's Manufacturing Company.
Milcor Inc.
Nystrom, Inc.
B.
Source Limitations: Obtain each type of access door and frame from single source from single
manufacturer.
C.
Flush Access Doors with Concealed Flanges
1.
2.
Assembly Description: Fabricate door to fit flush to frame. Provide frame with gypsum
board beads for concealed flange installation.
Locations: Wall locations.
3.
Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet for Door: Nominal 0.064 inch (1.63 mm), 16 gage.
a.
4.
5.
6.
D.
Finish: Factory prime.
Frame Material: Same material and thickness as door.
Hinges: Manufacturer's standard.
Hardware: Latch.
Fire-Rated, Flush Access Doors with Concealed Flanges
1.
Assembly Description: Fabricate door to fit flush to frame, with a core of mineral-fiber
insulation enclosed in sheet metal. Provide self-latching door with automatic closer and
ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES
083113 - 2
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
2.
3.
4.
interior latch release. Provide frame with gypsum board beads for concealed flange
installation.
Locations: Wall locations
Fire-Resistance Rating: Not less than that of adjacent construction.
Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet for Door: Nominal 0.040 inch (1.02 mm), 20 gage.
a.
E.
Hardware:
1.
2.3
Finish: Factory prime.
Latch: Cam latch operated by screwdriver.
FLOOR ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES
A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Babcock-Davis.
Bilco Company (The).
Karp Associates, Inc.
Milcor Inc.
Nystrom, Inc.
U.S.F. Fabrication.
B.
Floor Doors, General: Equip each door with adjustable counterbalancing springs, heavy-duty
hold-open arm that automatically locks door open at 90 degrees, release handle with red vinyl
grip that allows for one-handed closure, and recessed lift handle.
C.
Steel Angle-Frame Floor Door: Double-leaf opening. Prime-painted structural steel frame with
1/4-inch- (6.4-mm-) thick, diamond-pattern, prime-painted structural steel tread plate door;
nonwatertight; loading capacity to support 150-lbf/sq. ft. (7.2-kN/sq. m) pedestrian live load.
D.
Hardware: Provide the following:
1.
2.
3.
2.4
Hinges: Heavy-duty, stainless-steel butt hinges with stainless-steel pins.
Latch: Stainless-steel slam latch.
Lock: Recessed hasp.
MATERIALS
A.
Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.
B.
Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; with
minimum G60 (Z180) or A60 (ZF180) metallic coating.
C.
Frame Anchors: Same type as door face.
ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES
083113 - 3
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
D.
2.5
Inserts, Bolts, and Anchor Fasteners:
ASTM A 153/A 153M or ASTM F 2329.
Hot-dip
galvanized
steel
according
to
FABRICATION
A.
General: Provide access door and frame assemblies manufactured as integral units ready for
installation.
B.
Metal Surfaces: For metal surfaces exposed to view in the completed Work, provide materials
with smooth, flat surfaces without blemishes. Do not use materials with exposed pitting, seam
marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, or roughness.
C.
Doors and Frames: Grind exposed welds smooth and flush with adjacent surfaces. Furnish
attachment devices and fasteners of type required to secure access doors to types of supports
indicated.
1.
2.
3.
D.
2.6
For concealed flanges with drywall bead, provide edge trim for gypsum board securely
attached to perimeter of frames.
Provide mounting holes in frames for attachment of units to metal or wood framing.
Provide mounting holes in frame for attachment of masonry anchors.
Latching Mechanisms: Furnish number required to hold doors in flush, smooth plane when
closed.
FINISHES
A.
Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for
recommendations for applying and designating finishes.
B.
Steel and Metallic-Coated-Steel Finishes:
1.
Factory Prime: Apply manufacturer's standard, fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free,
universal primer immediately after surface preparation and pretreatment.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine substrates for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other
conditions affecting performance of the Work.
B.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES
083113 - 4
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
3.2
INSTALLATION
A.
Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing access doors and frames.
B.
Install doors flush with adjacent finish surfaces or recessed to receive finish material.
3.3
ADJUSTING
A.
Adjust doors and hardware, after installation, for proper operation.
B.
Remove and replace doors and frames that are warped, bowed, or otherwise damaged.
END OF SECTION 083113
ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES
083113 - 5
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
SECTION 084213 - ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
2.
3.
1.3
Exterior manual-swing entrance doors and door-frame units.
Sidelights.
Transoms.
ALLOWANCES
A.
1.4
Field quality-control testing is part of testing and inspecting allowance.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product.
1.
B.
Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components
and profiles, and finishes.
Shop Drawings: For aluminum-framed entrances. Include plans, elevations, sections, full-size
details, and attachments to other work.
1.
2.
Include details of provisions for assembly expansion and contraction and for draining
moisture occurring within the assembly to the exterior.
Include full-size isometric details of each vertical-to-horizontal intersection of aluminumframed entrances, showing the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
3.
Joinery, including concealed welds.
Anchorage.
Expansion provisions.
Glazing.
Flashing and drainage.
Show connection to and continuity with adjacent thermal, weather, air, and vapor
barriers, and curtain wall framing.
ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES
084213 - 1
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
C.
Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required, in manufacturer's standard
sizes.
D.
Fabrication Sample: Of each vertical-to-horizontal intersection of assemblies, made from 12inch (300-mm) lengths of full-size components and showing details of the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
E.
1.5
Joinery, including concealed welds.
Anchorage.
Expansion provisions.
Glazing.
Flashing and drainage.
Entrance Door Hardware Schedule: Prepared by or under supervision of supplier, detailing
fabrication and assembly of entrance door hardware, as well as procedures and diagrams.
Coordinate final entrance door hardware schedule with doors, frames, and related work to
ensure proper size, thickness, hand, function, and finish of entrance door hardware.
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A.
Qualification Data: For Installer.
B.
Product Test Reports: For aluminum-framed entrances.
C.
Field quality-control reports.
D.
Sample Warranties: For special warranties.
1.6
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A.
1.7
Maintenance Data: For aluminum-framed entrances to include in maintenance manuals.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Installer Qualifications: An entity that employs installers who have two (2) years documented
experience and supervisors who have five (5) years documented experience and who are
trained and approved by manufacturer.
B.
Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to ASTM E 699 for testing indicated.
1.8
WARRANTY
A.
Special Warranty: Installer agrees to repair or replace components of aluminum-framed
entrances that do not comply with requirements or that fail in materials or workmanship within
specified warranty period.
ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES
084213 - 2
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
1.
B.
Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.
Special Finish Warranty: Standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair finishes or
replace aluminum that shows evidence of deterioration of factory-applied finishes within
specified warranty period.
1.
Deterioration includes, but is not limited to, the following:
a.
b.
c.
2.
Color fading more than 5 Hunter units when tested according to ASTM D 2244.
Chalking in excess of a No. 8 rating when tested according to ASTM D 4214.
Cracking, checking, peeling, or failure of paint to adhere to bare metal.
Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
General Performance: Comply with performance requirements specified, as determined by
testing of aluminum-framed entrances representing those indicated for this Project without
failure due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction.
B.
Structural Loads:
1.
2.
C.
Structural: Test according to ASTM E 330 as follows:
1.
2.
3.
D.
Wind Loads: Hurricane Wind Loading – Miami-Dade County, FI/ ASCE-7
Other Design Loads: On Drawings.
When tested at positive and negative wind-load design pressures, assemblies do not
evidence deflection exceeding specified limits.
When tested at 150 percent of positive and negative wind-load design pressures,
assemblies, including anchorage, do not evidence material failures, structural distress, or
permanent deformation of main framing members exceeding 0.2 percent of span.
Test Durations: As required by design wind velocity, but not less than 10 seconds.
Air Infiltration: Test according to ASTM E 283 for infiltration as follows:
1.
Entrance Doors:
a.
E.
Pair of Doors: Maximum air leakage of 1.0 cfm/sq. ft. (5.08 L/s per sq. m) at a
static-air-pressure differential of 1.57 lbf/sq. ft. (75 Pa).
Water Penetration under Static Pressure: Test according to ASTM E 331 as follows:
ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES
084213 - 3
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
1.
F.
Energy Performance: Certify and label energy performance according to NFRC as follows:
1.
2.
3.
G.
Large-Missile Test: For glazed openings located within 30 feet (9.1 m) of grade.
Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements resulting from ambient and surface
temperature changes:
1.
2.2
Outdoor-Indoor Transmission Class: Minimum 30.
Windborne-Debris Impact Resistance: Pass missile-impact and cyclic-pressure tests when
tested according to ASTM E 1886 and testing information in ASTM E 1996 for Wind Zone 4.
1.
I.
Thermal Transmittance (U-factor): Fixed glazing and framing areas shall have U-factor of
not more than 0.69 Btu/sq. ft. x h x deg F (3.92 W/sq. m x K) as determined according to
NFRC 100.
Solar Heat Gain Coefficient: Fixed glazing and framing areas shall have a solar heat gain
coefficient of no greater than 0.45 as determined according to NFRC 200.
Condensation Resistance: Fixed glazing and framing areas shall have an NFRC-certified
condensation resistance rating of no less than 25 as determined according to NFRC 500.
Noise Reduction: Test according to ASTM E 90, with ratings determined by ASTM E 1332, as
follows.
1.
H.
No evidence of water penetration through fixed glazing and framing areas when tested
according to a minimum static-air-pressure differential of 20 percent of positive wind-load
design pressure, but not less than 10 lbf/sq. ft. (480 Pa).
Temperature Change: 120 deg F (67 deg C), ambient; 180 deg F (100 deg C), material
surfaces.
MANUFACTURERS
A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
B.
Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide or comparable
product by one of the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Arch Aluminum & Glass Co., Inc.
EFCO Corporation.
Kawneer North America (Basis of Design).
Oldcastle BuildingEnvelope.
Tubelite.
U.S. Aluminum.
YKK AP America Inc.
ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES
084213 - 4
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
2.3
ENTRANCE DOOR SYSTEMS
A.
Entrance Doors: Manufacturer's standard glazed entrance doors for manual-swing operation.
1.
2.
3.
Door Construction: 2-inch (50.8-mm) overall thickness, with minimum 0.188-inch- (4.8mm-) thick, extruded-aluminum tubular rail and stile members. Mechanically fasten
corners with reinforcing brackets that are deeply penetrated and fillet welded or that
incorporate concealed tie rods.
Door Design: Medium stile; 3-1/2-inch (88.9-mm) nominal width.
Glazing Stops and Gaskets: Square, snap-on, extruded-aluminum stops and preformed
gaskets.
a.
B.
Provide nonremovable glazing stops on outside of door.
Framing Members: Manufacturer's standard extruded aluminum, minimum 0.125 inch (3.2 mm)
thick and reinforced as required to support imposed loads.
1.
Nominal Size: As indicated on Drawings.
C.
Backer Plates: Manufacturer's standard, continuous backer plates for framing members, if not
integral, where framing abuts adjacent construction.
D.
Brackets and Reinforcements: Manufacturer's standard high-strength
nonstaining, nonferrous shims for aligning system components.
E.
Materials:
1.
Sheet and Plate: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M).
Extruded Bars, Rods, Profiles, and Tubes: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M).
Extruded Structural Pipe and Tubes: ASTM B 429/B 429M.
Structural Profiles: ASTM B 308/B 308M.
Steel Reinforcement: Manufacturer's standard zinc-rich, corrosion-resistant primer
complying with SSPC-PS Guide No. 12.00; applied immediately after surface preparation
and pretreatment. Select surface preparation methods according to recommendations in
SSPC-SP COM, and prepare surfaces according to applicable SSPC standard.
a.
b.
c.
2.4
with
Aluminum: Alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for type of use and finish
indicated.
a.
b.
c.
d.
2.
aluminum
Structural Shapes, Plates, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.
Cold-Rolled Sheet and Strip: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M.
Hot-Rolled Sheet and Strip: ASTM A 1011/A 1011M.
ENTRANCE DOOR HARDWARE
A.
Entrance Door Hardware: Hardware not specified in this Section is specified in Section 087100
"Door Hardware."
ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES
084213 - 5
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
B.
General: Provide entrance door hardware and entrance door hardware sets indicated in door
and frame schedule for each entrance door to comply with requirements in this Section.
1.
2.
3.
Entrance Door Hardware Sets: Provide quantity, item, size, finish or color indicated, and
products equivalent in function and comparable in quality to named products.
Sequence of Operation: Provide electrified door hardware function, sequence of
operation, and interface with other building control systems indicated.
Opening-Force Requirements:
a.
C.
Designations: Requirements for design, grade, function, finish, size, and other distinctive
qualities of each type of entrance door hardware are indicated in "Entrance Door Hardware
Sets" Article. Products are identified by using entrance door hardware designations as follows:
1.
2.
D.
Named Manufacturers' Products: Manufacturer and product designation are listed for
each door hardware type required for the purpose of establishing minimum requirements.
Manufacturers' names are abbreviated in "Entrance Door Hardware Sets" Article.
References to BHMA Standards: Provide products complying with these standards and
requirements for description, quality, and function.
Pivot Hinges: BHMA A156.4, Grade 1.
1.
E.
Egress Doors: Not more than 15 lbf (67 N) to release the latch and not more than
30 lbf (133 N)to set the door in motion and not more than 15 lbf (67 N) to open the
door to its minimum required width.
Offset-Pivot Hinges: Provide top, bottom, and intermediate offset pivots at each door leaf.
Butt Hinges: BHMA A156.1, Grade 1, radius corner.
1.
2.
3.
Nonremovable Pins: Provide set screw in hinge barrel that, when tightened into a groove
in hinge pin, prevents removal of pin while entrance door is closed.
Exterior Hinges: Stainless steel, with stainless-steel pin.
Quantities:
a.
b.
For doors up to 87 inches (2210 mm) high, provide three hinges per leaf.
For doors more than 87 and up to 120 inches (2210 and up to 3048 mm) high,
provide four hinges per leaf.
F.
Continuous-Gear Hinges: Manufacturer's standard with stainless-steel bearings between
knuckles, fabricated to full height of door and frame.
G.
Mortise Auxiliary Locks: BHMA A156.5, Grade 1.
H.
Manual Flush Bolts: BHMA A156.16, Grade 1.
I.
Automatic and Self-Latching Flush Bolts: BHMA A156.3, Grade 1.
ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES
084213 - 6
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
J.
Panic Exit Devices: BHMA A156.3, Grade 1, listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting
agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for panic protection, based on testing
according to UL 305.
K.
Cylinders: As specified in Section 087100 "Door Hardware." BHMA A156.5, Grade 1.
1.
Keying: Master key system. Permanently inscribe each key with a visual key control
number and include notation "DO NOT DUPLICATE".
L.
Strikes: Provide strike with black-plastic dust box for each latch or lock bolt; fabricated for
aluminum framing.
M.
Operating Trim: BHMA A156.6.
N.
Removable Mullions: BHMA A156.3, extruded aluminum.
1.
When used with panic exit devices, provide removable mullions listed and labeled by a
testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for panic
protection, based on testing according to UL 305. Use only mullions that have been
tested with exit devices to be used.
O.
Closers: BHMA A156.4, Grade 1, with accessories required for a complete installation, sized as
required by door size, exposure to weather, and anticipated frequency of use; adjustable to
comply with field conditions and requirements for opening force.
P.
Concealed Overhead Holders: BHMA A156.8, Grade 1.
Q.
Surface-Mounted Holders: BHMA A156.16, Grade 1.
R.
Door Stops: BHMA A156.16, Grade 1, floor or wall mounted, as appropriate for door location
indicated, with integral rubber bumper.
S.
Weather Stripping: Manufacturer's standard replaceable components.
1.
2.
Compression Type: Made of ASTM D 2000, molded neoprene, or ASTM D 2287, molded
PVC.
Sliding Type: AAMA 701/702, made of wool, polypropylene, or nylon woven pile with
nylon-fabric or aluminum-strip backing.
T.
Weather Sweeps: Manufacturer's standard exterior-door bottom sweep with concealed
fasteners on mounting strip.
U.
Silencers: BHMA A156.16, Grade 1.
V.
Thresholds: BHMA A156.21, raised thresholds beveled with a slope of not more than 1:2, with
maximum height of 1/2 inch (12.7 mm).
W.
Finger Guards: Manufacturer's standard collapsible neoprene or PVC gasket anchored to frame
hinge-jamb at center-pivoted doors.
ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES
084213 - 7
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
2.5
GLAZING
A.
Glazing: Comply with Section 088000 "Glazing."
B.
Glazing Gaskets: Manufacturer's standard sealed-corner pressure-glazing system of black,
resilient elastomeric glazing gaskets, setting blocks, and shims or spacers.
C.
Glazing Sealants: As recommended by manufacturer.
D.
Sealants used inside the weatherproofing system shall have a VOC content of 250 g/L.
E.
Sealants used inside the weatherproofing system shall comply with the testing and product
requirements of the California Department of Public Health's "Standard Method for the Testing
and Evaluation of Volatile Organic Chemical Emissions from Indoor Sources Using
Environmental Chambers."
2.6
ACCESSORIES
A.
Fasteners and Accessories: Manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant,
nonbleeding fasteners and accessories compatible with adjacent materials.
1.
2.
3.
B.
nonstaining,
Use self-locking devices where fasteners are subject to loosening or turning out from
thermal and structural movements, wind loads, or vibration.
Reinforce members as required to receive fastener threads.
Use exposed fasteners with countersunk Phillips screw heads, finished to match framing
system.
Anchors: Three-way adjustable anchors with minimum adjustment of 1 inch (25.4 mm) that
accommodate fabrication and installation tolerances in material and finish compatible with
adjoining materials and recommended by manufacturer.
1.
Concrete and Masonry Inserts: Hot-dip galvanized cast-iron, malleable-iron, or steel
inserts complying with ASTM A 123/A 123M or ASTM A 153/A 153M requirements.
C.
Concealed Flashing: Manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant, nonstaining, nonbleeding
flashing compatible with adjacent materials.
D.
Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt-mastic paint complying with SSPC-Paint 12
requirements except containing no asbestos, formulated for 30-mil (0.762-mm) thickness per
coat.
2.7
FABRICATION
A.
Form or extrude aluminum shapes before finishing.
ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES
084213 - 8
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
B.
Weld in concealed locations to greatest extent possible to minimize distortion or discoloration of
finish. Remove weld spatter and welding oxides from exposed surfaces by descaling or
grinding.
C.
Fabricate components that, when assembled, have the following characteristics:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
D.
Entrance Door Frames: Reinforce as required to support loads imposed by door operation and
for installing entrance door hardware.
1.
2.
E.
Profiles that are sharp, straight, and free of defects or deformations.
Accurately fitted joints with ends coped or mitered.
Physical and thermal isolation of glazing from framing members.
Accommodations for thermal and mechanical movements of glazing and framing to
maintain required glazing edge clearances.
Fasteners, anchors, and connection devices that are concealed from view to greatest
extent possible.
At exterior doors, provide compression weather stripping at fixed stops.
At interior doors, provide silencers at stops to prevent metal-to-metal contact. Install three
silencers on strike jamb of single-door frames and two silencers on head of frames for
pairs of doors.
Entrance Doors: Reinforce doors as required for installing entrance door hardware.
1.
2.
At pairs of exterior doors, provide sliding-type weather stripping retained in adjustable
strip and mortised into door edge.
At exterior doors, provide weather sweeps applied to door bottoms.
F.
Entrance Door Hardware Installation: Factory install entrance door hardware to the greatest
extent possible. Cut, drill, and tap for factory-installed entrance door hardware before applying
finishes.
G.
After fabrication, clearly mark components to identify their locations in Project according to Shop
Drawings.
2.8
ALUMINUM FINISHES
A.
Clear Anodic Finish: AAMA 611, AA-M12C22A41, Class I, 0.018 mm or thicker.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine areas, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation
tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES
084213 - 9
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
B.
3.2
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
PREPARATION
A.
3.3
Prepare surfaces that are in contact with structural sealant according to sealant manufacturer's
written instructions to ensure compatibility and adhesion. Preparation includes, but is not limited
to, cleaning and priming surfaces.
INSTALLATION
A.
General:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
B.
Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.
Do not install damaged components.
Fit joints to produce hairline joints free of burrs and distortion.
Rigidly secure nonmovement joints.
Install anchors with separators and isolators to prevent metal corrosion and electrolytic
deterioration and to prevent impeding movement of moving joints.
Seal perimeter and other joints watertight unless otherwise indicated.
Metal Protection:
1.
2.
Where aluminum is in contact with dissimilar metals, protect against galvanic action by
painting contact surfaces with materials recommended by manufacturer for this purpose
or installing nonconductive spacers.
Where aluminum is in contact with concrete or masonry, protect against corrosion by
painting contact surfaces with bituminous paint.
C.
Set continuous sill members and flashing in full sealant bed as specified in Section 079200
"Joint Sealants" to produce weathertight installation.
D.
Install components plumb and true in alignment with established lines and grades.
E.
Install glazing as specified in Section 088000 "Glazing."
F.
Entrance Doors: Install doors to produce smooth operation and tight fit at contact points.
1.
2.
3.4
Exterior Doors: Install to produce weathertight enclosure and tight fit at weather stripping.
Field-Installed Entrance Door Hardware: Install surface-mounted entrance door hardware
according to entrance door hardware manufacturers' written instructions using concealed
fasteners to greatest extent possible.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.
ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES
084213 - 10
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
B.
Field Quality-Control Testing: Perform the following test on aluminum-framed entrances.
1.
Water-Spray Test: Before installation of interior finishes has begun, areas designated by
Architect shall be tested according to AAMA 501.2 and shall not evidence water
penetration.
C.
Aluminum-framed entrances will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and
inspections.
D.
Prepare test and inspection reports.
3.5
MAINTENANCE SERVICE
A.
Entrance Door Hardware:
1.
2.
Maintenance Tools and Instructions: Furnish a complete set of specialized tools and
maintenance instructions as needed for Owner's continued adjustment, maintenance,
and removal and replacement of entrance door hardware.
Initial Maintenance Service: Beginning at Substantial Completion, provide six months' full
maintenance by skilled employees of entrance door hardware Installer. Include quarterly
preventive maintenance, repair or replacement of worn or defective components,
lubrication, cleaning, and adjusting as required for proper entrance door hardware
operation at rated speed and capacity. Use parts and supplies that are the same as those
used in the manufacture and installation of original equipment.
END OF SECTION 084213
ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES
084213 - 11
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
SECTION 084413 - GLAZED ALUMINUM CURTAIN WALLS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
1.3
Section includes glazed aluminum curtain walls.
PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS
A.
1.4
Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product.
1.
B.
Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components
and profiles, and finishes.
Shop Drawings: For glazed aluminum curtain walls. Include plans, elevations, sections, full-size
details, and attachments to other work.
1.
2.
Include details of provisions for assembly expansion and contraction and for draining
moisture occurring within the assembly to the exterior.
Include full-size isometric details of each vertical-to-horizontal intersection of glazed
aluminum curtain walls, showing the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
3.
C.
Joinery, including concealed welds.
Anchorage.
Expansion provisions.
Glazing.
Flashing and drainage.
Show connection to and continuity with adjacent thermal, weather, air, and vapor
barriers.
Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required, in manufacturer's standard
sizes.
GLAZED ALUMINUM CURTAIN WALLS
084413 - 1
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
D.
Fabrication Sample: Of each vertical-to-horizontal intersection of assemblies, made from 12inch (300-mm) lengths of full-size components and showing details of the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
E.
1.5
Joinery, including concealed welds.
Anchorage.
Expansion provisions.
Glazing.
Flashing and drainage.
Delegated-Design Submittal: For glazed aluminum curtain walls indicated to comply with
performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the
qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A.
Preconstruction Laboratory Mockup Testing Submittals:
1.
2.
3.
Testing Program: Developed specifically for Project.
Test Reports: Prepared by a qualified preconstruction testing agency for each mockup
test.
Record Drawings: As-built drawings of preconstruction laboratory mockups showing
changes made during preconstruction laboratory mockup testing.
B.
Qualification Data: For Installer[ and laboratory mockup testing agency][ and field testing
agency].
C.
Energy Performance Certificates: For glazed aluminum curtain walls, accessories, and
components from manufacturer.
1.
Basis for Certification: NFRC-certified energy performance values for each glazed
aluminum curtain wall.
D.
Product Test Reports: For glazed aluminum curtain walls, for tests performed by [manufacturer
and witnessed by a qualified testing agency] [a qualified testing agency].
E.
Source quality-control reports.
F.
Field quality-control reports.
G.
Sample Warranties: For special warranties.
1.6
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A.
Maintenance Data: For glazed aluminum curtain walls to include in maintenance manuals.
GLAZED ALUMINUM CURTAIN WALLS
084413 - 2
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
1.7
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Installer Qualifications: An entity that employs installers and supervisors who are trained and
approved by manufacturer. Supervisors must have a minimum of five (5) years documented
experience in the installation of curtain walls.
B.
Laboratory Mockup Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to ASTM E 699 for
testing indicated.
C.
Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to ASTM E 699 for testing indicated[ and
accredited by IAS or ILAC Mutual Recognition Arrangement as complying with ISO/IEC 17025].
D.
Product Options: Information on Drawings and in Specifications establishes requirements for
aesthetic effects and performance characteristics of assemblies. Aesthetic effects are indicated
by dimensions, arrangements, alignment, and profiles of components and assemblies as they
relate to sightlines, to one another, and to adjoining construction.
1.
1.8
Do not change intended aesthetic effects, as judged solely by Architect, except with
Architect's approval. If changes are proposed, submit comprehensive explanatory data to
Architect for review.
WARRANTY
A.
Special Assembly Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of glazed
aluminum curtain wall that do not comply with requirements or that fail in materials or
workmanship within specified warranty period.
1.
Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
2.
B.
Structural failures including, but not limited to, excessive deflection.
Noise or vibration created by wind and thermal and structural movements.
Water penetration through fixed glazing and framing areas.
Failure of operating components.
Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.
Special Finish Warranty: Standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair finishes or
replace aluminum that shows evidence of deterioration of factory-applied finishes within
specified warranty period.
1.
Deterioration includes, but is not limited to, the following:
a.
b.
c.
2.
Color fading more than 5 Hunter units when tested according to ASTM D 2244.
Chalking in excess of a No. 8 rating when tested according to ASTM D 4214.
Cracking, checking, peeling, or failure of paint to adhere to bare metal.
Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.
GLAZED ALUMINUM CURTAIN WALLS
084413 - 3
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer, as defined in Section 014000
"Quality Requirements," to design glazed aluminum curtain walls.
B.
General Performance: Comply with performance requirements specified, as determined by
testing of glazed aluminum curtain walls representing those indicated for this Project without
failure due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction.
1.
2.
Glazed aluminum curtain walls shall withstand movements of supporting structure
including, but not limited to, story drift, twist, column shortening, long-term creep, and
deflection from uniformly distributed and concentrated live loads.
Failure also includes the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
C.
Structural Loads:
1.
2.
D.
2.
Deflection Normal to Wall Plane: Limited to edge of glass in a direction perpendicular to
glass plane not exceeding 1/175 of the glass edge length for each individual glazing lite
or an amount that restricts edge deflection of individual glazing lites to 3/4 inch (19.1
mm), whichever is less.
Deflection Parallel to Glazing Plane: Limited to 1/360 of clear span or 1/8 inch (3.2 mm),
whichever is smaller..
Structural: Test according to ASTM E 330 as follows:
1.
2.
F.
Wind Loads: Meet the requirements of Miami-Dade Co/ ASCE-7 wind uplift for 120 mph
hurricane conditions.
Other Design Loads: As indicated on Drawings.
Deflection of Framing Members: At design wind pressure, as follows:
1.
E.
Thermal stresses transferring to building structure.
Glass breakage.
Noise or vibration created by wind and thermal and structural movements.
Loosening or weakening of fasteners, attachments, and other components.
Failure of operating units.
When tested at positive and negative wind-load design pressures, assemblies do not
evidence deflection exceeding specified limits.
Test Durations: As required by design wind velocity, but not less than 10 seconds.
Air Infiltration: Test according to ASTM E 283 for infiltration as follows:
1.
Fixed Framing and Glass Area:
GLAZED ALUMINUM CURTAIN WALLS
084413 - 4
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
a.
G.
Water Penetration under Static Pressure: Test according to ASTM E 331 as follows:
1.
H.
2.
2.
3.
Thermal Transmittance (U-factor): Fixed glazing and framing areas shall have U-factor of
not more than 0.57 Btu/sq. ft. x h x deg F (3.23 W/sq. m x K) as determined according to
NFRC 100.
Solar Heat Gain Coefficient: Fixed glazing and framing areas shall have a solar heat gain
coefficient of no greater than 0.40 as determined according to NFRC 200.
Condensation Resistance: Fixed glazing and framing areas shall have an NFRC-certified
condensation resistance rating of no less than 25 as determined according to NFRC 500.
Windborne-Debris Impact Resistance:
1.
K.
Seismic Drift Causing Glass Fallout: Complying with criteria for passing based on building
occupancy type when tested according to AAMA 501.6 at design displacement and 1.5
times the design displacement.
Vertical Interstory Movement: Complying with criteria for passing based on building
occupancy type when tested according to AAMA 501.7 at design displacement and 1.5
times the design displacement.
Energy Performance: Certify and label energy performance according to NFRC as follows:
1.
J.
No evidence of water penetration through fixed glazing and framing areas when tested
according to a minimum static-air-pressure differential of 20 percent of positive wind-load
design pressure, but not less than 6.24 lbf/sq. ft. (300 Pa)..
Seismic Performance: Glazed aluminum curtain walls shall withstand the effects of earthquake
motions determined according to ASCE/SEI 7.
1.
I.
Maximum air leakage of 0.06 cfm/sq. ft. (0.30 L/s per sq. m) at a static-air-pressure
differential of 1.57 lbf/sq. ft. (75 Pa)..
Meet the requirements of Miami-Dade Co/ ASCE-7 wind uplift for 120 mph hurricane
conditions.
Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements resulting from ambient and surface
temperature changes:
1.
2.
Temperature Change: 120 deg F (67 deg C), ambient; 180 deg F (100 deg C), material
surfaces.
Thermal Cycling: No buckling; stress on glass; sealant failure; excess stress on framing,
anchors, and fasteners; or reduction of performance when tested according to
AAMA 501.5.
a.
High Exterior Ambient-Air Temperature: That which produces an exterior metalsurface temperature of 180 deg F (82 deg C).
GLAZED ALUMINUM CURTAIN WALLS
084413 - 5
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
2.2
MANUFACTURERS
A.
Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide XXXXXXXXX or
comparable product by one of the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
B.
2.3
Arch Aluminum & Glass Co., Inc.
EFCO Corporation.
Kawneer North America.
Oldcastle, Inc.
TRACO.
Wausau Window and Wall Systems.
Source Limitations: Obtain all components of curtain wall system, including framing spandrel
panels, entrances and accessories, from single manufacturer.
FRAMING
A.
Framing Members: Manufacturer's extruded- or formed-aluminum framing members of
thickness required and reinforced as required to support imposed loads.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
B.
Construction: Thermally broken.
Glazing System: Retained mechanically with gaskets on four sides.
Glazing Plane: Front.
Finish: High-performance organic finish.
Fabrication Method: Either factory- or field-fabricated system.
Pressure Caps: Manufacturer's standard aluminum components that mechanically retain
glazing.
1.
Include snap-on aluminum trim that conceals fasteners.
C.
Brackets and Reinforcements: Manufacturer's standard high-strength
nonstaining, nonferrous shims for aligning system components.
D.
Materials:
1.
with
Aluminum: Alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for type of use and finish
indicated.
a.
b.
c.
d.
2.
aluminum
Sheet and Plate: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M).
Extruded Bars, Rods, Profiles, and Tubes: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M).
Extruded Structural Pipe and Tubes: ASTM B 429/B 429M.
Structural Profiles: ASTM B 308/B 308M.
Steel Reinforcement: Manufacturer's standard zinc-rich, corrosion-resistant primer
complying with SSPC-PS Guide No. 12.00; applied immediately after surface preparation
and pretreatment. Select surface preparation methods according to recommendations in
SSPC-SP COM, and prepare surfaces according to applicable SSPC standard.
GLAZED ALUMINUM CURTAIN WALLS
084413 - 6
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
a.
b.
c.
2.4
Structural Shapes, Plates, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.
Cold-Rolled Sheet and Strip: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M.
Hot-Rolled Sheet and Strip: ASTM A 1011/A 1011M.
ENTRANCES
A.
2.5
Entrances: Comply with Section 084113 "Aluminum-Framed Entrances and Storefronts."
SUN CONTROL
A.
Light Screens: Light-reflecting assemblies consisting of manufacturer's standard support
brackets or channels, and aluminum tray, designed for attachment to interior of curtain wall with
mechanical fasteners.
1.
2.
B.
Projection from Wall: As indicated on Drawings.
Finish: Match adjacent glazed aluminum curtain wall.
Materials:
1.
Aluminum: Alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for type of use and finish
indicated.
a.
b.
c.
d.
2.6
Sheet and Plate: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M).
Extruded Bars, Rods, Profiles, and Tubes: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M).
Extruded Structural Pipe and Tubes: ASTM B 429/B 429M.
Structural Profiles: ASTM B 308/B 308M.
GLAZING
A.
Glazing: Comply with Section 088000 "Glazing."
B.
Glazing Gaskets: Manufacturer's standard sealed-corner pressure-glazing system of black,
resilient elastomeric glazing gaskets, setting blocks, and shims or spacers.
2.7
ACCESSORIES
A.
Fasteners and Accessories: Manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant,
nonbleeding fasteners and accessories compatible with adjacent materials.
1.
2.
nonstaining,
Use self-locking devices where fasteners are subject to loosening or turning out from
thermal and structural movements, wind loads, or vibration.
Reinforce members as required to receive fastener threads.
GLAZED ALUMINUM CURTAIN WALLS
084413 - 7
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
B.
Anchors: Three-way adjustable anchors with minimum adjustment of 1 inch (25.4 mm) that
accommodate fabrication and installation tolerances in material and finish compatible with
adjoining materials and recommended by manufacturer.
1.
Concrete and Masonry Inserts: Hot-dip galvanized cast-iron, malleable-iron, or steel
inserts complying with ASTM A 123/A 123M or ASTM A 153/A 153M requirements.
C.
Concealed Flashing: Manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant, nonstaining, nonbleeding
flashing compatible with adjacent materials..
D.
Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt-mastic paint complying with SSPC-Paint 12
requirements except containing no asbestos, formulated for 30-mil (0.762-mm) thickness per
coat.
2.8
FABRICATION
A.
Form or extrude aluminum shapes before finishing.
B.
Fabricate components that, when assembled, have the following characteristics:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
C.
Profiles that are sharp, straight, and free of defects or deformations.
Accurately fitted joints with ends coped or mitered.
Physical and thermal isolation of glazing from framing members.
Accommodations for thermal and mechanical movements of glazing and framing to
maintain required glazing edge clearances.
Provisions for field replacement of glazing from interior.
Fasteners, anchors, and connection devices that are concealed from view to greatest
extent possible.
Fabricate components to resist water penetration as follows:
1.
2.
Internal guttering system or other means to drain water passing joints, condensation
occurring within framing members, and moisture migrating within glazed aluminum
curtain wall to exterior.
Pressure-equalized system or double barrier design with primary air and vapor barrier at
interior side of glazed aluminum curtain wall and secondary seal weeped and vented to
exterior.
D.
Curtain-Wall Framing: Fabricate components for assembly using manufacturer's standard
assembly method..
E.
Factory-Assembled Frame Units:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Rigidly secure non-movement joints.
Prepare surfaces that are in contact structural sealant according to sealant
manufacturer's written instructions to ensure compatibility and adhesion.
Preparation includes, but is not limited to, cleaning and priming surfaces.
Seal joints watertight unless otherwise indicated.
GLAZED ALUMINUM CURTAIN WALLS
084413 - 8
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
5.
F.
2.9
Install glazing to comply with requirements in Section 088000 "Glazing."
After fabrication, clearly mark components to identify their locations in Project according to Shop
Drawings.
ALUMINUM FINISHES
A.
High-Performance Organic Finish: Three-coat fluoropolymer finish complying with AAMA 2605
and containing not less than 50 percent PVDF resin by weight in both color coat and clear
topcoat. Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating
and resin manufacturers' written instructions.
1.
2.10
A.
Color and Gloss: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
Structural Sealant: Perform quality-control procedures complying with ASTM C 1401
recommendations including, but not limited to, assembly material qualification procedures,
sealant testing, and assembly fabrication reviews and checks.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine areas, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation
tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
B.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2
PREPARATION
A.
3.3
Prepare surfaces that will contact structural sealant according to sealant manufacturer's written
instructions to ensure compatibility and adhesion. Preparation includes, but is not limited to,
cleaning and priming surfaces.
INSTALLATION
A.
General:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.
Do not install damaged components.
Fit joints to produce hairline joints free of burrs and distortion.
Rigidly secure non-movement joints.
GLAZED ALUMINUM CURTAIN WALLS
084413 - 9
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
5.
6.
B.
Install anchors with separators and isolators to prevent metal corrosion and electrolytic
deterioration and to prevent impeding movement of moving joints.
Seal joints watertight unless otherwise indicated.
Metal Protection:
1.
2.
Where aluminum is in contact with dissimilar metals, protect against galvanic action by
painting contact surfaces with primer, applying sealant or tape, or installing
nonconductive spacers as recommended by manufacturer for this purpose.
Where aluminum is in contact concrete or masonry, protect against corrosion by painting
contact surfaces with bituminous paint.
C.
Install components to drain water passing joints, condensation occurring within framing
members, and moisture migrating within glazed aluminum curtain wall to exterior.
D.
Install components plumb and true in alignment with established lines and grades.
E.
Install glazing as specified in Section 088000 "Glazing."
1.
3.4
Prepare surfaces that will contact structural sealant according to sealant manufacturer's
written instructions to ensure compatibility and adhesion. Preparation includes, but is not
limited to, cleaning and priming surfaces.
ERECTION TOLERANCES
A.
Erection Tolerances: Install glazed aluminum curtain walls to comply with the following
maximum tolerances:
1.
2.
3.
Plumb: 1/8 inch in 10 feet (3.2 mm in 3 m); 1/4 inch in 40 feet (6.35 mm in 12.2 m).
Level: 1/8 inch in 20 feet (3.2 mm in 6 m); 1/4 inch in 40 feet (6.35 mm in 12.2 m).
Alignment:
a.
b.
c.
4.
3.5
Where surfaces abut in line or are separated by reveal or protruding element up to
1/2 inch (12.7 mm) wide, limit offset from true alignment to 1/16 inch (1.6 mm).
Where surfaces are separated by reveal or protruding element from 1/2 to 1 inch
(12.7 to 25.4 mm) wide, limit offset from true alignment to 1/8 inch (3.2 mm).
Where surfaces are separated by reveal or protruding element of 1 inch (25.4 mm)
wide or more, limit offset from true alignment to 1/4 inch (6 mm).
Location: Limit variation from plane to 1/8 inch in 12 feet (3.2 mm in 3.6 m); 1/2 inch (12.7
mm) over total length.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.
B.
Test Area: Perform tests on one bay at least 30 feet (9.1 m), by one story.
GLAZED ALUMINUM CURTAIN WALLS
084413 - 10
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
C.
Field Quality-Control Testing: Perform the following test on representative areas of glazed
aluminum curtain walls.
1.
Water-Spray Test: Before installation of interior finishes has begun, areas designated by
Architect shall be tested according to AAMA 501.2 and shall not evidence water
penetration.
a.
2.
Air Infiltration: ASTM E 783 at 1.5 times the rate specified for laboratory testing in
"Performance Requirements" Article but not more than 0.09 cfm/sq. ft. (0.45 L/s per
sq. m) at a static-air-pressure differential of 1.57 lbf/sq. ft. (75 Pa).
a.
3.
Perform a minimum of two tests in areas as directed by Architect.
Perform a minimum of two tests in areas as directed by Architect.
Water Penetration: ASTM E 1105 at a minimum uniform static-air-pressure differential of
0.67 times the static-air-pressure differential specified for laboratory testing in
"Performance Requirements" Article, but not less than 6.24 lbf/sq. ft. (300 Pa), and shall
not evidence water penetration.
D.
Glazed aluminum curtain walls will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and
inspections.
E.
Prepare test and inspection reports.
END OF SECTION 084413
GLAZED ALUMINUM CURTAIN WALLS
084413 - 11
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
SECTION 085113 - ALUMINUM WINDOWS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
1.3
Section includes aluminum windows for exterior locations.
PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS
A.
Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
1.4
Review and finalize construction schedule and verify availability of materials, Installer's
personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays.
Review and discuss the finishing of aluminum windows that is required to be coordinated
with the finishing of other aluminum work for color and finish matching.
Review, discuss, and coordinate the interrelationship of aluminum windows with other
exterior wall components. Include provisions for anchorage, flashing, sealing perimeters,
and protecting finishes.
Review and discuss the sequence of work required to construct a watertight and
weathertight exterior building envelope.
Inspect and discuss the condition of substrate and other preparatory work performed by
other trades.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product.
1.
Include construction details, material descriptions, glazing and fabrication methods,
dimensions of individual components and profiles, hardware, and finishes for aluminum
windows.
B.
Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, hardware, accessories, insect screens,
operational clearances, and details of installation, including anchor, flashing, and sealant
installation.
C.
Samples for Initial Selection: For units with factory-applied custom color finishes.
ALUMINUM WINDOWS
085113 - 1
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
1.
D.
Samples for Verification: For aluminum windows and components required, showing full range
of color variations for finishes, and prepared on Samples of size indicated below:
1.
E.
1.5
Include similar Samples of hardware and accessories involving color selection.
Exposed Finishes: 8 by 8 inches.
Product Schedule: For aluminum windows. Use same designations indicated on Drawings.
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A.
Qualification Data: For manufacturer and Installer.
B.
Product Test Reports: For each type of aluminum window, for tests performed by a qualified
testing agency.
C.
Field quality-control reports.
D.
Sample Warranties: For manufacturer's warranties.
1.6
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Manufacturer Qualifications: A manufacturer capable of fabricating aluminum windows that
meet or exceed performance requirements indicated and of documenting this performance by
test reports, and calculations.
B.
Installer Qualifications: An installer acceptable to aluminum window manufacturer for installation
of units required for this Project.
1.7
WARRANTY
A.
Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace aluminum windows that fail
in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.
1.
Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
2.
Failure to meet performance requirements.
Structural failures including excessive deflection, water leakage, condensation,
and air infiltration.
Faulty operation of movable sash and hardware.
Deterioration of materials and finishes beyond normal weathering.
Failure of insulating glass.
Warranty Period:
a.
Window: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.
ALUMINUM WINDOWS
085113 - 2
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
b.
B.
Aluminum Finish: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.
Manufacturer's Special Warranty on Laminated Glass: Manufacturer's standard form in which
laminated-glass manufacturer agrees to replace laminated-glass units that deteriorate within
specified warranty period. Deterioration of laminated glass is defined as defects developed from
normal use that are not attributed to glass breakage or to maintaining and cleaning laminated
glass contrary to manufacturer's written instructions. Defects include edge separation,
delamination materially obstructing vision through glass, and blemishes exceeding those
allowed by referenced laminated-glass standard.
1.
Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
Basis-of-Design Product:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
B.
2.2
EFCO Corporation; a Pella company.
Graham Architectural Products Corp.
Peerless Products Inc.
TRACO.
Wausau Window and Wall Systems.
Source Limitations: Obtain aluminum windows from single source from single manufacturer.
WINDOW PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
Product Standard: Comply with AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S.2/A440 for definitions and minimum
standards of performance, materials, components, accessories, and fabrication unless more
stringent requirements are indicated.
1.
B.
Performance Class and Grade: AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S.2/A440 as follows:
1.
2.
C.
Window Certification: AMMA certified with label attached to each window.
Minimum Performance Class: AW.
Minimum Performance Grade: 40.
Thermal Movements: Provide aluminum windows, including anchorage, that allow for thermal
movements resulting from the following maximum change (range) in ambient and surface
temperatures by preventing buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of components, failure of
joint sealants, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects. Base engineering calculation
on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss.
ALUMINUM WINDOWS
085113 - 3
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
1.
D.
2.3
Temperature Change: 120 deg F (67 deg C), ambient; 180 deg F (100 deg C) material
surfaces.
Windborne-Debris Impact Resistance: Meet the requirements of Miami-Dade County/ASCE-7
wind uplift for 120 mph hurricane conditions.
ALUMINUM WINDOWS
A.
Operating Types: Provide the following operating types in locations indicated on Drawings:
1.
2.
B.
Frames and Sashes: Aluminum extrusions complying with AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S.2/A440.
1.
C.
Basis of Design: See Section 088000 “Glazing”.
Fasteners: Noncorrosive and compatible with window members, trim, hardware, anchors, and
other components.
1.
2.4
Thermally Improved Construction: Fabricate frames, sashes, and muntins with an
integral, concealed, low-conductance thermal barrier located between exterior materials
and window members exposed on interior side in a manner that eliminates direct metalto-metal contact.
Laminated Glass Units:
1.
D.
Fixed.
Hopper.
Exposed Fasteners: Do not use exposed fasteners to the greatest extent possible. For
application of hardware, use fasteners that match finish hardware being fastened.
ACCESSORIES
A.
Subsills: Thermally broken extruded-aluminum subsills in configurations indicated on Drawings.
B.
Interior Trim: Extruded-aluminum profiles in sizes and configurations indicated on Drawings.
C.
Receptor System: Two-piece, snap-together, thermally broken, extruded-aluminum receptor
system that anchors windows in place.
2.5
FABRICATION
A.
Fabricate aluminum windows in sizes indicated. Include a complete system for assembling
components and anchoring windows.
B.
Glaze aluminum windows in the factory.
ALUMINUM WINDOWS
085113 - 4
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
C.
Weep Holes: Provide weep holes and internal passages to conduct infiltrating water to exterior.
D.
Provide water-shed members above side-hinged sashes and similar lines of natural water
penetration.
E.
Mullions: Provide mullions and cover plates, matching window units, complete with anchors for
support to structure and installation of window units. Allow for erection tolerances and provide
for movement of window units due to thermal expansion and building deflections, as indicated.
Provide mullions and cover plates capable of withstanding design wind loads of window units.
F.
Complete fabrication, assembly, finishing, hardware application, and other work in the factory to
greatest extent possible. Disassemble components only as necessary for shipment and
installation.
2.6
GENERAL FINISH REQUIREMENTS
A.
Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual" for recommendations for applying and
designating finishes.
B.
Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable,
temporary protective covering before shipping.
C.
Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are
acceptable if they are within one-half of the range of approved Samples. Noticeable variations in
the same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of other components are
acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to
minimize contrast.
2.7
ALUMINUM FINISHES
A.
Finish designations prefixed by AA comply with the system established by the Aluminum
Association for designating aluminum finishes.
B.
High-Performance Organic Finish (Three-Coat Fluoropolymer): AA-C12C40R1x (Chemical
Finish: cleaned with inhibited chemicals; Chemical Finish: conversion coatings; Organic
Coating: manufacturer's standard three-coat, thermocured system consisting of specially
formulated inhibitive primer, fluoropolymer color coat, and clear fluoropolymer topcoat, with both
color coat and clear topcoat containing not less than 70 percent polyvinylidene fluoride resin by
weight). Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with
AAMA 2605 and with coating and resin manufacturers' written instructions.
1.
Color and Gloss: Custom color to match specified zinc exterior panels.
ALUMINUM WINDOWS
085113 - 5
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine openings, substrates, structural support, anchorage, and conditions, with Installer
present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions
affecting performance of the Work.
B.
Verify rough opening dimensions, levelness of sill plate, and operational clearances.
C.
Examine wall flashings, vapor retarders, water and weather barriers, and other built-in
components to ensure weathertight window installation.
D.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2
INSTALLATION
A.
Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing windows, hardware, accessories,
and other components. For installation procedures and requirements not addressed in
manufacturer's written instructions, comply with installation requirements in ASTM E 2112.
B.
Install windows level, plumb, square, true to line, without distortion or impeding thermal
movement, anchored securely in place to structural support, and in proper relation to wall
flashing and other adjacent construction to produce weathertight construction.
C.
Install windows and components to drain condensation, water penetrating joints, and moisture
migrating within windows to the exterior.
D.
Separate aluminum and other corrodible surfaces from sources of corrosion or electrolytic
action at points of contact with other materials.
3.3
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.
1.
B.
Testing and inspecting agency will interpret tests and state in each report whether tested
work complies with or deviates from requirements.
Testing Services: Testing and inspecting of installed windows shall take place as follows:
1.
2.
Testing Methodology: Testing of windows for air infiltration and water resistance shall be
performed according to AAMA 502.
Air-Infiltration Testing:
a.
Test
Pressure:
That
required
to
determine
compliance
AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S.2/A440 performance class indicated.
ALUMINUM WINDOWS
with
085113 - 6
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
b.
3.
Water-Resistance Testing:
a.
b.
4.
5.
Allowable
Air-Leakage
Rate:
1.5
times
the
applicable
AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S.2/A440 rate for product type and performance class
rounded down to one decimal place.
Test Pressure: Two-thirds times test pressure required to determine compliance
with AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S.2/A440 performance grade indicated.
Allowable Water Infiltration: No water penetration.
Testing Extent: Three windows of each type as selected by Architect and a qualified
independent testing and inspecting agency. Windows shall be tested after perimeter
sealants have cured.
Test Reports: Prepared according to AAMA 502.
C.
Remove and replace noncomplying windows and retest as specified above.
D.
Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine
compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements.
E.
Prepare test and inspection reports.
3.4
ADJUSTING, CLEANING, AND PROTECTION
A.
Adjust operating sashes and hardware for a tight fit at contact points and weather stripping for
smooth operation and weathertight closure.
B.
Clean exposed surfaces immediately after installing windows. Avoid damaging protective
coatings and finishes. Remove excess sealants, glazing materials, dirt, and other substances.
1.
Keep protective films and coverings in place until final cleaning.
C.
Remove and replace glass that has been broken, chipped, cracked, abraded, or damaged
during construction period.
D.
Protect window surfaces from contact with contaminating substances resulting from
construction operations. If contaminating substances do contact window surfaces, remove
contaminants immediately according to manufacturer's written instructions.
END OF SECTION 085113
ALUMINUM WINDOWS
085113 - 7
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
SECTION 087100 – DOOR HARDWARE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes commercial door hardware for the following:
1.
2.
3.
B.
Door hardware includes, but is not necessarily limited to, the following:
1.
2.
3.
C.
Mechanical door hardware.
Electromechanical door hardware, power supplies, back-ups and surge protection.
Cylinders specified for doors in other sections.
Related Sections:
1.
2.
3.
D.
Swinging doors.
Sliding doors.
Other doors to the extent indicated.
Division 08 Section “Hollow Metal Doors and Frames”.
Division 08 Section “Clad Wood Doors”.
Division 28 Section “Access Control”.
Codes and References: Comply with the version year adopted by the Authority Having
Jurisdiction.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
ANSI A117.1 - Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities.
ANSI/SDI A250.13 - Testing and Rating of Severe Windstorm Resistant Components for
Swing Door Assemblies.
ASTM E1886 - Test Method for Performance of Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, Doors
and Shutters Impacted by Missiles and Exposed to Cyclic Pressure Differentials.
ASTM E330 - Standard Test Method for Structural Performance of Exterior Windows,
Curtain Walls, and Doors by Uniform Static Air Pressure difference.
ASTM E1996 - Standard specification for performance of exterior windows, curtain walls,
doors and storm shutters impacted by Windborne Debris in Hurricanes.
ICC/IBC - International Building Code.
NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.
NFPA 80 - Fire Doors and Windows.
NFPA 101 - Life Safety Code.
NFPA 105 - Installation of Smoke Door Assemblies.
DOOR HARDWARE
087100 - 1
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
11.
12.
13.
14.
E.
Standards: All hardware specified herein shall comply with the following industry standards:
1.
2.
1.3
TAS-201-94 - Impact Test Procedures.
TAS-202-94 - Criteria for Testing Impact and Non-Impact Resistant Building Envelope
Components using Uniform Static Air Pressure.
TAS-203-94 - Criteria for Testing Products Subject to Cyclic Wind Pressure Loading.
State Building Codes, Local Amendments.
ANSI/BHMA Certified Product Standards - A156 Series
UL10C – Positive Pressure Fire Tests of Door Assemblies
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: Manufacturer's product data sheets including installation details, material
descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, operational descriptions and
finishes.
B.
Door Hardware Schedule: Prepared by or under the supervision of supplier, detailing fabrication
and assembly of door hardware, as well as procedures and diagrams. Coordinate the final Door
Hardware Schedule with doors, frames, and related work to ensure proper size, thickness,
hand, function, and finish of door hardware.
1.
Format: Comply with scheduling sequence and vertical format in DHI's "Sequence and
Format for the Hardware Schedule."
2.
Organization: Organize the Door Hardware Schedule into door hardware sets indicating
complete designations of every item required for each door or opening. Organize door
hardware sets in same order as in the Door Hardware Sets at the end of Part 3.
Submittals that do not follow the same format and order as the Door Hardware Sets will
be rejected and subject to resubmission.
3.
Content: Include the following information:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
4.
Type, style, function, size, label, hand, and finish of each door hardware item.
Manufacturer of each item.
Fastenings and other pertinent information.
Location of door hardware set, cross-referenced to Drawings, both on floor plans
and in door and frame schedule.
Explanation of abbreviations, symbols, and codes contained in schedule.
Mounting locations for door hardware.
Door and frame sizes and materials.
Submittal Sequence: Submit the final Door Hardware Schedule at earliest possible date,
particularly where approval of the Door Hardware Schedule must precede fabrication of
other work that is critical in the Project construction schedule. Include Product Data,
Samples, Shop Drawings of other work affected by door hardware, and other information
essential to the coordinated review of the Door Hardware Schedule.
DOOR HARDWARE
087100 - 2
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
C.
Shop Drawings: Details of electrified access control hardware indicating the following:
1.
Wiring Diagrams: Upon receipt of approved schedules, submit detailed system wiring
diagrams for power, signaling, monitoring, communication, and control of the access
control system electrified hardware. Differentiate between manufacturer-installed and
field-installed wiring. Include the following:
a. Elevation diagram of each unique access controlled opening showing location and
b.
2.
interconnection of major system components with respect to their placement in
the respective door openings.
Complete (risers, point-to-point) access control system block wiring diagrams.
Electrical Coordination: Coordinate with related Division 26 Electrical Sections the
voltages and wiring details required at electrically controlled and operated hardware
openings.
D.
Proof of Certification: Provide copy of manufacturer(s) official certification or accreditation
document indicating proof of status as a qualified and authorized provider of the primary
Integrated Wiegand Access Control Products.
E.
Keying Schedule: Prepared under the supervision of the Owner, separate schedule detailing
final keying instructions for locksets and cylinders in writing. Include keying system explanation,
door numbers, key set symbols, hardware set numbers and special instructions. Owner to
approve submitted keying schedule prior to the ordering of permanent cylinders.
F.
Informational Submittals:
1.
Hurricane Resistant Openings: Exterior hurricane opening assemblies to be tested
according to ASTM E330, ASTM E1886, ASTM E1996 standards, and certified by a
qualified independent third party testing agency acceptable to authority having
jurisdiction, with labeling indicating compliance with the wind load and design pressure
level requirements specified for the Project.
2.
Hurricane Resistant Openings (State of Florida): Within the State of Florida, provide copy
of current State of Florida Product Approval or Metro-Dade County Notice of Acceptance
(NOA) as proof of compliance that doors, frames and hardware for exterior opening
assemblies have been tested and approved for use at the wind load and design pressure
level requirements specified for the Project.
a. Hurricane Resistant Components (State of Florida): Within the State of Florida,
provide copy of independent, third party certified listing to ANSI A250.13.
3.
G.
Product Test Reports: Indicating compliance with cycle testing requirements, based on
evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a
qualified independent testing agency.
Operating and Maintenance Manuals: Provide manufacturers operating and maintenance
manuals for each item comprising the complete door hardware installation in quantity as
DOOR HARDWARE
087100 - 3
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
required in Division 01, Closeout Submittals. The manual to include the name, address, and
contact information of the manufacturers providing the hardware and their nearest service
representatives. The final copies delivered after completion of the installation test to include "as
built" modifications made during installation, checkout, and acceptance.
H.
1.4
Warranties and Maintenance: Special warranties and maintenance agreements specified in this
Section.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Manufacturers Qualifications: Engage qualified manufacturers with a minimum 5 years of
documented experience in producing hardware and equipment similar to that indicated for this
Project and that have a proven record of successful in-service performance.
B.
Installer Qualifications: Installers, trained by the primary product manufacturers, with a minimum
3 years documented experience installing both standard and electrified builders hardware
similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and whose work has
resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance.
C.
Door Hardware Supplier Qualifications: Experienced commercial door hardware distributors with
a minimum 5 years documented experience supplying both mechanical and electromechanical
hardware installations comparable in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this
Project. Supplier recognized as a factory direct distributor in good standing by the
manufacturers of the primary materials with a warehousing facility in Project's vicinity. Supplier
to have on staff a certified Architectural Hardware Consultant (AHC) available during the course
of the Work to consult with Contractor, Architect, and Owner concerning both standard and
electromechanical door hardware and keying.
1.
Scheduling Responsibility: Preparation of door hardware and keying schedules.
D.
Integrated Wiegand, Wireless, and IP-Enabled Access Control Products Supplier Qualifications:
Integrated access control products and accessories are required to be supplied and installed
through current members of the ASSA ABLOY "Authorized Channel Partner" (ACP) and
"Certified Integrator" (CI) programs. Suppliers are to be factory trained, certified prior to project
bid, and a direct purchaser of the specified product. Installers are to be factory trained, certified
prior to project bid, and are responsible for commissioning, servicing, and warranting the
installed equipment specified for the project.
E.
Source Limitations: Obtain each type and variety of Door Hardware specified in this Section
from a single source, qualified supplier unless otherwise indicated.
1.
Electrified modifications or enhancements made to a source manufacturer's product line
by a secondary or third party source will not be accepted.
2.
Provide electromechanical door hardware from the same manufacturer as mechanical
door hardware, unless otherwise indicated.
DOOR HARDWARE
087100 - 4
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
F.
Regulatory Requirements: Comply with NFPA 70, NFPA 80, NFPA 101 and ANSI A117.1
requirements and guidelines as directed in the model building code including, but not limited to,
the following:
1.
NFPA 70 "National Electrical Code", including electrical components, devices, and
accessories listed and labeled as defined in Article 100 by a testing agency acceptable to
authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.
2.
Where indicated to comply with accessibility requirements, comply with Americans with
Disabilities Act (ADA), "Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities (ADAAG),"
ANSI A117.1 as follows:
a. Handles, Pulls, Latches, Locks, and other Operating Devices: Shape that is easy
b.
to grasp with one hand and does not require tight grasping, tight pinching, or
twisting of the wrist.
Door Closers: Comply with the following maximum opening-force requirements
indicated:
1)
2)
c.
3.
Interior Hinged Doors: 5 lbf applied perpendicular to door.
Fire Doors: Minimum opening force allowable by authorities having
jurisdiction.
Thresholds: Not more than 1/2 inch high. Bevel raised thresholds with a slope of
not more than 1:2.
NFPA 101: Comply with the following for means of egress doors:
a. Latches, Locks, and Exit Devices: Not more than 15 lbf to release the latch. Locks
shall not require the use of a key, tool, or special knowledge for operation.
b. Thresholds: Not more than 1/2 inch high.
4.
Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: Provide door hardware for assemblies complying with
NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to
authorities having jurisdiction, for fire ratings indicated, based on testing according to
NFPA 252 (neutral pressure at 40" above sill) or UL-10C.
a. Test Pressure: Positive pressure labeling.
G.
Hurricane Resistant Exterior Openings: Provide exterior door hardware as complete and tested
assemblies, or component assemblies, including approved doors and frames specified under
Section 081113 "Hollow Metal Doors and Frames", to meet the wind loads, design pressures,
debris impact resistance, and glass and glazing requirements applicable to the Project.
1.
Test units according to ASTM E330, ASTM E1886, ASTM E1996 standards, certified by
a qualified independent third party testing agency acceptable to authority having
jurisdiction, and bearing a third party certification agency permanent label indicting
windstorm approved product.
DOOR HARDWARE
087100 - 5
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
H.
Hurricane Resistant Exterior Openings (State of Florida including the High Velocity Hurricane
Zone (HVHZ)): Provide exterior door hardware as complete and tested assemblies, or
component assemblies, including approved doors and frames specified under Section 081113
"Hollow Metal Doors and Frames", to meet the wind loads, design pressures, debris impact
resistance, and glass and glazing requirements as detailed in the current State of Florida
building code sections applicable to the Project.
1.
Each unit to bear third party permanent label in accordance with the Florida Building
Code requirements.
I.
Each unit to bear third party permanent label demonstrating compliance with the referenced
standards.
J.
Keying Conference: Conduct conference to comply with requirements in Division 01 Section
"Project Meetings." Keying conference to incorporate the following criteria into the final keying
schedule document:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
K.
Pre-Submittal Conference: Conduct coordination conference in compliance with requirements in
Division 01 Section "Project Meetings" with attendance by representatives of Supplier(s),
Installer(s), and Contractor(s) to review proper methods and the procedures for receiving,
handling, and installing door hardware.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
L.
1.5
Function of building, purpose of each area and degree of security required.
Plans for existing and future key system expansion.
Requirements for key control storage and software.
Installation of permanent keys, cylinder cores and software.
Address and requirements for delivery of keys.
Prior to installation of door hardware, arrange for manufacturers' representatives to hold
a project specific training meeting to instruct the installing contractors' personnel on the
proper installation and adjustment of their respective products. Product training to be
attended by installers of door hardware (including electromechanical hardware) for
aluminum, hollow metal and wood doors. Training will include the use of installation
manuals, hardware schedules, templates and physical product samples as required.
Inspect and discuss electrical roughing-in, power supply connections, and other
preparatory work performed by other trades.
Review sequence of operation narratives for each unique access controlled opening.
Review and finalize construction schedule and verify availability of materials.
Review the required inspecting, testing, commissioning, and demonstration procedures
At completion of installation, provide written documentation that components were applied to
manufacturer's instructions and recommendations and according to approved schedule.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Inventory door hardware on receipt and provide secure lock-up and shelving for door hardware
delivered to Project site. Do not store electronic access control hardware, software or
accessories at Project site without prior authorization.
DOOR HARDWARE
087100 - 6
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
B.
Tag each item or package separately with identification related to the final Door Hardware
Schedule, and include basic installation instructions with each item or package.
C.
Deliver, as applicable, permanent keys, cylinders, cores, access control credentials, software
and related accessories directly to Owner via registered mail or overnight package service.
Instructions for delivery to the Owner shall be established at the "Keying Conference".
1.6
COORDINATION
A.
Templates: Obtain and distribute to the parties involved templates for doors, frames, and other
work specified to be factory prepared for installing standard and electrified hardware. Check
Shop Drawings of other work to confirm that adequate provisions are made for locating and
installing hardware to comply with indicated requirements.
B.
Door Hardware and Electrical Connections: Coordinate the layout and installation of scheduled
electrified door hardware and related access control equipment with required connections to
source power junction boxes, low voltage power supplies, detection and monitoring hardware,
and fire and detection alarm systems.
C.
Door and Frame Preparation: Related Division 08 Sections (Steel, Aluminum and Wood) doors
and corresponding frames are to be prepared, reinforced and pre-wired (if applicable) to receive
the installation of the specified electrified, monitoring, signaling and access control system
hardware without additional in-field modifications.
1.7
WARRANTY
A.
General Warranty: Reference Division 01, General Requirements. Special warranties specified
in this Article shall not deprive Owner of other rights Owner may have under other provisions of
the Contract Documents and shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties
made by Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents.
B.
Warranty Period: Written warranty, executed by manufacturer(s), agreeing to repair or replace
components of standard and electrified door hardware that fails in materials or workmanship
within specified warranty period after final acceptance by the Owner. Failures include, but are
not limited to, the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Structural failures including excessive deflection, cracking, or breakage.
Faulty operation of the hardware.
Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal weathering.
Electrical component defects and failures within the systems operation.
C.
Standard Warranty Period: One year from date of Substantial Completion, unless otherwise
indicated.
D.
Special Warranty Periods:
DOOR HARDWARE
087100 - 7
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
1.8
Ten years for mortise locks and latches.
Seven years for heavy duty cylindrical (bored) locks and latches.
Five years for exit hardware.
Twenty five years for manual surface door closers.
Two years for shallow depth floor closers.
Two years for electromechanical door hardware.
MAINTENANCE SERVICE
A.
Maintenance Tools and Instructions: Furnish a complete set of specialized tools and
maintenance instructions as needed for Owner's continued adjustment, maintenance, and
removal and replacement of door hardware.
B.
Continuing Service: Beginning at Substantial Completion, and running concurrent with the
specified warranty period, provide continuous (6) months full maintenance including repair and
replacement of worn or defective components, lubrication, cleaning, and adjusting as required
for proper door opening operation. Provide parts and supplies as used in the manufacture and
installation of original products.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
SCHEDULED DOOR HARDWARE
A.
General: Provide door hardware for each door to comply with requirements in Door Hardware
Sets and each referenced section that products are to be supplied under.
1.
Designations: Requirements for quantity, item, size, finish or color, grade, function, and
other distinctive qualities of each type of door hardware are indicated in the Door
Hardware Sets at the end of Part 3. Products are identified by using door hardware
designations, as follows:
a. Named Manufacturer's Products: Product designation and manufacturer are listed
for each door hardware type required for the purpose of establishing
requirements. Manufacturers' names are abbreviated in the Door Hardware
Schedule.
B.
Substitutions: Requests for substitution and product approval for inclusive mechanical and
electromechanical door hardware in compliance with the specifications must be submitted in
writing and in accordance with the procedures and time frames outlined in Division 01,
Substitution Procedures. Approval of requests is at the discretion of the architect, owner, and
their designated consultants.
DOOR HARDWARE
087100 - 8
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
2.2
HANGING DEVICES
A.
Hinges: ANSI/BHMA A156.1 certified butt hinges with number of hinge knuckles as specified in
the Door Hardware Sets.
1.
Quantity: Provide the following hinge quantity, unless otherwise indicated:
a.
b.
c.
d.
2.
Two Hinges: For doors with heights up to 60 inches.
Three Hinges: For doors with heights 61 to 90 inches.
Four Hinges: For doors with heights 91 to 120 inches.
For doors with heights more than 120 inches, provide 4 hinges, plus 1 hinge for
every 30 inches of door height greater than 120 inches.
Hinge Size: Provide the following, unless otherwise indicated, with hinge widths sized for
door thickness and clearances required:
a. Widths up to 3’0”: 4-1/2” standard or heavy weight as specified.
b. Sizes from 3’1” to 4’0”: 5” standard or heavy weight as specified.
3.
Hinge Weight and Base Material: Unless otherwise indicated, provide the following:
a. Exterior Doors: Heavy weight, non-ferrous, ball bearing or oil impregnated bearing
hinges unless Hardware Sets indicate standard weight.
b. Interior Doors: Standard weight, steel, ball bearing or oil impregnated bearing
hinges unless Hardware Sets indicate heavy weight.
4.
Hinge Options: Comply with the following where indicated in the Hardware Sets or on
Drawings:
a. Non-removable Pins: Provide set screw in hinge barrel that, when tightened into a
groove in hinge pin, prevents removal of pin while door is closed; for the
following applications:
1)
2)
3)
5.
Out-swinging exterior doors.
Out-swinging access controlled doors.
Out-swinging lockable doors.
Acceptable Manufacturers:
a. Bommer Industries (BO).
b. Hager Companies (HA).
c. McKinney Products (MK).
B.
Floor Closers: ANSI/BHMA A156.4 certified floor closers provided either center hung or 3/4"
offset hung type complete with top and intermediate pivots (offset closers only) in quantity
according to manufacturer's recommendation. Floor closers available with options for labeled,
lead lined and regular doors. Provide independent and adjustable valves for closing speed,
DOOR HARDWARE
087100 - 9
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
latch speed, and backcheck with built-in dead stop and hold open features as specified. Provide
finish cover plates or thresholds as indicated in door Hardware Sets.
1.
Acceptable Manufacturers:
a. Dorma Products (DO).
b. Rixson Door Controls (RF).
C.
Pivots: ANSI/BHMA A156.4, Grade 1, certified pivots provided either center hung or 3/4" offset
type complete with top, bottom, and intermediate pivots (offset pivots only) in quantity according
to manufacturer's recommendations. Space intermediate pivots equally not less than 25 inches
on center apart or not more than 35 inches on center for doors over 121 inches high. Pivot
hinges to have oil impregnated bronze bearing in the top pivot and a radial roller and thrust
bearing in the bottom pivot with the bottom pivot designed to carry the full weight of the door.
Pivots to be UL listed for windstorm where applicable.
1.
Acceptable Manufacturers:
a. Dorma Products (DO).
b. Rixson Door Controls (RF).
D.
Sliding Door Hardware: Sliding door hardware is to be of type and design as specified and
should comply with ANSI/BHMA A156.14.
1.
2.
3.
Sliding Bi-Passing Pocket Door Hardware: Provide complete sets consisting of track,
hangers, stops, bumpers, floor channel, guides, and accessories indicated.
Bi-folding Door Hardware: Rated for door panels weighing up to 125 lb.
Pocket Sliding Door Hardware: Rated for doors weighing up to 200 lb.
a. Acceptable Manufacturers:
1)
2)
2.3
Pemko Manufacturing (PE).
Richards-Wilcox, Inc. (RW).
POWER TRANSFER DEVICES
A.
Concealed Quick Connect Electric Power Transfers: Provide concealed wiring pathway housing
mortised into the door and frame for low voltage electrified door hardware. Furnish with Molex™
standardized plug connectors and sufficient number of concealed wires (up to 12) to
accommodate the electrified functions specified in the Door Hardware Sets. Connectors plug
directly to through-door wiring harnesses for connection to electric locking devices and power
supplies. Wire nut connections are not acceptable.
1.
Acceptable Manufacturers:
a. Securitron (SU) - EL-CEPT Series.
b. Von Duprin (VD) - EPT-10 x Molex Series.
DOOR HARDWARE
087100 - 10
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
2.4
DOOR OPERATING TRIM
A.
Flush Bolts and Surface Bolts: ANSI/BHMA A156.3 and A156.16, Grade 1, certified automatic,
self-latching, and manual flush bolts and surface bolts. Manual flush bolts to be furnished with
top rod of sufficient length to allow bolt location approximately six feet from the floor. Furnish
dust proof strikes for bottom bolts. Surface bolts to be minimum 8” in length and U.L. listed for
labeled fire doors and U.L. listed for windstorm components where applicable. Provide related
accessories (mounting brackets, strikes, coordinators, etc.) as required for appropriate
installation and operation.
1.
Acceptable Manufacturers:
a. Door Controls International (DC).
b. Rockwood Manufacturing (RO).
c. Trimco (TC).
B.
Door Push Plates and Pulls: ANS/BHMA A156.6 certified door pushes and pulls of type and
design specified below or in the Hardware Sets. Coordinate and provide proper width and
height as required where conflicting hardware dictates.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Push/Pull Plates: Minimum .050 inch thick, size as indicated in hardware sets, with
square corners and beveled edges, secured with exposed screws unless otherwise
indicated.
Door Pull and Push Bar Design: Size, shape, and material as indicated in the hardware
sets. Minimum clearance of 2 1/2-inches from face of door unless otherwise indicated.
Offset Pull Design: Size, shape, and material as indicated in the hardware sets. Minimum
clearance of 2 1/2-inches from face of door and offset of 90 degrees unless otherwise
indicated.
Fasteners: Provide manufacturer's designated fastener type as indicated in Hardware
Sets.
a. Acceptable Manufacturers:
1)
2)
3)
C.
Hiawatha, Inc. (HI).
Rockwood Manufacturing (RO).
Trimco (TC).
Locking Pull System: Post-mount style door pulls with integrated deadbolt locking system in
type and design as specified in the Hardware Sets. Pulls available in multiple head, floor, or
combination locking options, with outside keyed rim cylinder operation and inside turn piece
activation. Mounting applications for aluminum, glass, steel and wood doors, with customized
sizing and configuration options. Pull finishes include brass, bronze, and stainless steel. Provide
pulls standard with dustproof strike and auxiliary door stop as specified.
1.
Acceptable Manufacturers:
a. Rockwood Manufacturing (RO) – LP Series.
DOOR HARDWARE
087100 - 11
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
2.5
CYLINDERS AND KEYING
A.
General: Cylinder manufacturer to have minimum (10) years experience designing secured
master key systems and have on record a published security keying system policy.
B.
Source Limitations: Obtain each type of keyed cylinder and keys from the same source
manufacturer as locksets and exit devices, unless otherwise indicated.
C.
Cylinders: Original manufacturer cylinders complying with the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Mortise Type: Threaded cylinders with rings and straight- or clover-type cam.
Rim Type: Cylinders with back plate, flat-type vertical or horizontal tailpiece, and raised
trim ring.
Bored-Lock Type: Cylinders with tailpieces to suit locks.
Mortise and rim cylinder collars to be solid and recessed to allow the cylinder face to be
flush and be free spinning with matching finishes.
Keyway: Manufacturer’s Standard.
D.
Permanent Cores: Manufacturer's standard; finish face to match lockset; complying with the
following:
1.
Removable Cores: Core insert, removable by use of a special key, and for use with only
the core manufacturer's cylinder and door hardware. Provide removable core (small or
large format) as specified in Hardware Sets.
E.
Patented Cylinders: ANSI/BHMA A156.5, Grade 1, certified cylinders employing a utility
patented and restricted keyway requiring the use of patented controlled keys. Provide bump
resistant, fixed core cylinders as standard with solid recessed cylinder collars. Cylinders are to
be factory keyed where permanent keying records will be established and maintained.
1.
Provide a 6 pin multi-level master key system comprised of patented controlled keys and
security and high security cylinders operated by one (1) key of the highest level.
Geographical exclusivity to be provided for all security and high security cylinders and
UL437 certification where specified.
a. Level 1 Cylinders: Provide utility patented controlled keyway cylinders that are
furnished with patented keys available only from authorized distribution.
2.
Acceptable Manufacturer:
a.
b.
F.
Sargent Manufacturing (SA) - Degree Series.
Corbin Russwin (RU) – Access 3 Series.
Keying System: Each type of lock and cylinders to be factory keyed. Conduct specified "Keying
Conference" to define and document keying system instructions and requirements. Furnish
factory cut, nickel-silver large bow permanently inscribed with a visual key control number as
directed by Owner. Incorporate decisions made in keying conference, and as follows:
1.
Grand Master Key System: Cylinders are operated by a change key, a master key, and a
grand master key.
DOOR HARDWARE
087100 - 12
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
G.
Key Quantity: Provide the following minimum number of keys:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Top Master Key: One (1)
Change Keys per Cylinder: Two (2)
Master Keys (per Master Key Group): Two (2)
Grand Master Keys (per Grand Master Key Group): Two (2)
Construction Keys: Ten (10)
Construction Control Keys: Two (2)
Permanent Control Keys: Two (2)
H.
Construction Keying: Provide construction master keyed cylinders or temporary keyed
construction cores. Provide construction master keys in quantity as required by project
Contractor. Replace construction cores with permanent cores. Furnish permanent cores for
installation as directed under specified "Keying Conference".
I.
Key Registration List: Provide keying transcript list to Owner's representative in the proper
format for importing into key control software.
J.
Key Control Cabinet: Provide a key control system including envelopes, labels, and tags with
self-locking key clips, receipt forms, 3-way visible card index, temporary markers, permanent
markers, and standard metal cabinet. Key control cabinet shall have expansion capacity of
150% of the number of locks required for the project.
1.
Acceptable Manufacturers:
a.
b.
c.
K.
2.6
Lund Equipment (LU).
MMF Industries (MM).
Telkee (TK).
Key Control Software: Provide one network version of "Key Wizard" branded key management
software package that includes one year of technical support and upgrades to software at no
charge. Provide factory key system formatted for importing into “Key Wizard” software.
MECHANICAL LOCKS AND LATCHING DEVICES
A.
Mortise Locksets, Grade 1 (Heavy Duty): ANSI/BHMA A156.13, Series 1000, Operational
Grade 1 certified mortise locksets furnished in the functions as specified in the Hardware Sets.
Locksets to be manufactured with a corrosion resistant, stamped 12 gauge minimum formed
steel case and be field-reversible for handing without disassembly of the lock body. Lockset trim
(including knobs, levers, escutcheons, roses) to be the product of a single manufacturer.
Furnish with standard 2 3/4" backset, 3/4" throw anti-friction stainless steel latchbolt, and a full
1" throw stainless steel bolt for deadbolt functions.
1.
Acceptable Manufacturers:
a. Corbin Russwin Hardware (RU) – ML2000 Series.
b. Sargent Manufacturing (SA) – 8200 Series.
DOOR HARDWARE
087100 - 13
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
c.
B.
Yale Locks and Hardware (YA) – 8800FL Series.
Cylindrical Locksets, Grade 1 (Heavy Duty): ANSI/BHMA A156.2, Series 4000, Grade 1 certified
cylindrical (bored) locksets furnished in the functions as specified in the Hardware Sets. Lock
chassis fabricated of heavy gauge steel, zinc dichromate plated, with through-bolted application.
Furnish with solid cast levers, standard 2 3/4” backset, and 1/2" (3/4" at rated paired openings)
throw brass or stainless steel latchbolt. Locks are to be non-handed and fully field reversible.
1.
Acceptable Manufacturers:
a. Corbin Russwin Hardware (RU) – CL3300 Series.
b. Sargent Manufacturing (SA) – 10 Line.
c. Yale Locks and Hardware (YA) 5400LN Series.
C.
Lock Trim Design: As specified in Hardware Sets.
D.
Hurricane and Tornado Resistance Compliance: Mechanical locking and latching devices to be
U.L. listed for windstorm components where applicable. Provide the appropriate hurricane or
tornado resistant products that have been independent third party tested, certified, and labeled
to meet state and local windstorm building codes applicable to project.
2.7
INTEGRATED WIEGAND OUTPUT ACCESS CONTROL LOCKING DEVICES
A.
Integrated Wiegand Output Mortise Locks: Wiegand output ANSI A156.13, Grade 1, mortise
lockset with integrated proximity card reader, request-to-exit signaling, door position status
switch, and latchbolt monitoring in one complete unit. Hard wired, solenoid driven
locking/unlocking control of the lever handle trim, 3/4" deadlocking anti-friction latch, and 1"
case-hardened steel deadbolt. Lock is U.L listed and labeled for use on up to 3 hour fire rated
openings. Available with or without keyed high security cylinder override.
1.
Open architecture, hard wired platform supports centralized control of locking units with
new or existing Wiegand compatible access control systems. Latchbolt monitoring and
door position switch act in conjunction to report door-in-frame (DPS) and door latched
(door closed and latched) conditions.
2.
Reader supports HID 13.56 MHz (2K-32K) iClass® credentials.
3.
12VDC external power supply required for reader and lock, with optional 24VDC
operation available with iClass® reader. Fail safe or fail secure options.
4.
Installation requires only one cable run from the lock to the access control panel without
requirements for additional proprietary lock panel interface boards or modules.
5.
Installation to include manufacturer's access control panel interface board or module
where required for Wiegand output protocol.
a. Acceptable Manufacturers:
1)
2)
3)
DOOR HARDWARE
Corbin Russwin Hardware (RU) - Access 600 - ML20600 RNE1 Series.
Sargent Manufacturing (SA) - Harmony - H2 8200 Series.
Yale Locks and Hardware (YA) - Symphony - S8800 SYM Series.
087100 - 14
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
2.8
AUXILIARY LOCKS
A.
Mortise Deadlocks, Small Case: ANSI/BHMA A156.5, Grade 1, certified small case mortise type
deadlocks constructed of heavy gauge wrought corrosion resistant steel. Steel or stainless steel
bolts with a 1" throw and hardened steel roller pins. Deadlocks to be products of the same
source manufacturer and keyway as other specified locksets.
1.
Acceptable Manufacturers:
a.
b.
c.
2.9
Corbin Russwin Hardware (RU) - DL4100 Series.
Sargent Manufacturing (SA) - 4870 Series.
Yale Locks and Hardware (YA) - 350 Series.
LOCK AND LATCH STRIKES
A.
Strikes: Provide manufacturer's standard strike with strike box for each latch or lock bolt, with
curved lip extended to protect frame, finished to match door hardware set, unless otherwise
indicated, and as follows:
1.
2.
3.
B.
Standards: Comply with the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
2.10
A.
Flat-Lip Strikes: For locks with three-piece antifriction latchbolts, as recommended by
manufacturer.
Extra-Long-Lip Strikes: For locks used on frames with applied wood casing trim.
Aluminum-Frame Strike Box: Provide manufacturer's special strike box fabricated for
aluminum framing.
Strikes for Mortise Locks and Latches: BHMA A156.13.
Strikes for Bored Locks and Latches: BHMA A156.2.
Strikes for Auxiliary Deadlocks: BHMA A156.5.
Dustproof Strikes: BHMA A156.16.
ELECTRIC STRIKES
Standard Electric Strikes: Heavy duty, cylindrical and mortise lock electric strikes conforming to
ANSI/BHMA A156.31, Grade 1, UL listed for both Burglary Resistance and for use on fire rated
door assemblies. Stainless steel construction with dual interlocking plunger design tested to
exceed 3000 lbs. of static strength and 350 ft-lbs. of dynamic strength. Strikes tested for a
minimum 1 million operating cycles. Provide strikes with 12 or 24 VDC capability and supplied
standard as fail-secure unless otherwise specified. Option available for latchbolt and latchbolt
strike monitoring indicating both the position of the latchbolt and locked condition of the strike.
1.
Acceptable Manufacturers:
a. Folger Adam EDC (FO).
b. HES (HS).
DOOR HARDWARE
087100 - 15
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
B.
Hurricane and Tornado Resistance Compliance: Electric strikes to be U.L. listed for windstorm
components where applicable. Provide the appropriate hurricane or tornado resistant products
that have been independent third party tested, certified, and labeled to meet state and local
windstorm building codes applicable to project.
C.
Provide electric strikes with in-line power controller and surge suppressor by the same
manufacturer as the strike with the combined products having a five year warranty.
2.11
A.
CONVENTIONAL EXIT DEVICES
General Requirements: All exit devices specified herein shall meet or exceed the following
criteria:
1.
At doors not requiring a fire rating, provide devices complying with NFPA 101 and listed
and labeled for "Panic Hardware" according to UL305. Provide proper fasteners as
required by manufacturer including sex nuts and bolts at openings specified in the
Hardware Sets.
2.
Where exit devices are required on fire rated doors, provide devices complying with
NFPA 80 and with UL labeling indicating "Fire Exit Hardware". Provide devices with the
proper fasteners for installation as tested and listed by UL. Consult manufacturer’s
catalog and template book for specific requirements.
a. Fire Exit Removable Mullions: Provide keyed removable mullions for use with fire
exit devices complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a testing and
inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire and panic
protection, based on testing according to UL 305 and NFPA 252. Mullions to be
used only with exit devices for which they have been tested.
3.
Except on fire rated doors, provide exit devices with hex key dogging device to hold the
pushbar and latch in a retracted position. Provide optional keyed cylinder dogging on
devices where specified in Hardware Sets.
4.
Flush End Caps: Provide heavy weight impact resistant flush end caps made of
architectural metal in the same finish as the devices as in the Hardware Sets. Plastic end
caps will not be acceptable.
5.
Lever Operating Trim: Where exit devices require lever trim, furnish manufacturer's heavy
duty trim with cold forged escutcheons, beveled edges, and four threaded studs for thrubolts.
a. Lock Trim Design: As indicated in Hardware Sets, provide finishes and designs to
b.
DOOR HARDWARE
match that of the specified locksets. Provided free-wheeling type trim where
indicated.
Where function of exit device requires a cylinder, provide an interchangeable core
type keyed cylinder (Rim or Mortise) as specified in Hardware Sets.
087100 - 16
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
B.
6.
Vertical Rod Exit Devices: Provide and install interior surface and concealed vertical rod
exit devices as Less Bottom Rod (LBR) unless otherwise indicated.
7.
Narrow Stile Applications: At doors constructed with narrow stiles, or as specified in
Hardware Sets, provide devices designed for maximum 2” wide stiles.
8.
Dummy Push Bar: Nonfunctioning push bar matching functional push bar.
9.
Rail Sizing: Provide exit device rails factory sized for proper door width application.
10.
Through Bolt Installation: For exit devices and trim as indicated in Door Hardware Sets.
11.
Hurricane and Tornado Resistance Compliance: Conventional exit devices and tube steel
removable mullions to be U.L. listed for windstorm components where applicable. Provide
the appropriate hurricane or tornado resistant products that have been independent third
party tested, certified, and labeled to meet state and local windstorm building codes
applicable to project.
Conventional Push Rail Exit Devices (Heavy Duty): ANSI/BHMA A156.3, Grade 1 certified panic
and fire exit hardware devices furnished in the functions specified in the Hardware Sets.
Mounting rails to be formed from smooth stainless steel, brass or bronze architectural materials
no less than 0.072" thick, with push rails a minimum of 0.062" thickness. Painted or aluminum
metal rails are not acceptable. Exit device latch to be investment cast stainless steel, pullman
type, with deadlock feature.
1.
Acceptable Manufacturers:
a. Corbin Russwin Hardware (RU) - ED4000 / ED5000 Series.
b. Sargent Manufacturing (SA) - 80 Series.
c. Yale Locks and Hardware (YA) - 7000 Series.
C.
Tube Steel Removable Mullions: ANSI/BHMA A156.3 removable steel mullions with malleableiron top and bottom retainers and a primed paint finish. Provide keyed removable feature,
stabilizers, and mounting brackets as specified in the Hardware Sets. At openings designed for
severe wind load conditions due to hurricanes or tornadoes, provide manufacturers approved
mullion and accessories to meet applicable state and local windstorm codes.
1.
Acceptable Manufacturers:
a. Corbin Russwin Hardware (RU) - 700/900 Series.
b. Sargent Manufacturing (SA) - 980S Series.
c. Yale Locks and Hardware (YA) - M200 Series.
DOOR HARDWARE
087100 - 17
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
2.12
A.
ELECTROMECHANICAL CONVENTIONAL EXIT DEVICES
Electrified Conventional Push Rail Devices (Heavy Duty): Subject to same compliance
standards and requirements as mechanical exit devices, electrified devices to be of type and
design as specified below.
1.
Acceptable Manufacturers:
a. Corbin Russwin Hardware (RU) - ED4000 / ED5000 Series.
b. Sargent Manufacturing (SA) - 80 Series.
c. Yale Locks and Hardware (YA) - 7000 Series.
B.
2.13
A.
Electrified Options: As indicated in hardware sets, provide electrified exit device options
including: electric latch retraction , electric dogging, outside door trim control, exit alarm,
delayed egress, latchbolt monitoring, lock/unlock status monitoring, touchbar monitoring and
request-to-exit signaling. Unless otherwise indicated, provide electrified exit devices standard as
fail secure.
INTEGRATED WIEGAND OUTPUT ACCESS CONTROL EXIT DEVICES
Wiegand Output Integrated Card Reader Exit Hardware: Wiegand output ANSI 156.3 Grade 1
rim, mortise, and vertical rod exit device hardware with integrated proximity card reader,
latchbolt and touchbar monitoring, and request-to-exit signaling, in one complete unit. Hard
wired, solenoid driven locking/unlocking control of the lever handle exit trim with 3/4" throw latch
bolt. U.L listed and labeled for either panic or "fire exit hardware" for use on up to 3 hour fire
rated openings. Available with or without keyed high security cylinder override.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Open architecture, hard wired platform supports centralized control of locking units with
new or existing Wiegand compatible access control systems. Inside push bar (request-toexit) signaling and door position (open/closed status) monitoring (via separately
connected DPS).
Reader supports HID 13.56 MHz (2K-32K) iClass® credentials.
12VDC external power supply required for reader, with optional 24VDC operation
available with iClass® reader. 24VDC required for solenoid operated exit trim (12VDC if
applicable). Fail safe or fail secure options.
Installation requires only one cable run from the exit hardware to the access control panel
without requirements for additional proprietary lock panel interface boards or modules.
Installation to include manufacturer's access control panel interface board or module
where required for Wiegand output protocol.
Acceptable Manufacturers:
a. Corbin Russwin Hardware (RU) - Access 600 - ED5000 RNE1 Series.
b. Sargent Manufacturing (SA) - Harmony - H2 80 Series.
c. Yale Security (YA) - Symphony -7100 SYM Series.
DOOR HARDWARE
087100 - 18
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
B.
2.14
A.
Hurricane and Tornado Resistance Compliance: Integrated Wiegand electronic access control
exit devices to be U.L. listed for windstorm components where applicable. Provide the
appropriate hurricane or tornado resistant products that have been independent third party
tested, certified, and labeled to meet state and local windstorm building codes applicable to
project.
DOOR CLOSERS
All door closers specified herein shall meet or exceed the following criteria:
1.
General: Door closers to be from one manufacturer, matching in design and style, with
the same type door preparations and templates regardless of application or spring size.
Closers to be non-handed with full sized covers including installation and adjusting
information on inside of cover.
2.
Standards: Closers to comply with UL-10C and UBC 7-2 for Positive Pressure Fire Test
and be U.L. listed for use of fire rated doors.
3.
Cycle Testing: Provide closers which have surpassed 10 million cycles in a test
witnessed and verified by UL.
4.
Size of Units: Comply with manufacturer's written recommendations for sizing of door
closers depending on size of door, exposure to weather, and anticipated frequency of
use. Where closers are indicated for doors required to be accessible to the physically
handicapped, provide units complying with ANSI ICC/A117.1.
5.
Closer Arms: Provide heavy duty, forged steel closer arms unless otherwise indicated in
Hardware Sets.
a. Where closers are indicated to have mechanical dead-stop, provide heavy duty
arms and brackets with an integral positive stop.
b. Where closers are indicated to have mechanical hold open, provide heavy duty
c.
d.
6.
B.
units with an additional built-in mechanical holder assembly designed to hold
open against normal wind and traffic conditions. Holder to be manually
selectable to on-off position.
Where closers are indicated to have a cushion-type stop, provide heavy duty arms
and brackets with spring stop mechanism to cushion door when opened to
maximum degree.
Closers shall not be installed on exterior or corridor side of doors; where possible
install closers on door for optimum aesthetics. Provide drop plates or other
accessories as required for proper mounting.
Closer Accessories: Provide door closer accessories including custom templates, special
mounting brackets, spacers and drop plates, and through-bolt or security type fasteners
as specified in the door Hardware Sets.
Door Closers, Surface Mounted (Heavy Duty): ANSI/BHMA A156.4, Grade 1 surface mounted,
heavy duty door closers with complete spring power adjustment, sizes 1 thru 6; and fully
DOOR HARDWARE
087100 - 19
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
operational adjustable according to door size, frequency of use, and opening force. Closers to
be rack and pinion type, one piece cast iron or aluminum alloy body construction, with
adjustable backcheck and separate non-critical valves for closing sweep and latch speed
control. Provide non-handed units standard.
1.
Acceptable Manufacturers:
a.
b.
c.
d.
2.15
A.
Corbin Russwin Hardware (RU) - DC8000 Series.
Sargent Manufacturing (SA) - 351 Series.
Norton Door Controls (NO) - 7500 Series.
Yale Locks and Hardware (YA) - 4400 Series.
ARCHITECTURAL TRIM
Door Protective Trim
1.
General: Door protective trim units to be of type and design as specified below or in the
Hardware Sets.
2.
Size: Fabricate protection plates (kick, armor, or mop) not more than 2" less than door
width (LDW) on stop side of single doors and 1” LDW on stop side of pairs of doors, and
not more than 1" less than door width on pull side. Coordinate and provide proper width
and height as required where conflicting hardware dictates. Height to be as specified in
the Hardware Sets.
3.
Metal Protection Plates: ANSI/BHMA A156.6 certified metal protection plates (kick,
armor, or mop), beveled on four edges (B4E), fabricated from the following.
a. Stainless Steel: 050-inch thick, with countersunk screw holes (CSK).
4.
Fasteners: Provide manufacturer's designated fastener type as specified in the Hardware
Sets.
5.
Acceptable Manufacturers:
a. Hiawatha, Inc. (HI).
b. Rockwood Manufacturing (RO).
c. Trimco (TC).
2.16
DOOR STOPS AND HOLDERS
A.
General: Door stops and holders to be of type and design as specified below or in the Hardware
Sets.
B.
Door Stops and Bumpers: ANSI/BHMA A156.16, Grade 1 certified door stops and wall
bumpers. Provide wall bumpers, either convex or concave types with anchorage as indicated,
DOOR HARDWARE
087100 - 20
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
unless floor or other types of door stops are specified in Hardware Sets. Do not mount floor
stops where they will impede traffic. Where floor or wall bumpers are not appropriate, provide
overhead type stops and holders.
1.
Acceptable Manufacturers:
a. Hiawatha, Inc. (HI).
b. Rockwood Manufacturing (RO).
c. Trimco (TC).
C.
Overhead Door Stops and Holders: ANSI/BHMA A156.6, Grade 1 certified overhead stops and
holders to be surface or concealed types as indicated in Hardware Sets. Track, slide, arm and
jamb bracket to be constructed of extruded bronze and shock absorber spring of heavy
tempered steel. Provide non-handed design with mounting brackets as required for proper
operation and function.
1.
Acceptable Manufacturers:
a. Rixson Door Controls (RF).
b. Rockwood Manufacturing (RO).
c. Sargent Manufacturing (SA).
2.17
ARCHITECTURAL SEALS
A.
General: Thresholds, weatherstripping, and gasket seals to be of type and design as specified
below or in the Hardware Sets. Provide continuous weatherstrip gasketing on exterior doors and
provide smoke, light, or sound gasketing on interior doors where indicated. At exterior
applications provide non-corrosive fasteners and elsewhere where indicated.
B.
Smoke Labeled Gasketing: Assemblies complying with NFPA 105 that are listed and labeled by
a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for smoke control
ratings indicated, based on testing according to UL 1784.
1.
C.
Provide smoke labeled perimeter gasketing at all smoke labeled openings.
Fire Labeled Gasketing: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a
testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire ratings
indicated, based on testing according to UL-10C.
1.
Provide intumescent seals as indicated to meet UL10C Standard for Positive Pressure
Fire Tests of Door Assemblies, and UBC 7-2, Fire Tests of Door Assemblies.
D.
Sound-Rated Gasketing: Assemblies that are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting
agency, for sound ratings indicated, based on testing according to ASTM E 1408.
E.
Replaceable Seal Strips: Provide only those units where resilient or flexible seal strips are easily
replaceable and readily available from stocks maintained by manufacturer.
DOOR HARDWARE
087100 - 21
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
F.
Acceptable Manufacturers:
1.
2.18
A.
Pemko Manufacturing (PE).
ELECTRONIC ACCESSORIES
Push-Button Switches: Industrial grade momentary or alternate contact, back-lighted push
buttons with stainless-steel switch enclosures. 12/24 VDC bi-color illumination suitable for either
flush or surface mounting.
1.
Acceptable Manufacturers:
a. Security Door Controls (SD) - 400 Series.
b. Securitron (SU) - PB Series.
B.
Door Position Switches: Door position magnetic reed contact switches specifically designed for
use in commercial door applications. On recessed models the contact and magnetic housing
snap-lock into a 1" diameter hole. Surface mounted models include wide gap distance design
complete with armored flex cabling. Provide SPDT, N/O switches with optional Rare Earth
Magnet installation on steel doors with flush top channels.
1.
Acceptable Manufacturers:
a.
b.
c.
C.
Wiegand Test Unit: Test unit verifies proper Wiegand output integrated card reader lock
installation in the field by testing for proper wiring, card reader data integrity, and lock
functionality including lock/unlock, door position, and request-to-exit status. 12 or 24VDC
voltage adjustable operating as Fail Safe or Fail Secure.
1.
Acceptable Manufacturers:
a.
b.
c.
D.
Sargent Manufacturing (SA) – 3280 Series.
Security Door Controls (SD) - DPS Series.
Securitron (SU) - DPS Series.
Corbin Russwin Hardware (RU) - WT1 Wiegand Test Unit.
Sargent Manufacturing (SA) - WT1 Wiegand Test Unit.
Yale Locks and Hardware (YA) - WTI Wiegand Test Unit.
Networked Contactless Smart Card Readers: Contactless smart cards reader to securely read
access control data from 13.56 MHz contactless smart cards. The contactless smart card
reader is designed for use in access control applications by providing:
1.
2.
Secure access control data exchange between the smart card and the reader utilizing
key diversification and mutual authentication routines.
Contactless smart card reader to be designed for low current operation to enable
migration from most legacy proximity applications without the need to replace existing
DOOR HARDWARE
087100 - 22
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
3.
4.
5.
6.
access control panels and/or power supplies. Operating voltage: 5-16 VDC. Current
requirements: 55 mA Avg, 116 mA Peak at 12 VDC.
Universal compatibility with most access control systems and backwards compatibility
with legacy 125 KHz proximity access control formats.
Product construction suitable for both indoor and outdoor applications.
Customizable behavior for indicator lights and audible tones.
Acceptable Manufacturers (13.56 MHz iClass):
a. Corbin Russwin Hardware (RU) - 744F709/744F719 Series.
b. HID Global (HD) - R10/R40 Series.
c. Sargent Manufacturing (SA) - 6100/6120 Series.
E.
Contactless Smart Cards and Credentials: Contactless smart cards incorporating an access
control identification technology that utilizes 13.56 MHz radio frequency (RF) circuits in
microchip form. The microchips are encoded and securely transmit the encoded information
when activated.
1.
Acceptable Manufacturers (13.56 MHz iClass):
a. HID Global (HD) - iClass® Series.
F.
Power Supplies: Provide Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory Listed 12VDC or 24VDC
(field selectable) filtered and regulated power supplies. Include battery backup option with
integral battery charging capability in addition to operating the DC load in event of line voltage
failure. Provide the least number of units, at the appropriate amperage level, sufficient to
exceed the required total draw for the specified electrified hardware and access control
equipment.
1.
Acceptable Manufacturers:
a.
b.
c.
d.
2.19
A.
2.20
Corbin Russwin Hardware (RU) – 781N.
Sargent Manufacturing (SA) – 3500 Series.
Securitron (SU) - BPS Series.
Yale Locks and Hardware (YA) 782.
FABRICATION
Fasteners: Provide door hardware manufactured to comply with published templates generally
prepared for machine, wood, and sheet metal screws. Provide screws according to
manufacturers recognized installation standards for application intended.
CABLES AND WIRING
A.
Comply with Division 27 Section "Conductors and Cables for Electronic Safety and Security."
B.
Data Line Supervision: System to include alarm initiation capability in response to opening,
closing, shorting, or grounding of data transmission lines.
DOOR HARDWARE
087100 - 23
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
C.
2.21
Install appropriate number of conductor pairs, in the wire gage (AWG) recommended by
manufacturer, corresponding to the electronic locking functions specified, amperage drawn and
distances covered between the power supplies, power transfer devices, electrified hardware
and access control equipment.
FINISHES
A.
Standard: Designations used in the Hardware Sets and elsewhere indicate hardware finishes
complying with ANSI/BHMA A156.18, including coordination with traditional U.S. finishes
indicated by certain manufacturers for their products.
B.
Provide quality of finish, including thickness of plating or coating (if any), composition, hardness,
and other qualities complying with manufacturer's standards, but in no case less than specified
by referenced standards for the applicable units of hardware.
C.
Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable,
temporary protective covering before shipping.
D.
Antimicrobial Finishes: Where specified, finishes on locksets, latchsets, exit devices and
push/pull trim to incorporate an FDA recognized. Silver Ion, antimicrobial coating
(MicroShield™) listed for use on equipment as a suppressant to the growth and spread of a
broad range of bacteria, algae, fungus, mold and mildew.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine scheduled openings, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for
installation tolerances, labeled fire door assembly construction, wall and floor construction, and
other conditions affecting performance.
B.
Notify architect of any discrepancies or conflicts between the door schedule, door types,
drawings and scheduled hardware. Proceed only after such discrepancies or conflicts have
been resolved in writing.
3.2
PREPARATION
A.
Hollow Metal Doors and Frames: Comply with ANSI/DHI A115 series.
B.
Wood Doors: Comply with ANSI/DHI A115-W series.
DOOR HARDWARE
087100 - 24
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
3.3
INSTALLATION
A.
Install each item of mechanical and electromechanical hardware and access control equipment
to comply with manufacturer's written instructions and according to specifications.
1.
B.
Installers are to be trained and certified by the manufacturer on the proper installation
and adjustment of fire, life safety, and security products including: hanging devices;
locking devices; closing devices; and seals.
Mounting Heights: Mount door hardware units at heights indicated in following applicable
publications, unless specifically indicated or required to comply with governing regulations:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Standard Steel Doors and Frames: DHI's "Recommended Locations for Architectural
Hardware for Standard Steel Doors and Frames."
Wood Doors: DHI WDHS.3, "Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware for
Wood Flush Doors."
Where indicated to comply with accessibility requirements, comply with ANSI A117.1
"Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities."
Provide blocking in drywall partitions where wall stops or other wall mounted hardware is
located.
C.
Integrated Wiegand access control products are required to be installed through current
members of the ASSA ABLOY "Certified Integrator" (CI) program.
D.
Thresholds: Set thresholds for exterior and acoustical doors in full bed of sealant complying with
requirements specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants."
E.
Storage: Provide a secure lock up for hardware delivered to the project but not yet installed.
Control the handling and installation of hardware items so that the completion of the work will
not be delayed by hardware losses before and after installation.
F.
Final connect the system control switches (integrated reader locking hardware, remote readers,
keypads, etc.), and monitoring and signaling equipment to the related Controller devices at each
opening to properly operate the electrified door and access control hardware according to
system operational narratives.
G.
Networked System Application Software: Reference Division 28 Section "Access Control
Systems".
3.4
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Field Inspection: Supplier will perform a final inspection of installed door hardware and state in
report whether work complies with or deviates from requirements, including whether door
hardware is properly installed, operating and adjusted.
DOOR HARDWARE
087100 - 25
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
3.5
ADJUSTING
A.
3.6
Initial Adjustment: Adjust and check each operating item of door hardware and each door to
ensure proper operation or function of every unit. Replace units that cannot be adjusted to
operate as intended. Adjust door control devices to compensate for final operation of heating
and ventilating equipment and to comply with referenced accessibility requirements.
CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A.
Protect all hardware stored on construction site in a covered and dry place. Protect exposed
hardware installed on doors during the construction phase. Install any and all hardware at the
latest possible time frame.
B.
Clean adjacent surfaces soiled by door hardware installation.
C.
Clean operating items as necessary to restore proper finish. and provide final protection and
maintain conditions that ensure door hardware is without damage or deterioration at time of
owner occupancy.
3.7
DEMONSTRATION
A.
3.8
Instruct Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain mechanical and
electromechanical door hardware.
DOOR HARDWARE SCHEDULE
A.
The hardware sets represent the design intent and direction of the owner and architect. They
are a guideline only and should not be considered a detailed hardware schedule.
Discrepancies, conflicting hardware and missing items should be brought to the attention of the
architect with corrections made prior to the bidding process. Omitted items not included in a
hardware set should be scheduled with the appropriate additional hardware required for proper
application and functionality.
B.
Manufacturer’s Abbreviations:
1. MK - McKinney
2. PE - Pemko
3. RF - Rixson
4. RO - Rockwood
5. SA - Sargent
6. HS - HES
7. SU - Securitron
DOOR HARDWARE
087100 - 26
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
8. LU - Lund Equipment Co., Inc.
Hardware Schedule
Set: 1.0
Doors: B124, B20A, B20B, B20C, B58
1 Storeroom Lock
1 Core
SG 28 64 10G04 LL
DG1-6300
US26D
US15
SA
SA
US32D
US32D
US32D
US15
US32316
630
EN
MK
SA
SA
SA
Notes:
-Balance of hardware furnished by door/fence supplier.
-Coordinate door/gate thickness with suppliers.
Set: 2.0
Doors: 101
8
1
1
3
Hinge
Exit Device
Exit Device
Core
T4A3386 NRP
16 SG 43 55 56 64 MD8610 106
16 SG 43 55 64 MD8610
DG1-6300
2 Pull
RM3050-24 x 12HD
2
2
1
2
2
2
2
1-X36
SRI 351 OZ 351D
2005AT (opening width)
3452CNB (door width)
QC-C1500P
QC-C**** (length / type as required)
EL-CEPT
WD-SYSPK (Elevations and Point to
Point)
6130
DPS-M / W-GY (as required)
BPS (size & type as required)
B-12 / 24-5 (as required)
Concealed Overhead Stop
Door Closer
Threshold
Sweep
Frame Wire Harness
Door Wire Harness
Electric Power Transfer
1 Wiring Diagram
1
2
1
1
Card Reader
Position Switch
Power Supply
Battery Backup
32D
RO
RF
SA
PE
PE
MK
MK
SU
SA
SA
SU
SU
SU
Notes:
-All Exterior Doors on this project shall meet Hurricane Windstorm Requirements with the listed psf
DOOR HARDWARE
087100 - 27
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
ratings.
-The door hardware specified is listed as a basis of design for use with Aluminum Door/Frame
manufacturers YKK or Old Castle (Vistawall).
-If alternate hardware is proposed, please furnish compliance information to architect.
-Weatherstripping/Door edge gasketing furnished by Aluminum Door/Frame supplier.
-Furnish all necessary brackets/spacers and plates necessary for a complete and proper installation of
hardware items listed.
OPERATION:
-Free egress at all times.
-Doors normally closed and secured.
-Valid credential at card reader retracts the latch on active door exit device allowing entry.
-Entry by emergency key override.
-Request to exit switches in exit devices for authorized egress.
-Door position switches monitors door status.
Set: 3.0
Doors: 204
1
1
1
1
1
1
Stop
Floor Closer
Core
Cylinder
Locking Pull Set
Concealed Overhead Stop
60131
PH 5042/5012 (as required) NBC
DG1-6300
64 - 34 / 42 (as required)
LP3401FHD ADA LC
1-X36
626
626
US15
US26D
US32
630
RF
RF
SA
SA
RO
RF
US32D
US32D
EN
US32D
MK
SA
SA
RO
PE
PE
PE
PE
SU
Notes:
-See miscellaneous hardware set for installation tools.
-Balance of hardware furnished by door supplier.
Set: 4.0
Doors: 104, 211A, B120
3
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Hinge
Exit Device (exit only)
Door Closer
Kick Plate
Threshold
Rain Guard
Gasketing
Sweep
Position Switch
DOOR HARDWARE
T4A3386 NRP
SG WS 8810
SRI 351 CPS
K1050 10" 4BE CSK
2005AT (opening width)
346C (frame width)
2891AS (head & jambs)
3452CNB (door width)
DPS-M / W-GY (as required)
087100 - 28
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
Notes:
-All Exterior Doors on this project shall meet Hurricane Windstorm Requirements with the listed psf
ratings.
-If alternate hardware is proposed, please furnish compliance information to architect.
OPERATION:
-Free egress at all times.
-Door normally closed and secured.
-Door position switches monitors door status.
Set: 5.0
Doors: 103
3
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Hinge
Exit Device with Card Reader
Core
Door Closer
Kick Plate
Threshold
Rain Guard
Gasketing
Sweep
Frame Wire Harness
Door Wire Harness
Electric Power Transfer
1 Wiring Diagram
1 Power Supply
1 Battery Backup
T4A3386 NRP
SG WS 43 64 H2-8876 ETL
DG1-6300
SRI 351 CPS
K1050 10" 4BE CSK
2005AT (opening width)
346C (frame width)
2891AS (head & jambs)
3452CNB (door width)
QC-C1500P
QC-C**** (length / type as required)
EL-CEPT
WD-SYSPK (Elevations and Point to
Point)
BPS (size & type as required)
B-12 / 24-5 (as required)
US32D
US32D
US15
EN
US32D
32D
MK
SA
SA
SA
RO
PE
PE
PE
PE
MK
MK
SU
SA
SU
SU
Notes:
-All Exterior Doors on this project shall meet Hurricane Windstorm Requirements with the listed psf
ratings.
-If alternate hardware is proposed, please furnish compliance information to architect.
OPERATION:
-Free egress at all times.
-Door normally closed and secured.
-Valid credential at card reader integrated on exit device trim releases fail secure electric lever allowing
entry.
-Entry by emergency key override.
-Request to exit switch in exit device rail for authorized egress.
-Door position switch included with exit device monitors door status.
DOOR HARDWARE
087100 - 29
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
Set: 6.0
Doors: 113A
6
1
1
1
1
2
2
1
1
1
2
2
2
Hinge
Removable Mullion
Exit Device (exit only)
Exit Device
Core
Door Closer
Kick Plate
Threshold
Rain Guard
Gasketing
Sweep
Astragal
Position Switch
T4A3386 NRP
HC980
SG WS 8810
SG 43 64 WS 8804 862
DG1-6300
SRI 351 CPS
K1050 10" 4BE CSK
2005AT (opening width)
346C (frame width)
2891AS (head & jambs)
3452CNB (door width)
29324CNB (dr ht)
DPS-M / W-GY (as required)
US32D
PC
US32D
US32D
US15
EN
US32D
MK
SA
SA
SA
SA
SA
RO
PE
PE
PE
PE
PE
SU
Notes:
-All Exterior Doors on this project shall meet Hurricane Windstorm Requirements with the listed psf
ratings.
-If alternate hardware is proposed, please furnish compliance information to architect.
-Door position switches monitors door status.
Set: 7.0
Doors: B122
6
1
1
1
2
2
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
2
Hinge
Exit Device
Exit Device with Card Reader
Core
Door Closer
Armor Kick Plate
Threshold
Rain Guard
Gasketing
Sweep
Astragal
Frame Wire Harness
Door Wire Harness
Electric Power Transfer
DOOR HARDWARE
T4A3386 NRP
SG 43 55 HC4 8710
SG 43 64 HC4 H2-8774 306 x ETL
DG1-6300
SRI 351 CPSH
K1050 36" 4BE CSK
2705ATK MSES25SS (opening width)
346C (frame width)
2891AS (head & jambs)
3452CNB (door width)
29324CNB (dr ht)
QC-C1500P
QC-C**** (length / type as required)
EL-CEPT
US32D
US32D
US32D
US15
EN
US32D
32D
MK
SA
SA
SA
SA
RO
PE
PE
PE
PE
PE
MK
MK
SU
087100 - 30
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
1 Wiring Diagram
1 Position Switch
1 Power Supply
1 Battery Backup
WD-SYSPK (Elevations and Point to
Point)
DPS-M / W-GY (as required)
BPS (size & type as required)
B-12 / 24-5 (as required)
SA
SU
SU
SU
Notes:
-All Exterior Doors on this project shall meet Hurricane Windstorm Requirements with the listed psf
ratings.
-If alternate hardware is proposed, please furnish compliance information to architect.
OPERATION:
-Free egress at all times.
-Doors normally closed and secured.
-Valid credential at card reader integrated on active door exit device trim releases fail secure electric lever
allowing entry.
-Entry by emergency key override.
-Request to exit switches in exit devices rails for authorized egress.
-Door position switch included with active door exit device and loose for inactive door monitors doors
status.
Set: 8.0
Doors: 113, B125
3
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Hinge
Exit Device
Core
Door Closer
Kick Plate
Threshold
Rain Guard
Gasketing
Sweep
Position Switch
T4A3386 NRP
SG 43 64 WS 8804 862
DG1-6300
SRI 351 CPS
K1050 10" 4BE CSK
2005AT (opening width)
346C (frame width)
2891AS (head & jambs)
3452CNB (door width)
DPS-M / W-GY (as required)
US32D
US32D
US15
EN
US32D
MK
SA
SA
SA
RO
PE
PE
PE
PE
SU
Notes:
-All Exterior Doors on this project shall meet Hurricane Windstorm Requirements with the listed psf
ratings.
-If alternate hardware is proposed, please furnish compliance information to architect.
-Door position switch monitors door status.
Set: 9.0
Doors: B21
DOOR HARDWARE
087100 - 31
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
3
1
1
1
1
1
Hinge
Exit Device
Core
Door Closer
Kick Plate
Gasketing
T4A3386 NRP
12 SG 43 64 8804 ETL
DG1-6300
SRI 351 PS
K1050 10" 4BE CSK
S88D (head & jambs)
US32D
US32D
US15
EN
US32D
MK
SA
SA
SA
RO
PE
US32D
US2C
US32D
US15
630
EN
US32D
MK
SA
SA
SA
RF
SA
RO
PE
PE
PE
PE
PE
SU
Set: 10.0
Doors: 115, 223A, B123
6
2
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
2
2
2
Hinge
Surface Bolt
Storeroom Lock
Core
Surface Overhead Stop
Door Closer
Kick Plate
Threshold
Rain Guard
Gasketing
Sweep
Astragal
Position Switch
T4A3386 NRP
988
SG 64 8204 LNL
DG1-6300
9-X36
SRI 351 CPSH
K1050 10" 4BE CSK
2005AT (opening width)
346C (frame width)
2891AS (head & jambs)
3452CNB (door width)
355CS
DPS-M / W-GY (as required)
Notes:
-All Exterior Doors on this project shall meet Hurricane Windstorm Requirements with the listed psf
ratings.
-If alternate hardware is proposed, please furnish compliance information to architect.
-Door position switches monitors doors status.
-Use 2705 threshold at B123.
Set: 11.0
Doors: 114, B126
3
1
1
1
1
Hinge
Storeroom Lock
Core
Door Closer
Kick Plate
DOOR HARDWARE
T4A3386 NRP
SG 64 8204 LNL
DG1-6300
SRI 351 CPS
K1050 10" 4BE CSK
US32D
US32D
US15
EN
US32D
MK
SA
SA
SA
RO
087100 - 32
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
1
1
1
1
1
Threshold
Rain Guard
Gasketing
Sweep
Position Switch
2005AT (opening width)
346C (frame width)
2891AS (head & jambs)
3452CNB (door width)
DPS-M / W-GY (as required)
PE
PE
PE
PE
SU
Notes:
-All Exterior Doors on this project shall meet Hurricane Windstorm Requirements with the listed psf
ratings.
-If alternate hardware is proposed, please furnish compliance information to architect.
-Door position switch monitors door status.
Set: 12.0
Doors: 102, 15, 18C, 218
3
1
1
1
1
1
3
1
1
1
Hinge
Integrated Card Reader Lock
Core
Door Closer
Kick Plate
Door Stop
Silencer
Frame Wire Harness
Door Wire Harness
Electric Power Transfer
1 Wiring Diagram
1 Power Supply
1 Battery Backup
T4A3386 NRP
SG 64 H2-82271 LNL
DG1-6300
SRI 351 P10 / O (as required)
K1050 10" 4BE CSK
446 / 400 (as required)
608
QC-C1500P
QC-C**** (length / type as required)
EL-CEPT
WD-SYSPK (Elevations and Point to
Point)
BPS (size & type as required)
B-12 / 24-5 (as required)
US32D
US26D
US15
EN
US32D
US26D
32D
MK
SA
SA
SA
RO
RO
RO
MK
MK
SU
SA
SU
SU
Notes:
OPERATION:
-Free egress at all times.
-Door normally closed and secured.
-Valid credential at card reader integrated on lockset trim releases fail secure electric lock allowing entry.
-Entry by emergency key override.
-Request to exit switch in lockset for authorized egress.
-Door position switch integrated in lockset monitors door status.
Set: 13.0
Doors: 1A
DOOR HARDWARE
087100 - 33
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
3
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Hinge
Storeroom Lock
Core
Electric Strike
SMART Pac Bridge Rectifier
Door Closer
Kick Plate
Threshold
Rain Guard
Gasketing
Sweep
Frame Wire Harness
1 Wiring Diagram
1
1
1
1
Position Switch
Remote Push Button
Power Supply
Battery Backup
T4A3386 NRP
SG 64 8204 LNL
DG1-6300
1006-12/24-LBM x 2004M
2005M3
SRI 351 CPS
K1050 10" 4BE CSK
2705ATK MSES25SS (opening width)
346C (frame width)
2891AS (head & jambs)
3452CNB (door width)
QC-C1500P
WD-SYSPK (Elevations and Point to
Point)
DPS-M / W-GY (as required)
PB3ER
BPS (size & type as required)
B-12 / 24-5 (as required)
US32D
US32D
US15
630
EN
US32D
MK
SA
SA
HS
HS
SA
RO
PE
PE
PE
PE
MK
SA
SU
SU
SU
SU
Notes:
-All Exterior Doors on this project shall meet Hurricane Windstorm Requirements with the listed psf
ratings.
-If alternate hardware is proposed, please furnish compliance information to architect.
OPERATION:
-Free egress at all times.
-Door normally closed and secured with fail secure electric strike.
-Entry by remote push button that momentarily releases electric strike allowing entry.
-Entry by emergency key override.
-Door position switch monitors door status.
Set: 14.0
Doors: 223
6
1
2
1
1
1
2
2
Hinge
Dust Proof Strike
Flush Bolt
Storeroom Lock
Core
Door Closer
Kick Plate
Door Stop
DOOR HARDWARE
TA2314
570
555 / 557 (as required)
SG 64 8204 LNL
DG1-6300
SRI 351 P10 / O (as required)
K1050 10" 4BE CSK
446 / 400 (as required)
US32D
US26D
US26D
US32D
US15
EN
US32D
US26D
MK
RO
RO
SA
SA
SA
RO
RO
087100 - 34
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
2 Silencer
608
RO
Set: 15.0
Doors: 105, 106, 107, 110, 220, 221, 222, 224
3
1
1
1
1
1
3
Hinge
Storeroom Lock
Core
Door Closer
Kick Plate
Wall Stop
Silencer
TA2314
SG 64 8204 LNL
DG1-6300
SRI 351 P10 / O (as required)
K1050 10" 4BE CSK
400
608
US32D
US32D
US15
EN
US32D
US26D
MK
SA
SA
SA
RO
RO
RO
US32D
US32D
EN
US32D
US26D
MK
SA
SA
RO
RO
RO
US32D
US32D
US15
EN
US32D
US26D
MK
SA
SA
SA
RO
RO
RO
US32D
US26D
MK
SA
Set: 16.0
Doors: 1B
3
1
1
1
1
3
Hinge
Exit Latch
Door Closer
Kick Plate
Door Stop
Silencer
T4A3386 NRP
SG 8213 LNL
SRI 351 P10 / O (as required)
K1050 10" 4BE CSK
446 / 400 (as required)
608
Set: 17.0
Doors: 109
3
1
1
1
1
1
3
Hinge
Classroom Lock
Core
Door Closer
Kick Plate
Wall Stop
Silencer
TA2314
SG 64 8237 LNL
DG1-6300
SRI 351 P10 / O (as required)
K1050 10" 4BE CSK
400
608
Set: 18.0
Doors: 10, 11A, 12A, 14A, 17A, 3A, 8A, 9A
3 Hinge
1 Classroom Lock
DOOR HARDWARE
TA2314
SG 28 64 10G37 LL
087100 - 35
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
1
1
1
1
3
Core
Door Closer
Kick Plate
Door Stop
Silencer
DG1-6300
SRI 351 P10 / O (as required)
K1050 10" 4BE CSK
446 / 400 (as required)
608
US15
EN
US32D
US26D
SA
SA
RO
RO
RO
US32D
US32D
US15
EN
US32D
US26D
MK
SA
SA
SA
RO
RO
RO
US32D
US32D
US15
EN
US32D
US26D
MK
SA
SA
SA
RO
RO
PE
PE
US32D
US26D
US15
EN
US32D
US26D
MK
SA
SA
SA
RO
RO
RO
Set: 19.0
Doors: B54
3
1
1
1
1
1
3
Hinge
Classroom Lock
Core
Door Closer
Armor Kick Plate
Wall Stop
Silencer
T4A3386 NRP
SG 64 8237 LNL
DG1-6300
SRI 351 P10 / O (as required)
K1050 36" 4BE CSK
400
608
Set: 20.0
Doors: B07, B16A, B16B, B16C
3
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Hinge
Classroom Lock
Core
Door Closer
Kick Plate
Door Stop
Gasketing
Door Bottom
T4A3386 NRP
SG 64 8237 LNL
DG1-6300
SRI 351 P10 / O (as required)
K1050 10" 4BE CSK
446 / 400 (as required)
S88D (head & jambs)
411ARL
Set: 21.0
Doors: 1, 11, 12, 13, 14, 17, 18, 18A, 18B, 19, 2, 22, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7A, 8-11, 9
3
1
1
1
1
1
3
Hinge
Classroom Lock
Core
Door Closer
Kick Plate
Door Stop
Silencer
DOOR HARDWARE
T4A3386 NRP
SG 28 64 10G37 LL
DG1-6300
SRI 351 P10 / O (as required)
K1050 10" 4BE CSK
446 / 400 (as required)
608
087100 - 36
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
Set: 22.0
Doors: B53
3
1
1
1
1
3
Hinge
Classroom Lock
Core
Kick Plate
Wall Stop
Silencer
T4A3386 NRP
SG 64 8237 LNL
DG1-6300
K1050 10" 4BE CSK
400
608
US32D
US32D
US15
US32D
US26D
MK
SA
SA
RO
RO
RO
US32D
US26D
US15
US26D
MK
SA
SA
RO
RO
US32D
US32D
US15
US32DMS
US32DMS
EN
US32D
US32D
US26D
MK
SA
SA
Set: 23.0
Doors: 201, 203, 205, 206, 207, 208A, 208B, 208C
3
1
1
1
3
Hinge
Office Lock
Core
Wall Stop
Silencer
TA2314
SG 28 64 10G05 LL
DG1-6300
403
608
Set: 24.0
Doors: 111, 112, 225, 226
3 Hinge
1 Mortise Deadlock
2 Core
T4A3386 NRP
SG 64 4878
DG1-6300
1 Push Plate
70E
1 Pull Plate
111x70C
1
1
1
1
3
SRI 351 P10 / O (as required)
K1050 10" 4BE CSK
K1050 6" 4BE CSK
400
608
Door Closer
Kick Plate
Mop Plate
Wall Stop
Silencer
RO
RO
SA
RO
RO
RO
RO
Set: 25.0
Doors: 210, 211, 219
1 ByPass 2-Door Hdwe Kit
DOOR HARDWARE
HBP200A (size as required)
PE
087100 - 37
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
2 Flush Pull
872
US26D
RO
Set: 26.0
Doors: X-MISC
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
NOTE:
Crimp Tool
Frame Wire Harness
Repair Kit
Test Unit
Pivot Alignment Tool
Key Cabinet
Quickspotter Installation
Misc Installation Hardware / Owner Stock
QC-R003
QC-C1500P
QC-R001
WT1
2604
1205
1855051
MK
MK
MK
SA
RF
LU
RF
END OF SECTION 087100
DOOR HARDWARE
087100 - 38
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
SECTION 088000 - GLAZING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes glazing for the following products and applications, including those
specified in other Sections where glazing requirements are specified by reference to this
Section:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
1.3
1.4
Primary float glass.
Tempered glass.
Laminated glass.
Fire rated glass.
Exterior Insulating glass.
Mirror glass.
RELATED SECTIONS
A.
Division 8 Section – Steel Doors and Frames.
B.
Division 8 Section - Flush Wood Doors
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each glass product and glazing material indicated.
B.
Color samples for selection of gasket color.
C.
Samples: For the following products, in the form of 12-inch-square Samples for glass
and of 12-inch-long Samples for sealants. Install sealant Samples between two strips of
material representative in color of the adjoining framing system. Sample of gasket
material, full size profile by 12” long.
D.
Samples: For the following products, in the form of 12-inch-square Samples for glass.
1.
Each type of glass indicated.
E.
Glazing Schedule: Use same designations indicated on Drawings for glazed openings in
preparing a schedule listing glass types and thicknesses for each size opening and
location.
GLAZING
088000 - 1
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
1.5
F.
Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of glass and glazing products certifying
that products furnished comply with requirements.
G.
Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to
demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with
project names and addresses, names and addresses of architects and owners, and other
information specified.
H.
Preconstruction Adhesion and Compatibility Test Report: From glazing sealant
manufacturer indicating glazing sealants were tested for adhesion to glass and glazing
channel substrates and for compatibility with glass and other glazing materials.
I.
SWRI Validation Certificate: For each elastomeric glazing sealant specified to be
validated by SWRI's Sealant Validation Program.
J.
Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has completed glazing similar in
material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project; whose work has resulted in
glass installations with a record of successful in-service performance; and who employs
glass installers for this Project who are certified under the National Glass Association
Glazier Certification Program as Level 2 (Senior Glaziers) or Level 3 (Master Glaziers).
B.
Source Limitations for Clear Glass: Obtain clear float glass from one primary-glass
manufacturer.
C.
Source Limitations for Laminated Glass: Obtain laminated-glass units from one
manufacturer using the same type of glass lites and interlayers for each type of unit
indicated.
D.
Source Limitations for Glazing Accessories: Obtain glazing accessories from one source
for each product and installation method indicated.
E.
Source Limitations for Glass Sputter-Coated with Solar-Control Low-E Coatings: Where
solar-control low-e coatings of a primary glass manufacturer that has established a
certified fabricator program is specified, obtain sputter-coated solar-control low-e-coated
glass in fabricated units from a manufacturer that is certified by coated-glass
manufacturer.
F.
Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and
labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction,
for fire ratings indicated, based on testing according to NFPA 252.
G.
Glazing for Fire-Rated Window Assemblies: Glazing for assemblies that comply with
GLAZING
088000 - 2
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
NFPA 80 and that are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable
to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire ratings indicated, based on testing according to
NFPA 257.
H.
Safety Glass: Category II materials complying with testing requirements in 16 CFR 1201
and ANSI Z97.1.
1.
I.
Insulating-Glass Certification Program: Permanently marked either on spacers or on at
least one component lite of units with appropriate certification label of the following
testing and inspecting agency:
1.
2.
J.
2.
GANA Publications: GANA'S "Glazing Manual" and "Laminated Glass Design
Guide."
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
1.7
Sealant Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency qualified
according to ASTM C 1021 to conduct the testing indicated, as documented
according to ASTM E 548.
Test elastomeric glazing sealants for compliance with requirements specified by
reference to ASTM C 920, and where applicable, to other standard test methods.
Glazing Publications: Comply with published recommendations of glass product
manufacturers and organizations below, unless more stringent requirements are
indicated. Refer to these publications for glazing terms not otherwise defined in this
Section or in referenced standards.
1.
1.6
Insulating Glass Certification Council.
Associated Laboratories, Inc.
Elastomeric Glazing Sealant Product Testing: Obtain sealant test results for product test
reports in "Submittals" Article from a qualified testing agency based on testing current
sealant formulations within a 36-month period.
1.
K.
Subject to compliance with requirements, permanently mark safety glass with
certification label of Safety Glazing Certification Council or another certification
agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
Protect glazing materials according to manufacturer's written instructions and as needed
to prevent damage to glass and glazing materials from condensation, temperature
changes, direct exposure to sun, or other causes.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
GLAZING
Environmental Limitations: Do not proceed with glazing when ambient and substrate
temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by glazing material manufacturers
and when glazing channel substrates are wet from rain, frost, condensation, or other
causes.
088000 - 3
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
B.
1.8
Coordinate the Work of this Section with other Sections requiring glass installation.
WARRANTY
A.
General Warranty: Special warranties specified in this Article shall not deprive Owner of
other rights Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall
be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by Contractor under
requirements of the Contract Documents.
B.
Manufacturers Special Warranty for Coated Glass Products.
1.
C.
Manufacturer's Special Warranty on Laminated Glass: Written warranty, made out to
Owner and signed by laminated-glass manufacturer agreeing to furnish replacements for
laminated-glass units that deteriorate as defined in "Definitions" Article, f.o.b. the nearest
shipping point to Project site, within specified warranty period indicated below.
1.
D.
Warranty period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.
Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.
Manufacturer's Special Warranty on Insulating Glass: Manufacturer's standard form,
made out to Owner and signed by insulating-glass manufacturer agreeing to replace
insulating-glass units that deteriorate as defined in "Definitions" Article, f.o.b. the nearest
shipping point to Project site, within specified warranty period indicated below..
1.
Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
PRODUCTS AND MANUFACTURERS
A.
Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the products indicated in
schedules at the end of Part 3.
B.
Acceptable Manufacturers:
1.
Acceptable Manufacturers of Primary Glass:
a.
b.
c.
d.
2.
Acceptable Manufacturers of Laminated and Tempered Glass:
a.
GLAZING
Ford Glass Division.
Guardian Industries Corp.
Hordis Brothers, Inc.
Viracon.
Falconer Glass Industries.
088000 - 4
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
b.
c.
d.
3.
Acceptable Manufacturers of Mirror Glass:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
4.
2.2
Refer to the Schedule at the end of this section for glass locations.
Float Glass: ASTM C 1036, Type I (transparent glass, flat), Quality q3 (glazing select);
class as indicated.
HEAT-TREATED FLOAT GLASS
A.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
2.4
3M Corporation, Prestige Series PR70, or approved equal.
PRIMARY FLOAT GLASS
A.
2.3
Arch Aluminum & Glass Co., Inc.
Gardner Glass Products.
Gilded Mirrors, Inc.
Guardian Industries Corp.
Independent Mirror Industries, Inc.
Acceptable Manufacturers of Window Film (Basis of Design):
a.
5.
Ford Glass Division.
PPG Industries, Inc.
Viracon.
Heat-Treated Float Glass: ASTM C 1048; Type I (transparent flat glass); Quality-Q3; of
class, kind, and condition indicated.
Fabrication Process: By horizontal (roller-hearth) process with roll-wave distortion
parallel to bottom edge of glass as installed, unless otherwise indicated.
Provide Kind HS (heat-strengthened) float glass in place of annealed float glass where
needed to resist thermal stresses induced by differential shading of individual glass lites
and to comply with glass design requirements specified in Part 1 "Performance
Requirements" Article.
For uncoated glass, comply with requirements for Condition A.
For coated vision glass, comply with requirements for Condition C (other uncoated
glass).
Provide Kind FT (fully tempered) float glass in place of annealed or Kind HS (heatstrengthened) float glass where safety glass is indicated
LAMINATED GLASS
A.
Laminated Glass: Comply with ASTM C 1172 for kinds of laminated glass indicated and
other requirements specified, including those in the Laminated-Glass Schedule at the
end of Part 3.
B.
Interlayer: Interlayer material as indicated below, clear or in colors, and of thickness
indicated with a proven record of no tendency to bubble, discolor, or lose physical and
GLAZING
088000 - 5
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
mechanical properties after laminating glass lites and installation.
1.
C.
Laminating Process: Fabricate laminated glass to produce glass free of foreign
substances and air or glass pockets as follows:
1.
2.5
Mirror glass shall not be less than ¼ inch-thick mirror glazing quality clear glass, double
silvered, with silvering hermetically and uniformly copper-coated by fusing electrically to
silver, followed by a protective mineral oxide and oil base finish coat.
GLAZING GASKETS
A.
Dense Compression Gasket and Thermal Breaks: Molded or extruded gaskets of
material indicated below, complying with standards referenced with name of elastomer
indicated below, and of profile and hardness required to maintain watertight seal:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
B.
2.7
Neoprene, ASTM C 864.
EPDM, ASTM C 864.
Silicone, ASTM C 1115.
Thermoplastic polyolefin rubber, ASTM C 1115.
Any material indicated above.
Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors.
GLAZING TAPES
A.
2.8
Laminate lites with polyvinyl butyral interlayer in autoclave with heat plus
pressure.
MIRROR GLASS
A.
2.6
Interlayer Material: Polyvinyl butyral of thickness indicated with a proven record
of no tendency to bubble, discolor, or lose physical and mechanical properties
after laminating glass lites and installation.
Back-Bedding Mastic Glazing Tape: Preformed, butyl-based elastomeric tape with a
solids content of 100 percent; nonstaining and nonmigrating in contact with nonporous
surfaces; with or without spacer rod as recommended in writing by tape and glass
manufacturers for application indicated; packaged on rolls with a release paper backing;
and complying with ASTM C 1281 and AAMA 800.
GLAZING FILM
B.
Provide adhesive backed, non-metallized nano-technology based, externally mounted
window film to all exterior windows.
1.
GLAZING
Visible light transmitted: 69%.
088000 - 6
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
2.9
2.10
Total solar energy rejected: 50%.
Infrared rejected: 97%.
Visible light reflected (interior): 9%.
Visible light reflected (exterior): 9%.
UV light rejected: 99%.
Glare reduction: 22%.
SHGC: 0.5%.
U Value: 0.99.
MISCELLANEOUS GLAZING MATERIALS
A.
General: Provide products of material, size, and shape complying with referenced
glazing standard, requirements of manufacturers of glass and other glazing materials for
application indicated, and with a proven record of compatibility with surfaces contacted in
installation.
B.
Cleaners, Primers, and Sealers: Types recommended by sealant or gasket
manufacturer.
C.
Setting Blocks: Elastomeric material with a Shore A durometer hardness of 85, plus or
minus 5.
D.
Spacers: Elastomeric blocks or continuous extrusions with a Shore A durometer
hardness required by glass manufacturer to maintain glass lites in place for installation
indicated.
E.
Edge Blocks: Elastomeric material of hardness needed to limit glass lateral movement
(side walking).
F.
Cylindrical Glazing Sealant Backing: ASTM C 1330, Type O (open-cell material), of size
and density to control glazing sealant depth and otherwise produce optimum glazing
sealant performance.
FABRICATION OF GLASS AND OTHER GLAZING PRODUCTS
A.
GLAZING
Fabricate glass and other glazing products in sizes required to glaze openings indicated
for Project, with edge and face clearances, edge and surface conditions, and bite
complying with written instructions of product manufacturer and referenced glazing
standard, to comply with system performance requirements.
088000 - 7
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine framing glazing, with Installer present, for compliance with the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
3.2
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
PREPARATION
A.
3.3
Manufacturing and installation tolerances, including those for size, squareness,
and offsets at corners.
Presence and functioning of weep system.
Minimum required face or edge clearances.
Effective sealing between joints of glass-framing members.
Clean glazing channels and other framing members receiving glass immediately before
glazing. Remove coatings not firmly bonded to substrates.
GLAZING, GENERAL
A.
Comply with combined written instructions of manufacturers of glass, sealants, gaskets,
and other glazing materials, unless more stringent requirements are indicated, including
those in referenced glazing publications.
B.
Glazing channel dimensions, as indicated on Drawings, provide necessary bite on glass,
minimum edge and face clearances, and adequate sealant thicknesses, with reasonable
tolerances. Adjust as required by Project conditions during installation.
C.
Protect glass edges from damage during handling and installation. Remove damaged
glass from Project site and legally dispose of off Project site. Damaged glass is glass
with edge damage or other imperfections that, when installed, could weaken glass and
impair performance and appearance.
D.
Apply primers to joint surfaces where required for adhesion of sealants, as determined by
preconstruction sealant-substrate testing.
E.
Install setting blocks in sill rabbets, sized and located to comply with referenced glazing
publications, unless otherwise required by glass manufacturer. Set blocks in thin course
of compatible sealant suitable for heel bead.
F.
Do not exceed edge pressures stipulated by glass manufacturers for installing glass lites.
GLAZING
088000 - 8
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
G.
Provide spacers for glass lites where the length plus width is larger than 50 inches as
follows:
1.
2.
3.4
Locate spacers directly opposite each other on both inside and outside faces of
glass. Install correct size and spacing to preserve required face clearances,
unless gaskets and glazing tapes are used that have demonstrated ability to
maintain required face clearances and to comply with system performance
requirements.
Provide 1/8-inch minimum bite of spacers on glass and use thickness equal to
sealant width. With glazing tape, use thickness slightly less than final
compressed thickness of tape.
H.
Provide edge blocking where indicated or needed to prevent glass lites from moving
sideways in glazing channel, as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer and
according to requirements in referenced glazing publications.
I.
Set glass lites in each series with uniform pattern, draw, bow, and similar characteristics.
J.
Where wedge-shaped gaskets are driven into one side of channel to pressurize sealant
or gasket on opposite side, provide adequate anchorage so gasket cannot walk out when
installation is subjected to movement.
K.
Square cut wedge-shaped gaskets at corners and install gaskets in a manner
recommended by gasket manufacturer to prevent corners from pulling away; seal corner
joints and butt joints with sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer.
TAPE GLAZING
A.
Position tapes on fixed stops so that, when compressed by glass, their exposed edges
are flush with or protrude slightly above sightline of stops.
B.
Install tapes continuously, but not necessarily in one continuous length. Do not stretch
tapes to make them fit opening.
C.
Where framing joints are vertical, cover these joints by applying tapes to heads and sills
first and then to jambs. Where framing joints are horizontal, cover these joints by
applying tapes to jambs and then to heads and sills.
D.
Place joints in tapes at corners of opening with adjoining lengths butted together, not
lapped. Seal joints in tapes with compatible sealant approved by tape manufacturer.
E.
Do not remove release paper from tape until just before each glazing unit is installed.
F.
Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks and press firmly against tape by inserting
dense compression gaskets formed and installed to lock in place against faces of
removable stops. Start gasket applications at corners and work toward centers of
openings.
GLAZING
088000 - 9
Construction Documents/ Task Order: SAQMMA-12-F-2295
December 27, 2013
US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Barbados National Reference Laboratories
Bridgetown, Barbados
Project No. 7017.A
G.
3.5
3.6
Apply cap bead of elastomeric sealant over exposed edge of tape.
GASKET GLAZING (DRY)
A.
Fabricate compression gaskets in lengths recommended by gasket manufacturer to fit
openings exactly, with stretch allowance during installation.
B.
Insert soft compression gasket between glass and frame or fixed stop so it is securely in
place with joints miter cut and bonded together at corners.
C.
Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks and press firmly against soft compression
gasket by inserting dense compression gaskets formed and installed to lock in place
against faces of removable stops. Start gasket applications at corners and work toward
centers of openings. Compress gaskets to produce a weathertight seal without
developing bending stresses in glass. Seal gasket joints with sealant recommended by
gasket manufacturer.
D.
Install gaskets so they protrude past face of glazing stops.
PROTECTION AND CLEANING
A.
Protect glass from damage immediately after installation by attaching crossed streamers
to framing held away from glass. Do not apply markers to glass surface. Remove
nonpermanent labels, and clean surfaces.
B.
Protect glass from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction
operations, including weld splatter. If, despite such protection, contaminating substances
do come into contact with glass, remove them immediately